$% 

w 







CORNEL] 



KEY T 




l U L 



■■Kb 




LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 



©fa p 



Shelf 






UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, 



CORNELL'S 

KEY TO BIBLE STUDY 

OR 

THE BIBLE TAUGHT AS A SCIENCE. 

WITH A SERIES OF 

Introductory Bible Lessons, 

DESIGNED FOR 

Sunday Schools, Normal Glasses and Institutes. 

ACCOMPANIED BY AN 

Illustrated Biblical Index, 

24 by 34 Inches, 
NEATLY BOUND AND MOUNTED ON ROLLER. 



" Understandest thou what thou readest?" Acts, viii : 30. 



By C. V, D. CORNELL. 

- — ; — 

Millport, N. Y. 
1881. 



,c b1 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1880, by 

C. V. D. CORNELL, 

In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. C. 



Printed and Bound i>y E. R.Andrews, Electrotyped by James Lean* 

Rochester. N. Y. Rochester, N. y. 



TO ALL THOSE WHO 

DESIEE 

A KNOWLEDGE OF GOD'S EEYEALED WILL, 

AXE 

A SHAEE IX THE INHERITANCE, 

IS 

THIS WORK INSCRIBED 

BY 

THE AUTHOR. 



PREFACE. 



IN the last prayer of Jesus for his disciples, he says: "This is life 
eternal, that they might know Thee, the only true God, and Jesus 
Christ, whom thou hast sent." (John, xvii: 3.) To have an 
intelligent understanding of that record which reveals the true God, 
and the qualification to teach it to others, should be the ambition of 
every disciple. In this small work the reader must not expect to 
find all that it is necessary to know in order to be a good Bible 
student. This is not the object of the author. But it is to lay out 
and present what the frame-work of a building is to the structure 
when completed, and thereby lead the student to a systematic ac- 
quaintance with this great temple of God's wisdom. 

Should one ask: How can I qualify myself for a Sunday school 
teacher? how would we answer the question? This question has 
been asked many times during the last century, since the organiza- 
tion of Sunday schools, and it has received the one universal answer, 
namely: " Read your Bible. " The Ethiopian Eunuch was reading 
his Bible when overtaken by Philip. As they entered into conversa- 
tion, Philip asked the question: " Understandest thou what thou 
readest? " Listen to the reply: " How can I, except some one guide 
(instruct) me? And he desired Philip that he should come up and 
sit with him." (Acts, viii: 30, 31.) It was "at the same Scripture " 
(Isa. ch. liii) that Philip ' ' began and preached unto him Jesus. " The 
reading alone did not satisfy this earnest inquirer after truth any 
more than it answers the earnest inquirer after knowledge which 
will qualify him to be an efficient Sunday school worker. 

Where is the earnest and devoted child of God who, if he has not 
asked another, has asked himself the question: How can I qualify 
myself to be an instructor or a laborer in the vineyard of my 
Master? A desire on the part of young Christians to teach does not 
qualify them for the work; but it is the first thing necessary in 
making an efficient teacher, for it is this desire that prompts or calls 
for the qualification. The young Christian, thirsting after knowl- 
edge, after asking the question, says to us: " Come up and sit " with 



VI PREFACE. 

us. And if we answer the question, we must commence from the 
question, as Philip did from " the Scripture." For many years we 
have been obliged to hear this question, with no possible means of 
answering it. Here we saw there was a felt want of a satisfactory 
solution to this very important inquiry. It was twenty-five long 
years before the author received the first conception of how it might 
be answered. But soon after the first came the second, of which the 
following work is the result. 

That the Scriptures designed there should be • teachers there is no 
doubt, for Paul tells us there were various gifts dispensed in his day. 
In his letter to the church at Ephesus he says : "And he (Christ) 
gave some, apostles; and some, prophets; and some, evangelists; and 
some, pastors and teachers; " the object of which was " For the per- 
fecting of the saints, for the work of the ministry, for the edifying 
of the body of Christ." (Eph. iv: 11, 12.) It seems to us that, the 
office of teacher is a very important one ; and if so, it is our duty to 
qualify ourselves. In the course of my Sunday school work for the 
last thirty years, more frequent than all others have I heard this 
excuse when requested to take a class: "I am not qualified." In 
answer to this I could but reply: Why don't you qualify yourselves? 
It is then we hear the reply of the Eunuch: " How can I except 
some one instruct me." Now this ends the controversy until some 
method or system is introduced to answer this great demand. 

Over thirty years ago I asked myself this question : Why may not 
the Bible be taught on the same plan as other sciences? When we 
look on these years past and see the improvement that has been 
made in the development of all the sciences, they having been 
brought down to the comprehension of a child, it seems to us that 
the Bible only has been left in the background. We do not say by 
this that there has been no improvement in the system of Bible 
teaching; far from that, for the International Series are a decided 
advance upon the old seven verse system. But I do say that this is 
not equal to the advance made in the sciences; and I would not be 
far from the truth if I should say that Biblical science of to-day is 
where mathematics and geography were thirty years ago, and will 
there remain until some system is introduced and adopted to bring it 
to the front. To say that the Bible is not a scientific work — that it 
has not a scientific arrangement in the order of its several parts — 
would be to reflect discredit on its Author, and rob him of those 
great attributes of order and design which belong to him. There 
was for a time a sacred or hallowed influence which seemed to 



PREFACE. Yll 

surround the Scriptures, and forbade the thought of reducing it to a 
science ; but this gradually disappeared with the growing desire to 
meet the great want of the age. 

The views presented in this introductory work are the result of a 
long experience in Sunday schools and conventions. Two motives 
prompted me in pursuing this task: first, my own felt want; and 
second, the demand on the part of others. The labor expended in 
the preparation of the Illustrated Index, and this volume as a Key, 
in connection with the series of Introductory Lessons, was very 
great. It has formed almost a daily subject of thought for twenty- 
five years. Many of the lessons have been revised four and five 
times. The criticism of Biblical scholars may reveal imperfections, 
but this method of teaching the Bible is the result of practical 
experience with the author. He now presents it completed, but not 
claiming perfection. 

The author's design has been to prepare a work which, while easily 
understood and complete in scope, would, like the dictionary, be 
consulted whenever occasion required it. Information as gathered 
from a great number of volumes is usually not accessible to those 
by whom it is most needed. Hence the need of works in a con- 
densed form. Thus two objects have been kept in view in the 
preparation of this work, first, completeness, and second, brevity, so 
that the teacher or ordinary Bible reader might not be obliged to 
read volumes in order to know God's revealed icill. (See Chap. 
XXXVII.) 

A system is presented in this work for the special guidance of the 
teacher in imparting a knowledge of the Bible in our Sunday schools: 
first, the external, or history of the Bible (as presented in an intro- 
ductory lesson), preparatory to the study of the internal; and second, 
the internal, a revelation of God's will. This is not intended for 
infant class instruction, but for the adult student. 

In view of the great demand on the part of thousands in our land 
for help, I have attempted to supply this demand, introducing this 
great Bible science, in simple yet progressive manner, so easy to be 
understood that the child who can read may comprehend. I now 
offer the work to all Bible students, and especially to Sunday scJujoI 
teachers, with the prayer that it may be the means whereby many 
may obtain eternal life. If, by the blessing of God, it does this, the 
author will feel more than paid. 

C. V. D. CORNELL. 

Millport, IS". Y. 



Ylll PREFACE. 

INTRODUCTION TO LESSONS. 

The series of graded lessons presented in this work is intended to 
supply the felt want of qualifying Sunday school teachers for their 
work. The advantages of this sj^stem over the old are : 

First. In the old there is little opportunity for thought; the mind 
is constantly required to grasp something before it, like reaching 
after something in the dark. But in these lessons the thoughts are 
required to go back and digest the lesson (as will be seen in the 
Suggestions to Teachers) ; for the complete understanding of these 
lessons comes only to the mind as thought is brought to bear upon 
them. For instance, suppose the Bible student reads a chapter 
requiring fifteen minutes of time ; which is the most profitable to 
that student, to give that chapter just read another fifteen minutes 
of careful thought, or to push forward in continuous reading? The 
answer is obvious. 

Second. The student is made acquainted with many things which 
are absolutely necessary to an understanding of the Bible, which no 
system ever before adopted, viz: the definition and abbreviation of 
words used; correct pronunciation of words; the chronology of the 
Bible; the time, place and circumstance which called forth each 
book; also a brief historical account of the several writers. The 
history of the Bible is brought out; its original construction, its age, 
how preserved unchanged, its translation into the languages of the 
earth, its division into chapter and verse, etc., etc. And again, its 
being taught as any and every other science, introducing it to the 
pupils in the most simple and easy manner, acquainting them with 
such matter which leads them, step by step, from the most simple 
into the more advanced stage of Biblical knowledge. 

The lessons are so arranged as to meet both the wants of the 
private student and the demands of normal classes and institutes. 
Each lesson is topical, and is intended. to be illustrated on the black- 
board. Each blackboard lesson is given and introduced in the 
work, with its accompanying questions and notes, in its appropriate 
place. There is great benefit derived, aside from the valuable mate- 
rial contained in the lessons, in leading the pupils to do their own 
thinking, and to use their own hands in all the operations required. 
This work may be studied and used as a text-book, and the Biblical 
Index as a map, to place before the eye the entire analysis of the 
Bible as presented in full in our work. 



PREFACE. IX 

SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 

In order to become teachers the student must become familiar with 
the topics, and should study the directions given. By close attention 
to this, much may be accomplished ; without it, little. The teacher 
-who uses merely the suggestive questions here given, in order to 
lessen the labor of study or thinking, will fail, as they are only 
presented as aids to an honest effort. The power of any method 
lies in its suggestiveness, giving direction to the thoughts; for the 
teaching of to-day (says De Graff) is an art as well as a science. 

These lessons are not intended to occupy a portion of the time 
usually allotted to the Sunday school for other lessons; but it is to be 
the lesson, occupying one-half hour or more, under the leadership of 
the superintendent or conductor. The leader should master each 
lesson well before coming into the presence of his class. Each lesson 
having from five to seven topics (except Introductory and Interim), 
the conductor should bring out each lesson within the space of one 
hour. 

The student is required to have a Reference Bible, which has 
many marginal notes and the dates; also a blank book, 4 by 6 inches 
in size, and containing at least thirty leaves, and with it a good lead 
pencil. Each left hand page of this blank book is intended for the 
blackboard lesson, to be put down by the student as brought out by 
the conductor, and precisely in the same form. 

The conductor, with crayon in one hand and copy of the black- 
hoard lesson in the other, before the board, will ask such questions 
as are found below the blackboard illustration, and such others as 
may suggest themselves on the topics in question. If the questions 
are such as may be answered by reference to the Bible, and are not 
known to the class, state where they may be found, and be sure that 
«ach member of the class finds them. By this means they will 
become familiar with the Bible. Place the same on the board, 
writing or printing the answers as attractive as possible, which can 
be done by a little practice. Require everything that is placed on 
the board, so far as possible, to be produced by the pupils. See that 
each one places the same in their blank book. 

The opposite or right hand page of this blank book is intended for 
noting down " Gems of Thought " (which is the title of the page), as 
brought out by the conductor in each lesson. Under this title (Gems 
of Thought) the student is required, during the interval of each 
lesson, to recall from board illustration, and such other matters of 



X PREFACE. 

interest as brought out by the conductor, and write them down.* 
For thus is he not only learning to think, but also to transfer his 
thoughts to paper. 

Before proceeding to the next lesson, the conductor should call 
out from the student some of these "Gems" as a review of former 
lessons. f The conductor should review every time before entering a 
new lesson; and, so far as it is possible, review from the beginning, 
until the pupil is perfectly familiar with every topic developed. 

Let the student also be furnished with Labels for Reference Bible, 
which are furnished by the author of this work. These labels are to 
be put in place by the student, as required in each of the lessons. 
For instance, in the third lesson we have the two " Great Grand 
Divisions," named Old and New Testament. Now insert these tags 
or labels in their respective places, at the top of the Reference Bible. 
In like manner the other divisions, as called for in the lessons follow- 
ing. The names of the different books of the Bible are placed in 
the front of the page, in their respective places, beginning with 
" Gen." and ending with "Rev." See notice on last page. 

The following is from De Graff's School Room Guide : 

"LAWS of teaching. 

1. Know thoroughly and familiarly whatever you attempt to 
teach. 

2. Gain and keep the attention of your pupils, and excite their 
interest in the subject. 

3. Use language which your pupils fully understand, and clearly 
explain every new word required. 

4. Begin with what is already known, and proceed to the unknown 
by easy and natural steps. 

5. Excite the self-activity of the pupils, and lead them to discover 
the truth for themselves. 

6. Require the pupils to re-state fully and correctly, in their own 
language, and their own illustrations, the truth taught them. 

7. Review, review, review — carefully, thoroughly, repeatedly. 
Note. These laws underlie and control all successful teaching. 

Nothing need be added to them; nothing can be safely taken away. 

♦The conductor should insist on carrying into effect this suggestion, for 
it is a matter of great interest to the student. 

+ The author has been surprised, in giving the lessons, at the development 
of thought In children from eight to ten years of age. 



PREFACE. XI 

Be cheerful and smile often. A teacher with a long face casts a 
gloom over everything. Do not try to teach too much; better a little 
and teach it well. Review each lesson, or much will be lost." 

AUTHORS CONSULTED IN THE PREPARATION OF THIS 

WORK. 

The author acknowledges his indebtedness to friends who have 
aided in the work r and also to the following authors. Some of the 
articles quoted were collected several years prior to the thought of 
preparing this work, hence have not the name of the author. I have 
made free use of the views advanced by these authors, and claim no 
credit in anything except the method as applied to Biblical instruction. 

Henry's Comprehensive Commentary and Supplement. 

Scott's Commentary: Improved London Edition. 

History of the English Translation of the Bible: by Mrs. H. C. 
Oonant. 

Help to Read the Bible : by B. E. Nicholls, M. A. 

Dr. Win. Smith's Old and New Testament Histories: Student's 
Series. 

Home's Introduction to the Study of the Bible. 

Cottage Bible and Family Expositor: Rev. Wm. Pattern.- 

Kitto's Illustrated History of the Bible. 

Why Four Gospels: D. S. Gregory, D. D. 

Bible Antiquities: J. W. Nevins, D. D. 

Conybeare and Howson's Life and Epistles of Paul. 

Douay Bible. (Catholic version.) 

C. H. M.'s Notes on Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus and Numbers. 

The Gospel Treasury: Robert Mimpriss. 

Encyclopedia of Religious Knowledge : Rev. J. Newton Brown. 

Prophets of the Restoration: Rev. T. V. Moore, D. D. 

The Works of Flavius Josephus. 

The Psalms: Revised by T. J. Conant. 

Genesis : Revised by T. J. Conant. 

The Pictorial Bible Commentator: Ingraham Cobbin, V. D. M. 

Smith's Bible Dictionary. 

Complete Works of Andrew Fuller. 

Hand of God in History: Rev. H. Reade. 

Sunday School Geography: G. A. Starkweather. 

Coleman's Historical Text Book and Atlas. 

Osborn's Biblical Atlas. 

Bible Atlas and Gazetteer : American Tract Society. 



GENERAL SUBJECTS OF CHAPTERS. Xlll 



FOUR INDICES. 

This work is indexed for practical use in four different ways : 

First. By general subjects in thirty-seven (37) chapters. 

Second. By general and particular subjects in thirty-seven (37) 
chapters, four hundred and seventy-one (471) sections or subjects 
treated. 

Third. By an index of the twenty-three (28) Blackboard Lessons 
and the subject of each. 

Fourth. By an alphabetical index of all general and particular 
subjects. See page 365. 

GENERAL SUBJECTS OF CHAPTERS. 

CHAPTER. PAGES. 

I. History of the Bible, 1-35 

II. The Bible Opened, _.. 36-41 

III. Illustrated Biblical Index, 42-47 

IV. Grand Divisions of the Bible, 48-53 

V. Old Testament Divisions, 54-59 

VI. New Testament Divisions, * 60-65 

VII. Sub Divisions: Genesis, 66-71 

VIII. Exodus, 72-74 

IX. Leviticus,.. 75-78 

X. Numbers, 79-82 

XL Deuteronomy, 83-87 

XII. Sub Divisions: Joshua, 88-91 

XIII. Judges, 92-95 

XIV. Ruth, 96-97 

XV. 1st Samuel, .' 98-100 

XVI. 2d Samuel, , 101-103 

XVII. 1st Kings, ... 104-108 

XVIII. 2d Kings {Jon. Ill, Eos. 112, Am, 115, Joel, 117, 

Isa. 119, Mi. 123, Nah. 125, Zeph, 126), 108-129 



XIV 



GENERAL SUBJECTS OF CHAPTERS. 



CHAPTER. 
XIX. 

XX. 

XXI. 



XXII. 
XXIII. 
XXIV. 

XXV. 

XXVI. 

XXVII. 

XXVIII. 

XXIX. 

XXX. 

XXXI. 

XXXII. 

XXXIII. 



XXXIV. 

XXXV. 

XXXVI. 
XXXVII. 



PAGES. 

1st Chronicles, 129-1 35 

2d Chronicles (Im. 142-145, Jer. 147, Hob. 150),. 136-151 
History and Prophecy just Before and After the 

Destruction of Jerusalem (Jer. 152-154, Lam. 

155, Oba. 156, Eze. 158),. - 152-160 

History and Prophecy During the Captivity 

(Dan. 161, Isa. 164), 161-167 

Return from Captivity (Ezra, 168, Hag. 172, 

Zech. 174, Esth. 176, Neh. 180, Mai. 182),.... 168-191 
Devotional Books (Job, 192, Psa. 195, Prov. 198, 

Eccl. 1 99, Song of Sol. 200), . 1 92-208 

The Interim (400 years), 209-228 

The World's Preparation for Christianity, 229-235 

New Testament, -- 236-243 

Matthew, 244-249 

Mark, 249-255 

Luke, 256-266 

John, 267-281 

Acts: Church History (1 These. 286, 2 Thess. 288, 

1 Cor. 290, 2 Cor. 293, Gal. 295, Rom. 298),-. 281-302 
Acts: Church History, Continued (Phile. 303, 

Col. 305, Eph. 306, PMU. 308, 1 Tim. 312, 

Tit. 314, 2 Tim. 315, Heb. 318), 303-327 

General Letters (Ja. 328, 1 P. 330, 2 P. 332, 1 Jn. 

333, 2Jn. 336, 3 Jn. 336, Ju, 337), 327-339 

Future: Revelation, 340-353 

Illustrated Index Concluded, 354-356 

Abstract of Title to Heavenlv Inheritance, . 357-364 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



XV 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



GENERAL AXD PARTICULAR SUBJECTS. 



PAGE. 

PREFACE,." v 

Introduction to Lessons, viii 

Suggestions to Teachers, ix 

Authors Consulted, xi 

General Subjects of Chapters, xiii 

Table of Contents, xv 

List of Blackboard Lessons, _ xxv 

Chap. I. History of the Bible. 

Pabt I. 

SECTION. PAGE. 

1. Names of the Bible, 1 

2. Bible Lands, 1 

•3. Ancient Books, 3 

4. Sealing of Books, 4 

5. Divisions of the Bible, 4 

6. Punctuation, 5 

7. Age of the Bible, 6 

8. Preservation of the Bible, 7 

9. Unchanged Condition, ... 8 

10. History of the English 

Translation, 9 

11. Our English Bible, 12 

12. Bible Societies, 13 

13. Bible Printed in the United 

States, _ 14 

Part II. 

14. The Tradition of the El- 

ders, _ 14 



SECTION. PAGE. 

15. The Apocrypha, 16 

16. The Old Testament Manu- 

script, 17 

17. The New Testament Man- 

uscript, 18 

18. Ancient Versions, 20 

19. History of the Canon, 23 

20. Inspiration of the Bible, . . 23 

21. Accuracy of the Old Tes- 

tament, 24 

22. Prophecy from God, 25 

23. Originality "of the Bible,.. 25 

24. The Writers of the Bible, 27 
25. -Rules of Interpretation, .. 29 
26. Two Questions, 32* 

Lesson I and II, 33 

Chap. II. The Bible Opened. 

1. The Bible Taught as a 

Science, 36 

2. Two Grand Themes, 36 

3. Two Great Questions, 37 

4. Two Great Parts, 38 

5. The Word Testament De- 

fined, 3S 

6. Juxtaposition of Old and 

New Testaments, 38 

7. The Great Object, 39 

Lesson III , 40 



XVI 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



Chap. III. Illustrated Bibli- 
cal Index. 

1. Object of this Work, .... 42 

2. Illustrated Biblical Index, 43 

3. Two Great Grand Divi- 

sions, 44 

4. Dates of Old and New Tes- 

taments, 44 

5. Sphere or Globe, . 45 

6. Illustrations, . . 45 

7. Meridian Line, 47 

8. A Beautiful Illustration,.. 47 

9. Three Old Testament Grand 

Divisions, _ . . 47 

10. Number of Books, 47 

Chap. IT. Grand Divisions of 
the Bible. 

1. Historical: First Old Tes- 

tament Grand Division, 48 

2. Poetical : Second Old Tes- 

tament Grand Division, 49 

3. Prophetical: Third O. Tes- 

tament Grand Division, 49 

Lesson IV, 51 

*4. Historical: First New Tes- 
tament Grand Division, 52 

5. Epistolary: Second N.Tes- 

tament Grand Division, 52 

6. Apocalyptic: Third N.Tes- 

tament Grand Division, 53 
Lesson V, . . 53 

Chap. V. Old Testament Divi- 
sions. 

1. Old Testament: Historical, 54 

('/) Law,. 54 

(b) Executive, 55 

2. Poetical, 55 

(a) Job, 56 

(A) Psalms,. 56 



{c) Proverbs, .'. 56 

(d) Ecclesiastes, 56 

(e) Song of Solomon, 57 

3. Prophetical, 57 

(a) Major Prophets, 5? 

(b) Minor Prophets, 59 

Lesson VI, 59 

Chap. TI. New Testament Di- 
visions. 

1. N. Testament: Historical, 60 

(fit) Life of Christ, 61 

(b) Church History, 61 

2. Epistolary, 61 

(a) Doctrinal, . 62 

(b) Supplement, 62 

3/ Apocalyptic, 63 

Lesson VII, 65 

Chap. VII. Sub-Divisions of 
the Bible. 

1. Sub-divisions or Names, . . 60 

2. Explanations, 67 

3. Reflections, 67 

4. The Law, 68 

5. GENESIS, 68 

6. History of Mankind, 69 

7. Church History, 69 

8. The Writer,. 70 

9. Prophecies and Types, .;. 70 

10. Scientific View of Creation, 70 

11. Outline of Genesis, 71 

12. Conclusion, 71 

Chap. VIII. Exodus. 

1. EXODUS, 72 

2. Moses the Writer, 72 

3. Outline of Exodus, 73 

4. Reflections, 73 

5. Prophecies and Types 73 

6. Conclusion, 71 



TABLE OF CONTEXTS. 



XV11 



Chap. IX. Leviticus. 

1. LEVITICUS, 75 

2. Laws of Sacrifices and Of- 

ferings, - 75 

3. The Writer of Leviticus, . 75 

4. Subjects of the Book, 75 

5. Festivals, etc., 76 

6. Institution of Public Wor- 

ship, _ 76 

7. Types, 76 

8. Tables Weights, etc. , 76 

5. Jewish Times and Festi- 
vals, 78 

Chap. X. Numbers. 

1. NUMBERS, 79 

2. A Diary, 79 

3. General Outline, 79 

4. Number of Israel, .. 79 

5. Particular Outline, 80 

6. Tribes in Camp (111.), .... 81 

7. A Prophecy, 83 

Chap. XI. Deuteronomy. 

1. DEUTERONOMY, 83 

2. Where Written, 83 

3. A History of Five Weeks, 84 

4. The Repetitions, 84 

5. A Rehearsal, 84 

6. When to be Read, 84 

7. General Outline, 85 

8. Great Value of the Penta- 

teuch, 86 

Lesson VIII, 87 

Chap. XII. Sub-Divisions. 

[CONTINUED.] 

1. The Executive, 88 

2. Sacred History, 88 



3. The Compilers, 89 

4. Genuineness of this His- 

tory, 89 

5. This History Very Ancient, 89 

6. JOSHUA 90 

7. Church Established in Ca- 

naan, 90 

8. Government Theocratic, . _ 90 

9. Doctrine of the Future 

State, 91 

10. General Divisions, 92' 

11. Prophecy Fulfilled, 92 

Chap. XIII. Judges. 

1. JUDGES, 92 

2. Province of Judges, 93 

3. The Writers, 93 

4. Names of the Judges, 93 

5. Chronology of the Book,. 94 

6. General Survey, 94 

7. Outline of Judges, 94 

8. A Link in History, 95 

Chap. XIT. Ruth. 

1. RUTH, 96 

2. Flight into Moab, 96 

3. Return to Judea, 96 

4. Design of the Book, 97 

5. Boaz Mighty in the Law, . 97 

6. Comforting Reflection, ... 97 

Chap. XT. I Samuel. 

1. SAMUEL, Volume I, ... 98 

2. The Writer, 98 

3. A Word to the Reader,.. 98 

4. General Divisions, 99 

5. Outline of 1 Samuel, 99 

6. Eulogy on Samuel, _. 100 

7. Samuel as a Prophet, ... 100 



XV111 



TABLE OF CONTEXTS. 



Chap. XVI. II Samuel. 

1. SAMUEL, Volume II,-- 

2. David and the Psalms, . _ 

3. General Divisions, ... 

4. Outline of 2 Samuel, 

5. Supplement to 2 Samuel, 

6. Importance of this His- 

tory, 



101 
101 
102 
102 
103 

103 



Chap. XVII. I Kings. 

1. HISTORY OF THE 

KINGS, Vol. I, 104 

2. General Divisions, 104 

3. Outline 1 Kings, Part I 

(Ch. i-xi), 105 

4. The Reign of Solomon, _ 105 

5. Outline 1 Kings, Part II 

(Ch. xii-xxii), 106 

6. Remarks on the Kings, . . 108 

Chap. XVIII. II Kings. 

1. HISTORY OF THE 

KINGS, Vol. II, ---_ 108 

(a) Outline 2 Kings, Chap, 
i-xiv, 109 

2. Prophecy of JONAH, ..111 

(a) First Mention of Him, 111 

(b) His Prophecy, 112 

(c) Outline, ... 112 

((?) Type of Christ, 112 

3. Prophecy of HOSEA, .. 112 

(a) Particular Prophecies, 113 

(b) Divided into Dis- 
courses, 114 

4. Prophecy of AMOS, 115 

(a) His Use of Imagery,.. IK! 
{b) Outline, 116 

5. Outline 2 Kings, Contin- 

ued (Chap, xv), 117 

6. Prophecy of JOEL, .... 11,7 

A Bad Slate of Things, 118 



(b) Outline, 118 

7. Prophecy of ISAIAH,.. 119 

(a) General Analysis, 119 

(b) Prophecies of Christ, . 120 

8. Outline Isaiah, Part I 

(Chap, i-v), 121 

9. Outline 2 Kings, Contin- 

ued (Chap, xvi), 122 

10. Prophecy of MICAH,... 128 

(a) His Predictions, 123 

(b) Divisions, . 124 

11. Outline 2 Kings, Contin- 

ued (Chap, xvii-xix), _ . 124 

12. Prophecy of NAHUM,_. 125 

13. Outline 2 Kings, Contin- 

ued (Chap, xx, xxi),___ 126 

14. Prophecy of ZEPHANI- 

AH, ._ 126 

(a) Object of the Proph- 
ecy, 126 

(b) Outline, ..%'.. 127 

15. Outline 2 Kings, Contin- 

ued (Chap, xxii-xxv),. 127 

16. Conclusion of Kings, -.. 129 

Chap, XIX. I Chronicles. 

1. CHRONICLES, Vol. I,. 129 

2. Three General Parts, 131 

3. Outline Part I (Ch. i-ix), 131 

4. Outline Part II (Ch. x),_. 132 

5. Outline Part III (Ch. xi- 

xxix), 133 

Chap. XX. II Chronicles. 

1. CHRONICLES, Vol. II, 136 

2. Two General Parts, 136 

3. Outline Part I (Ch. i-ix), 137 
{a) Outline Part II (Ch. 

x-xxxvi), 138 

4. Prophecy of Isaiaii, Part 

II (Ch. vi-xii) 142 



TABLE OF. CONTENTS. 



XIX 



SECTION. PAGE. 

(a) Outline, 142 

5. Outline 2 Chronicles, con- 

tinued (Ch. xxix-xxxi), 142 

6. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part 

III(Ch. xiii-xxiii), ... 143 

7. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part 

IV (Ch. xxiv-xxxv), . . 144 

8. Outline 2 Chronicles, con- 

tinued (Ch. xxxii), 145 

9. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part 

V (Ch. xxxvi-xxxix), _ _ 145 

10. Outline 2 Chronicles, con- 

tinued (Ch. xxxiii), 146 

11. Prophecy of JEREMI- 

AH, . 147 

(a) Prophecies Respecting 

Christ, 147 

{b) Two General Parts, . . 148 

(c) Part I, Sections I-V,- 148 

(d) Part II, Sections I-II, 149 

12. Outline 2 Chron. contin- 

ued (Ch. xxxiv, xxxv), 149 

13. Prophecy of HABAK- 

KUK, 150 

(a) Outline, 150 

(b) Concluding Remarks,. 151 

14. Outline 2 Chronicles, con- 

tinued (Ch. xxxvi), ... 151 

15. Conclusion to Chronicles, 151 



€hap. XXI. History and Pro- 
phecy Just Before and After 
the Destruction of Jerusa- 
lem. 

1. Outline Jeremiah, Sec.V, 

Part I (Ch. xxxii-xliv), 152 

2. Outline Jeremiah, Sec. I, 

Part II (Ch. xlvi-li),.. 153 

3. Outline Jeremiah, Sec. II, 

Part II (Ch. lii), 154 



SECTION. PAGE. 

4. LAMENTATIONS OF 

JEREMIAH, 155 

5. Prophecy of OBADIAH, 156 

(a) Who the Edomites 
were, 156 

(b) The Prophecy Ful- 
filled, 157 

6. Prophecy of EZEKIEL, 158 
{a) Divisions of the Proph- 
ecy, 158 

{b) Outline Part I (Ch. i- 
xxiv), 158 

(c) Outline Part II (Ch. 
xxv-xlviii), 1 59 

(d) Character of the Pro- 
phecy, 159 

(e) The Ten Lost Tribes, . 160 

Chap. XXII. History and 
Prophecy During the Cap- 
tivity. 

1. Prophecy of DANIEL,.. 161 

(a) Chronology of this 
Book, ..'. 162 

(b) Two General Parts, .. 162 

(c) Outline Part I: Histor- 
ical, 163 

(d) Outline Part II: Pro- 
phetical, . 164 

(e) Daniel as a Writer, . _ . 164 

2. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part 

VI,... 164 

(a) Outline Isaiah, contin- 
ued (Ch. xl-lix), 166 

Chap. XXIII. Return from 
Captivity. 

1. EZRA: Continued His- 

tory of the Jews, 168 

2. Three General Parts 169 



XX 



TABLE OF CONTEXTS. 



SECTION. PAGE. 

3. Outline Ezra, Part I (Ch. 

i,ii),PartII(Ch.iii-v), 169 

4. Introduction to the Resto- 

ration Prophets (Eag- 
gai, Zechariah and Mai- 
achi), 170 

5. Prophecy of HAGGAI,. 172 

(a) General Divisions, 172 

(b) Explanation of this 
Prophecy, -- - 173 

(c) Characteristics of the 
Prophet, 173 

6. Prophecy of ZECHARI- 

AH, 174 

(a) Four General Parts, ._ 174 

(b) Analysis, 174 

7. Outline Ezra, Part II, 

continued (Ch. vi),.-..- 176 

8. Outline Ezra, Part III 

(Ch. vii), 176 

9. ESTHER: Historical, .- 176 

(a) Special Providence Il- 
lustrated, .. 177 

(b) Anal} r sis, 179 

10. Outline Ezra, Part III, 

continued (Ch. viii-x), 180 

11. NEHEMIAH: Continu- 

ed History of the Jews, 180 
{a) Outline (Ch. i-xiii), .. 181 

12. Prophecy of MALACHI, 182 
(%) Peculiarity of this 

Prophecy, 183 

(b) Divisions of this Pro- 
phecy, . . 183 

(c) Analysis, 183 

13. Diagram of the Kings 

and Prophets, 184 

Lesson IX and X, .185 

Lesson XI, 188 

Lesson XII and XIII,... 189 
Tabular View of the 

Prophets 191 



Chap. XXIY. Devotional. 

1. JOB: "Patience," 192 

{a) Three General Parts,. 192 

{b) Analysis, 193 

(c) Depository of Patriar- 
chal Religion, 193 

2. PSALMS: " Sacred 

Hymns," 195 

{a) Adaptation to Wor- 
ship, . . 195 

(b) Messianic Character,. 196 

(c) Five Collections, 196 

3. PROVERBS: "Maxims," 198 
{a) Design of this Book, , 198 
(b) Five General Parts, .. 199 

4. ECCLESIASTES:' 'Hap- 

piness," 199 

{a) For the Young, 200 

5. SONG OF SOLOMON, 200 
(a) A Poem, 201 

Lesson XIV, 202 

6. Chronology of Old Testa- 

ment Historical Books, 203 

Chap. XXT. The Interim. 

1. Inter-Biblical History, .. 209 

2. Political History of the 

Jews, 210 

3. The Four Periods, 211 

First Period, 211 

Second Period, 212 

(I) The Samaritan Oppo- 
sition, 212 

(II) Highpriests, . 213 

(III) The Septuagint Tran- 
slation, 214 

(IV) Histoiy under High- 
priests, 214 

Third Period, 216 

(I) Judas Maccabeus 216 

(II) John Ilyrcanus, 217 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



XXL 



SECTION. PAGE. 

Fourth Period, 217 

(I) The Design of Herod, 218 

(II) The Jews Disap- 
pointed, 218 

(III) Extent of the Reign 

of Herod,... ..- 219 

(IV) Herod's Public Ad- 
ministration, 220 

(V) Herod's Temple,.... 220 

(VI) Herod's Successor, . - 221 

4. Moral History of the Jews 221 

(a) State of Religion, 222 

(b) New Religious Centre, 222 

(c) The Great Expecta- 
tion, 223 

5. Synagogue System, 224 

6. Three Prevailing Lan- 

guages, 225 

Lesson XV, 227 

Chap. XXVI. The World's 
Preparation for Chris- 
tianity. 

1. The Fullness of Time,-. 229 

2. 1st, By Centralization, ._ 229 

(a) The Boundary, 229 

{b) Conquest, 230 

3. 2d, By Civilization, 230 

(«) The Roman Art, 231 

(&) The Grecian Schools, . 232 

4. 3d, By Demoralization, _ _ 233 

(a) Prayer for Deliverance 234 

(b) Prince of Peace, 234 

Lesson XVI, 235 

Chap. XXVII. New Testament. 

1. Preface, 236 

2. Grand Divisions, 238 

3. Historical, 239 

4. Introduction to the Four 

Gospels, 239 



SECTION. PAGE^ 

(a) Luke the Historian, _. 240 
{b) Theory of the Origin, 240 

(c) Gospel for the World, 240 

(d) Races of the World,.. 241 

(e) Preaching to the World 241 
(/) Demand for Perma- 
nent Records, 241 

(g) Adequacy, 242- 

Chap. XXVIII. Matthew. 

1. Introduction to Mat- 

thew's Gospel, 244 

(«) The Promise, 244 

{b) Character and Needs 

of the Jews, 244 

2. General Divisions, .. 246 

3. Matthew's Use of the 

Scriptures, 24$ 

4. Omissions of the First 

Gospel, 247 

5. Additions of the First 

Gospel, 248 

Chap. XXIX. Mark. 

1. Introduction to Mark's 

Gospel, 249 

2. Witnesses, 251 

3. Character and Needs, of 

the Romans, 251 

4. General Divisions, 252 

5. Roman Adaptation, 253 

6. Omissions of the Second 

Gospel, 254 

7. Additions of the Second 

Gospel, 255 

Chap. XXX. Luke. 

1. Introduction to Luke's 

Gospel, 256 

2. Character and Needs of 

the Greeks, 257 



XXI 1 



TABLE OF CONTEXTS. 



SECTION. PAGE. 

3. General Divisions, 260 

4. Greek Adaptation, 260 

5. Omissions of the Third 

Gospel, 262 

6. Additions to the Third 

Gospel,. 263 

7. Children's Gospel, 264 

8. Woman's Gospel, 264 

9. Gospel of the Poor, 265 

10. Conclusion, 266 

Chap. XXXI. John. 

1. Introduction to John's 

Gospel, .- 267 

2. Origin and Design, 267 

3. Character and Needs of 

the Christian, 269 

4. The Authorship, — 270 

5. General Divisions, 272 

6. Christian .Adaptation,... 272 

7. Omissions of the Fourth 

Gospel, 273 

8. Additions of the Fourth 

Gospel, 274 

9. Christian Doctrines, 275 

10. Conclusion : Four Gos- 

pels Needed, 276 

11. The Elements Common 

to the Four,... 277 

12. The Elements Peculiar to 

Each,... 278 

Lesson XVII, 280 

Chap. XXXII. Acts: Church 
History. 

1. Introduction to the Acts 

of the Apostles, 281 

2. Two General Parts, 283 

{a) Analysis of the Four 

Particular Parts, 283 

3. The Apostle Paul, 284 



SECTION. PAGE. 

4. Outline of Acts, Part IV, 285 

5. Introduction to 1st THES- 

SALONIANS, 286 

{a) Paul in Thessalonica, 286 

(b) Reasons for Writing, . 287 

(c) Outline of Paul's First 
Letter, 288 

6. Introduction to 2d THES- 

SALONIANS, 288 

{a) Why Paul Wrote again 288 
(b) Outline of Paul's Sec- 
ond Letter, 289 

7. Outline of Acts, Part IV, 

continued, 289 

8. Introduction to 1st COR- 

INTHIANS, 290 

{a) City of Corinth, 290 

(b) Reasons for Paul's 
Writing, 290 

(c) Outline of Paul's First 
Letter, 292 

9. Outline of Acts, Part IV, 

continued, 293 

10. Introduction to 2d COR- 

INTHIANS, 293 

(a) Object of Paul's Sec- 
ond Letter, 293 

{b) Outline of Paul's Sec- 
ond Letter, 295 

11. Introduction to GALA- 

TIANS, 295 

(a) Reasons for Writing, . 296 

(b) Three General Parts, . 297 

12. Introduction to RO- 

MANS, 298 

{a) Where Written, 298 

{b) Object in Writing, ... 298 

(c) Three General Parts, 300 
(<7) Conclusion, 301 

13. Outline of Acts, Part IV, 

continued, 301 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



XX111 



SECTION. PAGE. 

14. When and Where Paul 
Wrote the Following 
Letters,... t 302 

Chap. XXXIII. Acts : Church 
History (continued). 

1. Introduction to PHILE- 

MON, 303 

(«) Outline, 305 

2. Introduction to COLOS- 

SIANS,. 305 

{a) Outline, 305 

3. Introduction to EPHE- 

SIANS, 306 

(a) Outline, 307 

4. introduction to PHILIP- 

PLANS, 308 

(a) Outline, 309 

5. Preface to Paul's Last 

Three Pastoral Letters, 310 

6. Introduction to 1st TIM- 

OTHY, . 312 

{a) Outline, 313 

7. Introduction to TITUS, . 314 
{a) Outline, 315 

8. Introduction to 2d TIM- 

OTHY, 315 

(a) Paul's Last Imprison- 
ment, .. 315 

(b) Paul's Last Letter, .. . 317 

(c) Outline, 317 

id) Paul's Last Request, . . 318 

9. Introduction to HE- 

BREWS, -. 318 

{a) The Author, 318 

{b) Where and When 

Written, 319 

(c) To Whom Addressed, 320 

d) The Great Object, ... 320 

e) Outline,' 320 



SECTION. PAGE. 

(/) Hebrews a Supple- 
ment,. 321 

Lesson XVIII, ....323 

Lesson XIX and XX,... 325 

Chap. XXXIV. General Let- 
ters. 

1. Preface to General Let- 

ters, 327 

2. Introduction to JAMES, 328 

(a) Analysis,. 329 

3. Introduction to 1st PE- 

TER, 330 

{a) Where Written, 330 

(b) General Characteristic, 331 

(c) Analysis,.. 331 

4. Introduction to 2d PE- 

TER, 332 

(a) When Written, 332 

(b) Analysis, 332 

5. Introduction to 1st JOHN 333 

(a) The Author, 333 

(b) The Design, 334 

(c) Leading Thought, ... 334 

(d) Analysis, 335 

6. Introduction to 2d JOHN, 336 
(a) To Christian Mothers, 336 

7. Introduction to 3d JOHN, 336 

(a) To Whom Addressed, 336 

8. Introduction to J UDE,.- 337 
{a) The Design, 337 

(b) Sure Punishment of 
the Wicked, 338 

(c) Last Admonition, 389 

Lesson XXI, .339 

Chap. XXXV. Future : Revel- 
ation. 

1. Introduction to REVEL- 
ATION, 340 

(a) The Writer, 340 



XXIV 



TABLE OF CONTENTS. 



SECTION. PAGE. 

{b) To Whom Addressed, 341 
(c) The Object, 341 

2. Three Golden Topics, ._ . 341 

(a) Introduction Topic I, 341 
(I) Outline Topic I, 342 

(b) Introduction Topic II, 342 
(I) Outline Topic II, ----- 343 

3. Introduction to Topic III, 343 
(a) From Pentecost to 

Christ's Second Com- 
ing, 344 

4. Six General Parts, 345 

(a) Outline Part I: The 

Seven Seals Opened,.. 345 
(&) Part II: The Seven 
Trumpets Sounded, . . . 346 

(c) Part III: Three Ene- 
mies, the Dragon, the 
Beast, the False Proph- 
et, Warring Against the 
Church (Ch. xii-xiv),. 346 

{d) Part IV: The Seven 
Vials Poured Out (Ch. 
xv-xvi), 347 

(e) Part V: The Three 
Enemies of the Church 
Overthrown (Ch, xvii- 
xx), 347 



SECTION. PAGE. 

(/) Part VI: The New 
Heavenly Jerusalem, 
(Ch. xxi, xxii), 347 

5. Purpose of this Prophecy, 348 

6. Conclusion, _.. 348 

7. New Testament Chron- 

ology, 349 

Lesson XXII, 352 

Chap. XXXTI. Illustrated 
Index Concluded, 354 

Chap. XXXYII. Abstract of 

Title to the Heavenly 

Inheritance. 

1. The Inheritance De- 

scribed, 357 

2. The Inheritance Imper- 

ishable, 358 

3. The Title to this Inherit- 

ance, 358 

4. The Adoption and Heir- 

ship, 359 

5. Surety of Possession, _._ 360 

6. Is the Inheritance Real?. 360 

7. Signatures and Witnesses, 361 
Lesson XXIII, 363 



LIST OF BLACKBOARD LESSOKS. XXT 



LIST OF BLACKBOABD LESSONS. 

PAGE. 

I — <_fuMecJ: <$0€dfotu 0/ me &$i'o/e, Part I, - 33 
{Age, Preservation, Translation, &c.) 

II — C/afaecf: iffita&tu e/ me <£$*/&, Part II, - 33 
{Manuscript, Inspiration, Interpretation, &c. ) 

III — tstevteef ; kJico Z^ieat T^iana ^ZJtvt'dtondj 40 
{Old and New Testaments.) 

IV — Cfttwec/: <_//rtee 0, <_/. Tfiand Q/jivtaiend, 51 
{Historical, Poetical, Prophetical. ) 

V — <Jamect; tJmee Jt\ *J. T^tana QlJtviWcnd, 53 
{Historical, Epistolary, Apocalyptic.) 

{Law, Executive, Devotional, Major and Minor 
Prophets. ) 



59 



{Life of Christ, Church History, Paul's Pastoral 
Letters, General Letters, and Future. ) 

Vlll—S&fa; 2%e J&t*, - - - 87 

{Gen. and Deut. inclusive.) 



XXvi LIST OF BLACKBOARD LES*OX:\ 

PAGE. 

IX — <yt*{k'sct ' : <JAe waseceedtttej Part I, - - 185 

(Josh, and 2 lungs inclusive.) 

X — fL/eivtect ': <J At wccccat'ive, Part II, - - 185 

(1 Cliron. and Esther inclusive.) 

XI— Sfitfecfy 'Sffie ^Jfaf'oi WieA^eti, - - 188 

(Isaiah and Daniel inclusive.) 

XII— Safe*/.- 3% ^Jfma &io/i/ie&, Parti, - 189 
(Hosea and Micah inclusive.) 

XIII— £Pu&ot; *2/7ie ^inoi ^tc/i/ielj, Part II, 189 
(Xah. and Malachi inclusive.) 

XIV— 6/afact: ^e ®#evctio<na/ 'Sffoed*, - - 202 

(Job and S. of Solomon inclusive.) 

XV — c/awecf : iSnfrt- <Z$t'Auca/ i$oi4&iu, - - 227 

(History of the Jeius, 400 years B. C. ) 

XVI — <JaM<?ct ' : t_/Ae fflcua d <_S4eAaia&'en A ? 

ToAiUAJiantfu, - - - - - -235 

(History of the Gentiles, 400 years B. C.) 

XVII — Creewect : -ZtAe of wAu'd/, . . - 280 

(Matt, and John inclusive.) 

XVIII — Csu/yect ': wAiuicA ^oc'afou/j - - - 323 

(Acts of the Apostles.) 



LIST OF BLACKBOARD LESSOKS. XXV11 

PAGE. 

XIX — <ya/yect: <Jaa/ 6 J^ad^oia/ Jz,efaid , Part I, 325 
[Rom. and Col. inclusive) 

XX — <L7€emect; <_saa/ 6 Lsaafola/ ~Z<e#eU, Part II, 325 
(1 Thess. and Heb. inclusive.) 

XXI — i/ufaec/; jZeneia/ IteMett, - - -339 

(James and Jade inclusive.) 

XXII — t7av*e€f ; <J/ie i^fafate, .... 352 
(Revelation.) 

XXUI—S&^c/,' ^4&ac/ </ Wid, - - -363 

(Heavenly Inheritance. ) 



CHAPTEK I. 

HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. 

Part I. 

§ 1. Names of the Bible. The name Bible occurs 

nowhere in the sacred writings. Bible is from the Greek 
IltfjAoz, which means the inner bark of papyrus; the paper 
made of this bark; hence, a book, a scroll. Webster savs, 
" the Book by way of eminence; the sacred volume in 
which are contained the revelations of God; the principles 
of Christian faith and the rules of practice; the Old and 
.New Testaments: the Scriptures." 

The Bible has various names giyen to it. 

1st. Bible, from the material used in making ancient 
books. 

2d. Oracles or Scriptures, from the mode of revealing 
truths. 

3d. Word, — Law, — Law. Prophets" and Psalms, — Testa- 
ments or Covenants, from the contents of the book. 

4th. The JtibJe. the Holy Scriptures, the Canonical 
Scriptures, from the character of the book. 

§ 2. Bible Lands. Evcrv Bible reader should have a 
Bible Atlas, either Osborn's Biblical Tables, or Coleman's 
Historical Text-Book and Atlas. 

In these works the Bible lands are fully described, as 
they are in any atlas. Xo space, therefore, need be o-iveu 



HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. 



[Part L 



in this work to this topic, though an all important subject 
to one who would know the Bible in its surroundings. 

The following table of distances is inserted for reference. 
It is taken from Notes from our Bible School, by Rev. 
James P. Thorns. 



I. — Table of distances from Jerusalem 



Places. 


Miles. 


Jerusalem 





Athens. ...W., N.W. .. 


... 780 


Mt. Ararat. _N. E. 


... 760 


Bethel N. 


12 


Bethany E 


2 


Bethoron...N.W 


11 


Beersheba. . S. W - 


40 


Bethlehem S 


6 


Beirut. N 


. . . 150 



Babylon E 550 

Cana of Galilee, N 

Caesarea N. W 

Capernaum. _N. 

Cairo S. W 

Cyrene W 

Corinth. ...N. W 

Dan.. N 

Damascus, N., N. E 

Dead Sea E 

Emmaus._-W., N.W. . 
Gilgal-at Jordan, N. E. . 
Gilgal N.W 



70 

62 

85 

260 

790 

830 

110 

135 

15 

n 

23 
19 



II. — Other distances: 

Places. 

Dan to Beersheba 

Dan to Tyre 

Dan to Waters of Merom 

Dan to Sea of Galilee 

Mouth of Jordan to Medi- 
terranean 50 

Malta to Alexandria .. 980 



Miles. 

150 

25 

12 

24 



Places. 

Gibeon. . . N 

Gaza S. W 

Hebron S 

Jericho N. E 

Jordan N. E. 

Joppa....W., N. W 

Lydda....W., KW 

Malta.... W.,N. W 

Nazareth N 

Nineveh N. E 

Rome N.W 

Shechem N 

Shiloh N., N. E 

Sea of Galilee, N.,N. E.- 
Samaria N 

Sidon ..N 

Sinai S. 

Tabor N 

Tyre N 

Thebes. .....S. W 

Ur N. E 

Waters of Merom, N 



Places. 

Sidon to Damascus. 

Sidon to Tyre 

Tyre to Carmel 

Carmel to Caesarea.. 
Cu'sarea to Joppa... 
Joppa to Gaza 



Miles. 

5 

46 

20 

18 

25 

35 

22 

1240 

65 

575 

. 1450 

35 

22 

75 

42 

. 125 

230 

65 

105 

. 450 

. 435 

. 100 



Miles. 
50 

20 
35 
21 
,1o 
40 



Joppa to Gibraltar 3000 



Qh. I: §3.] 



ANCIENT BOOKS. 



III.- — Areas of Seas and Lakes: 



Miles 

Adriatic Sea 460x105 

Black Sea 725x225 

Caspian Sea 820x225 

Dead Sea 45x10 

Red Sea.,.. .--1160x125 

Sea of Galilee 14x7 

IV. — Length of Rivers: 



Waters of Merom 

Gulf of akaba to the Red 

Sea 

Gulf of Suez to Red 

Sea 

Suez Canal 



Miles. 
1700 
1150 



Euphrates 

Tigris 

V. — Elevations above the Mediterranean Sea: 



Nile... 
Jordan 



Miles. 
4x3 

105 

180 
100 



Miles. 

3600 

237 



Feet. 

Mt. Ararat 17,323 

Mt. Hermon 9,052 

Mt. Lebanon 10,059 

Mt. Hauran 6,500 

Mt. Ajlum 3,500 

Mt Jarmuk _ 3,650 

Mt. Tabor... 1,800 

Mt. Gilead... 5,000 

Mt. Genzim 2,500 



Mt. Ebal... 
Mt. Olives . 
Mt. Mizpah 
Mt. Zion . , . 
Mt. Carmel. 
Mt. Sinai .. 



Sea of Galilee, 
Dead Sea, 



638 feet 
1,316 feet 



Feet. 
2,500 
2,398 
2,800 
2,200 
1,200 
8,593 

below, 
below. 



§ 3. Ancient Books. Ancient books were not made 
of the same material as ours of the present day, nor eouM 
their construction be the same as now. There were various 
materials on which they were written. God wrote on 
tables of stone (marble), B. C. 1491; Hesiod wrote on 
sheets of lead, B. C. 900; The Persians and Ionians used 
skins of animals, B. C. 624; Roman laws were on brass 
and Solon's laws were on wood, B. 0. 600. The Draco 
laws were written on skins with blood. The books of the 
great library of Alexandria, 300 years before Christ, were 
written on parchment; and at more recent date palm leaves 
were used; while books now extant, written in the twelfth 
century. A. D., are found to be written on paper made of 



4 HISTORY ov THE BIBLE. [Part L 

linen. The New Testament beyond a doubt was parchment 
prepared from the skins of animals, as parchment in later 

times was much esteemed. 

The several pieces, or leaves, were joined one to an- 
other so as to make a single long sheet from the beginning 
to the end. This was then rolled around a stick; or if it 
was very long, around two sticks, beginning at each end, 
and rolling until they meet in the middle. Lu. iv: IT, 20. 

When any person wanted to read, he unrolled it to the 
place he wished; and when he had done, rolled it up again. 
Hence books of every size were called rolls. Our word 
volume means this in its original signification. Jer. xxxvi: 
2; Pslams xl: T: Isa. xxxiv: 4. 

The roll was commonly written on one side only; that 
which was given to Ezekiel. in vision, was written on both, 
within and without. Ez. ii: 9, 10. 

§ 4. Sealing of Books. From this account of the 
ancient books, it is easy to understand how they might be 
sealed, either once or a number of times, so that a new 
seal might have to be opened, after unrolling and reading 
a part, before the reader could proceed to the remainder. 

Suppose a book had seven seals. There would be seven 
skins or parchments folded as follows, viz: the first would 
be rolled on a stick and sealed; the second would be rolled 
over the first and sealed; the third over the second and 
sealed: and so on, making seven seals. 

The opening of one seal would be liberating one parch- 
ment containing a complete subject or scene. 

Thus there may be few or many seals; and each must 
he separately opened before read. See Isa. xxix: 11; "Rev. 
v: 1. % 

% 5. Divisions of the Bible. The division of the 

Bible into chapter.-, as we at present have them, ifi 
modern date. It is attributed toCardinal Hugo, who lived 
about the middle of the thirteenth century, and who did it 



Ch. I: £ 6.] PUiTCTUATIOK. 

for convenience of reference in a Latin concordance 

preparing. To refer more easily r<» a particular sentes 
he placed the first ^even letters of the alphabet along the 
margin of each page. Rabbi Nathan, a Jew. fur the same 
convenience of refereDce to his Hebrew Concordat 
adopted in 1438 Hugo's chapters, and marked every fifth 
line with a figure. In 1661, a Jew of Amsterdam, in his 
edition of the Hebrew Old Testament, divided the - 
of Hugo into ? - we now have them. Robert 

Stephens, a French printer, had previously (1554) divided 
the New Testament into verses. 

And thus, as the Jews borrowed the d:~ f the 

iptures into chapters from the Christians, in like man- 
:he Christian- borrowed that of the chapters 
from the Jew-. 

Punctuation. '"The Bible had originally, and for 
a long time, no punctuation. The words were not bo much 

separated - in one another. Letter folio* 

letter, successively, so that every line was like a .-ingle word. 
Hence, the reader was obliged first to separate and to 
re-combine the letters, in order to form word-, and by this 
means discover the sense. S iat as the fifth century, the 

v Testament had none of the ordinary marks 
tinction. 

The following ssages wi _ »i some ide 

the original text, and the difficulties <:>f the 
times. The letters used were all capitals: 

FORGODSOLOVEDTHEWORLDTHATHEOAYEm 
NLYBEGOTTE^SOKTHATWHOSOEVERBELIEV 

ETHIXHIMSHOrLDXOTPEElSHBrTHAYEEVEEL 
ASTIXGLIEE. John iii: 16. 

It was no easy task f<»r a person not long instruct 
very much v read the Bible well and intelli- 

gibly in the public assemblies, without adopting for 



6 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part I. 

guide some marks of distinction for private reading, pre- 
paratory to its use in the public service." — Carpenter. 

"The divisions made in the fifth century were very dif- 
ferent from those now in use, which consisted in setting 
just so many words in one line as were to be read, at the 
conclusion of which a pause was observed, and thereby to 
better disclose the sense of the writer. 

THAT THE AGED MEN BE SOBER 

GRAVE 

TEMPERATE 

SOUND IN THE FAITH 

THE AGED WOMEN LIKEWISE 

IN BEHAVIOR AS BECOMETH HOLINESS 

NOT FALSE ACCUSERS 

NOT GIVEN TO MUCH WINE 

TEACHERS OF GOOD THINGS 

It is clear that this mode of writing occupied too much 
space. This was gradually improved, but did not arrive at 
anything like perfection until long after the invention of 
printing, which came not into general use until the fore 
part of the fifteenth century." — Carpenter. 

The above will give to some extent the amount of labor 
expended on the Scriptures to bring it down to our under- 
standing. This, with the labor of translating it into 
English, witli the cost to those engaged in the work, of 
their fortunes, their liberty and their lives, ought to cause 
our hearts to go out in gratitude to God for the Bible, and 
in thankfulness that these things are not to be endured in 
our day. With a knowledge of this, we should prize the 
Scriptures; for now, not only the learned scribe or doctor of 
law may read it, but the child unlearned. 

§ 7. Age of the Bible. The Bible contains the oldest 
books in the world ; the first portions of it, which are the 
foundations of the rest, having been written 3,300 years; 



Ch. I: § 8. PRESERVATION OF THE BIBLE. 7 

which is 1,000 years earlier than any other history which we 
have. 

The oldest profane historians whose writings have reached 
our times were cotemporary with Ezra and Nehemiah, the 
last of the historians of the Old Testament. 

Between them and Moses, who wrote the first five books 
of the Bible, there is an interval of 1,000 years. The 
poems of Homer and Hesiod are somewhat more ancient 
than the history of Herodotus, but they were written 
nearly 600 years after the time of Moses. 

This fact will appear more remarkable if we consider 
some points in the history of the Jews. 

§ 8. Preservation of the Bible. The Jews, who 
had the care of these books (Rom. iii: 1, 2), at different 
periods in their history were a very despised and perse- 
cuted people. See an account of their treatment from the 
Midianites, Judges vi : 2-6 ; and from the Philistines, 
1st Sam. xiii: 20, etc. 

During their seventy years of captivity in Babylon their 
temple was burnt; the very ark in which the original copy 
of the law was kept was destroyed ; then all the glory of 
the Jewish worship perished, and their city being laid 
waste continued in that state for more than 100 years. 
But even in this captivity we have traces of the preserva- 
tion of the Scriptures : Dan. ix : 2 ; Neh. viii : 1. In all 
these fiery trials, which lasted for years, the Scriptures 
were preserved. 

The constant disposition of the Jews to idolatry before 
the captivity, was calculated, humanly speaking, to endanger 
the safety of their sacred writings ; for there was not only 
an attempt to destroy them, but also to destroy the prophets 
of the Lord. So far indeed did the attempt succeed, that 
in a subsequent period of their history, Josiah, king of 
Judah, and Hilkiah, the highpriest, were destitute of an 



8 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part I. 

authentic copy of the Scriptures, until the latter found it 
in the house of the Lord. 2d Kings xxii : 8; also M 
Chron. xxxiv : 14. 

§ 0. Unchanged Condition of the Bible. The 

Bible has been preserved unaltered. A copy of the five 
books of Moses, called the Pentateuch, was made by the 
Samaritans more than 500 years before Christ, which copy 
agreed perfectly with that of the Jews. This people 
became the rooted enemies of the Jews, so that any agree- 
ment between the two copies could not be considered as 
the work of design. 

Three hundred years before Christ these sacred writings 
of the Jews were translated into the Greek language from 
the Hebrew. Great numbers of them were distributed 
throughout the world, great care being taken in this 
translation to have it done correctly. These writings now 
became fossilized, so that any change on the part of either 
Jew or Greek would have been easily detected. 

Before these translations were extinct they became the 
basis of other translations, the subsequent ones always 
diligently compared with the former. 

The Greek language probably was never better under- 
stood than it was 300 years after Christ, when both the 
Old and New Testaments were translated anew in thai 
language, a few copies of which are now extant,* and are 
held as choice fossils in that dead language. (See "Cata- 
com hs of Rome" page 16.) 

* Within the last twenty years, Teschendorf lias discovered, at 
Mount Sinai, a manuscript called Sinaitic, which competent judges 
believe to date from A. D. 350; and the great Vatican copy is thought 
to be older. The great Alexandrian manuscript was brought to 
England in 1638. These, with a flood of other documents, including 
the more ancient Syriac, Latin anil Coptic versions, go far to prove 
the unchanged condition of our Bible. 



Ch", I: § 10.] HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH TRANSLATION. 9 

On comparing the Samaritan Pentateuch with the Greek 
translation of the Septuagint made 300 years before Christ, 
and that with the Greek translation of 300 years after 
Christ, we find they substantially agree with our present 
Bible. 

As additional proof of this, our Lord declared the Old 
Testament of his day to be the word of God : Mark, 
vii : 13. He also adopted the threefold division (Luke, 
xxiv : 44) of Law, Prophets and the Psalms. 

It has ever been believed, by both Jew and Christian, 
that the Old Testament which existed in our Savior's time 
has been handed down to us uncorrupted and unchanged. 

As before the coming of our Lord the enmity which 
existed between the Jews and Samaritans was overruled 
to the preservation of the Old Testament unaltered, so, 
since the time of Christ, the enmity between the Jews and 
Christians, and the divisions of Christians among them- 
selves, have prevented any change or corruption of the 
New Testament ; as no change could be made by one 
which would not be readily discovered by the other. 

§ 10. History of the English Translation. Some 
may suppose the Bible was originally written in the English 
language ; but this is not the fact. The New Testament 
was written at least 400 years before the English language 
had an existence, and the Old Testament earlier yet by 
1900 years. 

It will suffice here to give a brief account of the dates, 
the persons, their trials, and the work of translating the 
Bible into the English language. 

"We have," says Nicholls, "accounts of various parts 
of the Bible being translated into Saxon, Avhen that lan- 
guage was spoken in England." 

The Psalms were translated by Adhelm, the first bishop 
of Sherborne, A. J). 706 ; the four gospels by Egbert, 
bishop of Lmdisfern, who died A. D. 721. 



1(1 H1STOKY OF THE BIBLE. [Part I. 

The venerable Bede, an English historian of great learn- 
ing and deep piety, about the year 730 translated various 
parts, it not the whole, of the Bible into Saxon. 

King Alfred translated the Psalms, and Elfric, arch- 
bishop of Canterbury, parts of. the Old Testament, about 
A. D. 995. 

English translations of the Bible were also made in the 
13th and 14th centuries. But of the complete English 
translations of the Bible, the first was 

Wickliff's Bible, about A. D. 1380. This was before 
printing was invented; transcripts therefore were obtained 
with difficulty, and copies were very scarce. Before Wick- 
liff's translation, the price of a Bible in Latin, an unknown 
tongue to all but the learned, was as much as the laboring 
man's wages for fifteen years, and equal to $1,500 of our 
money." That amount seems much when compared with 
the present price. A good copy of the American Bible 
Society's Bible can now be purchased for twenty-five cents, 
and a Testament for five cents.* 

" In 1390, the thirteenth year of Richard II, a bill was 
brought into the House of Lords for the purpose of 
suppressing its publication ; but through the influence 
of John of Gaunt, Duke of Lancaster and the king's 
uncle, it was rejected. The followers of Wickliff were 
Mien encouraged to publish another and a more correct 
translation. But in the year 1408, in a convocation held 
at Oxford by archbishop Arundel, it was decreed that no 
one should thereafter translate any text of the Holy Scrip- 
tures into English by way of a book or tract, and that no 
hook of this kind should be read that was composed in the 
latter years of John Wicklirf, or since his death. This led 
the way to greai persecution; and many persons were 

* Even after Wickliff 's copy was finished the value of a New 
Testament was £2 His. (id., equal in purchasing value to $150 of our 
money now. — Gilly's Protestant Forefathers. 



Oh. I: §10.] HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH TRANSLATION. 11 

punished severely, and even with death, for reading the 
Scriptures in English.'' 

Tyndale's New Testament, A. D. 1526. This was the 
first printed edition of any part of the Scriptures into 
English. He took the precaution of printing it on the 
continent; but Tonstall, bishop of London, and Sir Thomas 
More, Lord Chancellor, succeeded in buying up and burn- 
ing almost the whole edition. This enabled Tyndale fo 
publish an improved edition. He also translated parts of 
the Old Testament. 

In the year 1531, at the instigation of Henry VIII and 
his council, he was imprisoned, and, after a long confine- 
ment, strangled, A. D. 1536, by order of the German 
Emperor, at Yillefont, near Brussels, and his body was 
reduced to ashes. 

Miles Coverdale's Bible, A. D'. 1535. Coverdale, after- 
wards bishop of Exeter, published a translation of the 
Bible and dedicated it to King Henry VIII. This was 
the first English Bible allowed by royal authority, and a 
copy of it was by royal proclamation ordered to be place'd 
in the choir of every parish church, to enable every man 
to read therein. 

Traverner's Bible, A. D. 1539. This was a kind of 
intermediate work, being a correction of Matthew's Bible, 
printed two years previous. 

The Great Bible, A. D. 1539. This was a revised 
edition, corrected by Cranmer and Coverdale, and so called 
because printed in large folio. There were several editions 
of it, particularly one in 1540, for which Cranmer wrote a 
preface showing that " Scriptures should be had and read 
by the lay and vulgar people." Hence this edition of 1540 
is called "The Cranmer Bible." 

During the seven years reign of Edward VI no new ver- 
sions were executed, though eleven editions were printed 
of both the Old and New Testament. 



12 HISTOKY OF THE BIBLE. [Part I. 

The Geneva Bible, A. D. 1500. Cbverdale, John Knox, 
Christopher Goodman^ and other English exiles, who had 
taken refuge in Genera, published this translation, the 
New Testament in 1557, and the remainder of the work 
in 1500. To it was added a note favoring the peculiar 
doctrines of Calvin. 

The Bishops' Bible, A. D. 1568. This was by Arch- 
bishop Parker, and was so called because he, with other 
learned persons, eight of whom were bishops, published 
this translation. This was in the reign of Queen Elizabeth. 

" The Rhemish Xew Testament,.A. D. 1572. This trans- 
lation into English was published by the Romanists, at 
Rheims, in France. They retained many Eastern, Greek 
and Latin words, and introduced so many difficult expres- 
sions that they contrived to render it unintelligible to the 
common people ; but shortly after published The Douay 
Old Testament, A. D. 1609-10. Cardinal Allen is under- 
stood to have had a principal share in the work. The 
Rhemish New Testament and Douay Old Testament form 
fhe present English Catholic Bible." — Nicholls. 

§ 11. Our English Bible. The next and best of the 
authorized translations is the King James Bible, the one 
now in general use. 

it was begun in the spring of 1607, in the reign of 
dames I, and finished in about three. years. Fifty-four 
of the most learned men in the universities and other 
places were commissioned to undertake the work of trans- 
lation; but seven of these having from illness and other 
causes relinquished their task, the work was performed by 
forty-seven. 

After long expectation and great desire of the nation, 
the present translation of the Bible came forth in the year 
Hill, over 270 years ago. The divines employed took 
great pains m conducting the work; for they Qot only 



Ch. I: § 12.] BIBLE SOCIETIES. 13 

examined the original text, but also compared together all 
the existing translations, both ancient and modern. 

An account might also be given of the dates and trials 
of translating this Book of Grod into the tongues of other 
nations. Suffice it to say, trials and difficulties were met 
and mastered, though not at such cost of life and treasure 
as the English translation. 

Within a few years there have been several individual 
translations of the Bible; and still more recently a revision 
by the '•'American Bible Union," organized in 1851 in 
New York, which succeeded in publishing the New Testa- 
ment complete, and also portions of the Old Testament. 

§ 12. Bible Societies. " The American Bible Society 
was organized in the city of New York, in May, 1816, by a 
convention of delegates from different parts of the country. 
It had been preceded by a large number of local and inde- 
pendent societies, the oldest of which was that established 
in Philadelphia in 1808. But the most of these were 
cheerfully enrolled as auxiliaries of The American Bible 
Society, which became a national society. 

Its business is conducted by a Board of Managers, con- 
sisting of thirty-six laymen of various Christian denomin- 
ations. 

Its work is benevolent and unsectarian. 

At the close of its sixtieth year its total issues of Bibles 
and Testaments and integral portions of the Scriptures 
were 33,125,760; its expenditures in this work having 
exceeded seventeen millions of dollars. 

The British and Foreign Bible Society was founded in 
1804. At the close of its seventy-first year it had extended 
its operations to almost every country in the world, and 
had put into circulation nearly 74,000,000 copies of the 
Bible and of integral parts of the Bible, in above two hun- 
dred languages and dialects, and had expended nearly eight 



14 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. 

millions sterling ($40,000,000), in translating, printing, 
and disseminating the Scriptures."* 

§ 13. The Bible Printed in the United States. 

" The first Bible printed in the United States or on the 
Continent of America, was in native Indian; the New 
Testament in 1661 and the Old in 1663, by Rev. John 
Eliot. They were published in Cambridge, Mass. The 
second was in German; published at Germantown, near 
Philadelphia, by Christopher Sower, in 1676. 

The first American edition of the Bible in English was 
printed by Kneeland and Green, at Boston, in 1752; but 
to avoid persecution from those who had a patent from the 
King, they were obliged to reprint the whole title page of 
the English copy. 

The next edition was by Robert Aitken, of Philadelphia, 
in 1781-2. He sent a memorial to Congress, praying for 
their patronage. His memorial was referred to a committee, 
who obtained the opinion of the Chaplain of Congress as 
to its general accuracy, and thereupon a resolution was 
passed, September 12th, 1782, recommending it to the 
people of the United States." — Nicholls. 

Part II. 

§ 14. The Tradition of the Elders. There is a 
work among the Jews called the Talmud, to which reference 
is made in the New Testament, which they hold as tradi- 
t ionary Scriptures. 

About the year A. I). 180, Jehoda, a Jewish Rabbi, 
wrote out the received traditions of the fathers. This 
work of Jehoda is called the Mishna; and the commentary 
upon it is called the Gamara; and these taken together 

* The above was copied from a pamphlet published by the Ameri- 
can Bible Society in connection with their Exhibition at Philadelphia, 
in 1876. It contains also specimens of their translations into one 
hundred and sixty-four languages and dialects. 



Ch. I: § 14. ] THE TRADITION" OF THE ELDERS. 15 

constitute the Talmud, which was more highly reverenced by 
the Jews than the Old Testament. That traditions are 
not to be received as divine authority, is sufficiently clear 
from our Savior's language as found in Mark vii : 1-13. 

It was believed by the Jews that there were added to 
the law a great mass of interpretations and commentary, 
which it was believed God had communicated to Moses, 
from whom it had been orally transmitted, until at last it 
was reduced to writing. 

The triviality and irksomeness of the requirements these 
imposed, abundantly justified Christ's words: "Ye have 
made the commandments of God of none effect by your 
traditions." (Matt, xv: 6.) 

" Incessant and elaborate washings were prescribed. An 
Qgg laid on the day .following the Sabbath could not be 
eaten, because no food must be prepared on the Sabbath. 
The wearing of nailed shoes on the Sabbath was an 
infringement of the law against bearing burdens on the holy 
day. And the disciples of Jesus were charged with Sab- 
bath breaking when they plucked the ears of corn, because 
the act was deemed ' a little harvest. ' " — Examiner and 
Chronicle. 

While it contains much that is worthless and silly, it has 
many proverbs and legends which are worth the while to 
read. The following is one of the legends and a few of 
the proverbs found in the Talmud. 

NOAH AND HIS VINEYARD. 

While Noah was planting his vineyard the Devil came to 
him and says: What are you doing here? Noah says, 
Planting a vineyard. The Devil says, What is the use of a 
vineyard? Says Noah, The fruits either dry or fresh are 
sweet and good, and the wine gladdens the heart. Then 
says the Devil, We will plant it on shares. So he brings 
a lamb, a lion, a hog, and a monkey, and sacrifices them, 
and mingles their blood with the soil. 



|() HISTORY OK THE BIBLE. [Part II. 

Wherefore if a man only cats, he is gentle as a lamb; if 
he drink* the wine, lie thinks lie is a lion, and falls into 
mischief; if he drinks habitually, he becomes disgusting, 

like the hog; if he gets drtlnh, lie jabbers and jumps and 

is silly, like the monkey. 

A FEW OF THE PROVERBS. 

To the wasj) men say: Neither thy honey nor thy sting. 

Solid wood burns with little noise, but thorns make a 
great crackling. 

Is the lamb rash who feeds among the wolves? Not if 
he trusts the good shepherd. 

He who enjoys too much of this world, is in danger of 
losing the next. 

Hypocrites steal leather, and make shoes for the poor. 

Woe to him who builds a big door, and has no house be- 
hind it. 

Weep not with the joyous, nor laugh with the sad; wake 
not with the sleeping, nor sleep with the waking. 

§ 15. The Apocrypha. The Apocrypha sometimes 
hound with the Bible, is a collection of ancient hooks. 
They are not found in any catalogue of canonical writings 
made in the first four centuries after Christ. Philo never 
quotes them as he does the Scriptures; Josephus expressly 
rejects them; the Jewish chnrch never received them as 
pari oi the canon; Christ and the apostles never quote 
them; and Malachi said no other messenger would come 
t ill the second Elijah. 

All external evidence is against their inspiration. And 
as for internal evidence: — 1st. None of the Apocryphal 
writers claimed Divine authority; and some virtually dis- 
owned inspiration. See 2 Mac. ii: 23; also xv: 38. 

•id. The hooks contain statements at variance with 
history . are self contradictory . and opposed to the doctrines 
and precepts of Script are. 



Cll. I: £ 16-] OLD TESTAMENT MANUSCRIPT. 1? 

They never formed a part of the rule of faith; yet the 
Council of Trent (A. D. 1545) gave them canonical author- 
ity. The writings are of value, however, for historical 
purposes, illustrating the progress of knowledge among the 
Jews; their tastes, manners, customs, religious character, 
their government; some books explain prophecies; others 
show the fulfilment of prophecies; and some passages ex- 
press high and noble sentiments. 

§ 10. The Old Testament Manuscript. We have 
now gained some knowledge about this book. We have 
traced its history through the English translation; how it 
lias been preserved, what changes have taken place in 
writing, in book-making, and seen the unchanged condition 
of the Bible contents amid these' changes. 

Now, as we open this Bible we do not find the manu- 
scripts (MSS.) in the author's hand writing, nor his auto- 
graph at the close of his work; so our next line of study will 
be to examine the genuiness of this book, and see upon 
what foundation its authority rests. 

This will lead us to examine the text, the versions, and 
the evidences of the Bible, and to inquire who are the 
writers. 

The following on " The Bible Text" and ••The Ver- 
sions."" was prepared for this work by Eev. James P. 
Thorns. 

I. The Old Testament Text. The Old Testament was 
written in Hebrew, on papyrus or vellum. Our present 
Hebrew text is a copy of copies, and is called Masoretio 
from the scholars at the Jewish academy at Tiberias, on 
the Sea of Galilee, who were called Masorites. There was 
a like school at Babylon. From the fourth to the tenth 
centuries. A. D., thevdid much bv way of collecting MSS. 
transcribing the Scriptures, writing traditions called 
Mishna, and commentaries called Gamara. 



18 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. 

II. The Number of Hebrew Manuscripts. In the 
museums and libraries of the world there are hundreds of 
Hebrew manuscripts. De Rossi collated 734 Hebrew MSS. , 
and Dr. Kennicott collated 630 more. Of these MSS., 102 
contain all the Old Testament; 490 Genesis; 549 the five 
Mezilloth (Ruth, Solomon's Songs, Lamentations, Esther 
and Ecclesiastes); 495 The Psalms; 172 Ezra and Nehe- 
miah; 211 Chronicles. The most MSS. are of the book of 
Esther. 

III. Date of Manuscripts. The existing Hebrew MSS. 
were most of them written before A. D., 1200. One is 
thought to belong to the tenth century, another to the 
eighth, and one is dated 580, A. D. Greek MSS. of the 
Old Testament (Septuagint) are as early as the fifth and 
fourth centuries (331 A. D.) 

IV. Various Readings. In these hundreds of MSS. 
the text is so much alike that the different readings do not 
essentially change the meaning. Of 864 different readings, 
all are in regard to vowel points, and one to the division of 
a verse. What difference does it make whether Savior is 
spelled " ior," or " our," or labor " or," or "our"? Or 
where the verse is divided in the lines? The errors are 
like grains of sand in a loaf of bread. The most corrupt 
MSS, extant do not change a principle or doctrine of the 
Bible. 

§ 1 7. The New Testament Manuscript. 

I. The Greek Manuscript. All the books of the New 
Testament were written before 100 A. D. 

II. No Apostolic Manuscript. There is no trace of Aposto- 
lic originals or New Testament MSS. of the first three 
centuries. The oldest New Testament MSS. date from Oon- 
stantine (331 A. D.) These MSS. are copied from MSS. prior 
to 331, A. I). The New Testament was written on papyrus, 



Ch. I: § 1?.] THE NEW TESTAMENT MANUSCRIPT. li> 

vellum, or parchment, in volumes; so that few MSS. have 
all the books of the New Testament. 

III. The Number of Manuscripts. The number of MSS. 
of the New Testament or parts of it, is about 1,500. 27 
MSS. contain all the New Testament. The volume, of the 
Gospels has 34 Uncial (capital letters) and 601 Cursive 
(running hand) MSS; that of the Acts and Catholic Epis- 
tles, 10 Uncials, and 229 Cursive; that of Pauline Epistles, 
14 Uncial, and 283 Cursive; that of the apocalypse, 4 Un- 
cial, and 102 Cursive. Beside these there are many dupli- 
cate MSS. and MSS. of select parts of the Gospels and 
Epistles. 

IV. Date of MSS. A MS. with division of chapters 
and verses is not earlier than the twelfth century A. D. ; a 
MS. on cotton not earlier than the eleventh century; a 
Cursive MS. is not earlier than the tenth century; inclined 
uncial MSS., with interrogations, or commas, than the 
ninth ; MSS. punctuated, pointed, or with ornamental 
initials, than the eighth; uncial MSS. divided into lines, 
accented with Euthalian titles, or subscriptions, than the 
fifth ; and MSS. with Eusebian canons, than the fourth 
century (315-340, A. D.). 

But the oldest MSS. may not be of the greatest value; 
for a twelfth century MS. may be a copy from a fourth 
century MS., while a MS. of the ninth may be copied 
from a MS. of the same century. 

V. Various Readings. More than 1000 MSS. have been 
collated, and 50 of these MSS. are from 1000 to 1500 
years old. In these, Bible critics have found about 50,000 
various readings. These are chiefly in orthography or 
arrangement of words; not fifty change the sense, and not 
one changes a principle. 

Of the immortal classics, there are only 15 MSS. of 
Herodotus extant, and of Plato there are not 30 MSS. 



20 HlSTOKY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. 

extant, and not one of these 1000 years old. This is true 
of all the classics. The texts of Milton and Shakespeare 
arc mutilated, though these poets have only heen dead 200 
years. 

God's eye has been upon these Bible MSS.. and they 
have been kept pure through all the changes of the ages. 

A standing proof of the purity and accuracy of the present 
Bible text is seen in the fact that the Jew agrees with 
the Christian in the letter of the Old Testament, and the 
Romanist with the Protestant in the letter of the New 
Testament. 

VI. Version MSS. The Bible was earl} T translated from 
these MSS. into other languages. These translations are 
called versions, and MSS. of such versions are still extant. 
Besides the most important versions given in the next 
article, there are extant MSS. belonging to the ninth cen- 
tury of Slavonic. Georgian MSS. of the sixth century, 
Armenian MSS. of the fifth century, and Ethiopic and 
Coptic of the fourth century. 

§ 18. Ancient Versions of the Bible. Ancient 

versions are translations from the old Bible manuscripts 
(MSS.), many of which MSS. have been lost or destroyed. 
These versions, therefore, furnish another source of evi- 
dence to sustain the genuineness of the Scriptures. 

I. The Septuagint (The LXX). This is a Greek version. 
a translation of the Old Testament from the Hebrew. 

This translation was made at Alexandria, in Egypt, by 
<>nlcr of the king (Philadelphus), by seventy Jews, about B. 
( '. 278. It was in use in the time of Christ, as we have more 
than 300 quotations from it in the New Testament. For 
a long period it was used as the Old Testament in the 
Christian church. This Septuaginl is now used in the 
Greek and Oriental churches. 

II. The Peshito. This is the Syriac version of both the 
old and New Testaments. It is a translation from the 



Ch. I: § IS.] AJSTTENT VERSIONS OF THE BIBLE. %1 

Hebrew, made in the first century A. D., at Edessa, It is 
called Peshito, because simple, literal, verbal. It embraces 
none but the canonical books, and is valuable for its 
antiquity and the clearness and strength with which it 
enunciates some disputed Messianic passages. 

The Syro-Hexaplar version is a translation of the Sep- 
tuagmt into Syriac, by Paul of Tela, about 600 A. D. 

III. The Samaritan Pentateuch. The Samaritan Pen- 
tateuch is rather a revision than a translation of the 
Hebrew text. There are now 18 MSS. of this Pentateuch. 
The origin and date of this version are unknown. Some 
place it at the founding of Gerizim Temple, B. C. 341, and 
by Manasseh ; others put it as late as the second or third 
century A. D. This version is not considered of any great 
critical value. 

IV. The Targums. These Targums are Chaldee (Ara- 
maic) paraphrases of parts of the Old Testament. The 
Hebrew language was then dumb, and these Targums are 
formed chiefly on the Septuagint. Of these, the Penta- 
teuch of Onkelos, avIio died before the ruin of Jerusalem, 
is the oldest and best. Onkelos is thought by some to 
have been a disciple of Gamaliel, the teacher of Paul. 
This Pentateuch of Onkelos is supposed by others to date 
about 60 B. 0. There are 141 MSS. of it. The Targum 
on the Earlier and Later Prophets, by Jonathan Ben-Urriel, 
supposed to date about the time of Christ's death, is next 
in value. 

V. The Vulgate. The Vulgate is a Latin version of the 
Scriptures. In the second century A. D. there was a Latin 
version of the Scriptures Avhich originated in North Africa. 
The Old Testament part was translated from the LXX : 
and in Italy this version was called the Old Latin, or 
Italic. This version, Jerome (A. D. 382) undertook to 
revise and correct, and completed the Old Testament. 
But still later he began to make a Latin version directly 



22 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. 

from the Hebrew. This last translation of Jerome, on 
which he spent twenty years, is called the Vulgate. It is 
made up in part from the old Italic version, in part from 
Jerome's revised version, and in part immediately from 
the Hebrew, and was completed in A. D. 405. It, how- 
ever, chiefly follows the Septuagint. The Vulgate became 
the Scriptures to all the Latin churches -at the close of 
the seventh century, and is to-day the authority with 
Romanists. 

VI. The Talmud. The Talmud is a digest of Jewish 
traditions, and a compendium or ritual law. It was writ- 
ten in Hebrew, and dates about A. D. 200. It has two 
parts: 1st. The Mishna, or text of the "Second Law;'* 
2d. The G-amara, or commentaries of later date, about 
A. D. 500. There are two, the Jerusalem Talmud and 
Babylonish Talmud, named from the two schools. 

VII. Quotations in Writings of the Fathers. The early 
divines are called "Fathers," and in their extant writings 
are very numerous and accurate quotations from the Bible. 
From the quotations of the Fathers and writers (180) who 
lived between the second and fifth centuries, and whose 
works are now extant, the entire New Testament could be 
recovered, if the original MSS. were destroyed. And 
if the MSS. of the Old Testament were destroyed, the 
entire Old Testament could be produced from the Targums 
and early versions. 

VIII. Conclusion. We have, then, three independent 
sources by which we may test the genuineness of the 
writings of the Bible : 

Lst. There are in our libraries to-day more than 1000 
Hebrew MSS. of the Old Testament, and more than 1500 
Greek MSS. of the New Testament. 

2d. These five chief versions, or translations of the 
MSS. into other Languages, which are given above, with 
many more thai might have been added. 



Ch. I: § 20.] INSPIRATION OF THE BIBLE. 2$ 

3d. The quotations from the Church Fathers, who 
lived between 100 and 600 A. D., whose writings are now 
extant. 

These three sources of evidence agree as to the purity 
and correctness of our present Bible text. 

§ 19. A History of the Canon. That all the books- 
of the Bible were in existence as early as the second century 
we are assured : 

I. From the writings of Josephus, the Eabbi; the Apos- 
tolic Fathers who lived 100-200 A. D. ; writings still extant. 

II. The Heretics in the Church at that period, in attack- 
ing the Canon, mention the books of the Bible, and thus 
testify to their existence in the second century. 

III. The Enemies of Christianity, outside the Church 
evidence the books of the Canon at this time. 

IV. The Apologists, in defending the Bible, recognize 
the books in this era. 

V. The Persecutions of the Church in this period sus- 
tains the same fact. 

Therefore we have a genuine Bible text that has come 
down to us from A. D. 100; and we have the identical 
record as the writers first gave it. 

§ 20. Inspiration of the Bible. Being assured that 
we have a genuine copy of the original writings, we are pre- 
pared now to consider the claim of the Bible to Divine 
Inspiration. The following evidences are an outline from 
"Normal Class Manual," by Dr. A. Hovey. 

That the Bible has a Divine origin is seen: 

I. By the accuracy of statement in secular matters in the 
New Testament. 

Christianity and the New Testament were nearly con- 
temporaneous. The books of the New Testament were 
all written before A. D. 100, the time in which the New 
Testament events took place. Christianity as a historical 
religion took its rise in Palestine about 30 A. D. 



24 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part U. 

II. The New Testament references to Nature. 

(a.) To natural scenery: hills, mountains, valleys, lakes, 
etc. 

(/>.) To natural productions; vines, olives, figs, palms, 
lilies, etc. 

(c.) To well knoAvn animals; horses, oxen, sheep, foxes. 
sparrows, etc. 

III. The New Testament references to people. 

(a.) The mixed people in Palestine; Jews, Greeks, Ro- 
mans, etc. 

(b.) To sects; Pharisees, Sadducees, Herodians; and 
views of each. 

(c.) To Killers (often named); kings, tetrarchs, govern- 
ors, priests, etc. 

IV. The New Testament references to customs. 

(a.) Products of labor ;/ houses, prisons, towers, ships, 
coins, etc. 

(b.) Habits of people; religious, social; fishers, soldiers. 
publicans, etc. 

(c.) Diseases; as fever, leprosy, palsy, lunacy, etc. 

This vast number of references in the New Testament 
to secular matters, all being correct, shows that the writers 
were divinely directed in writing. 

§ 21. The Divine Origin of the Bible is also seen 
in the Accuracy of Old Testament in Secular Mat- 
ters. 

I. Books of Old Testament were written during a period 
of 1200 years, ending B. C. 400. 

II. Many books full of historical allusions; as Kings, 
Est her. Ezra. 

III. Many topographical allusions: lands, boundaries, etc. 

IV. r ldie many writers, the long period, the various cul- 
ture, the varied fortunes of the dews in L 500 years, make 
the accurate record very remarkable, and proves that the 
Old Testament writers were divinely directed in. writing. 



Ch. I: §21.] RELIGIOUS TEACHING OF THE BIBLE. 25 

§ 22. Prophecy shows the Bible to he from God. 

I. It is incredible that predictions, such as are in the 
Bible, could have been made without Divine illumination. 

II. Predictions concerning: 

(a.) Nations; as Egypt, Edoni, Syria, Judea. 

(b. ) Cities ; as Ninevah, Babylon, Tyre, Sidon, Jerusa- 
lem, etc. 

(c. ) Persons ; as Cyrus, John the Baptist, Jesus Christ. 

These predictions, minute in detail, having been literally 
fulfilled, show the Bible to have Divine origin. 

§ 23. The Originality and Consistency of the 
Bible's Religious Teaching show it to be from God. 

I. Bible Doctrines of God are Perfect. 

1st. Writers do not speak of God as mere Force, or Law, 
acting blindly, without choice. 

2d. They speak of God as personal, thinking, willing, 
loving. 

3d. That He is the Supreme Huler of the Universe. 

4th. That He is righteous, loving justice and judgment, 
and hating iniquity. 

5th. That God is benevolent, so "loving the world that 
he gave his only begotten Son, that whosoever believeth in 
him should not perish, but have everlasting life." 

All the writers of the Bible agree in the doctrine of 
God, a doctrine consistent with Reason, Conscience and 
Feeling; and this doctrine of God shows the inspiration of 
the Bible. 

II. The Bible tea rites the Sinfulness of Man. 

1st. That by disobedience man has brought upon him- 
self the evils and guilt of his fallen condition. 

2d. That sin is universal in the race ; that all men are 
culpable, and under the penalty of sin. 

3d. While conscience reaffirms this truth, the speculative 
understanding protests against it; yet all the sacred writers 



26 HISTOBY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. 

agree throughout as to the sinfulness of man, thus showing 
they were inspired by God. 

III. The Bible a Unit as to the Way of Salvation. 

1st. The writers all agree as to the justice and law of 
God, yet set forth His infinite love and grace. 

2d. The Old Testament writers, in sacrifices and types, 
give pictures of Christ as a sacrifice for sin. Lev. xvi; Is. liii. 

3d. The New Testament writers present Christ as the 
sinners' substitute. Heb. chapters, ix, x. 

4th. The writers all agree in experience; as, contrition 
for sin, trust in God, love for God, holiness and truth. 

The unity of sentiment in so many writers, in such a 
long period, on so great and difficult subjects, shows that 
God spoke by them, as the Bible affirms. 

IV. The Character of Christ in the New Testament shows 
the Bible to be from God. 

1st. The Gospel records could never have been, if Christ 
had not existed. Christ's character is faultless iu thought, 
aim, feeling and action; holy. 

2d. While Christ was human in the broadest sense, he 
was superhuman. He was Divine as well as human. His 
Divine character is seen in His love, wisdom and power 
(over the forces of nature, diseases, death, demons). He 
was God-man. 

3d. Four writers cannot depict such a character. The 
Jews were expecting a different Messiah; they could not 
imagine such a character and depict it in the daily events 
of life. 

4th. Therefore the Gospels are trustworthy historical 
records, and teach that Christ did live, and promised the 
inspiration of the Holy Spirit to the Apostles. And the 
grounds for believing the fulfilment of this promise are as 
good as that Christ lived. 

Therefore, by the inspiration of God the Apostles wrote 
the Xew Testament, and both endorsed the Old Testament 



Oh. I: § 24.] WRITERS OF THE BIBLE. 27 

and teach that Christ did the same. Hence, from the 
accuracy of the Bible in secular matters, the fulfilment of 
many of its predictions, the originality and consistency of 
its religious teaching, and the character of Christ — upon 
such pillars as these the inspiration of God's word stands. 
The Bible is the Book of Cod to man. 

"The law of the Lord is perfect, converting the soul; 
the testimony of the Lord is sure, making wise the simple; 
the statutes of the Lord are right, rejoicing the heart; the 
commandments of the Lord are pure, enlightening the 
eyes; the fear of the Lord is clean, enduring forever; the 
judgments of the Lord are true and righteous altogether." 

How important, then, that we should understand what 
God's word teaches. 

Says Dr. A. H. Strong, D. D., in an article on the 
Method of Inspiration : 

"The Bible is, in all its parts, the word of God. Hence 
each part is to be judged, not by itself alone, but in its 
connection with every other part. The Scriptures are not 
to be interpreted as so many merely human productions 
by different authors, but also as the work of the Divine 
mind. * * * * Seemingly trivial things are 
to be explained from their connection with the whole. 
One history is to be built up from the several accounts of 
the life of Christ. One doctrine must supplement another. 
The Old Testament is part of a progressive system, whose 
culmination and key are to be found in the New. The 
central subject and thought which binds all parts of the 
Bible together, and in the light of which they are to be 
interpreted, is the person and work of Jesus Christ." 

§ 24. The Writers of the Bible. The Bible was 
not written by one person, but by many, of different sta- 
tion, abilities and education. 

Moses wrote the Pentateuch, "was learned in all the 
wisdom of the Egyptians," and brought up as the son of 
Pharaoh's daughter. 



28 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. 

David and Solomon were kings; Daniel was a minister 
of state ; Ezra was a priest and a scribe ; Amos was a 
herdsman; Matthew was a taxgatherer; Lnke was a physi- 
cian; Paul was a learned lawyer; Peter and John were 
fishermen, "unlearned and ignorant men." 

These persons lived at different times and could not 
have intercourse with each other. David wrote about 400 
years after Moses ; Isaiah about 250 years after David: 
Matthew more than 700 years after Isaiah, and 400 years 
after Malachi, the last of the writers of the Old Testament. 

Between Moses, who wrote the first, and John, who 
wrote the last of the sixty-six books which form our pres- 
ent Bible, there was an interval of 1600 years. 

This agreement of the writers is remarkable. One 
framed laws, as Moses ; another gives ' an abstract of the 
history of the Jewish nation, as Joshua ; another of a 
private family, as that of Ruth; David and others wrote 
the Psalms; Solomon the Proverbs; Isaiah, Jeremiah and 
others give us the prophecies; the four evangelists. Mat- 
thew, Mark, Luke and John, the life of Christ in its four 
phases; Paul and others letters, in which we find the doc- 
trines of Christ; and John, in the Revelation, closes up 
the book with the history of the Christian church from its 
organization to the second coming of Christ and the end 
of the world. 

In comparing the Old and New Testaments, we perceive 
a striking contrast as to the for /ns of religion between that 
inculcated by Moses and our blessed Lord. 

The Law, as given by Moses, abounded in ceremonies, 
and was adapted to the peculiar circumstances of the nation 
of the Jews; while the system which the writers of the 
New Testament have given contains but few ceremonies, 
and those very simple in character, admitting of universal 
application. Acts, ii: 8-11; also Mark, xvi: 15. 



[Ch. I: § 25. rules or interpretation. 29 

How wonderful that two systems, at first sight so dis- 
similar, should be found to agree on all material points ! 
Surely these men "spake as they were moved by the Holy 
Spirit/' and thus they are infallible teachers and writers. 

But none of these writers claim sinlessness of character. 
On the contrary they confess their sins. One has said: 
"Infallible teachers are those who set forth by voice or 
pen the will of God in the best manner practicable, whose 
teaching the reason of man has no right to modify or 
reject, but only to ascertain and obey.'* 

The Holy Spirit so took possession of these teachers 
while giving instruction, whether oral or written, that they 
were taught what and how they should write or speak. 
They were not so directed in the affairs of life : and yet 
these writers were good men, and many of them eminently 
godly. 

A study of the writers shows the unity amid diversity, 
the harmony among variety in the Bible, all the more 
wonderful; and proving that "all Scripture is given by 
inspiration of God, and is profitable for doctrine, for re- 
proof, for correction, for instruction in righteousness; that 
the man of God may be perfect, thoroughly furnished 
unto all good works." 

§ 25. Rules of Interpretation. The subject of Bible 
interpretation can only be briefly treated here; though 
much might be said upon it. 

Horsley says: "The most illiterate Christian, if he can 
but read his English Bible, and will take the pains to read 
it in a right manner, will not only attain all that practical 
knowledge which is essential to salvation, but, by God's 
blessing, he will become learned in everything relating to 
his religion, in such a degree that he will not be liable to 
be misled either by the refuted arguments or the false as- 
sertions of those who endeavor to engraft their own opinions 
upon the oracles of God." 



30 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. 

I. Three Rules. The three following rules embrace 
much in their application: 

1st. Ascertain the sense of a passage from the words in 
their general usage, in the sentence, and in the context. 

2d. Study the design and scope of the writer, with the 
occasion, circumstances, and scenery of the writing. 

3d. Compare Scripture with Scripture in passages con- 
taining the same word or phrase in similar sense, or 
speaking of the same thing, or having a like thought to 
justify a comparison. 

II. Dr. Hovefs Rules. In a condensed form these are 
the rules of Dr. A. Hovey, of Newton Theological Semi- 
nary. 

1st. Personal qualities are more important than rules, 
viz : fairness of mind, love of truth and patience in study. 

2d. Study the general style of the sacred record. The 
style is not scientific, but popular; it is prose and poetry. 

3d. Consider the object and quality in a given book. 

4th. Study the circumstances in which a book was 
written. 

5th. Consider the relation of a given paragraph to the 
whole book. 

6th. Study the meaning of particular words and 
phrases. 

7th. Examine other statements of the same writer on 
the topic treated in a given passage. 

III. Prof. M. B. Riddle's Rules. 1st. Read the Bible 
copiously with the single aim to know the meaning of the 
writer. 

2d. Pray God to give grace to accept and apply that 
meaning when found. This is practically the illumination 
of the spirit. 

3d. Begin with the plainer passages, reserving the more 
obscure ones until greater skill is acquired. 



Ch. I: § 25.] RULES OF IJNTERPRETATiOJS'. 31 

4th. Remember the responsibility that attends the right 
of private judgment. 

He who has not trusted himself to Christ cannot interpret 
the Scriptures. Not to have personal trust in Him as 
there made known is to be too much out of harmony with 
the Book to interpret it in its most important aspect; as a 
Book which makes men "wise unto salvation." 

IV. The Frame of Mind for Bible Study. Too much 
importance cannot be placed upon the frame of mind for 
Bible study. 

1st. Neither knowledge of language or science, or his- 
tory can take the place of piety in a student of the Word 
of God. Hawthorne says: "Christian faith is a grand 
cathedral with divinely pictured windows. Standing 
without you see no glory, nor can possibly imagine any; 
standing ivithin every ray of light reveals a harmony of 
unspeakable splendors." 1 Cor. ii: 14. 

2d. Patience is needed in Bible study. The rich mines, 
of God's grace are not on the surface; there must be 
patience in the mining processes before the pure gold is 
secured. 

3d. A reverence for the supreme authority of God's 
Word is necessary to a right understanding of it. A love 
of the truth gives the student candor in investigation, a 
consciousness of ignorance on such great themes as the 
Bible treats, a conviction of their authority over conscience, 
and a sense of humility that led one to exclaim, " 0, the 
depth of the riches, both of the wisdom and the knowledge 
of God; how unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways 
past finding out." Rom. xi: 33. 

4th. Prompt obedience to the truth is necessary to un- 
derstanding the Bible. "If any man will do his will, he 
shall know of the doctrine, whether it be of God." John 
vii : 17. Judicial and spiritual blindness follow disobedience 
to known truth. Only in obedience to the truth and spirit 



32 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part II. 

of God can the mind of the spirit of the Word be known. 
Following the spirit He will guide you into all truth by 
the Word of God. 

§• 26. Two Questions. Now two questions may arise 
in our minds. 

First: — Who are qualified? or in the language of Paul, 
" Who is sufficient for these things? " In answer we would 
say, certainly not he who, in attempting to qualify himself, 
should begin with the study of the Book of Kevelation or 
the Gospel by John; for we find that Jesus who is our great 
teacher did not so. We have very plain examples to the 
contrary. For instance, in his conversation with the dis- 
ciples while on their way to Emmaus, he began where the 
Scriptures begin. "And beginning at Moses and all the 
prophets, he expounded unto them in all the Scriptures 
the things concerning himself." Luke xxiv: 27. Again, 
be particular to notice the order of his teaching in verse 44; 
" all things must be fulfilled, which were written in the law 
of Moses, and in the prophets, and in the Psalms, concern- 
ing me." Now the psalms, as will be seen, are to the law 
and the prophets what the Gosj^el of John is to the three 
preceding ones, a supplement. We would consider it 
supremely ridiculous if we should send our child to school 
who is ignorant of mathematics, and the teacher should 
decide that the child should commence with cube root or 
fractions. Now we ask, is it any less so when we commence 
the study of " God's written will to men?" 

Second: — How may we qualify ourselves? It is the ob- 
ject of this little book, with the Illustrated Index, to 
answer this question, and to introduce a system which, by 
the blessing of God, may supply the great felt want of this 
age. Ignorance of the Bible prevails everywhere, and will 
so long as children are born ignorant. And it is equally 
true of all classes, the high and the low, the rich and the 
poor; hence there will ever he a demand for I fathers of 
the Word. 



Oh. I, §§ 1-26.] LESSON" I AND II. 

LESSON I AND II. 

lyu^ec/: tgptdfe'tw. 0/ me <tl$tv/e. 

Part I. 
4. SBanck. 

2. offamfA. 

3. odnckn4. 



33 



^1 



dm 



40. 



wmima. 

$Punc4ua4ion. 

9lteeiva4ion. 
Vnchanaed. 
$lamla4ion. 
44. fful ffiMe. 

42. $oddwt>. 

43. fflilte in Vniied ifiadeo. 

Part II 

44. $fbacU4wwA k 

45. ^jicaukha. 

46. 0ld $fttAamm4 oManmt 
4*1. qffew ffle$4amen4 oMwmWiiUb. 
4&. <^lndtn4 Yetoiom. 

40. §ht (gancn. 

20. ^mktta4lon. 

24. gtccuuicu. 

22. ©PioftAecu. 

23. Ouamaliiu. 

24. Ww4w. 

25. ^n4et/ji/be4a4icw>. 
2(0. £fwo 3ue*4iom. 



34 HISTORY OF THE BIBLE. [Part I. 

SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Part I. 

Note. The teacher should before asking any question, first and 
always write upon the board the title of the lesson and the subject. 
Let the introductory remarks be about the subject of the lesson, 
bringing out the necessity of some knowledge of the "History of 
the Bible." The questions here given are only a few of the many 
which will suggest themselves upon a study of Chapter I, Part I. 

What is the name of the book in hand? 

Note. Write Bible in the centre of the board, and have class 
also in centre of left hand side of page of blank book. This must be 
strictly adhered to, that each pupil be kept up fully to the work. 
Whenever there is a mark or word placed on the board, the teacher 
should see that each pupil note the same; also that every pupil find 
every reference or date. 

What is the definition of the word? (Ch. I: § 1.) 
Note. After the answer to the question, it is then placed on the 

board, and used as a catch word by the pupil in noting down gems 

of thought. 

What is the extent of Bible lands? (Ch. I: § 2.) 
Note. Here use some good map. 

What city is considered as the centre ? Ans. Jerusalem. 

Which way from Jerusalem is the Dead sea? Damascus? 

etc. 

How were ancient books constructed? (§ 3.) 

Note. It would be well for the teacher to make of heavy Manilla 

paper, a roll (or scroll). After giving a description of it, call for 

references found in Jer. xxxv : 2 ; Psalms xl : 7 ; Isa. xxxiv : 4. 

Was the roll commonly written on both sides? Ezek. ii: 
9,10. How were they sealed? (§4.) Isa. xxix: 11; Rev. 
v: 1, 2. 

Note. Now place on the board the catch word. Follow this 
plan throughout. • 

What of its divisions into chapters and verses? (§ 5.) 
What of its punctuation? (§ 6.) The Bible: What is it? 



Ch. I: §§ 7-26.] lessor i and ij. 35 

2 Tim iii: 16; 2 Peter i: 21. When were the earlier por- 
tions of it written? (§ 7.) Who had the care of these rolls 
(books)? (§ 8); Eom. iii: 1, 2. How were these preserved 
unchanged? (§ 9.) What of its translation into English? 
and cost? (§ 10.) What of our present version? (§11.) 
What of Bible Societies? (§ 12.) What of its being printed 
in the United States? (§ 13.) 
Note. Review from the blackboard. 

Pakt II. 

What of the tradition of the Elders? (§ 14.) What of 
the Apocrypha? (§15.) What of Old Testament manu- 
scripts? (§ 16.) New Testament manuscripts? (§ 17.) 
What of ancient versions? (§18.) What about the ancient 
canon of the Scriptures? (§ 19.) What about the inspira- 
tion of the Bible? (§ 20.) What about the accuracy of the 
Old Testament in secular matters? (§ 21.) What does the 
prophecy of the Bible show? (§ 22.) What do writers say 
of the originality of the Bible religion? (§ 23.) What may 
be said of the writers of the Bible? (§ 24.) What are some 
of the rules of interpretation? (§ 25.) Who are qualified 
to teach the Bible? (§ 26.) How may we qualify ourselves? 
Luke xxiv: 17. 

Note. Review from the blackboard. 



36 THE BIBLE OPENED. 

CHAPTER II. 

THE BIBLE OPENED. 

§ 1. The Bible Taught as a Science. Probably no 
one desiring a knowledge of the Bible has not felt the want 
of some illustration, whereby the understanding might be 
aided through the sense of sight; also some system intro- 
ducing the student, by some primary or introductory steps, 
into this great laboratory of wisdom. 

The Bible is not a scientific book any more than a flower 
garden is a system of botany; yet we may discover relations, 
arrangement, order, system in God's flowers, and so we may 
in God's Book. 

§ 2. Two Grand Themes of the Bible. Jesus when 
closeted with his disciples in that upper room, after spend- 
ing several hours with them in giving instruction and 
encouragement, as he was about to leave them, offers a 
prayer to his Father for them asking Him to give them 
eternal life, and then states in the prayer what eternal life 
is, as follows: " This is life eternal, that they might know 
Thee, the only true God, and Jesus Christ, whom Thou 
hast sent." John xvii: 3. 

We have here two grand themes presented to us in this 
passage. The first is to know God, and the second to 
know Christ. Now the question may arise in our mind 
how may Ave best get a knowledge of God? There are 
many ways that we may study Him, especially as the God 
of nature; yet no one will get anything like a thorough 
knowledge of God, of His attributes and His dealings with 
men through this moans. AW 1 are obliged f<> go to the Old 
Testament. Now what mav he said of God as found in 



Ch. II: § 3. TWO GKEAT QUESTIONS. 3? 

the Old Testament may also be said of Christ as found in 
the New. Hence we have two " Grand Themes;" the first 
treating of God, giving us a knowledge of Him as found 
only in the Old Testament; and the second telling us all 
about Christ and what he has done ior us, as found only in 
the New Testament. 

Is it possible then for us to be able to understand the 
New Testament without first having some knowledge of 
the Old? or vice versa? True, the Old Testament does 
treat of Christ, but it is in types and shadows. He is 
spoken of as the shadoiv of good things to come, which is 
developed only in the New. 

§ 3. Two Great Questions. We find in the book of 
Job — which is supposed to have been written prior to the 
pentateuch — that when in conversation with his three 
friends there were raised two very important questions; 
first, "How shall man be just with God?" Ch. ix: 2; and 
the second is, "If a man die, shall he live again?" Ch. xiv: 
14. 

There is much involved in this first question. We find 
a solution of it only in the New Testament as brought out 
in Paul's letter to the Romans, the golden topic of which 
is " Justification by faith. " (Bom. v: 1.) See Index. 

The second great question was, "If a man die, shall he 
live again?" The subject of the future, or anything be- 
yond this life, is considered as very sparingly taught in the 
Old Testament. And it is so especially when we read it 
independent of the New Testament, the grandest theme of 
which is the "Resurrection of the dead." 1 Cor. xv: 13, 14. 

" But if there be no resurrection of the dead, then is 
Christ not risen: But if Christ be not risen, then is our 
preaching vain, and your faith is also vain. " In the Old 
Testament the question is raised, and in the New it is 
answered. 



38 THE BIBLE OPENED. 

§ 4. The Two Great Parts. Hence we have two 
great and grand themes presented as found in the two 
" Great Grand Divisions," viz. Old and New Testaments. 
See Illustrated Index. 

It is said of other things, " There is much in a name." 
Certainly there is no subject of greater importance to us 
than is found in the above names or titles. 

§ 5. The Word Testament Defined. A man may 

concoct a will in his mind and execute it himself, or in 
other words, dispose of his own property during his life- 
time; there is no heirship involved in this; but if he com- 
mits his will to writing it is then intended that another is 
to execute it, and not until after his death. Now the 
moment it is committed to writing, it becomes his will and 
testament. What is included in this writing or instrument 
becomes a ivitness to his will; and at his death the property 
becomes subject to his heirs. 

Now what God proposes to give us is eternal life (just 
what was lost in Adam's transgression), or restore us to 
position as before the fall. God in His eternal councils is 
represented as having a will and purpose, and saw fit to 
have it committed to writing, as found in our Bible. Hence 
it is God's written will. Will the reader ask himself or 
herself the question, am I an heir? Am I following out 
the requirements of this will of our Father? 

In a certain sense, the New Testament may be considered 
a supplement to the Old. 

§ 6. 'juxtaposition of the Old and New Testa- 
ment. In the Old is found a record of the introduction of 
sin in the world, and the expulsion from Eden ; in the 
New is found the remedy for sin, and the restitution to 
paradise and favor with God. 

In the Old is found prophecies; in the New is recorded 
their fulfillment. In the Old types are shown as; in the 



Ch. II: § 7. THE GREAT OBJECT. 39 

New antitypes. In the Old are seen " shadows of good 
things to come;" in the New the substance. In the Old is 
found nought but death; in the New "life and immor- 
tality are brought to light." In the Old "they were 
gathered to their fathers;" in the New is Christ shown to 
be "the resurrection and the life." In the Old is found 
the law that is " a schoolmaster to bring us to Christ f in 
the New we find the Christ. In the Old we are taught 
how God hates sin; ("The day thou eatest thereof thou 
shalt surely die;") and in the seventeenth chapter of Levi- 
ticus is prefigured the great day of atonement; in the New 
is a record of that atonement having been accomplished in 
the sufferings of Christ; the claims of God honored as re- 
gards the above sentence. In the Old is darkness as 
compared with the New Testament: "In Him was life; 
and the Life was the light of men." John i: 4. In the 
Old Testament we are told that we are sinners; in the New 
how we may become saints. 

Then should not we ask ourselves a few very serious 
questions? How stands our account with God? Are we 
willing to cease trying to save ourselves and accept of what 
Christ has done for us? " There is none other name under 
heaven given among men, whereby we must be saved." 
Let our better judgment answer. 

We have thus far only looked at the general characteris- 
tics of the "Two Great Grand Divisions" of the Bible. 
There is no less truth in the thousand and one particular 
things as brought out in searching the Scriptures. 

That there are two grand parts which go to make up the 
great and grand whole is evident; for when referring to 2d 
Cor. iii : w r e find not only the theme, but names of each 
part or great grand division. 

§ 7. The Great Object. It is evident to the careful 
student of the Bible, that the great object for which it was 
given to man was, to present Jesus Christ as the Savior of 
the world to the glory of God. Phil, ii: 11. 



40 THE BIBLE OPENED. 

LESSON III. 

<J^fj^-/.- ^Ji^o T^ieaJ Tfiana 2/)tvt<uhn4. 

f /. ffld gfedamerd, s6co yeate <$f. <jj. 1 n> ,, 
$n4eum, J^oo " (i }Wu44en 

^few §edamm4, WO " g/. S.\ ^l 
$ooh, 66: 0. §. S(j; qjjt. §. Sx(j = ^. 

SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Note. Before introducing this lesson, review the former, and 
ascertain how many have written gems of thought. Then proceed 
in the following order: First, write on the board the caption — 
"Lesson III." See that every pupil does the same. Then write, 
' ' Subject : Two Gr. Gr. Divisions. " 

Into what study do we enter to-day? (Chap. II.) Can 
there be any objection to teaching the Bible as a science? 
(Ch. II, § 1.) How many distinct themes are found in the 
Bible? (§ 2.) What is that of the 0. T. ? What is that of 
the N. T.? John xvii: 3. Which book of the Bible is 
supposed to be the oldest? (§ 3.) What two great questions 
are found in Job? Where is the first found? (See Job 
ix: 2.) What is the second? (Job xiv: 14.) Where in 
the N. T. do we find the answer to the first question? 
(Rom. v: 1.) Where to the second? (1 Cor. xv; 13, 14.) 
Is it possible then to have a correct understanding of the 
N. T. without some knowledge of the Old? 

Into how many general parts may the Bible be divided ? 
■(§ 4. ) What may we for convenience call them? See Index. 
What is the name of the first? The second? (2 Cor. iii: 
r,, 14.) Define the word Testament? (§ 5.) 

Note. Make bracket and write God's Written WiU. 



Oh. II. LESSOR III. 41 

How many years of history are there in the Old Testa- 
ment? (Ch. Ill, §4.) 

Note. Have class find dates — Gen. Ch. i, also Malachi — and they 
have the answer, 3600. 

How many in the New? What do we understand by the 
letters B. C, as found in all Old Testament dates? What 
by A. D. ? How many years between the Old and New 
Testaments? See date of Mai. and Matt. Ans. About 
400 years. What name shall we give this interval ? 

Note. This is an important item, and reference will be made to 
it again. 

How many books are found in the Old Testament? 

Note. See second page reference Bible. Have class count them 
and repeat them in concert, and pronounce them correctly. 

How many in the New Testament? 

Note. Place the multiple sign between the figures indicating the 
number in Old Testament (3x9), and the product gives the number 
in the New. 

How many in both the Old and New Testament? Chap, 
iii: § 10. By what name is the Old Testament frequently 
called? 

Note. Define the word. See Chap, iii : § 4. 

Does it ever refer to the New Testament? (Acts xvii: 2.) 
Does the word occur in the Old Testament? (Dan. x: 21.) 

Note. Review from blackboard, The Illustrated Biblical Index 
may now be placed before the class. The teacher should acquaint 
himself with Chap, iii: and present it as an introduction to the above 
lesson. 



£2 ILLUSTRATED BIBLICAL INDEX. 

CHAPTER III. 
ILLUSTRATED BIBLICAL INDEX. 

§ 1. The Object of This Work. The object of this 
work, which is intended as a guide to Bible Study ac- 
companied by the "Illustrated Biblical Index," is to pre- 
sent a system so simple in its arrangement that the child 
may comprehend and follow it, yet far reaching enough to 
answer the earnest desire of the more advanced and mature 
scholar. 

The Bible is one of the many sciences which go to make 
up a store of knowledge such as we should have, such as 
we must have, in order to fulfill our mission for which God 
created us. 

The question is, how can such a knowledge best be 
obtained? AVe answer: Treat the Bible just as we do any 
other study. For instance, geography, in its primary or 
introductory lessons, is presented to the pupil in the form 
of a Globe. You show the child different places indicated 
upon the globe. In order that these different localities 
may be retained in the memory, the globe is divided, first 
into hemispheres. Then each hemisphere is further divid- 
ed into continents, with their various subdivisions, as 
Europe, Asia, and Africa, making up the Eastern Conti- 
nent; North and South America the Western Continent. 
Division after division is thus made until the pupil is 
able to clearly indicate the exact location of any particular 
place. 

Here, then, we have a course marked out whereby this 
particular branch of study may be mastered. So we find 
some system followed in the acquisition of all the other 
sciences except the Bible. Shall the Bible be the only 



Ch. Ill: § 2. ILLUSTRATED BIBLICAL iSTDEX. 43 

exception? We propose that it shall not. As in geography 
and other branches, we would teach the Bible by means of 
object lessons. 

As all the knowledge we have acquired on any subject 
has been received through one or more of the five senses, 
we propose in the study of the Bible likewise to call into 
use as many of these senses as possible. 

The time is coming, and not far distant, when Sunday 
School teachers must have some qualifications for the 
responsible position they occupy other than simply the in- 
clination or disposition to teach. It is difficult to see just 
how this can be obtained until some system of instruction 
is employed as a standard, whereby teachers may qualify 
themselves. 

The reader will now observe the Index, where we find 
noted the several divisions into which the Bible is divided. 
The student will readily perceive that the marks indicating 
divisions are only where a particular subject ends and a 
new subject begins; and the divisions, as we here find them, 
are as natural as the divisions of the continents when only 
separated by a narrow isthmus. 

§ 2. Illustrated Biblical Index. First, then, we 
notice the name — "Illustrated Biblical Lntdex." • 

Early in the history of this country there could be seen 
guide-boards at almost every crossing of the roads leading 
from one place to another. Upon these the traveler could 
read the number of "miles to" such and such a place; 
.also there could be seen the Index hand, with its finger 
pointing in the direction of the place where the traveler is 
expecting possibly to meet with loved ones. 

Many have said to me: "The Bible is a grand, but con- 
fused mass.'' Now what we propose to do is, to place these 
"landmarks " at such points that the traveler heavenward 
bound may, bv their aid, be helped on his journey. 



44 ILLUSTRATED BIBLICAL INDEX. 

Before us is seen an illustration of a Bible, open at the 
place which divides what is termed the "Old" from the 
"New Testament." 

§ 3. The Two Great Grand Divisions. These are 
what we now propose to call the two " Great Grand 
Divisions." From either side of this open Bible are seen 
what appear to be radiations of light; and just beneath we 
find a reference to Psalm cxix: 130; '* The entrance of thy 
word giveth light." 

" Thy word is a lamp unto my feet, and a light unto my 
path." Psalm cxix: 105. "That (Jesus) was the true 
Light, that lighteth every man that cometh into the world. 
He was in the world, and the world was made by Him." 
John i: 9, 10. 

"Now as the sun is a beautiful and appropriate symbol 
of Christ, so the moon strikingly reminds us of the church. 
The light of the moon is not her own; so it is with the 
church." C. H. M. 

" Ye (Christians) are the light of the world. A city 
that is set on an hill cannot be hid." Matt, v: 14. 

Light therefore is a symbol of knowledge. 

§ 4. Dates of the Old and New Testaments. We 

now notice also on the opposite pages of this open booh. 
" Yeaks 4000 B. C.;" and "Yeabs 100 A. D." 

While it may be difficult to settle many points of time in 
chronology, yet it is conclusive that from Adam to Christ 
was about 4000 years; while the New Testament chronology 
covers only about 100 years. 

Old Testament history is marked B. C, i. c, before 
Christ; while A. D., i. e., in the year of our Lord, refers 
to New Testament chronology. 

" The Scriptures" refer to the writings of the Old Tes- 
tament. Thus were they called in the time of t lie A postles, 
as found in Acts xvii: 11, where it says, " These were more 



Ch. Ill: § 6. ILLUSTKATIONS. 45 

noble than those in Thessalonica, in that they received the 
word with all readiness of mind, and searched the Scrij)- 
tures daily, whether those things were so" (referring to 
the Berean Christians); the New Testament not having- 
then been written.* 

There also may be seen a portion of the fourth chapter 
of the prophecy of Malachi, which is the '"end" of the 
Old Testament. 

§ 5. Sphere or Globe. Upon this open Bible we 
also find resting a sphere, or globe, with parallel and 
longitudinal lines. Between the parallel lines are found 
the several divisions, viz: 1st. " Great Grand Divisions;" 
2d, "Grand Divisions;" 3d, "Divisions;" and 4th, Sub- 
divisions, or names of the books of the Bible, from Genesis 
to Revelation. 

Above the equatorial line are found, in the several zones: 

First — "The Golden Chain of Topics" of each sub- 
division or book. 

Second — The name of the writers, or supposed writers, 
of each book, with the date. 

And lastly — "References to Christ," as found in the 
several books. These references show how the Old Testa- 
ment is linked to the New, and the New Testament to the 
Old as well ; and how impossible it is to understand the 
New Testament without first having some knowledge of 
the Old. 

§ 6. Illustrations. Take, for instance, the reference 
given concerning Christ as found in Gen. xxii: 18: "And 

* The book of the Acts of the Apostles covers about thirty-five 
years of history, from 33 A. D. to 68; while the above incident 
occurred about A. D. 48. By referring to dates of the New Testa- 
ment books, as found in the fifth Zone of the Index, we find that 
Matthew's Gospel only was written; New Testament history was be- 
ing made up at this time. 



46 ILLUSTRATED BIBLICAL INDEX. 

in thy seed shall all the earth be blessed." Underneath 
will be seen the figure 1. Now go over to the New Testa- 
ment side of the sphere and find the corresponding figure, 
1, and above it will be found a reference to Gal. iii: 16. 
Read: "Now to Abraham and his seed were the promises 
made. He saith not, And to seeds, as of many; but as of 
one, And to thy seed, which is Christ." 

Again, take the reference corresponding to figure 2, on 
the left hand side of the globe; Exodus, xii: 7: "And they 
shall take of the blood, and strike it on the two side posts 
and on the upper door post of the houses wherein they 
shall eat it. " Thus the passover was instituted as a re- 
membrance of their deliverance from bondage. Now turn 
to figure 2 on the right. We are referred to Matt, xxvi : 28 : 
"For this is my blood of the new testament, which is shed 
for many for the remission of sins." 1st Cor. xi: 25, 26: 
"This do ye, as oft as ye drink it, in remembrance of me. 
For as often as ye eat this bread, and drink this cup, ye do 
show the Lord's death till he come." 

Turn to another reference in the Old Testament division, 
indicated by figure 5; Exodus, xvii: 6: "Behold, I stand 
before thee there upon the rock in Horeb; and thou shalt 
smite the rock, and there shall come water out of it, that 
the people may drink." Now look at the corresponding 
figure (5) in the New Testament division; 1st Cor. x: 4: 
"And all did drink the same spiritual drink; for they 
drank of that spiritual Rock that followed them; and that 
Bock was Christ." 

See how beautifully one illustrates the other ! The 
above are but a few of the many passages which serve as 
explanations. 

To be able to see the intimate relation there is between 
the Old and New Testaments, it is necessary to know, 
first, that the Old is constantly pointing forward to the 
New: and second, thai the New 1ms not less than 850 



Ch. Ill: § 10. NUMBER OF BOOKS. 47 

references to the Old Testament, 300 of which are verbal 
quotations. 

§ 7. The Meridian Line. Notice again, all the 
matter on the left of the ' ' Meridian " line pertains to the 
Old Testament; while that on the right refers to the New 
Testament, except where the " Index Hand" is seen. 

§ 8. A Beautiful Illustration. We have here also, 
in the sphere as seen resting on the book, this beautiful 
thought illustrated: That all the light or knowledge of 
God we are able to gain emanates from the Bible, and 
tenters in Christ. 

§ 9. Three Old Testament Grand Divisions. We 

now turn to the zone in' which is found the "Grand 
Divisions." 

We notice that the Old Testament Great Grand Division 
is divided into three parts, viz: "Histokical," "Poeti- 
cal" and "Prophetical." 

The first, or historical, i. e., that which pertains to the 
history of persons, places or things, contains seventeen 
books, Trom Genesis to Esther inclusive; the poetical, five; 
and the prophetical, seventeen books. 

§ 10. Number of Books. Now notice the numbers, 
17, 5 and 17. We find that 17+5+17=39, the whole 
number of books in the Old Testament. Now place the 
multiple sign between these two figures, 3 and 9 (3x9), 
and the product equals the number of books in the New 
Testament, i. e., 27. 



48 GRAND DIVISIONS OF .THE BIBLE. 

CHAPTER IV. 
GRAND DIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. 

§ 1. Historical : First Old Testament Grand 
Division. The reader may ask for some illustrations 
showing that this first Old Testament "Grand Division'' 
is "Historical." We have but to read the first chapter of 
Genesis and we there have a description of how the earth 
was made, and the sea, and all that in them is, and Adam, 
the first of our race. 

Turn to the third chapter, and we are taught how sin 
was introduced into the world; and in the thirteenth verse 
of the same chapter the promise of a Savior or Redeemer 
from sin. 

In the sixth and following chapters we have an account 
of Noah and the flood; and commencing with the twenti- 
eth, to the end, is found the history of Abrahan^ Isaac, 
Jacob and the twelve patriarchs; the book ending with 
the interesting history of Joseph and his brethren, leaving 
them in Egypt. 

The book of Exodus opens with an account of their 
preparations for leaving Egypt, and proceeds with their 
departure for Canaan, etc. 

Joshua speaks of himself as the executor of the law 
previously given; while the Judges refer to the organiza- 
tion of the people for self government. 

In Ruth is given the origin of the family of the kings. 
And in Lsi and 2d Samuel — which may be considered as 
the first and second volume of the same work — Is found 
the history of the kings of Judah and Israel down to the 
lime of their captivity; while 1st and 2d Kings speak of 
God's dealings with (hem. 



Oh. IV: §3. PROPHETICAL. 4 ( .> 

And lastly,, in Esther is the narration of a special provi- 
dence of God in rescuing the nation of the Jews from a 
decree of death from the Persian king. 

Old Testament history covers a space of 3600 years. 

§ 2. Poetical : Second Old Testament Grand 
Division. We now turn to the second Old Testament 
"Grand Division," viz: "Poetical." These books are five 
in number, namely: Job, Psalms, Proverbs, Ecclesiastes 
and Song of Solomon; a collection of writings claiming 
the most remote antiquity, and containing subjects of the 
most inspiring and devotional character, exhibiting speci- 
mens of fine poetic art. 

In giving the name Poetical to this grand division, it is 
not to be understood that this form of Hebrew T verse is not 
found elsewhere in the Bible. The blessing of the sons of 
Jacob, the songs of Moses and Miriam, and the 32d and 
33d chapters of Deuteronomy were written in this same 
style. Mneteen-twentieths of the seventeen books which 
comprise the "Prophetical" were written in poetry. But 
they do not partake so much of a devotional character as 
the above. 

The Hebrew poets Avere men inspired of God; and among 
them were kings, lawgivers and prophets. 

§ 3. Prophetical: Third Old Testament Grand Di- 
vision. The third and last of the Old Testament " Grand 
Divisions" is the k ' Prophetical." "Prophecy is interwoven 
with every part of the Bible, from Genesis to Kevelation; 
but this part is distinguished from the rest of the Old Tes- 
tament by being called * The prophets;' partly because, 
though history is slightly introduced, its leading object is 
prophecy; and partly because, in the progress of God's 
revelation to man, these writings hold, in the gradual de- 
velopment of evangelical truth, an intermediate place 
between Law and the Gospel. The prophets were raised up. 
not only to prepare by their predictions for the coming of 



50 GBAND DIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. 

the Messiah, but also as preachers to their respective genera- 
tions. They throw great light on the historical books of the 
Old Testament considered as a religious history." — NicholU. 

"The prophets had a practical office to discharge as 
pastors and ministerial monitors of the people of God. To 
' show Jacob his transgression, and Israel his sins,' was a 
part of the commission they received. They spake — being 
filled with the holy spirit — the mind of the spirit. 

The writings of the prophets, tl^e most sublime and 
beautiful in the world, from their not being generally un- 
derstood, lose much of that usefulness and effect which 
they are so well calculated to produce on the souls of men. 
Many prophecies are somewhat dark till events explain 
them."' — Henry. 

The prophecies are, with the exception of the last 
(Malachi), episodes in the historical part of the Old Testa- 
ment; as Elijah and Elisha, who prophesied in the days of 
Ahab, king of Israel. At the same time Jehoshaphat was 
king of Judah. Again, Isaiah prophesied, as he says. 
during the reigns of Uzziah, Jotham, Ahaz, and Hezekiah. 
kings of Judah. Is. i: 1. 



Ch. IV. LESSON IV. 51 

LESSON IV. 

CstevpecJ; ^jAt&s (P/a ^/et foment T^iand S//WU40H4. 

id. <§$k4olvcal ; Wemiktiwe. 

I fytd. Poetical; iPoeity. 

3d. iPiohlwiical ; Revelation. 




^k |V x 4tA. 'fen. ~ fgdh. ffloofo, 4*[ 
2d. U—ff. &. " 5 




3d. $a. — (dial. " 4f 

SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Note. Ascertain who have written gems of thought, and then 
review on the divisions of the Bible from the Index. The introduc- 
tory remarks on the lesson should always be on the subject. 

Into how many distinct parts may we divide the Old 
Testament Or. Or. Division? 
Note. Place on the board the figures 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3. 

What may we for convenience call them? (Ch. IV: § 1.) 
What shall we call the first 0. T. grand division? Why so 
called? What one word may we use in defining it? 

Note. Illustrate by relating some historical incidents. 

What is the name of the first hook in this 0. T. errand 

i o 

division? 

Note. The class should count them, and give the names, so that 
they become familiar with them. Draw a curved line from figure 
1 to its corresponding figure below. 

What is the name of the first and last books ? What are 
the abbreviations? How many books? 

Note. Each answer is to be placed on the board in its order. 



52 GRAis T D DIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. 

What is the name of the second 0. T. grand division? 
(Ch. IV: § 2.] Why so called? Note the definition of 
the word. What is the name of the first book? The last? 
Note curved line. How man}? etc. What is the name of 
the third 0. T. grand division? (§ 3.) Why so called? 
What single word may we use to define it? 

Note. Draw curved line. 

The first book? Abbreviation? Last book? How many? 
How many books in the three 0. T. grand divisions? 
Note. Conclude with review from the board. 

§ 4. Historical: First New Testament Grand 

Division. We now pass over the meridian line to the 
New Testament side of the sphere, and we find here like- 
wise three " Grand Divisions/' the same number as in the 
Old Testament, named as follows: Historical, Episto- 
lary, and Apocalyptic* 

First: " Historical;" so named as before stated, and as 
will be seen when it is again divided in the zone above. 
This Grand Division contains five books, Matt, to Acts, in- 
clusive. 

§ 5. Epistolary: Second New Testament Grand 

Division. Second: "Epistolary,'' or pertaining to letters, 
as also seen in zone above, containing twenty-one letters, 
or books, from Romans to Jnde, inclusive. These were 
written in days when there was doubtless intimate commu- 
nication by letter between cities and provinces, by posl 
roads, or " Appian way."* as they are called — a line of com- 
pact pavement as first constructed by A p pi us (Maud ins. 

* This word is used here on account of its frequent use by all 
writers on this book. If so then it is necessary for the student to 
understand its meaning. Webster says: "It is derived from the 
Latin word apocalypsis, to uncover, to disclose." 



Oh. IV: § 6. lessor v. 53 

These ways or roads were also built and used for trans- 
mitting armies from one part of a province to another. 
. The common practice of letter writing may be seen- by 
referring to 2d Cor. iii: 1; 1 Cor. vii: 1. 

§ 6. Apocalyptic: Third New Testament Grand 

Division. Third: "Apocalyptic;" this word is defined 
in zones above, and contains only one book — "Revelation." 



LESSON V. 




fh4. <$$iUo%wal : Wvmildvi 
id. Igfi'tidolaiy : SSeiim. 
, sd. <$lfcccaluji4ic : JFudwu 



^k i\ v - hi. qAH.oM. — o$c?L. ffioofo, 5 
Jcl. Slew. —fade. " /f 

sd. ohewltdion, u / 

SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Note. Review the Gems of Thought and Divisions of previous 
lesson. 

Into how many parts may the N. T. Gr. Gr. Division 
be divided? (Ch! IV: § L) See Index. What shall we 
call the first? What is the definition of the word? What 
one word can you give embodying the definition? Find 
the first book in this part, and give the name. The 
abbreviation. * 

Note. Draw the curved lines. 



54 OLD TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. 

The last book? How many books? 

Note. The names to be given in concert. 

What is the name of the second N. T. Grand Division? 
(§5.) What is the definition of Epistolary? What is the 
name of the first book? The last? How many books? 

Note. Class name the books in concert ; also give the abbrevia- 
tions. State some item of interest as found in this section. 

What is the name of the third N. T. Grand Division ? 
What is the definition of Apocalyptic? (Foot note § 4.) 

Note. Class find the books comprising this Grand Division. 

How many books in this part? How many books in the 
three grand divisions of the New Testament? 

Note. Review from the blackboard. 



CHAPTER V. 
OLD TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. 

§ 1. Old Testament : Historical. We will now 
return to the Old Testament "Historical." We find that 
this is made up of two parts or "Divisions," viz: "Law" 
and "Executive." See second zone. 

(a.) Law. First, "Law,"* containing the five books of 
Moses, or the Pentateuch,! from Genesis to Deuteronomy 

* Law is a rule of action, a precept or command, coming from a 
superior authority, which an inferior is bound to obey. The term 
as here used is intended to signify the five books of Moses. Law 
may be further defined by the word Statute. "A statute is a partic- 
ular law drawn out in form, and particularly and distinctly enacted 
and proclaimed." — Webster. 

f Ho called from a Greek word, signifying five books. They were 
written by Moses in one continuous work, and still remain in that 
form. 



ph. V: §2. poetical. 55 

inclusive. The Savior refers to this division in Luke, 
xxiv : 44. This was that which was read in the syna- 
gogues; and a copy of it was deposited in the side of the 
ark to preserve it from injury. Deut. xxxi: 26. In the 
Law is found a continuous history of the world, from the 
creation to the death of Moses, a period of about 2550 
years. 

(b.) . Executive. Second, "Executive," so called because 
the Law passed from the hands of the lawgiver, Moses, to 
Joshua, the executor of that law, to which the children of 
Israel were afterwards subject. It contains twelve books, 
from Joshua to Esther inclusive. 

In this division we find the Twelve Tribes now united 
under one government, and Joshua is appointed the execu- 
tor, or judge, he being the first of the subsequent fourteen. 
Moses, being both lawgiver and judge, was the first, while 
Samuel was the last. In them was invested authority; 
hence they became the Authoritative. 

This style of government lasted nearly four hundred 
years, when, by request, God gave them a king. The 
reign of kings continued for about 500 years, or up to the 
Babylonian captivity, which lasted TO years. From their 
return from the captivity to the coming of Christ was 
about 500 years, during which time they were governed by 
highpriests. Through all these ages and changes there 
was an authoritative who kept before the people this law 
of Moses. 

In passing from one division to another it will be observed 
there is a marked change of subject. 

§ 2. Poetical. In passing into the "Poetical," we 
find no division, but we change its name in the next zone 
above to "Devotional," thus giving an inkling of the 
nature of the books. They are just what the devout child 
of God loves to read. There are five of them, from Job 
to Song of Solomon inclusive. 



56 OLD TESTAMENT DIVISION'S. 

(a.) Job. This book has "Patience" as its theme. If 
overcome with trials and feel we lack patience, we read 
Job. Reference is made to this book by the Apostle 
James (v: 11), where he says: "Behold, we count them 
happy which endure. Ye have heard of the patience of 
Job, and have seen the end of the Lord; that the Lord is 
very pitiful, and of tender mercy. " 

(b. ) Psalms. These are a collection of " Sacred Hymns, " 
and were used in the temple worship as hymn and prayer 
books are now used in the devotional part of our services. 

Hooker says: "What is there necessary for man to know 
which the Psalms do not teach? Let there be any grief or 
disease incident to the soul of man, any wound or sickness 
named, and there is in this treasure house a present remedy 
at all times to be found." 

(c.) Proverbs ("Maxims"). Of the Proverbs, Bishop 
Hopkins says: "Other parts of the Scriptures are like a 
rich mine, where the precious ore runs along in one con- 
tinued vein; but this is like a heap of pearls which, though 
they are loose and unstrung, are not the less excellent and 
valuable. " 

(d.) Ecclesiastes. "The subject of this book is Happi- 
ness. Its chief object is to correct one of the commonest 
and most fatal of all delusions, that of supposing the 
things of this world to be sufficient for our happiness, 
and pursuing them as our chief good; and also to direct us 
to true happiness. It especially instructs us that knowl- 
edge is not our true happiness, but, as Bishop Butler 
remarks, 'another end is appointed to direct our lives to; 
an end which the most knowing may fail of, and the most 
ignorant arrive at.' And the author sums up the purpose 
of the whole hook in these remarkable words: • Let us 
hear the conclusion of the whole matter: Fear God, and 
keep his commandments; for this is the whole duty of man. 



Oh. V: § 3. prophetical. 57 

For God shall bring every work into judgment, with every 
secret thing, whether it be good, or whether it be evil/ 
Ch. xii: 13, 14." — Mcholls. 

(e.) Song of Solomon. This book seems to represent, 
under an "Allegory," the mutual love which exists between 
Christ and his church, which is represented as the Bride, 
the Lamb's wife. There are many passages in other por- 
tions of the Scriptures Adhere similar figures are used, in 
both Old and New Testaments. See Hos. ii: 14-23; Matt, 
ix: 15; 2 Cor. xi: 2; Eev. xix: 7-9, and xxi: 2-9. 

§ 3. Prophetical. We have now passed through the 
••Poetical," and have noted the central thought in each 
book. As Ave pass on and enter the book of Isaiah, or 
"Prophetical," Ave find an entire change in the subject 
matter. 

The Prophetical is diA T ided into tAvo parts, viz: "Major," 
or greater, and " Minor," or lesser prophets. The Major 
contains five books. Isaiah to Daniel inclusive; the Minor 
twelve, Hosea to Malachi inclusive. 

(a.) Major Prophets. This distinction of the prophets 
into greater and lesser alludes: 

First: To the size Of the books. 

The prophecies of Isaiah and Ezekiel contain each one- 
fifth more reading matter than all the minor prophets 
combined; and the writings of Jeremiah nearly one-third 
more; Avhile the prophecy of Daniel but a little less. 

Second: They were given under a peculiar stress of cir- 
cumstances, as will be seen by the following: 

Gregory, in speaking of the Jewish Dispersion, says: 
•'The story of the DiAdne judgments Avhich followed the 
apostasy of the chosen people is familiar. The Divine 
wrath did not delay, but fell upon Solomon. At his death 
the vast empire of David had already shrunk to its original 
narroAv limits, and the Lord declared that even Avhat re- 



b8 OLD TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. 

mained should be rent from his successors. Jeroboam, 
when he had drawn off the ten tribes in revolt, established 
the idolatrous worship as the religion of the state. And 
from that time Israel, or the ten tribes, made haste to 
destruction, in spite of the many warnings and judgments 
of God. The blow fell when Shalmaneser, king of Assyria, 
took Samaria, razed it, destroyed the kingdom of Israel, 
and carried the captives away to Halah and Habor (Chebar). 
Judah followed in the idolatry of Israel, and a little more 
than a century later the people were carried away captive 
to Babylon, save a remnant that fled into Egypt. 

The prophetic activity reached its height during the 
decline and captivity. It was then that the sins against 
the covenant needed most to be rebuked. Early in that 
period appeared Elijah and Elisha, who wrought more 
miracles than any prophet since the days of Moses and 
Joshua. Just before the overthrow of Israel, Isaiah flour- 
ished in Judah, cotemporary with Hosea in Israel. 

It is obvious, moreover, that in the captivity the hopes 
of the Messiah needed to be kept most clearly before the 
people. Still more earnestly, therefore did the prophets 
ply their vocation among the captives of Judah and Israel, 
directing them in the working of God's purposes; Jeremiah 
with the remnant in Egypt, Ezekiel among those by the 
river Chebar, and Daniel at the court of the great eastern 
monarch. " 

Here we find them weighed down with oppression, strang- 
ers in a strange land, disheartened and weeping over their 
once happy home. Now desolated as it was by the feet of 
strangers, this was once their happy home; the beautiful 
temple their place of worship; the city of Jerusalem their 
beloved city. It was "Beautiful for situation, the joy of 
the whole earth, is Mount Zion, on the sides of the north, 
the city of the great King." Psalm xlviii: 'I. 



Oh. V: § 3. 



LESSON" VI. 



59 



When asked to. sing one of these songs of Zion, they 
answered: "How shall we sing the Lord's songs in a 
strange land? If I forget thee, Jerusalem, let my right 
hand forget her cunning! If I do not remember tlfee, let 
my tongue cleave to the roof of my mouth; if I prefer not 
Jerusalem above my chief joy." Psalm cxxxvii: 3-6. 

(b.) Minor Prophets. The "Minor" (lesser) may be so 
considered when contrasted with the above. 



LESSON" VI. 






OS** 



$fi/>doucal, 



«4. SBl 



aw 



ia4u4e ffioofa, 



@xecu4we : ^uihouiaivw, 42 



\diml, | 3d. Szvoiional. 



S 

42 



SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 
Note. Review all the divisions. 

What is the name of the first 0. T. Grand Division? 
{See Index.) How many books does it contain? Into how 
many general parts may it be divided? (Ch. v, § 1.) 

Note. Make a bracket and place the figures 1st and 2d. 

What may we call them ? Define the word Law. What 
two words may be used to define this part? What is the 
name of the first book? What is the abbreviation? Name 



60 NEW TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. 

the last book. The abbreviation. How many books in 
this division? By whom was this Law written? Did our 
Savior speak of this division? (Luke, xxiv: 44.) Where 
and he>w was it preserved? How many years of history in 
these five books? What are they sometimes called? Ans. 
Pentateuch. Define the word. 

What is the name of the second 0. T. Division? (Ch. V: 
§1, b. ) What one word can be used to give an idea of the 
character of this part? 

Note. The teacher is to continue the subject of this division as 
above. 

W^hat is the name of the second 0. T. Grand Division? 
(Ch. V: § 2.) 

Note. Give the names, character, number of books, etc.; then 
proceed to state how these books are devotional in their character, 
for what they were intended, and how used. First, Job; Jas. v: 11. 
Second, Psalms, etc. The last Gr. Gr. Division (Prophetical, Ch. V, 
§ «S) may be treated as the first, with the same style of questions, 
bringing out the blackboard illustration. The subjects are found in 
their respective places in the Key. Conclude with review from the 
blackboard. 



CHAPTER VI. 
NEW TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. 

§ l. New Testament: Historical. We will pass 
again over the " Meridian' 1 line to the New Testament side 
of the sphere. 

We find the New Testament " Historical " divided into 
two parts; first, the " Life of Christ," from Matthew to 
John, inclusive. Second, " Church History/' found only 
in the book of Acts. 



Oh. VI: § 2. EPISTOLARY. 61 

(a.) Life of Christ. The four evangelists present four 
peculiar phases of his life, viz: Matthew treats of the 
"Kingship" of Christ:" Mark presents him as the "Ser- 
vant;" Luke exhibits his "Humanity;" and John his 
"Divinity.''" 

Matthew wrote for the " Jew," Mark for the " Soman," 
Luke for the "'Greek,'' and John, thirty-four years later, 
for the " Christian." 

(b.) Church History. That the evangelist Luke was 
the author of the Acts, is affirmed by the voice of antiquity, 
as also by internal evidence. "His long attendance on 
Paul," says Henry, "as well as his having been an eye- 
witness of many of the occurrences he records, renders him 
a most respectable and credible historian. " 

This history closed about A. D. 68, covering a space of 
about 3J years. Says Scott, "There are here given us the 
only history of the manner in which the most extraordinary 
revolution that ever took place in the moral and religious 
state of the world was first begun. Jerusalem, Caesarea, 
Antioch, and even Ephesus, all the great and celebrated 
cities, nay. Rome itself, the proud capital of the world, were 
among the places that felt its power and were affected by its 
influence. " 

§ 2. Epistolary. We next enter the "Epistolary" 
(letters) Grand Division, containing twenty-one books or 
letters. Of these we find Paul wrote fourteen, or two- 
thirds of them. Now we propose to call these fourteen 
"Paul's Pastoral Letters:" thus named from the nature of 
the matter contained in them, having been written to the 
pastors, or to the churches that had been previously organ- 
ized by him. 

The remaining seven letters or epistles are termed " Gen- 
eral Letters;" so named by Origen, one of the Church 
Eathers, who wrote in the early part of the third century. 



62 XEW TESTAMENT DIVISIONS. 

(a.) Doctrinal The fourteen letters of Paul are •'Doc- 
trinal;" so called since they are explanatory of the teaching 
of Christ. 

Macknight observes: " While the inspired epistles of the 
other apostles deserve to be read with the utmost attention, 
on account of the explication of particular doctrines and 
facts which they contain, and the excellent precepts of 
piety and morality with which they abound, the epistles of 
Paul must be regarded as the grand repository in which the 
ivhole of the gospel doctrine is lodged, and from which the 
knowledge of it can be drawn to the greatest advantage." 

(b.) Supplement. The seven remaining books or " Gen- 
eral Letters," James to Jude, inclusive, may be considered 
as a " Supplement" to Paul's fourteen letters, since they 
are a further illustration of the doctrines therein taught. 

We extract the following from 0. H. M.'s note* on Gen- 
esis: "And here I may remark the beautiful harmony 
between St. James and St. Paul on the subject of justifica- 
tion. The intelligent and spiritual reader, who bows to 
the important truth of the plenary inspiration of the Holy 
Scriptures, knows full well that on this question it is not 
with Paul or James we have to do, but with the Holy 
Ghost, who graciously used each of these honored men as 
the pen to write his thoughts, just as I might take up a 
quill pen or a steel pen to write my thoughts; in which 
case it would be preposterous to speak of a discrepancy be- 
tween the two pens, inasmuch as the writer is one. Hence 
it is just as impossible that two divinely inspired penmen 
should clash, as that two heavenly bodies, while moving in 
their divinely appointed orbits, could come into collision. 
But in reality, as might be expected, there is the fullest 
and most perfect harmony between these two apostles; in- 
deed on the subject of justification, the one is the counter- 
part or exponent to the other. St. Paul gives us the 



Ch/Tl: §4 apocalyptic, 63 

inward principle; James the outward development of that 
principle. The former presents the hidden life; the latter 
the manifested life. The former looks at man in relation 
to God; the latter looks at him in his relation to man. 
Now we want both." James says, " Faith without works 
is dead." 

§ 4. Apocalyptic. Apocalyptic pertains to a prophecy 
or an unfolding of the future history of the Christian 
church; hence its name, "Revelation." * 

Before leaving this subject let us take our 'Bible and find 
the reference as seen under name of this division (Rev. 
xxi: 1-4), and see what inducement there may be to living 
a holy life. John says: "And I saw a new heaven and a 
new earth: for the first heaven and the first earth were 
passed away; and there was no more sea. And I, John, 
saw the holy city, new Jerusalem, coming down from God 
out of heaven, prepared as a bride adorned for her hus- 
band. And I heard a great voice out of heaven, saying: 

Behold, the tabernacle of God is with men, 
And he will dwell with them, and they shall be his people, 
And God himself shall be with them, and be their God. 
And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes; 
And there shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor crying, 
Neither shall there be any more pain: 
For the former things are passed away." 

The Bible opens with man in paradise, happy, pure, in 
holy communion with God. It closes with man — such as 
are redeemed with the blood of Christ — seen in the new 
and heavenly city, giving honor and ascribing power to 
Jesus, the Lamb. The same Jesus who suffered ignominy, 
shame and death in this world is now reigning. 

* The word Revelation is the translation of the Greek title to the 
book Apocalypsis; that is, " uncovering" or "•unveiling." 



64 STEW TESTAMENT DIVISION'S. 

Ascriptions of Praise. The same who wore the 
crown of thorns is now wearing the crown of glory; and 
in the ascriptions of the redeemed it is said: 

"And they sang a new song, saying: 
Thou art worthy to take the book, and to open the seals 

thereof : 
For thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by thy 

blood, 
Out of every kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation; 
And hast made us unto our G-od kings and priests : 
And we shall reign on the earth. " Key. v: 9-10. 

To this was added a chorus, in which the angels joined 
with the redeemed. "The number of them was ten 
thousand times ten thousand, and thousands of thousands; 
saying with a loud yoice : 

Worthy is the Lamb that was slain, 

To receive power, and riches, and wisdom, 

And strength, and honor, and glory, and blessing." 

And to this was added yet additional ascriptions of 
honor and glory by " Every creature which is in heaven, 
and on the earth, and under the earth, and such as are in 
the sea, and all that are in them, heard I saying: 

Blessing, and honor, and glory, and power, 
Be unto him that sitteth upon the throne, 
And unto the Lamb forever and ever! 

And the four beasts (living creatures) said, Amen. And 
the four and twenty elders (the representatives of the 
redeemed under the patriarchal and apostolic dispensa- 
tions) fell down and worshipped him that liveth forever 
and ever." Rev. v: 11-14. 



Cli. VI. 






LESSOR VII. 

LESSOR VII. 



65 



Cruviecf: <Jne ^tve lyVew <J lament 2/)u 



\ido ) wcai 



%jlldoly 



weal 



am < 



id. SUvfe of (ghud ' : JFow iPfiam, 

ffloofo, A- 

2ci. (ghwich $fiurfol/u : @%aqnaa= 

4ion. $j)ook, / 

Wodunol. ffiocfa, U 
41%. ^me^al %44ev> : 



un/Uemem 



woi 



/die \ ffliduit. 



lev-, xxi : i=4. $>ookb, 



SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOT^S. 
Review. Call out the several divisions. 

How many grand divisions are there in the New Testa- 
ment? What is the name of the first? See Index. Num- 
ber of hooks? Names? Abbreviations? Into how many 
general parts may the Historical be divided? 

Note. Draw bracket, and 1st, 2d. 

What may we call the first? (Ch. VI, § 1, a.) How 
many hooks? Of what do they treat? The first? Second? 
Third? Fourth? 

Note. Call out the writers, for whom written, etc. 

What shall we call the second division? •(§ 1, b. ) Who 
is the writer? What is the name of this book of history? 
Of what is it a history? Ans. The organization of the 
Christian church. When did this history close? From 



66 SUB-DIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. 

what citv did it emanate? What great cities were consid- 
ered as centers? 

What is the name of the second New Testament grand 
division ? Into Iioav many parts may this division be 
divided? Ans. Two. (§ 2.) Name the first, Why so 
called? The second? Why so called? What is the lead- 
ing characteristic of Paul's Pastoral Letters? Axs. Doc- 
trinal. What of the General Letters? (§ 2. &.) 

What is the name of the third New Testament grand 
division? To what does this allude? Ans. Future. (Rev. 
xxi:l-4.) See CL VI : §4. 

Note. Much of interest may be drawn from this section. See 
that every member of the class has the labels properly arranged at 
the top of the page designating the several divisions, and close with 
review from the blackboard. 



CHAPTER VII. 

SUB-DIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. 

§ 1. Subdivisions or Names. We are now about to 

pass again to the Old Testament side of the sphere. This 
the reader will observe is the fourth time, as will be seen 
on the "Illustrated Index," as follows: 

First: Bringing out the "Great Grand Divisions." of 
which there are two, the names of which are The Old and 
The New Testament. 

Second: The "Grand Divisions," of which there are 
six, three of which are found in the Old and three in the 
New Testament. 



Ch. VII: § 3. REFLECTIONS. 67 

Third: The "Divisions." Of these we find there are 
ten, the Old Testament being divided into five and the 
New into five. 

Fourth: We now bring ont the Subdivisions, or names 
of all the books of the Bible, with the Golden Topic or 
Link in each book, which form * ' The Golden Chain of 
Topics." Of these subdivisions there are 66; 39 in the 
Old and 27 in the New Testament. We will find also in 
this zone, not only the names of the books, but the number 
of chapters in each book, showing their comparative size. 

§ 2. Explanations. 

I. Golden Tojncs. The first zone above the equatorial 
line contains the Golden Topic of each of these sixty-six 
(66) books. 

II. Writers of Books. In the next zone above is found 
the names of the writers of these books, with either the 
date of the incident recorded or the close of the writing 
of each, as found in the American Bible Society's Bible, 
which adopted the Biblical Chronology as arranged by 
Archbishop Usher. f 

III. References to Christ. In the upper zone are found 
one or more references to Christ. These zones, however, 
will be treated in their respective places in this work. 

§ 3. Reflections. As we now enter into the more 
minute study of the great lessons as brought out in the 
several books, we are led to exclaim with Paul: "'Who is 
sufficient for these things?'' "This is holy ground." We 
feel not only to remove our hats, as in the presence of some 
one who is our superior, but to take the shoes from off our 
feet. We are taught that the Bible is ''God's written will 
to men." We venture only so far as God may be pleased 
to reveal himself. 

"We know there is nothing in Scripture without its 
divine meaning; and it is tmr privilege as well as our duty 



68 G EXES IS. 

to seek to know the meaning of all that our God has 
graciously written for our learning. This, we believe, can 
only be reached by humble, patient, prayerful waiting on 
Him. The One who has penned the Book knows perfectly 
the scope and object of the Book as a whole, and of each 
division of the Book in particular. This will have the 
effect of checking the unhallowed flights of the imagina- 
tion. The Spirit of G-od alone can open Scripture to our 
souls. 'God is our interpreter' in revelation as well as in 
providence; and the more we lean on Mm in true self- 
emptiness, the deeper insight we shall have both of his 
Word and his ways." — G. H. M. on Numbers, p. 04. 

§ 4. The "Law." We now pass to the first Old 
Testament ^Division — The Law. We find it divided 
into five parts or "Subdivisions," viz: Genesis, Exodus, 
Leviticus, Numbers and Deuteronomy. The object, in 
what may be said in regard to the several books of the 
Bible, is that the reader may have a clearer understanding 
of them. And in order to understand them the student 
must study these five books diligently, and indeed master 
them, for they are a key to the following portions of the 
Scriptures, which cannot be understood without it; 
they are the foundation upon which the other Scriptures 
rest. They are to the Old Testament what the four gospels 
are to the New Testament. 

§ 5. Genesis. {See Chronology, (It. XX IV: ■ 6.) 
Written by Moses for the Hebrews, B. C. 1401. 

GOLDEN" TOPIC, " ORIGIN. " 

"There is a majestic sublimity in the introduction to 
this book. No apology, preamble or account of the writer: 
you are introduced at once into the very heart of things. 
No vain conjectures about what was before time, nor why 
things were done thus and thus; but simply so it was." — 
Andrew Fuller. 



Ch. VII: § 7. CHUKCH HISTORY. 69' 

While it may be difficult to ascertain what may be the 
most prominent topic of some of the books of the Bible, 
there certainly can be no very great difficulty as to this 
one; we need but define the word Genesis, which means 
generation or Origin. (See Index.) 

In it, then, we have a history of the origin, or begin- 
ning. It relates to the creation of the earth and man; 
and it gives us an account of how sin was introduced into 
the world, and the remedy provided against it. 

The time of the writing of this book was about 1491 B. C. 

Nicholls says: "This book, from the first page of which 
it has been truly said, that a child may learn more in one 
hour than all the philosophers in the world learned with- 
out it in one thousand years. 

This book is the foundation of all history, for we are 
indebted to the tenth chapter for all that we know about 
the origin of nations; yet it is remarkable Iioav much 
larger a part of it is occupied with the history of one 
family than with all the other inhabitants of the earth." 

§ 6. History of Mankind. The general history of 
mankind before the flood extended over a period of 1656 
years, and, including an account of the creation of the 
world, occupies only seven chapters; the general history of 
mankind after the flood, during a period of 427 years 3 
occupies only four chapters; while the particular history 
of Abraham and his descendants, consisting principally of 
the details of the life of a few individuals, and treating 
only of a period of 286 years, occupies thirty-nine chapters. 

§ 7. Church History. The reason is, that the Bible 
is not merely the history of men, but a history of the 
church of God ; hence we have the names of those who 
directly or indirectly constitute that church. Genesis 
contains the history of about 2369 years, embracing the 
period from the creation to the death of Joseph. 



70 GENESIS. 

§ 8. The Writer. As to the writer of this book there 
is no doubt, as it is universally ascribed to "Moses." (See 
Index.) It is cited thirty-three times in the Scriptures; 
and in it are found many lessons of faith and trust in 
God, showing us that even in that remote period the 
coming of a Savior was expected. 

§9. Prophesies and Types. Nicholls says: "Collect 
the prophecies concerning Christ, Ch. iii: 15, etc. This 
promise or covenant of grace was renewed to Noah, vi: 18, 
and again to Abraham, who was born only two years after 
the death of Noah. It was promised to Abraham that ; all 
the nations of the earth should be blessed in his seed,' 
xxii: 18 (see Index), and 'that seed is Christ,' Gal. iii: 16. 
Thus was the gospel preached to Abraham." 

There are also many types relating to Christ found in 
this book. For instance, Abel, Noah, and the offering of 
Isaac by his father, showing the love of God to us, in the 
great sacrifice of his son. 

§ 10. Scientific view of Creation. We will now 

give a brief outline of this book, first, of the six days crea- 
tion, and then of the subject-matter of the book as a 
whole. 

According to the most distinguished teacher of science 
referred to in the following outline, the account. of the 
creation recognizes two great eras, as inorganic and organic, 
consisting of three days each; each era opening with the 
appearance of light, that of the first being Cosmical, that 
of the second Solar, for the special uses of the earth, as 
follows : 

"I. INORGANIC ERA: 

1st Day, — LIGHT, cosmical. 

2d Day. — The earth divided from the fluid around it. 
oj -rv j 1. Outlining of the land and water. 

2. Creation of vegetation. 



Ch. VII: § 11. outline or genesis. 71 

II. ORGANIC era: 

4th Day.— LIGHT from the sun. 

5th Day. — Creation of the lower animals. 

rthDay.-P- Ok 
J (2. Cn 



y 1. Creation of mammals. 



Creation of man. — Dana." 

§11. Outline of Genesis. 

" I. Gen. Chap, i and ii, contains the accoiint of the 
creation of the earth and man. 

II. Chap. iii. The primeval state and fall of man. 

III. Chap. iv. History of Adam and his descendants, 
with the progress of religion and the origin of the arts. 

IV. Chap. v. Genealogies, age and death of the patri- 
archs, until Noah. 

V. Chap, vi-viii. The general defection and corruption 
of mankind, the deluge, and preservation of Noah and 
his family in the ark. 

VI. Chap. ix. The history of Noah and his family sub- 
sequent to the time of the deluge. 

VII. Chap. x. The repeopling and the division of the 
earth among the sons of Noah. 

VIII. Chap. xi. The building of Babel, the confusion 
of tongues, and the dispersion of mankind. 

IX. Chap, xii-1. The lives of Abraham, Isaac, Jacob, 
and Joseph." — Carpenter. 

§ 12. Conclusion. " The book of Genesis closes with 
the death of Jacob and Joseph. But before the scenes shut 
up, we have graphic and expanded views of the fate of the 
twelve tribes of Israel, in the prophetic blessings of their 
dying father; of which those relative to Judah are to us 
far the most interesting, as they point to Him, in whose 
work all the plans and promises of Jehovah center and 



72 EXODUS. 

are accomplished. Says Sir William Jones: 'This volume 
independent of its divine origin contains more sublimity 
and beauty, more morality, more important history, and 
finer strains of poetry and eloquence, than can be col- 
lected from all other books, in whatever language or age 
they may have been composed.'" — Cottage Bible. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

EXODUS. 

§ 1. Exodus (See Chronology, Ch. XXIV: § 6), 
written by Moses at Sinai, for the Hebrews, B. C. 1491. 

GOLDEX TOPIC "DEPARTURE." 

Says Nicholls: " The title of this book is peculiarly ap- 
propriate. Exodus means Departure (see Index), and 
this book contains the account of the departure of the 
Israelites out from Egypt; an event which is th& foundation 
of their whole history as a nation, and which is more fre- 
quently referred to than any other in their subsequent 
history." 

§ 2. Moses the Writer. This book is also univer- 
sally ascribed to -Moses, and is cited as his work by David. 
Daniel, and others of the sacred writers. Forty-four 
references are made to this book by Christ and his Apos- 
tles. It embraces- the history of about L45 years, from the 
death of Joseph to the erection of the tabernacle in the 
wilderness of Sinai. 

The time Avhen this book was composed is not clear, 
though we know it must have been written soon after the 
commencement of the tabernacle worship, H'Hi B. C. 



Ch. VIII: § 3. OUTLINE OF EXODUS. 73 

§ 3. Outline of Exodus. The very general topics of 
this book are as follows : 

I. Exodus, Chap. i-vi. The oppression of'the Israelites 
in Egypt, and the raising up of Moses their deliverer. 

II. Chap, vii-xiil. The deliverance by the ten plagues, 
and the institution of the Passover. 

III. Chap, xiv-xv. The passage through the Red Sea, 
and song of triumph. 

IV. Chap, xvi-xviii. The miraculous supply of food 
and water. Amalek overcome, and visit of - Moses' 
father-in-law. 

V. Chap, xix-xxiii. The Law given at Mount Sinai. 

VI. Chap, xxiv-xxxv. The directions for making the 
tabernacle and its appointments, and the institution 
of the priesthood. 

VII. Chap, xxxvi-xl. Building of the tabernacle. 

§ 4. Reflections. One of the leading features in the 
book of Genesis, which must not be lost sight of, is the 
call of Abraham when God said to him, " Get thee out of 
thy country,*' etc., Ch. xii: 1-3. There we find the origin of 
a people who are to be peculiarly his; a distinct and isolated 
people, who are to be under his immediate superintend- 
ence, educating them so that in the course of time they 
may be prepared, or made ready, to receive the oracles of 
God. To accomplish this it required 500 years, which 
brings us down to the giving of the law on Sinai. 

§ 5. Prophecies and Types. In this book as In 
Genesis we find prophecies and types of Christ. Let us 
turn to Ch. xvii: 6 (see Index) : "Behold I stand before thee 
there upon the rock in Horeb: and thou shalt smite the 
rock, and there shall come water out of it. that the people 
may drink." Now let us turn to 1st Cor. x: 4, and get 
the New Testament interpretation of the above passage* 
" They drank of that spiritual Bock that followed thenu 
and that Bock was Christ." 



74 • EXODUS. 

Manna is a type of the "Bread which cane down from 
heaven," John 6: 51, for nourishing the immortal soul'mto 
eternal life. 

The Red Sea was a type of baptism. 1st Cor. x: 1, 2. 

Nicholls, in referring to the passover as a type of Christ, 
says: "It is a remarkable circumstance that Christ — our 
passover — was sacrificed for us, and our deliverance from 
the bondage of sin completed, in the same month, and on 
the same day of the month, that the Israelites were deliv- 
ered from the bondage of Egypt. Man did not intend 
this." Compare Matt, xxvi: 5, with Acts xiii: 27. 
• There was also a law-giver: Christ has given laws to the 
church; and so Moses was a type of Christ in giving laws 
to the children of Israel. 

These are but a few of the many types of Christ pre- 
sented. Says Henry: " There are more types of Christ in 
this book than in any other book of the Old Testament. " 

§ 6. Conclusion. " Moses, having in the book of 
Genesis described the creation of the world, the origin of 
the nations, and the repeopling of the earth, details in the 
book of Exodus the commencement and nature of the Jew- 
ish Church and Polity, which has been termed a Theocracy, 
in which Jehovah appears not merely as their creator and 
Lord, but as their king. 

Hence this, with the following books of Moses, are not 
purely historical; but contain not only laws for the regula- 
tion of their moral conduct and the rights and ceremonies 
of their religious worship, but judicial and political laws 
relating to government and civil life. 

A part of these have been detailed in this book, and an 
account given of the erection of a superb royal palace, the 
tabernacle, in which Jehovah was pleased to dwell, or 
manifest his special presence by the Shekinah, or glory. 
appearing between the cherubims. The stupendous facts 
connected with these events are fully attested by every suc- 
ceeding writer of Ihe sacred Scriptures.*' — Cottage BibU. 



Oh. IX: §4. THREE SUBJECTS OF THE BOOK. 75 

CHAPTER IX. 

LEVITICUS. 

§ 1. Leviticus (See Chronology, Oh. XXIV: § 6), 
written by Moses for the Hebrews at Sinai, B. C. 1491. 

GOLDEN TOPIC "DUTIES OF LEVITES?" 

"The book of Exodus closes with G-od's taking solemn 
possession of the tabernacle: the book of Leviticus treats 
of the services enjoined there; or in other words, the rites 
and ceremonies of the Jewish religion. The descendants 
of Levi were set apart to instruct the people in the knowl- 
edge of these rites, and to conduct the religious worship of 
the Jews; and this book is called Leviticus, or the Duties 
of Levites, because it contains the rules which would 
enable them to discharge their duties." — Nicholls. 

§ 2. Laws of Sacrifices and Offerings. " There is 
nothing historical in this book except the account; Oh. 
viii-ix, of the consecration of the priesthood; Ch. x: of the 
punishment of JSTadab and Abihu; and Ch. xxiv, of Shel- 
omith's son. All the rest is taken up with the laws which 
(lod gave to Israel concerning the sacrifices and offerings, 
meats, drinks, and divers washings, by which God set that 
people apart for himself, all of which ' were shadows of 
good things to come.* " — Henri/. 

§ 3. The Writer of Leviticus. This book is cited 
as the work of Moses in 2d Chron. xxx: 16, Daniel ix- 13, 
and as an inspired writing in 2d Cor. vi: 16, and 1st Peter 
i: 16. 

§ 4. Three Subjects of the Book. " The rites and 
ceremonies contained in this book are reducable to the 
three following general heads: 

I. Sacrifices; all of which had a typical reference to 
Christ, and especially to his atonement. 



76 LEVITICUS. 

II. Purifications from legal uncleanness. These repre- 
sented the necessity of inward purity of the heart, 
and man's need of the Holy Spirit to purify the soul. 

III. Solemn Festivals, calculated to unite their tribes in 
one nation; to keep them separate from other nations; 

. to promote among them piety." — Xicliolls. 
§ 5. Festivals, etc. The chief of these were, the 
daily sacrifices; the weekly Sabbaths; the monthly feasts of 
the new moons. And the following were the annual ob- 
servances: the feast of the Passover; the feast of Pentecost; 
the feast of Trumpets; - the great day of Atonement; and 
the feast of Tabernacles. 

§ 6. Institution of Public Worship. " This book 
records the transactions of but one month, but the facts it 
mentions are peculiarly appropriate to its subject, viz, the 
public worship of God, by which especially his great name 
was to be honored. These facts are, the consecration of 
Aaron and his sons to the priesthood; the punishment of 
Nadab and Abihu; and the stoning of the blasphemer. 

The first instructs us in the importance God attaches to 
his worship; the second show r s in an awful manner the sin- 
fulness of those who interfere with it; and the third is a 
solemn warning of the danger of taking his holy name in 
vain." — Nicholls. 

§ 7. Types. The institution of high priesthood typi- 
fied Christ, the great High priest. The books of Leviticus 
and Hebrews should be read together, as they mutually 
illustrate each other. 

It. will be seen that the law as found in Leviticus is a 
shadow of good things to conn. But observe particularly 
the services on the great day of atonemenl as found in Ch. 
xvi, and how it is explained in Hebrews Oh. ix. 

§ 8. Tables of Weights, Measures, and Moneys, 
mentioned in the "Bible. The following is extracted 



Oh. IX: §8. WEIGHTS, MEASURES AND MONEYS. 7? 

chiefly from the second edition of Dr. Arbuthnot's Tables 
of Ancient Coins, Weights, and Measures: 

1. Jeivish Weights reduced to English Troy Weights. 

lbs. oz. pen. gr. 

The gerah, one-twentieth of a shekel, Ex. xxx: 13, 12.000 

The bekah, half a shekel, Ex. xxxviii: 26, 4 13.2&5 

The shekel, Gen. xxiv: 22; Amos viii: 5, 9 2.571 

The maneh, 60 shekels, Ezek. xlv: 12, 2 3 6 10.285 

The pound, mina, 100 shekels, 2 Chr. ix: 16; 1 K. x : 17, 3 9 10 17.142 

The talent, 3000 shekels, Ex. xxxviii: 25, 26, 113 10 1 10.285 

2. Scripfu re Measures of Length reduced to Eng. Measure. 

yds. feet. inch. 

A finger or digit, Jer. lii: 21, 0.912 

A palm or hand-breadth, 1 K. vii: 26; com. Jer, lii: 21, 3.648 

A span the longer, Ezek. xliii: 13, _■_ __'_ -10.944 

A common span, half a cubit,. 9.000 

A common cubit, two spans, 1 6.000 

A sacred cubit, Ex. xx v: 10, 1 9.888 

A fathom, the Greek orguia, Acts xxvii: 28, 6 0.810 

A measuring reed, Ezek. xl: 3, 5, . 10 11.328 

The measuring line, Zech. ii: 1, 48 1 11.040 

A furlong, or stadium, one-eighth of a Roman mile, 202 8.625 

A furlong, or stadium, one-tenth of an Eastern mile, 243 7.200 

A Roman mile, Matt, v: 41, ...-_.._ ._ 1617 2 9.000 

A Sabbath day's journey, Acts i: 12, 1215 3 0.000 

3. Scripture Liquid Meas. reduced to English Wine Meas. 

gals. qts. pts. 

A log, Lev. xiv: 10, 12, 15, 21, 24, 0.833 

A firkin, John ii: 6, according to Cumberland, 3 1.125 

A hin, Ex. xxix: 40; Lev. xix: 36; Ezek. xlvi: 5, , U, 1 1 0.000 

A bath, equal to the ephah, Ezek. xlv: 11; Lu. xvi; 6, 7 2 0.500 

A firkin, John ii: 6. the bath according to Campbell 7 2 0.500 

A cor, equal to the homer, Ezek. xlv; 14, 75 2 1.000 

4. Scripture Dry Measures reduced to English Corn Meas. 

pecks, qte. pts. 

A cab, 2Kings, vi: 25, _._■ 3.000 

A measure, the chcenix, Rev. vi: 6, 1 0.166 

An omer, one-tenth of an ephah,Ezek. xvi, 36, 2 1.100 

A measure, the seah, lji. xviii: 32; 2 K. vii: 1, 16, 18, _. 1 1.000 

An ephah, ten omers, Ex. xvi: 36, 3 1 1.000 

A half-homer, the letech, Hos. hi: 2 16 0.000 

A homer, or cor, ten baths, Ezek. xlv: 14; Lu. xvi: 7, 32 1.000 

5. Scripture Moneys reduced to United States Moneys. 

dols. cts. m. 

A mite, lepton, Mark xii: 42, 0.500 

A farthing, kodrantes, Mark xii: 42, 1.000 

Afarthing, assarius, Matt, x: 29, 1 5.000 

A gerah. one-twentieth of a shekel, Ex. xxx: 13, 2 8.000 

A penny, denarius, Matt, xviii: 28; xx: 2; xxii; 19, 15 4.700 

A bekah, or half -shekel, Ex. xxxviii: 26, 28 0.000 

A shekel of the sanctuary, Lev. v: 15, 56 0.000 

A piece of money, stater. Matt, xvii: 27, .. . 70 3.700 

A dram, tne Persian daric, 1 Chr. xxix: 7; Ezr. viii: 27, 3 51 8.600 

A shekel of gold, Num. vii: 14, 8 88 4.000 

A pound or mina, Luke xix: 13, 15 21 4.000 

A maneh, the Hebrew mina, Ezek. xlv: 12 27 81 3.000 

A talent, Matt, xxv: 15, 912 75 0.000 

A talent, 60 manehs, 1668 78 0000 

A talent of gold, Ex. xxv: 39; 1 Chr. xxix: 7, 26452 30 0.000 



78 



LEVITICUS. 



Hours of the Day. 



The day, reckoning from sun-rise, and the night from sun-set, were each 
divided into 12 equal parts, called the 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th, etc., hour. 

Watches. 

The first watch— From sun-set to the third hour of the night. 
The second or middle watch— From the third hour to the sixth. 
The third watch, or cock-crowing— From the sixth hour to the ninth. 
The fourth or morning watch— From the ninth hour to sunrise. 

§ 9. Jewish Times and Festivals. 





Correspond- 
ing with the 
months of 


Months of the 




Hebrew Months. 


Sacred 
Year. 


Civil 
Year. 


Festivals. 


1. Ahib, or Nisan. 
Exod.xii: 2,18; xiii: 4. 
Esth. iii: 7; Neh. ii: 1. 


March. 
April. 


1st. 


7th. 


14. Paschal Lamb killed. 

15. Passover. 

16. First fruits of barley 
harvest presented to the Lord. 

21. Passover ended. 


2. Zif , or Iyar. 
1 Kings vi: 1. 


April. 
May. 


2d. 


8th. 




3. Si van. 
Esth. viii: 9. 


May. 
June. 


3d. 
4th. 


9th. 


6. Pentecost. First fruits 
of wheat presented to the Lord. 


4. Tamus, Tammuz, 
or Thamuz. 


June. 
July. 


10th. 




5. Ab. 


July. 
August. 


5th. 


11th. 




6. Elul. 
Neh. vi: 15. 


August. 
September. 


6th. 


12th. 


9. Temple taken on this day 
by the Chaldeans, and af- 
terward by the Romans. 


7. Tifri, Tisri, or 

Ethanim. 
1 Kings viii: 2. 


September. 
October. 


7th. 


1st. 


1. Feast of Trumpets. 
10. Day of Atonement. 
15. Feast of Tabernacles. 
22. Last day of it. 


8. Marchesvan, or Bui. 
1 Kings vi: 38. 


October. 
November. 


8th. 


2d. 




9. Cisleu, or Chisleu. 


November. 
December. 


9th. 


3d. 


25. Feast of the Dedication 
of the temple. 


10. Tebath. 
Esth. ii: 16. 


December. 
January. 


10th. 


4th. 




11. Sebat, 
Zech. i: 7. 


January. 
February. 


nth. 


5th. 




12 and 13. Adar. 
Esth. iii: 7. Ve-Adar or 
the second Adar, is 
added here, when ne- 
cessary. 


February- 
March. 


12th. 


6th. 


14 and 15. Feast of Purim. 
Esth. ix: 18-81. 



Ch. X: § 3. GENERAL OUTLINE. 79 

CHAPTER X. 
NUMBEKS. 

§ 1. Numbers. (See Chronology, Ch. XXIV: § 6.) 
Written by Moses for the Hebrews, B. C. 1451, in the land 
of Moab. 

GOLDEN TOPIC, " CENSUS TAKING." 

" This name is given to this book because it contains an 
account of the numbering of the children of Israel, the 
first of which took place in the beginning of the second 
year after their departure out of Egypt; the second in the 
plains of Moab, at the conclusion of their journey in the 
wilderness. 

This book comprehends a period of about 38 years; bat 
the most of the events related in it happened in the first 
and last of those years." — Nicholls. 

§ 2. A Diary. The whole of the book may be con- 
sidered as a diary, and is the most ancient booh of travels 
ever published. The route taken by the Israelites, under 
the direction of their inspired leader, has been traced out 
by modern travelers; and many places here mentioned still 
bear the same name, and correspond exactly in their geo- 
graphical situation. 

§ 3. General Outline. The following is a general 
outline of the history: 

I. The consecration of the tabernacle and the Levites. 

II. The journeyings and encampments of the Israelites. 

III. Their murmurings and rebellions. 

IV. Various laws are repeated and new ones given. 

§ 4. Number of Israel. When Jacob went 'down 
into Egypt with his family, it will be remembered that 
they numbered only 70 souls ; but notwithstanding the 



80 NUMBERS. 

oppression and cruelties that were practiced upon them, 
when they left it and crossed the Red Sea into the wilder- 
ness they numbered more than two million. 

What a wonderful increase was there in the course of 
218 years! The people are indeed "as the stars of heaven 
in multitude." 

At the conclusion of the sojourn in the wilderness an- 
other census of the twelve tribes was taken, and directions 
given for the division of the, land of Canaan, which they 
are about to enter. We find their number about the same 
as when they first came out from Egypt . Those who thus 
came out had so murmured and sinned against God that 
he had resolved they should never be put in possession of 
the land of Canaan, but that their children only should 
have it. These would then know how true was the word 
of God, when, at the end of 38 years, they should find 
there were but hvo left out of this large number, now 
amounting to 625,850 males above 20 years of age. We 
find that reckoning is made only of those "that are able 
to go forth to war in Israel." 

§ 5. Particular Outline of Numbers. The follow 
ing is a specification of particular subjects: 

I. Chap. i-ii. "Census Taken," and the tribes placed in 

order around the tabernacle. 

II. Chap, iii-iv. Numbering of the Levites, and the as- 

signment to their several work. 

III. Chap. v-vi. Laws concerning trespasses, jealousy and 
the Nazarites. 

IV. Chap, vii-viii. Dedication of the tabernacle, and con- 
secration of the Levites. 

V. Chap. ix-x. The cloud, and the order of march. 

VI. Chap, xi-xii. The sending of quails, and Miriam's 
leprosy. 

VII. Chap, xiii-xiv. Twelve spies sent up to search the 
land, and the people murmur at their report. 



Oh. X: §6. THE TRIBES IN CAMP. 81 

VIII. Chap. xv. Law of meat and drink offerings. 

IX. Chap, xvi-xvii. The rebellion, and the budding of 
Aaron's rod. 

X. Chap, xviii-xix. The charge to the priests and Levites, 

and the law of purification. . 

XI. Chap, xx-xxi. The smiting of the rock, and setting 
up of the brazen serpent. 

XII. Chap, xxii-xxv. The story of Balak and Balaam. 

XIII. Chap, xxvi-xxvii. " Census Taken " in the plains 
of Moab, and the law of inheritance. 

XIV. Chap, xxviii-xxx. The law of offerings and vows. 

XV. Chap, xxxi-xxxii. The enemies of Israel on the east 
of Jordan are overcome. 

XVI. Chap, xxxiii-xxxiv. The forty-two journeys, and 
the division of the land of Canaan. 

XVII. Chap, xxxv-xxxvi. The cities of the Levites, the 
cities of refuge, and the provision for securing the 
possession to each tribe. 

§ 6. The Tribes in Camp. The accompanying plan 
presents the order of the tribes in their tents round about 
the tabernacle. When they broke camp, the first and 
second divisions marched forward in the order of their 
respective tribes, Judah taking the lead and bearing the 
standard of their division; then the Levites, bearing the 
tabernacle; and then the third and fourth divisions in the 
order of their tribes. 



82 



NUMBERS. 



NORTH 



p 

go 



157,600 Men. 
Fourth Grand Division. 



Asliur, 
41,500. 



Simeon, 
59,300. 



Dan, 

62,700. 



Naphtali, 
53,400. 



• 








II 




Merarites, 




¥§ 




3,200. 




pq 








W 








J 








O 


c 


.S o 


CO 
CD 


< 


ft! 
— CO 

5* 


f°" 




(X 


» [> 


P3 


CD 


w 


PC 






PQ 








< 








H 




CO g 




2,750, 




o8 o? 




Kohathites. 




~ ^ 








JeS 









Reuben, 
46,500. 



lL^. CO 

o =" 

O 8Q 



-3 ' 

© SS 
o ^ 



CDi © 

?5 



Gad, 

45,650. 



151,450 Men. 
Second Grand Division. 



SOUTH. 



Ch. XI: § 2. WHERE WRITTEN. 83 

§ 7. Prophecy. This book contains one signal predic- 
tion relative to the Messiah, ch. xxiv: 17-19. "Balaam's 
prophecy of the Star of Jacob points to the ( Bright and 
Morning Star' which through the tender mercy of God 
was to visit us; and his mention of the sceptre points to 
the spiritual kingdom of Him who must reign till 'He 
hath put all enemies under his feet.' 1 Cor. xv: 25." — 
Nicholls. 



CHAPTEE XL 

DEUTERONOMY. 

§ 1. Deuteronomy. (See Chronology, Ch. XXIV: §6.) 
Written by Moses for the Hebrews, in the land of Moab, 
B. C. 1451. 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "LAW REHEARSED." 

Deuteronomy means " Law Kehearsed," so called because 
it contains a repetition or rehearsal of the law. It also 
contains additions, omissions, and fuller explanations. The 
omissions are such as pertain to the duties of the Levites. 
The additions are such as refer to their entering the prom- 
ised land. The explanations are such as apply it to the 
heart, and not so much to the outward life. It is the fifth 
book of the writings of Moses, and is in fact a commentary 
on the previous four books. 

§ 2. Where Written. From a comparison of chap, 
i: 5, with xxxiv: 1, it appears to have been written by 
Moses in the plains of Moab, a short time before his death. 
It is cited as his work in 2 Ohron. xxv: 4, and Dan. ix: 13, 
and is often quoted as an inspired writing by Christ and 
his apostles. 



SH. DEUTERONOMY. 

§ 3. A History of Five Weeks. It embraces a his- 
tory of about five weeks. It enforces obedience by the 
strongest exhortations; and was no doubt intended for the 
benefit of those born in the wilderness, and who conse- 
quently were not present at the giving of the law on Sinai. 

§ 4. The Repetitions. The variations in expression 
observable in the repetition of the law have been considered 
as an intimation that its spirit, rather than its letter, is 
that which is to be regarded. 

§ 5. A Rehearsal. "In this book may be found the 
pathos and sublimity of religion, in a strain not to be 
surpassed in any part of the Old Testament. It contains 
a rehearsal and republication of the law hy the great prophet 
of it himself, with a survey of the wonders of Egypt and 
the wilderness, the past acts of God's mighty arm, working 
in terror and in mercy, and a terrific insight into the future 
plagues of the apostate people. 

It also helps us to trace the progressive scheme of Scrip- 
ture; for in its doctrinal character and use it may be set 
above the simpler and earlier promulgation of the law, as 
recorded in Exodus.'' — Carpenter. 

The book of Leviticus would instruct them in the form 
of their worship ; this book may be considered as teaching 
them with what spirit they should perform it. The general 
outlines of it, if not the whole hook, were to be written 
upon stones, plastered, and set up on their entering the 
promised land, as a solemn memento of the terms on which 
they should enter and retain it. Chap, xxvii: 2-8. 

§ 6. When to be Read. It was to be read publicly 

by the priests every seventh year, at the feast of tabernacles, 
in the hearing of all the people. Chap, xxxi: 9-13. The 
importance of having a knowledge of it will be seen by 
the Saviors quotations; Compare Matt, iy: 4, 1, 10, with 
Dent, viii: :{; \ i: 1C. 13. 



Ch. XI: § 7. GENERAL OUTLINE OF DEUTERONOMY. 85 

Not only was it to be read m public every seven years, 
but it was to be taught by the parents every day to the 
children. "And thou shalt teach them diligently unto thy 
children, and thou shalt talk of them when thou sittest in 
thy house, and when thou walkest by the way, and when 
thou liest down, and when thou risest up" Deut. vi: 7. 

By comparing the law given in Chap, xxi: 22-23, with 
Gal. iii: 13, we see how clear is the allusion to Christ, who 
was made a curse for us, being hanged on a tree. * 

§ 7. General Outline of Deuteronomy. 

I. Chap, i-iii. Rehearsal of the transactions in the wilder- 

ness. 

II. Chap. iv. Exhortations to obedience to the laws of 

God. 
Ill: Chap. v-xi. Rehearsal of the moral law. 

IV. Chap, xii-xvi. Rehearsal of some parts of the cere- 
monial law. 

V. Chap, xvii-xviii. Rehearsal of judicial laws, promise 
of the Great Prophet, and covenant between Jehovah 
and the Israelites. 

VI. Chap, xix-xxvii. Laws of cities of refuge, of war, 
divorce, etc. 

VII. Chap, xxviii. Wonderful prophecy of the destruc- 
tion of Jerusalem by Nebuchadnezzar, 600 B. C, and 
also by Titus, 70 A. D. 

VIII. Chap, xxix-xxx. Exhortations to obedience on their 
arrival in Canaan. 

IX. Chap. xxxi. Moses' charge to Joshua, and the deliv- 
ery of the law to the Levites. 

X. Chap, xxxii, The song of Moses. 

XL Chap, xxxiii. The blessing of the twelve tribes. 
XII. Chap, xxxiv. Moses views the land, dies, and is 

buried; his age, and the thirty days' mourning; Joshua 

succeeds him; eulogy. 

* The reader should find both references and read them carefully. 



86 DEUTERONOMY. 

§ 8. Great Value of the Pentateuch. The coming 
of the Savior is more particularly foretold in the preceding 
books. The preparation which the prophecies in these 
five books made for the coming of Christ remarkably 
appears in the expectation of the Samaritans, who admit- 
ted no other books as inspired than the Pentateuch. As a 
proof of this, let us turn to John, iv: 4-42, and read care- 
fully, noting what is said in verse 4, "Samaria;" 29, "the 
Christ;" 39, "many believed;" 42, "we have heard our- 
selves." 

"Finally: The treasury of wisdom and knowledge which 
is amassed in these jive books has enriched the whole 
civilized earth, and, indeed, greatly promoted that very 
civilization. They have been a kind of text booh to almost 
every writer on geology, geography, chronology, jurispru- 
dence, political economy, theology, poetry and criticism, from 
the time of Moses to the present day. Books to which the 
choicest writers and philosophers in pagan antiquity have 
been deeply indebted, and which were the text books of all 
the prophets ; books from which the flimsy writers against 
divine revelation have derived their natural religion and 
all their moral excellence; books written in all the energy 
and purity of the incomparable language in which they 
are composed; and lastly, books which, for importance of 
matter, variety of information, dignity of sentiment, accu- 
racy of facts, impartiality, simplicity and sublimity of 
narration, tending to improve and ennoble the intellect, 
and ameliorate the physical and the moral condition of 
man, have never been equaled, and can only be paralleled 
by the Gospel of the Son of God! Fountain of endless 
mercy, justice, truth and beneficence! How much are thy 
gifts and bounties neglected by those who do not read this 
law, and by those who, having read it, are not morally 
improved by it, and made wise unto salvation 1 " — 
Baqster. 



Cb. XL LESSON VIII. 87 

LESSON YIII. 



un. 



Met, 


».g 


. M(jJ 


n 


it 


uqo 


(( 


it 


uqo 


n 


tt 


U54 


a 


it 


U5i 



/. ^enem : Sua 

2. IgxoduA : Wekaliww. 

J ^ Is. SBtwtku* : Su4i& o{ SBcvifa. 

^S 5 1§ *• (^uwibtte ■' (gemAub §akiny. 

5. Wmit/ionomu : Saw- @Hehea>t6ed. u 

irvndadfsuch. 

SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Note. Review the several divisions, the parts of each, and the 
names. See Index. 

What is the name of the first Old Testament Division ? 
Ans. Law. Into how many parts is it divided? What 
are they called? (Ch. VII: § 1.) 

Note. Place on the board bracket and figures 1, 2, 3, etc. 

What is the name of the first Old Testament Subdivi- 
sion ? The second ? Third ? etc. What is the Golden 
Topic of Genesis? (§ 5.) By whom was this book written? 
(§8.) When written? Where? 

Note. It is supposed by some to have been written by Moses, 
while attending the flocks of his father-in law, in the land of Midian. 

What is the name of the second subdivision? (Ch. VIII: 
§1.) The writer? When written? Date? Outline? (§3.) 

What is the name of the third subdivision? (Ch. IX: 
§ 1.) By whom written? For whom was it written? 
Where ? What is the Golden Topic ? Into how many 
general parts is it divided? (§4.) 

Note. Give the subject of each part. 



#8 SUBDIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. 

What is the name of the fourth subdivision? (Ch. X: 
§ 1.) By whom written? Where? 

Note. Bring out the four parts of the outline. (§ 3.) 

What is the name of the fifth subdivision? (Ch. XI: 
§ 1.) When and where written? Golden Topic? General 
outline? (§ 7.) 

Note. State distinctly each part, and review from the blackboard. 



CHAPTER XII. 
SUBDIVISIONS OF THE BIBLE. 

[continued.] See Index. 

§ 1. The Executive. This division of the Old Tes- 
tament is altogether historical. It contains a history of 
the Jewish church as well as the nation, beginning from 
the first settlement in the land of Canaan, and extending 
to their re-settlement in the same land after the captivity 
in Babylon. It covers a period of over 1000 years, from 
the death of Moses to the reformation of Nehemiah. 

§ 2. Sacred History. Sacred history djffers from 
every species of ordinary history in this, that, while the 
latter records events and details facts simply, the former 
combines them with the event as coincident with the pur- 
poses of God. 

It is evident from a clos,e examination of these historical 
books, that they arc a collection of authentic records, as 
,kept by the priests or other publicly appointed persons. 
The events which comprise them were generally recorded 
while the matter was fresh in the memory, and by persons 
who lived in the period to which they refer. 



Cll. XII. § 5. THIS HISTORY VERY ANCIENT. 89 

§ 3. The Compilers. The work of collecting and 
revising has been attributed to Nehemiah and Ezra. As 
regards the .authority of. these books, it ought to be suffi- 
cient for us to know that, in their present form, they have 
been attested by Christ and his apostles. 

While the twelve tribes were united under one govern- 
ment their history was one in point of view; but when a 
separation took place, as it did at the close of the reign of 
Solomon, under the designation of "Judah and Israel," 
then the kingdom of Judah, from which the Messiah was 
to descend, was the chief object of attention with the 
sacred historians. They treated of the events which trans- 
pired in Israel when especially connected with what con- 
cerned Judah. 

§ 4. Genuineness of this History. These writings, 
like all other parts of the Scriptures, have every mark of 
genuine and unaffected truth. Many incidents are related 
and interwoven with accounts of other nations, yet no 
inconsistencies have ever been detected. 

"One would naturally expect to find a different state of 
things than is found in this history, which, alas ! is a 
melancholy representation of their sins and miseries; for 
the law made nothing perfect; that was to be done by the 
bringing in of a better hope. And yet if we compare the 
history of the Christian church with its constitution, we 
shall find the same cause to wonder, so many have been its 
errors and corruptions; for neither does the gospel make 
anything perfect in this world, but as still in the expecta- 
tion of a better hope in the future state." — Henry. 

§ 5. This History Tery Ancient. The history in 
which we are entering commenced at least 1000 years 
before Herodotus (B. C. 445), who is called the father of 
profane history. Says Henry: " It is ancient history, far 
more ancient than was ever pretended to come from any 
other hand. Homer, the most ancient genuine heathen 



90 JOSHUA. 

writer, who lived in the beginning of the Olympiads, near 
the time of the founding of the city of Rome by Romulus 
(753 B. C), was about the time of the reign of Hezekiah, 
king of Judah." 

We now proceed to notice these executive historical 
books, in the order which we find them placed in our 
Bible. 

§ 6. Joshua. {See Chronology, Ch. XXIV: § 6.) 
Supposed to have been written by Joshua in Canaan, B. C. 
1426. 

GOLDEN TOPIC, f * CO JS QUEST." 

This book records the "Conquest" of Canaan by Joshua. 
It is not certain whether this book received its name from 
Joshua as the author or as the hero of it. It is reasonable 
to believe that Joshua would keep minutes of events in 
which he was so much interested. Dr. Clark observes: 
"The book of Joshua is one of the most important writ- 
ings of the Old Covenant, and should never be separated 
from the Pentateuch, of which it is at once both continu- 
ation and completion. Between this book and the five 
books of Moses there is the same analogy as between the 
four G-ospels and the Acts of the Apostles." 

§ 7. The Church Established in Canaan. The 

Pentateuch contains a history of the great Jetvish legislator 
(Moses), and the laws on which the Jewish church should 
be established. The book of Joshua gives an account of 
the establishment of that church in the land of Canaan. 
The four gospels give an account of the transactions of 
Christ, the great Christian legislator, and of those laws on 
which his church should be established and by which it 
should be governed. The Acts of the Apostles give an 
account of the actual establishment of that church, accord- 
ing to the predictions and promises of its great founder. 

§ 8. Government Theocratic. The Hebrew govern- 
ment, as established by Joshua, was a Theocracy: that is. 



Gil. Xll: § 9. D0CTE1XE OF THE EL'TURE STATE. 91 

God himself was the Supreme G-oyernor of the nation. So 
Christ is to be the Supreme Governor of his church under 
the gospel dispensation. 

The Hebrew government, though divine, appears to have 
been founded in covenant between God and Israel as regards 
their rewards and punishments. These were all temporal, 
and necessarily so, as nations have no existence in a future 
state. This does not prove, however, that they had no 
knowledge of a future life, the revelation of which is 
progressive. 

§ 9. Doctrine of the Future State. -The doctrine 
of the future state among the Hebrews (as the progress of 
truth generally is) was like the rising of the sun, which 
' shineth more and more unto the perfect day. ' It is im- 
possible to account for the faith and piety of the early 
patriarchs on the supposition that they had no knowledge 
of the future state. 

Could Abel or Noah walk with God, as they are repre- 
sented to have done, under the impression that the moment 
of death should separate them from him forever? Could 
Abraham, Isaac and Jacob die in the faith, as the author 
of the epistle to the Hebrews, in chap, xi, informs us they 
did, without any assurance of a hereafter? Could Moses 
4 esteem the reproach of Christ greater riches than air the 
treasures of Egypt,' because 'he had respect to the recom- 
pense of reward,' when his whole life was a series of 
afflictions, when he was not even suffered to set his foot 
within the promised land, had he not looked for a better 
country, even a heavenly? Indeed, the apostle has fully 
decided the question by telling us that God hath 'prepared 
them a city. ' What city was prepared for these venerable 
patriarchs except that New Jerusalem, to which we all 
aspire? Kev. iv: l-4."—Mcholls. See Job, xix: 26; Ps. 
xlix: 15; Isa. xxvi: 19; Dan. xii: 2. ■ 



92 JUDGES. 

§ 10. General Divisions of Joshua. The book 
seems to divide itself into four parts, which comprehend 
the histor}' of thirty years. 

I. Chap. i. God's confirmation of Joshua. 

II. Chap, ii-xii. Account of the conquest of the land of 

Canaan. 

III. Chap, xii-xxii. Division of the land to the tribes. 

IV. Chap, xxiii-xxiv. Joshua's last address, death and 
burial. 

§ 11. Prophecy Fulfilled. One leading idea of the 
book seems to be God's fulfillment of the promises to 
Abraham, Isaac and Jacob, that they should possess the 
promised land. 

"The name of Joshua is the same as Jesus, a Savior. 
Canaan is a type of heaven. The triumphs'through faith 
of the Israelites under Joshua may be considered as typical 
of the final triumph of the church and of every true Chris- 
tian through Jesus, the captain of our salvation; while the 
destruction of the Canaanites is an emblem of that which 
awaits the world of the ungodly at the judgment of the 
great day." — Nicholls. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

JUDGES. 

§ 1. Judges. (See Chronology, Chap. XXIV: § 6.) 
Supposed to have been written by the high priests. 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "GOVERNMENT." 

This history begins with the death of Joshua and reaches 
to that of Samson, and treats of the establishment of 
'^Government." See Acts, xiii: 20. 



Ch. XIII: § 4. NAMES OF THE JUDGES. 93 

After the death of Joshua, the Israelites were governed 
by magistrates who ruled under the general designation of 
judges; and the book which contains the history of these 
rulers is called The Book of Judges. There were fourteen 
of these persons whom God raised up, not in regular suc- 
cession, but from time to time, to govern Israel intermediate 
between Joshua and the kings. 

In reading this book, it should be borne in mind that 
these men sometimes acted under divine direction in exe- 
cuting judgment; for if this be lost sight of it will be 
impossible to approve of their conduct on some occasions. 
Some of them were called of God, iii : 9, and others elected 
by the people, xi: 5-6. 

§ 2^ Province of the Judges. The term judge was 
originally applied to those whom Moses, by the advice of 
his father-in-law, appointed to assist him in hearing and 
redressing the complaints of the people. The judges here 
mentioned were not only magistrates, but some of them 
were prophets and military chiefs and avengers of the 
people. 

§ 3. - The Writers. The writers of Judges are un- 
known; but it is generally supposed to have been the high 
priests. 

§ 4. Names of the* Judges. Strictly speaking, Moses 
may be reckoned as Israel's first judge, and Joshua, his 
successor, the next, of whom we have account in previous 
books ; but Moses was also lawgiver and prophet, and 
Joshua's mission was the conquest and settlement of the 
country. We have, then, 1, Qthniel, who was raised up 
to deliver Israel from the hands of Chushan; 2, Ehud, 
who delivered them from the Moabites ; 3, Shamgar ; 
4, Deborah ; 5, Gideon, who conquered the Midianites ; 
6, Abimelech; 7, Tola; 8, Jair; 9, Jephtha, who made a 
rash vow; 10, Ibzan; 11, Elon; 12, Abdon: .13, Samson : 



04 JUDGES. 

14, Eli, who was also high priest. Samuel was both judge 
and prophet; but is reckoned as prophet, and was the 
first in the continued succession of prophets that ended in 
Malachi. Acts, iii: 24. 

§ 5. Chronology of the Book. The first sixteen 
chapters seem to follow nearly in chronological order the 
course of events from the death of Joshua to the death of 
Samson, a period of more than three hundred years; but 
the last fiye chapters contain distressing incidents, which 
form a sort of appendix to the former part of the history. 

§ 6. General Survey of Judges. The teaching of 
the book is clearly reflected when viewed in its threefold 
aspect, viz: 

I. The condition of the Israelites between the death . of 
Joshua and Othniel. 

II. The league with the Canaanites. 

III. The result of the league. . 

The leagues of the Israelites with the Canaanites resulted 
in that people becoming thorns in their sides, and subject- 
ing them to many grievous oppressions. 

§ 7. Outline of Judges. " The last part of the book 
is removed from its proper place, the chapters having been 
carried forward in order, probably, 'that the thread of the 
narrative might not be interrupted. In the following 
analysis they are inserted in the order of history: 

I. Chap, i-ii: 10. Interim after the death of Joshua, 
(28 years). 

II. Chap, xvii, xviii. Introduction of idolatry among 
the tribes. 

III. Chap, xix, xxi. History of the Levite and the war 
among the tribes. 

IV. Chap, ii: 11; iii: 7. The intermixture of the Israel- 
ites with the Canaanites. 



Ch. XIII: §8. A LINK IN HISTORY. 95 

V. Chap, iii: 8; iv. Servitude and deliverance of the 
Israelites. 

VI. Chap. v. Triumphant song of Deborah and Barak. 

VII. Chap, vi-viii. Subjugation of the Israelites by 
Midian, and their deliverance by Gideon. 

VIII. Chap. ix. Usurpation and death of Abimelech. 

IX. Chap, x: 1-6. Administration of Tolah and Jair. 
,X. Chap, x: 7; xii: 7. Oppression by the Philistines 

and Ammonites, and their deliverance by Jephtha. 

XI. Chap, xii: 8-15. Administration of Ibzan, Elon 
and Abdon. 

XII. Chap, xiii-xvi. Oppression by the Philistines 
' and deliverence by Samson." — Carpenter's Guide. 

§ 8. A Link in History. "The book of Judges 
forms an important link in the history of the Israelites. It 
furnishes us with a lively description of a fluctuating and 
unsettled nation; a striking picture of the disasters and dan- 
gers which prevailed without magistracy; ' when the high- 
ways were unoccupied, and the travelers walked 'through 
byways;' when a few prophets were appointed to control the 
people, and ' every one did that which was right in his own 
eyes. ' It exhibits the contests of true religion with super- 
stition; and displays the beneficial effects which flow from 
the former, and the miseries of impiety. It is a remarka- 
ble history of the long suffering of God toward the Israelites, 
in which we see the most signal instances of his justice and 
mercy alternately displayed. The people sinned and were 
punished; they repented and found mercy. 

These things were written for our warning; none should 
presume, for God is just; none need despair, for God is 
merciful. " — Home, 



96 RUTH. 

CHAPTER XIV. 

ETJTH. 

§ 1. Ruth. {See Chronology, Chapter XXIV: § 6). 
Supposed to have been written by Samuel, B. C. 1063. 

GOLDEN TOPIC "ORIGIN OF DAVID'S FAMILY." 

This book may be considered a historical appendix to the 
book of Judges, which precedes it; and an introduction to 
the two volumes of Samuel which follow it, as their chief 
subject is David. The book of Ruth contains the " Origin 
of David's Family," and also- his descent from Judah; or 
the origin of a line of kings, as given by Matthew. 

The author is unknown, but probably was Samuel; and 
the time is supposed to have been when Gideon was called 
to the office of judge. Then Israel was grievously oppress- 
ed by the Midianites, who invaded the land, stripped them 
of their corn, and created an artificial famine; the only 
famine mentioned during the administration- of the 
judges. See Judges vi : 4-6. 

§ 2. The Flight into Moab. The narrative may be 
abridged in a few words: Elimelech, an inhabitant of 
Bethlehem, accompanied by his wife and two sons, was 
driven by famine from the land of Israel to sojourn in the 
land of Moab, where, he died. His two sons marry Moabit- 
ish women, Ruth and Orpah. In the course of ten years 
both of the young men die; and Naomi, accompanied by 
one of her daughters-in-law, returns to Judea, where peace 
and plenty were restored. 

§ 3. The Return to Judea. On their way Naomi 
persuades Ruth and Orpah to go back to their relatives in 
Moab, to which the latter reluctantly consents; but Ruth 
positively refuses to Leave her mother-in-law. At length, 



Ch. XIV § 4. DESIGN OF THE BOOK. 07 

through the leadings of Providence, Ruth becomes known 
to Boaz, a rich land owner of the tribe of Ephraim, who 
was related to Elinielech, her deceased father-in-law. To 
him she is shortly married, and becomes the mother of 
Obed; "and Obed begat Jesse, and Jesse begat David." 
Ch. iv: 22, See also Matt. ch. i. 

§ 4. Design of the Book. " The design of Ruth is to 
lead us, 1 — Into the true doctrine of Providence; it shows 
how conversant God is about our private concerns, and 
teaches us ' in all our ways to acknowledge God. ' 

2. — To lead us to Christ, who descended from Ruth. 

3. — In the conversion of Ruth, the Moabitess, we have 
also a type of the calling of the Gentiles into the fellowship 
of the Messiah. " — Henry. 

Henry further says: "There is scarcely a chapter in all 
the sacred history, that stoops so low as this, to take cog- 
nizance of so humble a person as Ruth, a poor Moabitish 
widow; so humble in action as her gleaning corn, in a neigh- 
bor's field, and the minute circumstances thereof. But all 
this was in order to her being grafted into the line of Christ, 
and taken in among his ancestors, that she might be a figure 
of the espousals of the Gentile church to Christ. Is. liv: 1. 

§ 5. Boaz Mighty in the Law. Of the rich Boaz the 
Chaldee reads, mighty in the luiv. If he was both it was a 
most rare and excellent conjunction; to be mighty in 
wealth, and mighty in the Scriptures too, is to be mighty 
indeed. He was the grandson of Nashan, prince of Judah 
in the wilderness, and son of Salmon, probably a younger 
son, by Rahab, the harlot of Jericho." 

§ 6. A Comforting Reflection. This little history 
teaches us that good people, like Naomi, may be very much 
afflicted for a time, yet God will be their comfort. Ruth's 
sacrifice of family and friends for God, and her subsequent 
prosperity and honor, teach God's special care over those 
who trust in him. 



98 I SAMUEL. 

CHAPTER XV. 

I SAMUEL. 

§ 1. Samuel : Yolume I. (See Chronology, Chap. 
XXIV : § 6.) The first twenty-five chapters are supposed 
to have been written by Samuel, and the remainder by 
Nathan and. Gad. 

GOLDEX TOPIC, "ISRAEL'S AND JUDAITS KINGS." 

The two books of Samuel are also called the First and 
Second Books of the Kings, or first and second volumes of 
the four books which contain the history of "Israel's and 
Judah's Kings." The first two volumes bring out the 
complete establishment of the kingdom; while in the fol- 
lowing books is found, in connection with the history of 
the kings, that which may be particularly attributed to 
God, or God's dealings with men. 

This first volume contains the account of the change of 
government from judges to kings, and includes a period of 
80 years, from the birth of Samuel, the last of the judges, 
to the death of Saul, who was the first of the kings. 

§ 2. The Writers. This book derives its name from 
the prophet Samuel, by whom at least the fore part, as far 
as the twenty-fifth chapter, was probably written. The 
last part, with the book following, is ascribed to Nathan 
and Gad (see 1 Chron. xxix: 29). As to this there is no 
difference of opinion. 

§ 3. A Word to the Reader. There is so much of 
interest in this book that it is difficult to make an outline; 
for we know not where to begin or end. We will only 
present a few topics; not that these topics are of greater 
interest than others, but the leading ones. A careful 



Oh. XV: § 5. OUTLINE OF I SAMUEL. 99 

reading of this book will be of. profit, as in this and the 
following book are many exhibitions of the attributes of 
God in his dealings with men. 

§ 4. General Divisions of 1 Samuel. The book 
seems to divide itself into three general heads or divisions: 

I. Chap, i-viii. An account of Eli's fall, and Samuel's 

rise and good government. 

II. Chap, ix-xv. Samuel's resignation, and Saul's advance- 

ment and wicked reign. 

III. Chap, xvi-xxxi. The choice of David as king; his 
struggle with Saul; Saul's downfall, and David's as-* 
cendancy to the throne. 

§ 5. Outline of 1 Samuel. 

I. Chap. i. Contains an account of the birth of Samuel. 

II. Chap, ii: 1-10. The song of Hannah. 

III. Chap, ii: 11-36. The mal-administration of Eli's sons. 

IV. Chap. iii. The call of Samuel, and the denunciation 
against Eli's house. 

V. Chap. iv. The capture of the ark, and the death of 

Eli. 

VI. Chap. v-vi. The chastisement of the Philistines, and 
the restoration of the ark. 

VII. Chap. vii. The people repent, renounce their idols, 
and defeat the Philistines. 

VIII. Chap, viii-ix. The people ask and obtain a king. 

IX. Chap. xii. Samuel protests his integrity to the assem- 
bled people, and exhorts them to obedience. 

X. Chap, xiii-xiv. Sanies wars with the Philistines. 

XI. Chap, xv.- His war with the Amalekites, and his 
rejection from the throne. 

XII. Chap. xvi. The anointing of David, and his intro- 
duction to Saul. 

XIII. Chap, xvii : 1-54. David's victory over Goliath. 

XIV. Chap, xvii: 54-xxvii. Saul persecutes David. 



100 I SAMUEL. 

XV. Chap, xxviii. Saul consults the witch of Endor. 
X\ 7 L Chap, xxix-xxxi. Saul's defeat ; his death and 
burial. 

§ 6. Eulogy on Samuel. We should neTer lose sight 
of Samuel as a most admirable character. Observe his 
piety, his obedience to Eli, and his' strict regard for the 
truth. He is earnest and persevering as a minister, lead- 
ing men to repentance. As a judge he feared God, was 
unselfish, and always sought the good of others. Those 
who gather a knowledge of his life will observe that ' ' He 
lived to the noblest of purposes — the glory of God and the 
good of his country. He died full of years and of honor, 
and was universally lamented. " — Stackhouse. 

§ 7. Samuel as a Prophet. ''Samuel was the most 
famous prophet after Moses, distinguished like him for his 
frequent intercessions, and the first of that succession of 
prophets, the great subject of whose predictions was Christ. 
Luke, i: 32. The book discloses a grand display of Christ, 
who is (1 Sam. ii: 10) here for the first time in Scripture 
spoken of as the Messiah, or Anointed, and also as a king- 
before that office was established among the Israelites. 

'Who does not see,' says St. Austin, 'that the spirit of 
Hannah prophesied of the Christian religion, the city of 
God, whose king and founder is Christ. This is indeed 
the chief import of the hymn. ' Compare Hannah's song 
with that of Mary, Luke, i: 46-55." — Nichotts. 

In conclusion, let us bear in mind that the first king of 
Israel was not left without a prophet of God, with whom 
he could advise; and more, he could not say he was not 
advised. And so it was with nearly all the subsequent 
kings. For instance. Samuel was prophet to Saul, Nathan 
to David, Elijah to Ahab, etc. 



Gil. XVI: § 2. DAVID AX J) THE BOOK OF PSALMS. 101 

CHAPTER XVI. 

II SAMUEL. 

§ 1. Samuel : Volume II. (See Chronology, Chap. 
XXIV: § 6.) Written by Nathan, B. C. 1030. 

GOLDEN TOPIC, " ISBAEl's AXI) Jt'DAH'S KINGS. " 

This book derives its name from the prophet Samuel; it 
was written by Nathan. It bears an exact resemblance to 
the preceding history, and is likewise connected with the 
history which follows it — I and II Kings. It comprises a 
period of 38 years of David's reign. It is very important 
that the reader should acquaint himself well with the 
history of this king, in order that he may have a better 
understanding of other portions of Scripture, particularly 
the Psalms. 

§ 2. David and the Book of Psalms. He wrote 
many of them when meditating on the various circum- 
stances of his life. For instance, in recounting the many 
mercies and blessings of God, his heart was filled with love 
and gratitude, and inspired to pen the 103d Psalm, where 
he says: " Bless the Lord, my soul!" At other times, 
when* thinking of his sinfulness in the sight of a just Grod, 
his heart humbled and penitent, he is made to cry out in 
the language of the 51st Psalm: "Have mercy upon me, 
God, according to thy loving kindness." And at other 
times still he is meditating on his early pastoral life of a 
shepherd boy, and the many dangers attending it; possibly 
thinking of the time when, in defense of the flock, he is 
obliged to beard the lion, which he slays, and thus brings 
security to the innocent sheep ; it was probably when 
reflecting upon these things that his heart goes out in 



102 U SAMUEL. 

exultant praise to God, and he exclaims, in the language 
of the '23d Psalm: "The Lord is my shepherd, I shall not 
want." It is hoped the student will not fail to read these 
Psalms in this connection. 

§ 3. General Divisions of 2 Samuel. This Second 
Book of Samuel, in its more general character, divides 
itself into two general heads. 

I. David establishing himself at Jerusalem as the seat 
of government. 

II. The subduing of the Philistines, Moabites, Ammon- 
ites, Edomites, Amalekites, and the Assyrians; extending 
his kingdom to the utmost bounds of the land, which had 
never before been possessed by them; thus fulfilling the 
promise made to Abraham. Gen. xii: 2. 

§ 4. Outline of II Samuel. 

I. Chap. i. Contains David's^lamentations over Saul and 

Jonathan. 

II. Chap. ii-v. His subjugation of the house of Saul, and 

his own confirmation in the kingdom. Verse 8 to end: 
His victories over the Jebusites and Philistines. 

III. Chap, vi-viii. He fetches the ark from Kirjath- 
jearim, and purposes to build the temple, but is not 
permitted. 

IV. Chap, viii-x. His victory over the Philistines, Moab- 
ites and Ammonites. 

V. Chap, xi-xii: 25. His sin with Bathsheba, and the 

birth of Solomon. Verse 26 (ch. xii) to end: He 
takes Kabbah. 

VI. Chap, xiii-xviii. His domestic troubles, and flight 
from Jerusalem. 

VII. Chap, xix-xx. His return to the capital, and quel- 
ling of the insurrection. 

VIII. Chap xxi. The punishment of the sons of Saul, 
and war with the Philistines. 



Ch. XVI: § 5. SUPPLEMENT TO LI SAMUEL. 103 

IX. Chap, xxii-xxiii: T. David's psalm of thanksgiving 
and last words. Verse 8 to end: Catalogue of his 
mighty men. 

X. Chap. xxiv. His offence of numbering the people, 

his penitence and sacrifice. 

£ 5. Supplement to II Samuel. {See Chronology, 

Chap. XXIY: $ 6.) This book is incomplete, and re- 
quires 1 Chron., chap, xxii-xxix. to supplement it. These 
chapters bring out incidents connected with making ar- 
rangements for building the temple, which are not found 
elsewhere. The reader will readily see the connection. 

Chap. xxii. Preparations for building the temple. 

Chap, xxiii-xxvii. Order of service, i officers and divisions. 

Chap, xxviii. David presents the plan. 

Chap. xxix. Gifts for the temple : David's prayer of 
thanksgiving. 

By noting the dates, as found in all reference Bibles, it 
will be seen that these chapters fill up an interim in the 
history chronologically. They form a complete historical 
chain, and fill up the space between the books of Samuel 
and the books which follow. 

§ 6. Importance of this History. "The books of 
Samuel connect the eham of sacred history, by describing 
the circumstances of a very interesting period. They 
describe the Jewish church a.> established by David, and 
point out his typical relation to Christ, and are considered 
as a key to the Psalms." — Bagster. 

Thus we conclude the second volume of these very inter- 
esting historic books: as they have a close connection with 
what follows in Bible history. 



104 I KINGS. 

CHAPTER XVII. 
I KINGS. 

§ 1. History of the Kings : Volume I. {See Chron- 
ology, Chap. XXIV : § 6.) Written by the high priests. 

golden topic, "god's attributes.'' See Index. 

The two books of Samuel are sometimes called the first 
and second books of the kings; while the two which bear 
the name of kings would be the third and fourth, or a 
continuation of the same history. 

The authors of these last named books cannot be ascer- 
tained with certainty; but they were doubtless, like the 
former, compiled from the authentic records kept by the 
scribes and recorders, who were contemporary with the 
eyents; 2 Sam. yiii: 1?; 2 Kings, xviii: 18. It is generally 
supposed that Nathan was the compiler, and are univer- 
sally accepted as a correct account of persons, incidents 
and places referred to. 

This first book embraces a period of 126 years, referring 
first to David's old age and the anointing of Solomon, Ins 
son, as king of Israel, and extending to the death of 
Jehoshaphat, king of Judah. 

§ 2. General Divisions. This book may be divided 
into two general heads: 

I. The long and successful reign of Solomon, as found 
m the first eleven chapters. 

II. In the remaining eleven chapters an account of the 
division of the kingdom; the tribes of Judah and Benjamin 
forming the kingdom of Judah, under the reign of Reho- 
boam, son of Solomon; and the remaining ten tribes under 
Jeroboam, son of Nebat, retaining the old name of Israel. 



Ch. XVII: § 3. outline, i kixgs, part i. 106 

§ 3. Outline : I Kings, Part I. The following is 
an outline, the design of which is particularly to bring out 
the two general divisions: first, the reign of Solomon; and 
secondly, the reign of the kings after the revolt; and more 
especially the names, designating those who reigned over 
Judah from those who reigned over Israel, and the partic- 
ular prophet sent to these several kings. 

Chap. i-ii. David's old age; Solomon declared king; 
David's charge to Solomon; his death. 

Chap, iii-iv. Solomon's choice of wisdom, and his pros- 
perity. 

Chap. v. Solomon's contract with Hiram for material 
to build the Temple. 

Chap. vi. Building of the Temple. 

Chap. vii. Ornaments and vessels of the Temple finished^ 

Chap. viii. Dedication of the Temple. 

Chap. ix. God's covenant with Solomon. 

Chap. x. Queen of Sheba visits Solomon. 

Chap. xi. Idolatry of Solomon, the result, and his death. 

§ 4. The Reign of Solomon. The most distin- 
guished feature in the reign of Solomon was the building 
and dedication of the temple, and God's taking possession 
of it. Says Bishop Home: "Let us imagine to ourselves 
a building where scarce anything appeared less valuable 
than silver and gold; a building of which God himself 
condescended to be the Architect, and had therefore in 
the design and execution all the perfection that Infinite 
Wisdom could give it. 

Before this building, let us think we see the nation of 
the Israelites assembled, encircling their king seated upon 
an exalted throne of burnished brass, with all the ensigns 
of majesty and royalty ; whilst, amid the harmony of 
different kinds of instruments, with the voices of the 



106 



I KINGS. 



whole people joining in a grand chorus of praise and 
thanksgiving, the glory of Jehovah, or a body of light 
above the brightness of the sun, descends from heaven 
and fills the temple. The imagination can hardly reach 
this grand picture. This is the scene described by the 
sacred writer in 2 Chron. v: 11-14." 

Let us not think that He is less present with us than 
He was with Israel. Is the Christian church less favored 
than the Jewish church was? Have we lost anything by 
the incarnation of the Son of God? Surely not. For He 
(the Son) hath declared: " Where two or three are gathered 
together in my name, there am I in the midst." Matt, 
xviii: 20. " Seeing then that we have a great high priest 
that is passed into the heavens, Jesus, the Son of God, let 
us come boldly unto the throne of grace, having boldness 
to enter into the holiest by his blood." Heb. iv: 14; x: 19. 
AlsoEph. ii: 21, 22. 

The fall of Solomon should teach us that the very 
highest endowments possessed by man are not sufficient to 
preserve one from falling into the gravest sin and folly, 
and that the way of the transgressor is always hard. 

§ 5. Outline: I Kings, Part II. 

Chap. xii. Rehoboam succeeds Solomon; the rebellion; 
the kingdom divided. Judah and Benjamin form the 
kingdom of Judah; the remaining ten tribes form the 
kingdom of Israel, under Jeroboam, son of Nebat, made 
king at Shechem. 



JUDAH. 

Ch. xiii. Rehoboam, king 
17 years. He refuses to grant 
the people's request; the re- 
bellion follows. 

Prophet, Shemaiah. 



ISRAEL. 

Ch. xiii. Jeroboam, king 
22 years. His hand is with- 
ered; the disobedient prophet 
slain. 

Prophet, Ahijah. 



Oil. XVII: §5. OUTLIKE, I KINGS, PART II. 



107 



JUDAH. 

Ch. xiv. Shishak, king of 
Egypt, carries away the treas- 
ures. 

Abu am, son of Rehoboam, 
king 3 years. 



Ch. xv. Asa, king 41 years. 
His good reign. 



Ch. xvi. 26th year of Asa. 

31st year of Asa. 
38th year of Asa. 



ISRAEL. 

Ch. xiv. The king's son is 
sick; he sends his wife to the 
prophet Ahijah. 

Nadab, son of Jeroboam, 
king 2 years. 



Ch. xv. Baasha, king 24 
years. His wicked reign. 
Prophet, Jehu. 



Ch. xvi. Elah, son of 
Baasha, king 2 years. 

Zimri, king 7 days. 

Omri, king 12 years, 6 in 
Tirzah and 6 in Samaria. 

Ahab, son of Omri, king 
22 years; takes Jezebel to 
wife. 



Ch. xvii. Elijah the proph- 
et; his prophecy of drouth; fed by the ravens and the poor 
widow; raises the widow's son to life. 

Ch. xviii. Elijah meets, 
with Ahab; Elijah's sacrifice; priests of Baal slain; the 
prophet obtains rain. 

| Ch. xix. Elijah flees ; is 
miraculously fed; goes to Horeb, where he hears a still 
small voice; returns to Israel; anoints Jehu king of Israel; 
and calls Elisha the prophet, who follows him. 

| Ch. xx. Samaria besieged 
by Benhadad, king of Syria, but is defeated by Ahab, who 
was reproved by a prophet. 

Ch. xxi. Jezebel's scheme 
to destroy Naboth; Elijah prophecies the death of Ahab 
and Jezebel. 



108 



ii kings. 



JUDAH. 

Ch. xxii. Jehoshaphat, 
king 25 years; his alliance 
with Ahab against the Syri- 
ans; he refuses an alliance 
with Ahaziah. 

Jehoram reigns 8 years. 



ISRAEL. 

Ch. xxii. Death of Ahab. 
Ahaziah, his son, king 2 
years. He did evil in the 
sight of the Lord, and walk- 
ed in the way of his father. 



§ 6. Remarks on the Kings. The characters of the 
kings of Judah referred to may be thus briefly given: 
David, the devout; Solomon, the wise. 

After the revolt: Rehoboam, the simple; Abijah, the 
valiant; Asa, the upright; and Jehoshaphat, the religious. 

The reigns of these kings were long, when compared 
with the wicked kings of Israel. The number of the good 
was nearly equal to that of the bad; but the reigns of the 
good were generally long, and the bad short. Chap, xvi: 15. 

We now pass to the second volume of the history of the 
kings. 



CHAPTER XVIII. 



II KINGS. 



§ 1. History of the Kings: Tolunie II. (8& 

Chronology, Chap. XXIV: § 6.) Written by the high 
priests. 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "GOD'S ATTRIBUTES." 

This book is a continuation of the preceding, and con- 
tains the contemporary history of the kingdoms of Israel 
and Judah during a period of 308 years, from the time of 



Ch. XVIII: § I. OUTLINE OF II KINGS. 109 

Elijah to the destruction of Jerusalem. The following is 
an outline of the history of the kings of Judah and Israel 
up to the fifteenth chapter. 

(a.) Outline of II Kings, Chapters I-XIV : 



JUDAH. 



Ch. i. Jehoshaphat reigns. 



ISRAEL. 



Ch. i. Ahaziah reigns ; 
harmed by a fall, sends for 
Elijah, who prophecies his death; two companies sent to 
Elijah destroyed, while the the third is saved; Ahaziah's 
death. Jehoram king 12 years. 

| Ch. ii. Elisha follows Eli- 
jah to Bethel, Jericho, and passes oyer Jordan on dry 
ground; the horses and chariot of fire take Elijah up into 
heaven; Elisha's return through the Jordan to Jericho; he 
heals the waters of Jericho ; bears destroy the children that 
mock him. 

Ch. iii. Jehoram, with the 
help of the kings of Judah and Edom, smites Moab, by 
prophecy of Elisha. 

Ch. iv. Elisha multiplies 
the widow's oil; raises the Shunammite's son; heals the 
pottage. 

Ch. y. Naaman, by the re- 
port of a captive Hebrew maid, goes to Samaria and is 
healed by Elisha; the prophet's servant, Gehazi, tells a lie 
and is smitten with leprosy. 

Ch. vi. Iron made to swim 
by Elisha; he discloses to the king of Israel the secret 
counsel of the king of Syria; the Syrian army smitten with 
blindness, led to Samaria, fed- and returned to their master; 
siege of Samaria and famine. 

Ch. vii. Elisha prophecies 
plenty in Samaria; flight of the Syrians. 



110 



II KINGS. 



JUDAH. 

Ch. viii. Jehoram's wick- 
ed reign; Edom's reyolt. 

Ahaziah, son of Jehoram, 
reigns one year; joins Israel 
against Hazael, king of Syria. 



Oh. ix. Ahaziah joins Je- 
horam against Jehu; flees 
when Jehoram is slain, and 
dies in Megiddo. 



ISRAEL. 

Ch. viii. The Shunam- 
mite's land restored; Elisha 
prophecies the death of Ben- 
hadad, king of Syria; Hazael 
reigns in his stead; Jehoram 
wounded. 



Ch. ix. A young prophet 
anoints Jehu king of Ra- 
moth-Gilead, who reigns 28 
years; he kills Jehoram in 
the field of Naboth; Jezebel, 
wife of Ahab, is thrown from 
a window, killed, and eaten 
by dogs, as Elijah prophecied. 



Ch. x. The seventy sons of 
Ahab slain by command of Jehu; also forty-two of the 
brethren of Ahaziah, king of Israel; he destroys the house 
and worshippers of Baal; he follows in the sins of his 
predecessors; Hazael smites the coasts of Israel; Jehu dies; 
his son Jehoahaz reigns in his stead. 

Ch. xi. Athaliah, queen of Judah six years; she de- 
stroys all the royal seed except Jehoash (or Joash), who 
was saved by his aunt, Jehosheba ; by arrangement of 
Jehoiada, the priest, Jehoash is crowned at the age of 7, 
and reigns 40 years; Athaliah is slain. 

Ch. xii. Jehoash reigns well all the days of Jehoiada, 
the priest; he orders the temple repaired; diverts Hazael, 
king of Syria, from Jerusalem, by giving him the gold, 
silver and treasures belonging to the temple; he is then 
slain by his own servants. 

Amaziah reigns in his stead. 

Ch. xiii. Jehoahaz, son of 
Jehu, king of Israel; a wicked reign of 17 years; he dies; 



Oh. XVI11 § 2. PROPHECY OF JONAH. 



Ill 



JUDAH. ISRAEL. 

is succeeded by his son Jehoash (Joash ver. 14), 16 years. 
The seat of government is still at Samaria. Elisha proph- 
ecies Israel's victories over Syria; he is taken sick and 
dies; Israel invaded by the Moabites; Jehoash recaptures 
the cities taken by the Syrians. 



Oh. xiv. Amaziah, son of 
Joash, reigns 29 years; he 
sends messengers to Jehoash, 
king of Israel; war was the 
result; he is slain by a con- 
spiracy. There was no king 
for eleven years. 

Azariah (also called Uz- 
ziah), son of Amaziah, king 
52 years, 



Ch. xiv. Jehoash defeats 
the king of Judah; Jerusa- 
lem is destroyed, and her 
gold, silver, treasure and ves- 
sels of the temple carried to 
Samaria. 

Jeroboam II, king 41 years. 

Jonah prophecies concern- 
ing the coasts of Israel; the 
fulfillment. 

Zechariah king, son of 
Jeroboam. 
Outline continued, see § 5. 

§ 2. Prophecy of Jonah. (See Diagram, Chapter 
13.) 
golden topic, "to nineveh." See Index. 

Jonah was the son of Amittai, a native of Geth-hepher, 
in G-alilee. He is said to have prophesied concerning 
Jeroboam II, that he should restore the coasts of Israel; 
which prophecy, not now extant, was perhaps delivered in 
the reign of Jehoash, the father of Jeroboam II. 

It is difficult to decide whether his prophecy concerning 
Nineveh was delivered before or after the prophecy referred 
to; but it does decide the question of placing him at this 
place in the history we are now pursuing. 

(a.) First Mention of Him. The first mention we have 
of Jonah is in 2 Kings, xiv: 25. He is considered the 
most ancient of all the prophets whose writings have been 



XXIII: 



112 HOSEA. 

handed down to us. He appears as a prophet to the 
Gentiles, being sent to Nineveh, which soon after this 
became the capital of the great Assyrian Empire, a city 
equally distinguished for its magnificence and corruption. 
Nineveh at this time is supposed to have been much larger 
than Babylon, and the chief gentile city of the world. 
Assyria is frequently mentioned in the 15th and following 
chapters of 2 Kings. It is necessary that the reader should 
first read this prophecy as an episode in the history, ena- 
bling him better to understand what follows. 

(b. ) His Prophecy. Jonah's prophecy is a simple narra- 
tive, containing nothing poetical except his thanksgiving 
ode in the second chapter, which is most beautiful and 
sublime. He preaches to a people having 600,000 young 
children who know not their right hand from their left. 
It is supposed that Jonah was the writer of this book. 
(c. ) Outline. 
Chap. i. Jonah sent to Nineveh ; flees to Tarshish ; 

being overtaken by a storm, he is thrown into the sea, 

and swallowed by a fish. 
Chap. ii. For his prayer he is delivered out of the belly 

of the fish. 
Chap. iii. Jonah sent again; preaches to the Ninevites; 

the)' repent. 
Chap. iv. Jonah repines at God's mercy; he is reproved 

by the type of a gourd. 
(d.) Type of Christ. The prophet was swallowed up by 
a great fish; our Savior was admitted into the jaws of 
death, and for the same length of time. In this instance 
he is a sign of Christ. See Matt, xii: 39, 40. 

§ 3. Prophecy of Hosea. (See Diagram, Chapter 
XX III: §13.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, ''AGAINST ISRAEL." 

Of Hosea's parentage we have no certain information, 
except that he was the son of Beeri. He prophesied 



Ch. XVIII: § 3. PKOPHECY OF HOSEA. 113 

during the reigns of Uzziah, Jotham, Ahaz, and in the 
third year of Hezekiah, kings of Judah; and during the 
reign of Jeroboam II, king of Israel. He was no doubt 
an Israelite who lived in Samaria, 'or within the borders of 
the ten tribes, as his predictions are chiefly against them. 

Huetius observes that "Many passages- in Jeremiah 
and Ezekiel seem to refer to, and to be borrowed from, 
Hosea, who wrote a good while before them. As Jer. vii: 
34; xvi: 9; xxv: 10: and Ez. xxvi: 13, speak the same with 
Hosea, ii: 11. So Ez. xvi: 16, etc., is taken from Hosea, 
ii: 8. Thus one prophet confirms another." 

He is supposed to have prophesied during a term of 80 
or 90 years. 

(a.) Particular Prophecies. Among other prophecies, 
Hosea foretells: 

1. The captivity and dispersion of Israel. Chap, v: 7; 
ix: 3, 6-11: x: 5. 6: xiii: 16. 

2. The deliverance of Judah from Sennacherib. Chap. 
i: 7. See 2 Kings, xix: 35. 

3. The present destitute condition of the Jews is por- 
trayed. Chap, iii: 4. 

1. The restoration, and union with the Gentiles in the 
kingdom of Christ. Chap, i: 10, 11; iii: 5. See Rom. 
ix: 24-26. 

5. The call of the Savior out of Egypt. Chap, xi: 1. 
See Matt, ii: 15. 

6. His resurrection on the third day. Chap, vi: 2. 
See Matt, xxviii: 6. 

T. The assurance of the resurrection from the power of 
death and the grave. Chap, xiii: 14. See 1 Cor. xv: 35. 

Prophecies are referred to by our Lord (Matt, ix: 12, 13; 
xii: 7): by Matthew (ii: 15; compare Hosea, xi: 1); and by 
Paul ( Rom. ix: 25, 26; 1 Cor. xv: 4; compare Hos. vi: 6). 



114 HOSE A. 

(b.) Divided into Discourses. "The prophecy contains 
fourteen chapters, and may be divided into five discourses, 
not including the title (ch. i: 1), viz: 

DISCOURSE I. 

I. Chap, i: 2-11. Under the figure of the supposed infi- 

delity of the prophet's wife is represented the spiritual 
infidelity of the Israelites, a remnant of whom, it is 
promised, shall be saved. 

II. Chap, ii: 1-11. They are exhorted to forsake idolatry. 

III. Chap, ii: 11-23, and iii. Promises are then intro- 
duced, on the general conversion of the twelve tribes 
to Christianity, and the purposes of God toward the 
ten tribes, under the figure of the })rophet taking 
back his wife on her repentance. 

DISCOURSE II. 

Chap, iv-vi: 1-3. A reproof of the cruelty and idolatry 
of Israel, against which the inhabitants of Judah are 
exhorted to take warning; interspersed with promise 
of pardon. 

DISCOURSE III. 

I. From chap, vi: 4, to vii: 10. The prophet's exhortation 

to repentance proving ineffectual, God complains by 
him of their obstinancy. 

II. Chap, vii: 11-16, and viii. Israel will be carried into 

captivity into Assyria by Sennacherib, notwithstand- 
ing their reliance on Egypt. 

DISCOURSE IV. 

I. Chap, ix, x. The captivity and dispersion of Israel. 

II. Chap. xi. Israel further reproved for idolatry, yet 

they shall not be utterly destroyed; and their return 
to their own country is foretold. 

III. Chap, xii, xiii: 1-8. Renewed denunciations arc made 
on account of their idolatry. 



Ch. XVIII: § 4. prophecy of amos. 115 

DISCOURSE V. 

I. Chap, xiii: 9-16. After further denunciations of pun- 

ishment, he intermixes promises of restoration from 
captivity. 

II. Chap, xiv: 1-3. The prophet further exhorts Israel to 

repentance, and furnishes them with a beautiful form 
of prayer adapted to their circumstances. 

III. Chap, xiv: 4-9. Foretells their reformation from idol- 
atry, together with the subsequent restoration of all 
the tribes, and their conversion to Christ." — Home's 
Introduction. 

§ 4. Prophecy of Amos. (See Diagram, Chapter 
XXIII: §13.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "CAPTIVITY OF ISRAEL." 

This prophecy must drop in at this point for two reasons : 
first, it says he prophesied during the reign of Uzziah ; and 
second, we read of the fulfillment of a portion of this 
prophecy in the subsequent history, 2 Kings, xviii: 9. 

Amos was contemporary with the prophet Hosea. He 
was not educated in the schools of the prophets, founded 
by Samuel, but was called to the prophetic office when a 
herdsman and gatherer of Sycamore fruit. He lived in 
Tekoa, in the territory of Judah, and was sent to prophecy 
against : 

I. The surrounding nations, as follows: 

1. The Syrians (ch. i: 1-5), which see fulfilled in 2 K. 
xvi: 9. 

2. The Phillistines (i: 6-8); recorded as accomplished in 
2 K. xviii: 8; Jer. xlvii: 1-5; and 2 Chron. xxvi: 6. 

3. The Tyrians (i: 9, 10). 

4. The Edomites (i: 11, 12, compared with Jer. xxv: 21; 
xxvii: 3, 6). 

5. The Ammonites (i: 13-15). 

6. The Moabites (ii: 1-3). 



116 AMOS. 

II. To both Israel and Judali (from ch. ii: 4, to ix: 10). 
"Hear this word that the Lord hath spoken against you, 
children of Israel ! against the whole family which 1 
brought up from the land of Egypt." Oh. iii: 1. 

III. Their desolation and restoration (chap, ix: 11-15; 
compare Acts, xv: 13-16). 

(a.) His Use of Imagery. As Archbishop Newcome 
observes: "He borrows many images from the scenes in 
which he is engaged; but he uses them with skill, and 
gives them tone and dignity by the eloquence and grandeur 
of his manner.'' "The same celestial Spirit/' says Lowth, 
"actuated Isaiah, and Daniel in the court, and Amos in 
the sheepfold, occasionally employing the natural eloquence 
of some, and at other times making them eloquent." 

It was Amos who said, in answer to Amaziah, the prophet 
of Baal, when told to flee from Bethel, "I was no prophet, 
neither was I a prophet's son; but was a herdsman. The 
Lord took me as I followed the flock." 

(b.) Outline. 

Chap. i-ii. A prophet of Judah, who prophesied against 
Syria, Philistia, Tyre, Edom and Amnion; God's wrath 
against Moab, Judah and Israel; he complains against 
their unthankf illness. 

Chap. iii. The necessity of God's judgments against Israel, 
and the publication of it; lie will visit the altars of 
Bethel. 

Chap. iv. Israel and Judah reproved for oppression, idol- 
atry and incorrigibleness. 

Chap. v. An exhortation to obedience and repentance ; 
God rejects their hypocritical service. 

Chap. vi. Israel's desolation. 

Chap. vii. God's judgments of grasshoppers and fire ; 
Amos, in Bethel, is admonished to flee to Judah. 

Chap. viii. Illustrations of the certainty of Israel's end. 
See chap, iii: 1. 

Chap. ix. Prophecy of the restoration of Israel. 



Ch. XVIII: § 6. PROPHECY OF JOEL. 117 

§ 5. Outline : II Kings, Chapter xv. {Continued 

from § 1, a.) 



JUDAH. 

Ch. xv. Uzziah's good 
reign; he dies a leper. 

Jotham, son of Uzziah, 
king; has a good reign of 16 
years ; is succeeded by Ahaz, 
who reigned 16 years at Je- 
rusalem. 



ISRAEL. 

Ch. xv. Zachariah, son 
of Jeroboam II, reigned only 
6 months; slain by Shallum, 
who usurped the throne and 
reigned 1 month; was slain 
by Menahem, who reigned 
10 years; he was an evil king. 
Pekahiah, son of Menahem, 

reigned 2 years ; Pekah slays him and reigns 20 year,-. 

Tiglath-pileser, king of Assyria, takes certain cities of 

Israel captive to Assyria. Hoshea, the son of Elah, slew 

Pekah and reigned 10 years.* 
Outline continued, see § 9. 

§ 6. Prophecy of Joel. (See Diagram, Chapter 
XXIII: § 13.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "TERRIBLE JUDGMENTS." 

Concerning the family, condition and pursuit of this 
prophet, nothing is known for a certainty. He is supposed 
to have delivered his prophecies soon after Hosea com- 
menced his ministry; and to have addressed Judah, on 
account of the frequent mention of Judah and Jerusalem; 
and is generally supposed to have lived in the reign of 
Uzziah; and to have predicted the overthrow of Judah by 
the Chaldeans, at the time when Uzziah was confiding in 

* Here is affixed the prophecy of Joel, which should be read in 
this connection. Also that portion of the prophecy of Isaiah which 
was uttered during the reign of Uzziah finds place here, with a 
preface which should be well studied, noting the several parts, I, II, 
III, etc. Note the number of chapters in each part. Chapters i-vi 
should be read in this connection. . 



118 JOEL. 

his military power, "and his heart was lifted up to de- 
struction.". 2 Chron. xxvi: 16. 

(a.) A Sad State of Things. The prophet begins with 
a historical account of a most terrible devastation of the 
land, by the combined forces of four of the most destruc- 
tive insects, viz: the palmer worm, the locust, the canker 
worm and the caterpillar; and in connection with this a 
most scorching drought. Knowing the destructive feature 
of each of these enemies of mankind, the prophet gives 
us a most vivid picture of the desolation of the land, an 
account of which is not found elsewhere. After the pre- 
sentation of this terrible picture which was before their 
eyes (see ch. i : 16), the prophet exhorts the people to 
repentance, comparing the nation to men under the influ- 
ence of intoxicating liquor, stupid, unconscious and asleep. 
He says: "Awake, ye drunkards," etc.; and he exhorts 
them to fasting and. prayer. He calls upon them to pro- 
claim "a solemn assembly, gather the elders and all the 
inhabitants of the land into' the house of the Lord your 
God, and cry unto the Lord;" and in connection with this 
promises the favor of God to those who would be obedient. 

Such was the condition of the people at the time when 
this prophecy was uttered. 

(/;. ) Outline. The principal events which seem to be 
prefigured and predicted in this book of Joel are as follows: 

I. The invasion of the Assyrian hosts under Sennacherib 
(fulfilled 2 K. xix; also Isa. xxxvi), under the symbol of 
locusts, chap, i: 1-4; and the destruction of Jerusalem 
under Titus, chap, ii: 30. Compare Matt, xxiv: 29. 

II. The gospel dispensation; the outpouring of the Holy 
Spirit which accompanied it, chap, ii: 28-30. Compare 
Acts, ii: 17-21. 

III. The destruction of their enemies, and the glorious 
state of the Christian church which is to follow it ; chap. in. 



Ch. XVIII: § 7. PROPHECY OF ISAIAH. 119 

§ 7. Prophecy of Isaiah. (See Diagram, Chapter 
XXIII: § 13.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "EVANGELIST." 

Of Isaiah's personal history little is known, though he 
was so eminent a man, and prophesied during a period of 
fifty or sixty years. 

He was a man of contrite spirit (chap, vi: 5), and felt a 
deep commiseration for his own people (xxi: 3), and for 
the heathen (xvi: 9), thus showing that mind to be in him 
which was in Christ Jesus (Phil, ii: 5). 

Isaiah means Good news of Jehovah, hence he has been 
called "The Evangelist." 

(a.) General Analysis. The contents of this book of 
Isaiah may be divided into six parts: 
Part I. See § 8. 

Chap. i-v. Contains a general description and state and 
condition of the Jews in several periods of their history, 
with prophecies of the promulgation and success of the 
gospel, and the coming of the Messiah to judgment. 

These predictions were delivered during the reign of 
Uzziah, king of Judah. 

Part II. See Ch. XX: § 4. 

Chap, vi-xii. Comprises the predictions delivered in 
the reigns of Jotham and Ahaz. 

Part III. See Ch. XX: § 6. 

Chap, xiii-xxiii. Contains various predictions against 
the Babylonians, Assyrians, Philistines, and other nations 
with whom the Jews had intercourse. The prophecy in 
this and the two following parts was delivered during the 
reign of Hezekiah. 

Part IV. See Ch. XX: § 7. 

Chap, xxiv-xxxv. Contains a prophecy of the great 
calamities that should befall the people of God, of his 



120 ISAIAH. 

merciful preservation of a remnant of them, and their 
restoration to their OAvn country; and their conversion to 
the gospel, and the destruction of anti-Christ. 
Part V. See Ch. XX: § 9. 
Chap, xxxvi-xxxix. Comprises the historical part of the 
book of Isaiah, according to 2 Chron. xxxii: 32. It relates 
the invasion of Sennacherib, and the destruction of his 
army in answer to Hezekiah's prayer; Hezekiah's sickness. 
his miraculous recovery, and the prolongation of his life 
fifteen years. 

Part VI. 

Chap, xl-lxvi. Contains a series of prophecies delivered 
toward the close of the reign of Hezekiah; some say during 
the Babylonian captivity. (See Ch. XXII: § 2.) The chief 
subject of them is the restoration of the church. The 
redemption from Babylon is employed as an image to 
shadow, forth redemption by Christ; Isaiah so connecting 
the two events as scarcely ever to treat of the former 
without introducing some allusion to the latter. 

Isaiah's writings (Part VI) contain a view of the gospel 
dispensation, from the birth of the Messiah to that glorious 
period when the kingdoms of the world shall become the 
kingdoms of God and of his Christ.* 

(b.) Prophecies of Christ. "Thus are foretold: The 
divine nature of Christ (ch. vii : 14; ix: 6); his human 
descent (xi: 1); his threefold character of prophet (xlii: 1, 
6, 7; xlix: 1), priest (liii: 12), and king (ix: 6, T; xxxii: 1, 2). 
His coming is to be proclaimed by the Bap'tist (xl: 3, 4. 
with Matt, iii: 3, etc.); his appointment to preach (Ixi: 
1, 2); his miracles (xxxv: 5, 6); the rejection of his per- 
sonal ministry (vi: 9-12, with Matt, xiii: 14; also liii: 3): 
his suffering for our sins (1: G; liii: 4-11); his death and 
burial, with remarkable circumstances attending them (liii: 

* See introduction of Part VI of Isaiah's prophecy, Ch. XXII: £2. 



Ch. XVIII: §8. PROPHECY OF ISAIAH. 121 

10-12); his victory over the grave (xxv: 8; liii: 10-12); the 
rejection of the Jew (lxv: 2-7); the call of the G-entile 
world (xlix: 5-12: lxv: 1); the increase of his kingdom, (ix: 
7; xi: 4-10; lix: 16, etc.). 

The office of the Holy Spirit is also noticed (lxiii: 10, 11, 
14); while it is shown that the full manifestation of his 
office and influence was reserved for the times of the 
gospel (xxxii: 15; xxxv: 6; xliv: 8)." — Nicholls. 

In reading this and every other hook of the prophets, 
particular attention should be paid to those sins which call 
forth the indignation of God, that we may avoid them. 

We are now better prepared to enter into the more care- 
ful study of these writings. * 

§ 8. Prophecy of Isaiah During the Reign of 
ITzziah, King of Juclah. 

Outline to Part I, Chap. I-V. See § 7, {a). 

CHAPTER I. 

This first chapter is intended for a sort of preface to the 
whole book, and was probably the first sermon or prophecy 
published; and Calvin thinks these predictions were affixed 
to the door of the temple, that all might read them. 

Verse 2. The children of G-od. having rebelled, become 
a sinful nation. 5. Their corruption and desolation; a 
very small remnant saved. 10. He reproves them for their 
whole service. 16. He exhorts to repentance with promises 
and threatenings. 25. Promised grace on account of the 
remnant. f 28. Threatened destruction of the wicked. 

* The reader should read frequently and become familiar with the 
article on Rules of Interpretation. See Ch. I: § 25. 

f "The calamities of Ahaz, Sennacherib's invasion, the distress 
which it occasioned (2 K. xviii: 13-17), its surprising event, and 
Hezekiah's reformation, were accomplished in this prediction; and 
so were the Babylonish captivity (2 K. xxv), the redemption of the 
captive Jews (Neh. yii), and the consequent adherence to the wor- 
ship of Jehovah." — Scott. 



122 II KINGS. 

CHAPTER II. 

"This chapter, with chapters three and four, form one 
distinct prophecy, delivered about the close of UzziarT* 
reign, to Judah and Jerusalem. " — Scott. 

Verse 1. Isaiah prophesies the coming of Christ's king- 
dom. (Luke, xxiv: 46, 47.) 6. Wickedness is the cause 
of God's forsaking. 10. Exhortation to fear God. 

CHAPTER III. 

"Isaiah, in this chapter, goes on to foretell the desola- 
tions of Judah and Jerusalem for their sins, both that by 
the Babylonians (2 K. xxv), and that complete ruin by 
the Romans, A. D. 70." — Henry. 

Verse 1. Great confusion caused by sin. 9. The impu- 
dence of the people. 12. The oppression of the people. 
16. Judgments on the pride of the women. 

CHAPTER IV. 

Verse 1-6. A prophecy of Christ, the Branch, and the 
blessings to flow from him. 

CHAPTER V. 

Verse 1. In this parable God represents his care for 
his people, and their ungratefulness. 8. Woe upon cov- 
etousness. 11. Woe upon lasciviousness. 18. Woe upon 
impiety and injustice. 20. The execution of God's judg- 
ments. * 

§ 9. Outline II Kings, Chapter xvi. (Continued 
from § 5.) 

JUDAH. 

Ch. xvi. Ahaz king. Re- 



1SRAEL. 

Ch. xvi. Pekah king. 



zin, king of Syria, joined by 

the king of Israel, comes up to war against Jerusalem. 

Ahaz requests the king of Assyria to join him in defence 

* "This animated description," says Scott, "seems to predict tin 
invasion of Nebuchadnezzar, king of Babylon. B. C. 588. See 2 K 
xxv. 



Ch. XVIII: § 10. PROPHECY OF MICAH. 123 

against Israel; sends him presents; he consents; they take 
Damascus and slay the king. Ahaz spoils the temple; his 
death. Hezekiah, his son, reigns in his stead 29 years. 
Outline continued, see §11. 

§ 10. Prophecy of Micah. (See Diagram, Chapter 
XX 111: § 13.) . 

golden topic, "Christ's kingdom." 

Micah, the sixth of the minor prophets, was a native of 
Morasthi, a small town in the southern part of Judah. 
We learn from the introduction to his predictions (ch. i: 1) 
that he prophesied in the reigns of Jotham, Ahaz and 
Hezekiah (Jer. xxvi: 18), kings of Judah; consequently he 
was contemporary with the prophets Isaiah, Joel, Hosea 
and Amos. He began to prophesy a little after Isaiah, 
confirming his predictions, both against Judah and Israel. 

Scott says: "What we find here in writing is but an 
abstract of the sermon he preached during the reign of 
these kings. 

The date of chapter three is fixed in Jeremiah to the 
reign of Hezekiah (Jer. xxvi: 16-19); but nothing further 
is known with certainty concerning the time when Micah's 
predictions were delivered." 

(a.) His Predictions. One of his predictions is related 
to have saved the life of Jeremiah. (Ch. iii: 12; compare 
Jer. xxvi: 18-24.) 

He foretells in clear terms the invasion of Shalmaneser 
(ch. i: 6-8; fulfilled 2 K. xvii: 4-6); and that of Senna- 
cherib (ch. i: 9-16; fulfilled 2 K. xviii: 13); the cessation 
of prophecy (ch. iii: 6-7); and the final destruction of 
Jerusalem (ch. iii: 12); also of Assyria (ch. vii: 8-10). 

He speaks of the promulgation of the gospel from Mount 
Zion; its beneficial effects (ch. iv: 1-8; compare Isa. ii: 2-4): 
and the birth-place of Christ (ch. v: 2: compare Matt, ii: 
6; also John, vii: 42). 



124 II KINGS- 

. (b.) Divisions. "Three sections, omitting the super- 
scription, are introduced by the same phrase, 'Hear ye,' 
and represent three natural divisions of that prophecy: 
(I) ch. i-ii; (II) ch. iii-v; (III) ch. vi-vii. 

The following chronological arrangement may be adopted, 
thus: 

PAR"? I. 

Chap, i, was delivered in the contemporary reigns of 
Jotham, king of Judah, and of Pekah, king of Israel. 

PART II. 

Chap, ii-iv: 8. Certain predictions delivered in the reign 
of Ahaz of Judah, and Pekah and Hoshea of Israel. 

TART III. 

Chap, iv: 9, to the close of the prophecy, during the 
reign of Hezekiah.'* — Dr. Smith. 

§ 11. Outline II Kings, Chapter xvii-xix. (Con- 
tinued from § 9.) 

JUDAH. ISRAEL. 

Ch. xvii. Hoshea's wick- 
ed reign. Shalmaneser, king 
of Assyria, after a three years' siege, takes Samaria, and 
carries Israel away captive into Assyria,* and places them 
in Holah, and in Habor by the river Gozan, and in the 
cities of the Medes. The colonization of Samaria by 
Babylonians and others, verse "-24. \ 

Ch. xviii. Hezekiah puts down idolatry in Judah; Sen- 
nacherib, king of Assyria, invades the land: blasphemous 
speech of Rabshakeh; Hezekiah threatened. 

Ch. xix. Sennacherib's letter to king Hezekiah, Heze- 
kiah's prayer; Isaiah's prophecy and its fulfillment. 

Outline continued, sec § 13. 



Ch. xvii. Hezekiah king. 



* This was the third and complete captivity of Israel. 

f This people, in tin- days of the Savior, were called Samaritan-. 



Oh. XVIII: s< 12. prophecy OF Nurr.vi. 125 

g 12. Prophecy of Nahum. (See Diagram, Chapter 
XXIII: § 13.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "THE COMFORTER, " 

Nahum, the Elkoshite. His persona] history is quite 
unknown. The site of Elkosh, his native place, is dis- 
puted, some placing it in Galilee, and others in Assyria,' 
among the captiv.es of Israel. 

The date of this prophecy can be determined with as 
Little precision as the birthplace of its author. It is most 
probable that Nahum flourished in the latter half of the 
reign of Hezekiah, There is no doubt that he was an 
Israelite from the imagery u^t\ in chap, i: 4, 5. His name 
signifies "Comforter," and he was raised up to console 
Israel; the purpose of his vision being to comfort them in 
their captivity. 

Nahum's prophecy relates exclusively to the destruction 
of the niagnificenl city of Nineveh, which event had been 
predicted by Jonah nearly one hundred years before. Says 
Davison: "This book will be best understood by'being 
read as a continuation or supplement to the prophecy of 
Jonah." The predictions were remarkably fulfilled about 
one hundred years Later by the Medes and Chaldeans, 
B. C. (512; and so complete was its overthrow that the site 
•on which the greai city stood is a mere conjecture. 

The prophet Zephaniah, who began to prophesy just 
before the fall of Nineveh, also refers to its destruction in 
chap, ii: 13-15. 

The book of Nahum is divided into three chapters; but 
it is one continuous poem of unrivalled sublimity. A 
prophecy respecting Christ is found in chap, i: 15. Com- 
pare Isa. lii: 7; also Rom. x: 15. 



126 ZEPHANTAH. 

§ 13. Outline II Kings, Chapters xx-xxi. {Con- 
tinued from § 11.) 



JUDAH. 



ISRAEL. 



Captive rn Assyria. 



Ch. xx. Hezekiah, warn- 
ed of his death, in answer to 
prayer has his life lengthened 15 years; its truth is con- 
firmed by a miracle; Isaiah prophesies of the Babylonian 
captivity. 

Ch. xxi. Manasseh began to reign at 12 years of age> 
and reigned 55 years; his wicked reign, death and burial. 
Amon reigned in his stead 2 years, in Jerusalem; he is 
slain by his servants. Josiah, his son, is made king by 
the people of the land, and reigned 31 years. 

Outline continued, see § 15. 

§14. Prophecy of Zephaniah. (See Diagram, Chap. 
XXIII: §13.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, 44 CAPTIVITY OF JUDAH." 

This prophet was " The son of Cushi, the son of Geda- 
liah, the son of Amariah, the son of Hizkiah." He traces 
his pedigree to the fourth ancestor. Hizkiah is supposed 
to be the celebrated king Hezekiah. 

We learn from the commencement of his prophecy, that 
he delivered his predictions in the reign of Josiah, king of 
Judah; and no doubt before the reformation of that king, 
which took place in the 18th year of his reign. 

(a. ) Object of the Prophecy. He was contemporary with 
Jeremiah, and prophesied with the same object in view, 
stimulating King Josiah to his great work of reformation 
in view of God's judgments in the impending "Captivity 
of Judah." 

He describes the desolation of Nineveh with remarkable 
accuracy. See chap, n: 13-15. Compare Nahum, chap, 
ii-iii. 



Ch. XVIII: § 15. OUTLIKE II KINGS. 127 

His style is poetical; and the general tone of the last 
portion (chap, iii: 8-20) is supposed to refer to the. coming 
of the Messiah, but without special reference to him in 
person. There is a prophecy referring to Christ in chap. 
i: 7. Compare Matt, xxii: 2-14. 

(b.) Outline. 

Chap. i. A prophecy of God's severe judgments again it 

Judah and Jerusalem for their various sins. For 

fulfillment see 2 K. xxiii-xxv. 

Chap. ii. Prophesies of the destruction of Gaza, Ashke- 
lon, Ashdod, Akron, Moab, Amnion, Ethiopia, Assyria 
and Nineveh for their sins. 

Chap. iii. A sharp reproof against Jerusalem for her 
sins; captivity foretold (fulfilled 2 K. xxv); the promise 
of restoration (fulfilled Ezra and ISTehemiah); condi- 
tion after the return from captivity (fulfilled Ezra, iii: 
10-13). 

§15. Outline II Kings, Chapter xxii -xxv. {Con- 
tinued from § 13.) 



JUDAH. 



ISRAEL. 



In captivity. 



Ch. xxii. Josiah was eight 
years old when he began to 
reign; he repairs the temple. Hilkiah, the priest, finds 
the book of the covenant; Huldah, the prophetess, speaks 
peace to Josiah, and fortells the destruction of Jerusalem.* 

Ch. xxiii. Josiah causes the book of the covenant to be 
read, which Hilkiah found in the house of the Lord; all 
come together, renew the covenant, and destroy all that 
pertains to idolatry ; he keeps the passover. Josiah is 
slain by the king of Assyria, at Megiddo; is brought to 

* Thus was fulfilled the prophecy of the man of God spoken of in 
l Kings, xiii: 1, 2. 



128 II KINGS. 

Jerusalem and buried. Jehoaiiaz, son of Josiah, reigned 
in his stead only three months; was imprisoned by Pharaoh- 
nechoh, king of Egypt, who made Jehoiakim king, and 
put him under tribute; he reigned 11 years. 

Ch. xxiy. Jehoiakim pays tribute to Nebuchadnezzar; 
he rebels; bands of surrounding nations are brought up 
against him in judgment against Judah for the innocent 
blood shed by Manasseh, according to prophecy; his death. 
Jehoiachix, his son, succeeded him, and reigned wickedly 
three months. 

Nebuchadnezzar takes Jerusalem captive, carries away 
the king, his family, officers and the craftsmen to Babylon, 
leaving only the poorest sort of the people of the land. 

Zedekiah is made king by the king of Babylon over 
the remnant left at Jerusalem, and reigned 11 years. He 
rebelled against Nebuchadnezzar. 

Ch. xxv. Nebuchadnezzar, after two years' siege, takes 
Jerusalem; Zedekiah flees to the plains of Jericho, where 
he is captured and brought before the king of Babylon; 
was judged to have his sons slain and his eyes put out, 
after which he was bound in chains and carried to Baby- 
lon, where he died. 

Verse 8. Nebuzar-adan, the king's captain, burns the 
temple, Zedekiah's house, and all the houses of the great 
men; also breaks down the walls of the city. He carries 
away most of the people, leaving only the poor of the land 
as husbandmen; spoils and carries away the treasures of 
the temple, and carries all the officers to Riblah, where 
they are slain. 22. Gedaliah chosen governor by the king 
of Babylon, but soon is slain by Ishmael; and through fear 
of the Chaldeans, all the people, great and small, flee into 
Egypt. 27. Jehoiachin, after 31 years imprisonment, is 
released by Evil-merodach, king of Babylon and successor 
to Nebuchadnezzar, H. C. 562. 



Ch. XIX: § 1. CHRONICLES* VOL. I. 129 

§ 16. Conclusion of Kings. "The events detailed 
in these books are of themselves very interesting. The 
account of the wisdom of Solomon; the rash and impolitic 
conduct of his son Eehoboam; the disobedient prophet; 
the widow of Zarephath; Elijah and the prophets of Baal; 
Benhadad's pride and defeat; Elijah's ascension to heaven; 
Elisha's succession to his ministry, and the series of mira- 
cles he performed; the panic and flight of the Syrians; the 
predicted death of Ahab and Jezebel and their children: 
are all pregnant with instruction. 

We perceive in these impressive histories the characters 
and the qualities of men painted with the utmost fidelity, 
and the attributes of God displayed with great effect. The 
particulars and circumstances are sketched out with a brief 
and lively description, and the imagination lingers with 
pleasure in filling up the outline presented to our view." — 
Bagster. 

We now close this history to enter into the "Review 
from Adam," as found in First and Second Chronicles. 



CHAPTER XIX. 

I CHRONICLES. 

§ 1. Chronicles : Volume I. Written probably by 
Ezra, B. C. 525. 

golden topic, "review from adam." See- Index. 

"These books were written after the return of the Jews 
from the Babylonish captivity, and are called Chronicles 
because they contain an abstract, in the order of time, of 
the whole sacred history to the period when they were 
written, including about 3466 years. 



130 . r CIIRONK LES. 

One leading object of the writer, who was probably Ezra, 
appears to have been to point out from the public records, 
still preserved, the state of the different families before the 
captivity, that at their return they might again possess 
their respective inheritances. That the worship might be 
conducted as before, he enters minutely into the duties, 
genealogies, families and orders of the priests and Levites; 
and to stir the Jews to a holy zeal for restoring the temple 
and its service." — Nicholls. 

Anciently they formed but one book in the Hebrew 
Bible. They contain many repetitions of things found in 
the Kings, and may by some be thought needless; but in 
sacred things " precept must be upon precept, and line 
upon line." "To me," says Paul, "to write the same 
thing is not grievous, but for you it is safe." Phil, iii: 1. 
These repetitions must not be deemed superfluous, but as 
a "Review from Adam" down along the ages to the time 
when this less bulky volume could be circulated among 
the tribes as a hand book, concise, and just adapted to 
their wants; for in the reinstating and reorganizing them 
as a nation in their native land, probably very few of those 
who were carried away captive 70 years previously lived to 
return. * 

These books are of no less value to us, in giving us a 
concise account, as a revieiv of what we have read in the 
hooks which precede them, refreshing our memories of 
many incidents that have gone from us, and calling forth 
nezo thoughts, and arranging them in chronological order. 

We must not lose sight of this point, that a rule or 
system adapted to the acquisition of any science is appli- 

* There were but very few copies of the Scriptures then in exist 
cure; for previous to the captivity, and during the first part of the 
reign of Josiah, for the space of 30 years they were not read. And 
now, after the lapse of nearly a century, and on their return, the 
demand called forth these books now under consideration. 



Oh. XIX: § 3. OUTLINE PART I. 131 

cable to the Bible. Then let us adopt every available 
means within our reach to get a knowledge of that which 
offers to secure to us eternal life. John, xvii: 3. 

§ 2. Three General Divisions. The history com- 
prised in this book covers 2988 years. It may be divided 
into three parts: 

I. Chap. i-ix. G-enealogies, with historical sketches in- 
termixed. 

II. Chap. x. A brief account of the life and death of 
King Saul. 

III. Chap, xi-xxix. An account of the reign of David, 
Saul's successor, concluding with his preparations for build- 
ing the temple. 

§ 3. Outline Part ■ I (Ch. i-ix). Genealogies, with 
historical sketches intermixed. 

Chap, i: 1. Record from Adam to Noah. See Gen. x: 2. 

5. Family record of the three sons of Noah. See Gen. 
xi: 10. 

24. Family record of Abraham. 

29. Family record of the sons of Abraham. 

43. Eecord of the kings and dukes of Edom. See Gen. 
xxxvi: 15-19. 

Chap, ii: 1. Family record of Israel (Jacob). Ch. 1: 34; 
also Gen. xxxii: 28. 12. And Boaz begat Obed, and Obed 
Jesse. Ruth, iy: 18-22. 

13. Family record of Jesse. 1 Sam. xvi: 11. 

Chap, iii: 1. Family record of David, king of Israel. 
11. His line to Zedekiah, the last king of Israel. See 
2 K. xxiv: 17. 

1-7. Family record of Jeconiah (Jehoiachin). 2 K. 
xxiv: 6-8. 

Chap, iv: 1; Family record of Judah, son of Jacob. See 
Gen. xlix: 8. 39. Conquest of Gedar; and the last of the 
Amalekites conquered by 500 sons of Simeon. 



132 I CHRONICLES. 

Chap, v: 1. Line of Reuben, who lost his birthright. 
9. His habitation and record in the days of Jothani, king 
of Judali, and Jeroboam II, king of Israel. 26. Taken 
captive with the Gadites and the half tribe of Manasseh, 
by Tilgath-pilneser (or pileser). 

Chap, yi: 1. Family record of Levi, giving the line of 
priests to the captivity. 

16. Record of the families of Gershom (compare Gen. 
xlvi: 11; also Ex. vi: 16), Merari and (v. 33) Kohath, who 
had charge of the singing until the temple was built by 
Solomon, when they waited on their office according to 
their order. Chap, xxiii: 3-33. 

49. Family record of Aaron and his sons, and their office. 
Ex. xxviii. 54.. Designation of cities as dwelling places of 
the Levites. Josh, xxi: 3-8. 

Chap, vii: 1. Family record of the sons of Issachar, 
Benjamin, Naphtali, Manasseh and Ephraim. N~u. xxvi: 35. 

28. Habitations of Ephraim and Asher. 

Chap, viii: 1. Family record of Benjamin and the chief 
men. Jud. xx: 15-16. 33. Record of Saul and Jonathan, 
sons (descendants) of Benjamin. 1 Sam. xiy: 51, 49. 

Chap, ix: 1. Concluding remarks on the previous chap- 
ters. The eighth chapter should end with this verse. 

2. The first settlement in the land after the captivity. 

3. The first who dwelt in Jerusalem. 10. The first of the 
priests and Levites, and their service. 39. Repetition of 
chap, viii: 33-38. "This repetition." says Scott, ••seems 
to have been intended merely as an introduction to the 
ensuing history." 

g 4. Outline Part II (Ch. x). A brief account of 
the life and death of Saul. 

Chap, x: 1. Saul's overthrow by the Philistines. 4. Saul 
and his armor bearer murder themselves. 13. Saul's deatli 



Cli. XIX: § 5. outline paet in. 133 

attributed to asking counsel of a witch. 1 Sam. xxviii: 7. 
14. David, son of Jesse, made king. 

Note. This chapter, except the last two verses, is a mere tran- 
script of the last chapter of the first book of Samuel. 

§ 5. Outline Part III (Ch. xi-xxix). An account 
of the reign of David, and his preparation to build the 
temple. 

Chap, xi: 1. David anointed king in Hebron. 2 Sam. 
v: 1-5. 4. Moves his throne to Jerusalem. 10. Cata- 
logue of David's mighty men. 2 Sam. xxiii: 8-39. 

Chap, xii: 1. Warriors who came to David at Ziklag. 1 
Sam. xxvii : 2-6. 23. Warriors who come to David at 
Hebron from all parts of the kingdom, 250,000 or more 
valiant men. 

Chap, xiii: 1. David, with princes and people and great 
solemnity, fetches the aek from Kirjath-jearim. 1 Sam. 
vii: 1-2. 9. ITzza is smitten for presumption. 2 Sam. vi: 
fr-7. 13. The ark carried aside and left at the house of 
Obed-edom. 14. His house greatly blessed. Gen. xxx: 27. 

Chap, xiv: 1. The kindness of Hiram, king of Tyre, to 
David. 2 Sam. v: 11. 2. David's prosperity; he takes 
more wives. 8. David's hvo victories over the Philistines. 
2 Sam. v: 25. 12. David's great fame. 

Chap, xv : 1. David builds a tent for the ark at Jerusalem. 
2. He orders the priests and Levites from Obed-edom. 
16. David appoints the singers and players on instru- 
ments; also porters, or doorkeepers. 

Chap, xvi: 1. The ark brought into the tent prepared, 
and sacrifice offered. 8. Psalm of thanksgiving. 37. Da- 
vid appoints ministers, porters, priests and musicians, to 
attend continually on the ark. 

Note. Verse 8-22 contain the first 15 verses of Ps. cv. Verse 
23-33 contain the whole of Ps. xcvi, with some slight variation. 



134 I CHRONICLES. 

Chap, xvii: 1. David proposes to build a house for the 
Lord. 2. The prophet Nathan's message respecting it. 
16. David's prayer. Compare 2 Sam. vii: 18. 

Chap, xviii: 1-17. David's victories. Compare 2 Sam. 
viii. 

Chap, xix: 1 to end. The Ammonites and Syrians de- 
feated. This chapter corresponds with 2 Sam. x: 6. 

Chap, xx : 1. Kabbah is besieged by Joab, spoiled by 
David, and the people tortured. 4. Three giants are slain 
in three battles with the Philistines. 

Note. " This chapter goes on with the narrative in the 11th and 
12th chapters of the second book of Samuel; and it is remarkable 
that the important episode of David's sin in the matter of Uriah, his 
reproof, and his repentance, are entirely omitted; and this book of 
Chronicles passes immediately from the 1st verse of the 11th to the 
20th verse of the 12th chapter. It omits also the crimes of Amnon 
and Absalom, David's song, and passes to the 18th verse of the 21st 
chapter of the 2d book of Samuel, the last five verses of which, with 
some variations, conclude this chapter." — Cottage Bible. 

Chap, xxi: 1. David, tempted by Satan, forces Joab to 
number the people. 6. He repents. 9. And makes choice 
in the three judgments of pestilence. 14. David repents, 
and Jerusalem is spared. He purchases Oman's (Araunah 
in 2 Sam. xxiv: 18) threshing floor, builds an altar, and 
sacrifices unto the Lord.* 

Note. This chapter is nearly a repetition of 2d Sam. xxiv. The 
following seven chapters have already found a place as an appendix 
to 2d Samuel, and before the 1st book of Kings; but it no less follows 
as links in the history we are now pursuing, showing how complete 
is the review, as set forth in the preface to this book. 

Chap, xxii: 1. David designates this threshing floor as 
the place to build the temple, and makes preparations for it. 



* It will be remembered that this threshing floor which David pur 
chased is the same place— Mount Moriah — where Abraham offered 
his son Isaac, (Jen. xxii; 2; and where afterwards Solomon built the 
temple. See Dent. xii: 0-7. 



Ch. XIX: § 5. OUTLINE PART ITI. 135 

6. Charge to his son Solomon. IT. David's charge to the 
princes of Israel. 

Chap, xxiii: 1. Solomon made king. 2. The number 
and distribution of the Levites. 

T. The families of the Gershomites. 

12. The sons of Kohath. 

21. The sons of Merari. 

24. The several offices of the Levites. 

Chap. xxiv. Aaron's sons divided by lot into twenty-four 
courses. 

Chap. xxv. Number, office and division of the singers. 

Chap, xxvi: 1. Division of the porters, or gate keepers. 
13. Gates assigned by lot. 20. Levites appointed to have 
charge of the treasures. 29. Appointment of officers and 
judges. 

Chap, xxvii: 1. The appointment of a captain to serve 
each month. 16. And a prince for each tribe. Xu. vii: 2. 
25. David's several officers. 

Chap, xxviii: 1. David assembles all his appointed offi- 
cers, and exhorts them to fear God. 11. He gives Solomon 
the pattern and gold and silver for the temple. 22. David's 
charge to Solomon. 

Chap, xxix: 1. By David's example the people are made 
willing to contribute of theis treasures. 10. His thanks- 
giving and prayer. 20. All the people bless the Lord, and 
make Solomon their king; "and he sat on the throne of 
the Lord instead of David, his father, * * * and 
all Israel obeyed him." 27. David, his father, "reigned 
over Israel forty years; seven years reigned he in Hebron, 
and thirty-three years reigned he in Jerusalem. And he 
died in a good old age, full of days, riches and honor." 



136 II CHRONICLES. 

CHAPTEK XX. 

II CHRONICLES. 

§ 1. Chronicles : Yolume II. This book is a con- 
tinuation of the jn-eceding one. In some respects it agrees 
with the books of Kings, and many references may be 
made to them. There are, however, some things men- 
tioned in this book that are not found in the Kings. The 
histories of Jehoshaphat and Hezekiah, and many other 
things there mentioned, are here more fully and clearly 
explained, as will be seen as we pass along. 

This book opens with Solomon haying assumed the 
responsibilities of the throne and the kingdom, and con- 
tains a history of the several kings of his race, who reigned 
in succession until the time of the captivity. It covers a 
space of 480 years, and concludes with an intimation of 
the decree of Cyrus for the restoration of the Jews and the 
rebuilding of the temple. 

§ 2. Two General Parts. This book very naturally 

divides itself into two general divisions. 

I. The reign of Solomon and the building of the temple 
(ch. i-ix). 

II. The reigns of the kings of Judah after the revolt 
(B. C. 975), and the destruction of Jerusalem (ch. x-xxxvi). 

That this second part of these records may be better un- 
derstood, we give the following more definite analysis, with 
the date of the beginning of each reign: 

Chap. i-ix. The history of the kingdom of Israel under 
Solomon, B. C. L015. 

Chap, x-xii. Accession of Rehoboam to the throne, B. C. 
975. 



Gil. XX: § 3. O.UTLIJ^E PART I. 13? 

Chap, xiii-xvi. The reigns of Abijali and Asa, kings of 
Judah, B. C. 957. 

Chap, xvii-xx. The reign of Jehoshaphat, B. C. 914. . 

Chap, xxi-xxiv. The reigns of Jehoram and Ahaziah, 
and the usurpation of Athaliah, B. C. 889. 

Chap, xxv-xxvii. Reigns of Amaziali, Uzziah and Joth- 
am, B. C. 839. 

Chap, xxviii. The reign of Aliaz, B. C. 712. 

Chap, xxix-xxxii. The reign of Hezekiah, B. C. 727. 

Chap, xxxiii. The reign of Manasseh and Anion, B. C. 
698. 

Chap, xxxiv-xxxv. The reign of Josiah, B. C. 611. 

Chap, xxxvi: 1-21. The subsequent reigns to the desola- 
tion of Jerusalem and the temple, or the final captivity, 
B. 0. 588. 22 to end. The edict of Cyrus, B. 0. 538. 

§ 3. Outline Part I (Oh. i-ix). The reign of Solo- 
mon, and the building of the temple. 

Chap, i : 1. Solomox strengthened in his kingdom. 
7. His choice of wisdom. 1 K. iii: 5-15. 13. Solomon's 
wealth and commerce. 

Chap, ii: 1. Solomon's laborers for the building of the 
temple. 3. He sends to Hiram, king of Tyre, for timber 
and skillful workmen. 1 K. v: 1. 11. Hiram's friendly 
answer. 18. The work requires 3600 overseers. 

Chap, iii: 1. The place and time of building the temple. 
3. The dimensions and ornaments. 1 K. vi. 11. The 
cherubim placed in it. 14. The vail and pillars. 1 K. 
vii: 21, 22. 

Chap, iv: I. The altar of brass, and the molten sea. 1 
K. vii: 23. 6. The ten lavers, candlesticks and tables. 
9. The courts, and the instruments of brass'. 19. The 
instruments of gold. 

Chap, v: 1. The temple finished, and treasures deposited 
in it. 2. The ark is deposited in the most holy place. 



13& 11 CHRONICLES. 

11. The Levites sing praises to God, and the clond tills 
the temple. Ex. xl: 4, 35. 

Chap, vi: 1. Solomon, having hlessed the people, hlessed 
God. 12. Solomon's prayer at the dedication of the tem- 
ple. 1 K. viii: 12. 

Chap, vii: 1. Solomon's prayer answered. 4. His sotemn 
.sacrifice. 8. Having kept the feast of tabernacles, he dis- 
missed the people, 12. The Lord appears to Solomon by 
night and makes a covenant with him. 1 K. ix. 

Chap, viii: 1. Solomon's other buildings. 1 K. ix: 10. 
7. All the heathen nations who dwell in the land pay 
tribute. 11. He brings his wife to her house. 12. Solo- 
mon's yearly sacrifice. 14. He appoints the places of the 
priests and Levites. 17. Solomon's ships bring gold from 
Ophir ($10,939,050). 

Chap, ix: 1. The Queen of Sheba admires the wisdom of 
Solomon. 1 K. x. 13. "His annual revenue in gold over 
$14,300,000,000. "— A Clark. 15. His targets, throne of 
ivory, vessels, presents, chariots and horses, and his trib- 
utes. 29. * Solomon's reign of 40 years and death. 

(a.) Outline Part II (Ch. x-xxxvi). The reigns of the 
kings of Judah after the revolt. 

Chap, x: 1. Israelites hasten to Shechem to crown Reho- 
boam king. Jeroboam asks to have the taxes reduced. 
6. Rehoboam, accepting the advice of the young men in 
preference to that of his father's counsellors, answers 
roughly. 16. The ten tribes revolt, and Rehoboam flees. 

Note. This chapter is copied almost verbatim from 1 K. xii. 

Chap, xi : 1. Rehoboam prepares an army to subdue Israel. 
2. He is forbidden by Shemaiah the prophet. 5. He builds 

* ' 'In the book (v. 29). It appears by this that the prophets were 
also historians, who gave an account of what passed in their times; 
out of this work this short history was extracted. * * * These 
three did join to make one book, out of which it is probable Ezra 
took many things." — Patrick. 



!'ll. XX: § 3. OTJTLINE PART II. 13t> 

and fortifies several cities. 13. The priests and Levites, 
being cast off by Jeroboam, resort to Jerusalem, with other 
pious Israelites. 

18. Family record of Rehoboam. 

Chap, xii: 1. Rehoboam forsakes the Lord, and is pun- 
ished by Shishak. 1 K. xiv: 21-25. 5. He and the princes, 
repenting at the preaching of Shemaiah the prophet, are 
delivered from destruction, but not from spoil. 13. The 
reign and death of Rehoboam. 

Chap, xiii: 1. Abijah now reigns, and makes war with 
Jeroboam. 4. He shows the justice of his cause. 13. The 
battle; God delivers Judah. 

21. Family record of Abijah. Iddo is prophet. 

Chap, xiv: 1. Asa becomes king; he destroys idolatry. 
6. Asa strengthens his kingdom. 9. Zera, son of Shishak,' 
king of Egypt, makes war with Asa and is defeated. 

Chap, xv : 1. The prophet Azariah; his prophecy. Asa, 
with Judah and Israel, make a solemn covenant with Grod. 
16. Asa removes his mother from being queen, for idolatry. 
1 K. xv : 13. 18. Asa enjoys a long peace. 

Chap, xvi: 1. Baasha, king of Israel, builds Ramah for 
a defence. 2. With the aid of Benhadad, Asa destroys 
Ramah. 7. Prophecy of Hanam against Asa; he is put 
in prison. 11. The reign and death of Asa. 1 K." xv: 24. 

Chap, xvii: 1. Jehoshaphat's good reign. T. He sends 
Levites and priests to teach the people.* 10. His enemies 
fear him. 12. His greatness; his captains and armies. 

* "In these verses we have an account of a remarkable ministry 
established by Jehoshaphat, in which three classes of men were 
employed: I, the princes; II, the Levites; III, the priests. We may 
presume the princes instructed the people in the civil law, the Levites 
in the temple service and ritual law, and the priests instructed them in 
the nature and design of their religion. Against such a people, in- 
structed in such principles, no enemy could be successful." — BagsUr. 



140 II CHRONICLES. 

Chap, xviii: 1. Jelioshaphat becomes rich; joins Ahab, 
king of Israel against Kamoth-gilead.* 8. The prophet 
Micaiah is brought before both kings. 13. The prophecy 
of Micaiah against the false prophets. 28. They go to 
battle, and Ahab, king of Israel, is slain. 

Note. This chapter corresponds with 1 Kings, xxii: 2-31. 

Chap, xix: 1. Jelioshaphat, returning home from the 
battle, meets Jehu, and is reprimanded by him. 6. The 
king's instructions to the judges, priests and Levites. 

Chap, xx : 1. Jelioshaphat, in his fear, proclaims a fast. 
5. The king's prayer. 14. The prophecy of Jaliaziel as- 
sures the king of a signal deliverence, which is received 
with thankfulness. 22. The great overthrow of the ene- 
mies of Judah. 26. The people bless God at Baracha and 
♦ return home. 35. He joins Ahaziah in sending ships to 
Tarshish; they are wrecked, according to the predictions of 
Eliezer. 

Chap', xxi: 1. Jehoram takes the throne, and slays his 
brothers. 5. His wicked reign. 2 K. viii: 16-22. 8. Edom 
and Libnah revolt, because the king had forsaken the Grod 
of his fathers. 12. A prophecy in writing against him 
from Elijah. 16. The Philistines and Arabians oppose 
him. 18. He dies without' regrets and is buried, but not 
m the sepulchre of his fathers. 

Note. In verse 2 we read : "Jelioshaphat, king of Israel." But 
we know he was not king of Israel, but of Judah; hence here is a 
mistake by the transcribers. The Arabic, the Syriac and the Vulgate 
read, King or Judah. 

Chap, xxii: 1. Aiiazia if s wicked reign. 2 K. ix: 10-27. 
5. He joins Jorum, king of Israel, and is slain by Jehu. 
lo. A thaliah murders the royal family and usurps the throne. 

* "Jelioshaphat took Athaliah, the daughter of Ahab, to be wife 
to his son Joram (2 K. viii: 18); which fatal connection was highly 
displeasing to God, and Jelioshaphat was severely reproved for it by 
Jehu the prophet. Ch. xix: \-'3."—Bagster. 



Ch. XX: § 3. outline part ii. 141 

Chap, xxiii: 1. Jehoiada, the priest, sets things in order 
and makes Joash king. 2 K. xi: 4 to end. 12. Athaliah 
is slain. 16. Jehoiada, the priest, restores the worship of 
God. 

Chap. xxiv: 1. Joash reigns well all the.days of Jehoiada, 
the priest. 4. He orders the temple repaired. 15. Jehoi- 
ada's death and burial. 17. Joash falls into idolatry; slays 
Zechariah the prophet. 23. The king is plundered by the 
Syrians, left sick, and slain by his servants. 

Chap, xxy: 1. Amaziah began his reign well. 2 K. xiv: 
1-20. 5. Israelites are hired to fight against the Edomites, 
and dismissed at the word of a prophet. 11. He overthrows 
the Edomites. 13. The Israelites, offended at being dis- 
missed, take spoil on their way home. 14. Amaziah serves 
the gods of Edom, and rejects the advice of the prophet. 
17. The king, not willing to take advice of Joash, is van- 
quished and Jerusalem spoiled. 25. His reign, and death 
by conspiracy. 

Chap, xxvi: 1. Uzziah becomes king, and reigns well 
while under the advice of the prophet Zechariah. 16. Be- 
ing lifted up with pride, he attempts to burn incense in 
the temple, and is smitten with leprosy. 22. Jotham, his 
son, succeeds him, whose acts were recorded by Isaiah the 
prophet. 

Chap, xxvii: 1. Jotham's good reign. 5. He subdues 
the Ammonites. 7. His reign and death. 2 K. xv: 1-7. 

Chap, xxviii: 1. Ahaz, reigning wickedly, is greatly 
afflicted by the Syrians. 6. Great slaughter in Judah, and 
many captives taken by the Israelites; captives are sent 
home by the counsel of Obed, the prophet. 16. Ahaz 
sends in vain to Assyria for aid. 22. In this dilemma he 
plunges into idolatry. 26. He dies and is succeeded by 
Hezekiah. 

Note. The greater part of this chapter has been anticipated in 
the sixteenth chapter of Second Kings. 

Outline 2 Chron. continued, see § 5. 



142 II CHRONICLES. 

§ 4. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part II (Ch. vi-xii). 
Having studied well the incidents connected with the 
reigns of Jotham and Ahaz, we are now prepared to read 
that portion of Isaiah's prophecy which was Avritten dur- 
ing these reigns. This portion commences with the sixth 
chapter and ends with the twelfth, and comprises Part IL 
See Preface to Isaiah, Part II; Chap. XVIII: § 7. 

(a. ) Outline. 

Chap. vi. Isaiah's vision of the divine glory, and the 
prophecy respecting the Jews. 

Chap. vii. Deliverence promised to Ahaz, which is typi- 
cal of salvation by Christ. 

Chap. viii. The subjection, both of Israel and subse- 
quently of Judah, to the Assyrian power. 

Chap. ix. A prophecy of the blessings of Messiah's king- 
dom, and judgments denounced against the impenitent. 

Chap. x. Judgment against all oppressors, particularly 
Assyria, from whom Israel is promised deliverance. 

Chap. xi. The j)eaceable kingdom of Messiah; the return 
of the Jews; and the calling of the Gentiles. 

Chap. xii. The song of triumph in God's salvation. 

§5. Outline II Chronicles, xxix-xxxi. {Con* 

tinned from § 3.) 

Chap, xxix: 1. HEZEKIAH reigns well. He opens the 
door of the temple, and exhorts tin 1 priests and Levites to 
set things in order for the worship of God. 11. They 
sanctify themselves* (1 Chron. xxiii: 12-21), and cleanse 
the temple and its service. 20. Hezekiah offers solemn 

* We here find the necessity of reading and becoming familiar 
with the record of the families, as found in the first nine chapters of 
First Chronicles; for if the reader forms an acquaintance with these 
several families, and with the work they are called to perform in the 
temple service, he will be enabled to understand what is meant when 
reference is made to them elsewhere in the Bible. 



Ch. XX: § 6. PROPHECY OF ISAIAH, PART III. 143 

sacrifices, wherein the Levites were more forward than the 
priests. 

Chap, xxx : 1. Hezekiah proclaims the solemn feast of 
the passover. 13. The .assembly destroy the altars of idol- 
atry, and keep the feasts fourteen days. 27. The priests 
and Levites bless the people. 

Chap, xxxi: 1. The people forward to destroy idolatry. 
2. Hezekiah orders the courses of the priests and Levites, 
and provides for their work and maintenance. 5. The 
people bring their offerings and tithes. 11. Hezekiah ap- 
points officers to dispose of the tithes. 

Outline continued, see § 8. 

§ 6. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part III. (See Preface, 
Chap. XVIII: § ?.) Part III comprises chapters xiii- 
xxiii. The following is an outline: 

Chap. xiii. Judgments denounced against Babylon. Ful- 
filled by the Medes; Dan. v: 28-31. 

Chap. xiv. God's mercy to Israel; song of triumph over 
their enemies (Babylon). Fulfilled Dan. v: 30. Palestina 
(Philistines) threatened. 

Chap. xv. Lamentable state of Moab. 2 K. xvii: 25. 

Chap. xvi. M-oab exhorted to obedience. 

Chap. xvii. Oracle of Damascus (fulfilled 2 K. xvi: 9) 
and Israel. Compare verses 12-14 with 2 K. xix: 35. 

Chap, xviii. (Very obscure. ) Supposed to relate to Egypt 
and Israel. 

Chap. xix. An oracle concerning Egypt. 

Note. "The fulfillment of this prophecy is supposed to be 
brought about by intestine wars. He likewise intimates (ver. 18) the 
spread of the Jewish religion in Egypt and Syria under Alexander 
and his successors." — Bishop Lowth. 

Chap. xx. A type prefiguring the shameful captivity of 
Egypt and Ethiopia. 

Chap. xxi. The fall of Babylon (fulfilled Dan. v: 5, 6), 
Dumah (Edom) and Arabia (obscure). 



144 ISAIAH. 

Chap. xxii. The prophet's lament of the invasion of the 
Jews by the Assyrians. 2 K. xviii. Prophecy concerning 
Shebna and Eliakim. 2 K. xviii. 37. 

Chap, xxiii. Miserable overthrow of Tyre by Xebuchad- 
nezzar. (Josephns Ant. Book, 10: sec. vii.) The return 
of the Jews, v. 17, 18. 

§ 7. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part IT. (See Preface, 
Chap. XVIII: § 7.) Part IV contains chapters xxiv- 
xxxv, as follows: 

Chap. xxiv. The divine judgments on the land of Israel. 

Note. " Whether the desolation here spoken of was that occa" 
sioned by Shalmanezer, Nebuchadnezzar or the Romans is not certain. 
Perhaps it may have a view to all three. " — Rev. Wm. Patton. 

Chap. xxv. A prophetic ode of thanksgiving for the de- 
liverance referred to in the previous chapter. 

Chap. xxvi. Another song of praise for God's favor to 
his people in temporal and spiritual blessings. 

Chap, xxvii. God's care for his people represented by 
the care of a husbandman over his vineyard. 

Chap, xxviii. God's judgments against both Israel and 
Judah, but intermingled with mercy." 

Chap. xxix. God's judgment on Jerusalem (Ariel). The 
invasion by Sennacherib. 2 K. xxv. 

Note. "The subject of this and the four following chapters is 
the invasion of Sennacherib; the great distress of the Jews while it 
continued; their sudden and unexpected deliverance by God inter- 
posing in their favor; the prosperous state of the kingdom uiuk j r 
Hezekiah; interspersed with severe reproofs, and threatenings for 
their hypocrisy, stupidity, infidelity, etc"— Bishop Lowih. 

Chap. xxx. God's people threatened for tlu-ir reliance OH 
Egypt; and the awful destruction of the Assyrian army in 
the valley of Hinnom. 2 Chron. xxxii. 

Chap. xxxi. This chapter seems to be an abridgment of 
the preceding one. 



Ch. XX: § 9. prophecy of isaiah, part v. 145 

Chap, xxxii. The prophetic blessings of Christ's king- 
dom. 

Chap, xxxiii. God's judgments on the enemies of his 
church, and the privileges of the godly. 

Chap, xxxiv. The church avenged of her enemies. 

Chap. xxxv. Blessing enjoyed at the coming of Christ. 

Note. " The last two chapters form one prophecy, an entire and 
beautiful poem consisting of two parts, and hence the chapters. " — 
Bishop Lowth. 

Outline continued. se< j g 9. 

§ 8. Outline II Chronicles, xxxii. (Continued 
from § 5. ) 

Chap, xxxii: 1. Sennacherib invades Judah; Hezekiah 
fortifies himself and encourages the people. 9. The blas- 
phemies of Sennacherib by messenger and letters. 20. 
Hezekiah and the prophet Isaiah pray, and in answer the 
angel destroys the hosts of the Assyrians. 25. Hezekiah 
grows proud, and is humbled by God. 27. His reign and 
death; he is succeeded by Max ass kit. 

Outline continued, see £ 10. 

§ 9. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part Y. (See Preface? 
Chap. XV III: § 7.) At ttiis point the Bible student 
should read Part Y (Historical) of the prophecy of Isaiah 
if he would continue the history of this king; for in the 
32d verse of chapter xxxii we read: "Xow the rest of the 
acts of Hezekiah, and his goodness, behold, they are written 
in the vision of Isaiah the prophet, the son of Amoz, and 
in the book of the kings of Judah and Israel.'* Consult 
also the preface to this prophecy, which introduces the 
leading topics and gives the chapters in which they are 
found, and this will prepare the mind to receive it intelli- 
gently. 

Part Y contains chapters xxxvi-xxxix. "We may safely 
conclude that this was part of that history of Hezekiah's 



140 ir CHRONICLES. 

reign which Isaiah wrote, as referred to in 2 Chron. xxxii: 
32."—Lowth. 

^fany of Isaiah's predictions relate to and are fulfilled in 
the events recorded in these four chapters ; hence it is 
proper that the history containing them should be inserted 
here, thus keeping it fresh in the memory, enabling them, 
and us as well, to apply the predictions to the events to 
which they refer. 

"The key of prophecy is to be found in history. The 
exact fulfilling of this prophecy ought to serve to confirm 
the faith of God's people in other prophecies, the accom- 
plishment of which is' at a greater distance. 

This is the same story, almost word for word, as found 
in 2 Kings, xviii, beginning with the 13th verse, and end- 
ing with chapter xxi. But it was so memorable an event 
that it was worthy to be twice fully recorded, and afterwards 
an abridgment as found in 2 Chron. xxxii.'" — Henry. 

We pass by this part without further note of its contents; 
but we say to the student, be sure to read it slowly and 
thoughtfully, and compare this account with the same 
event recorded in 2 Kings. 

Outline Isaiah continued, see § 2, Chop. XXII. 

§ 10. Outline II Chronicles^ xxxiii. {Continued 
from § 8.) 

Chap, xxxiii: 1. Manasseh's wicked reign. 10. He is 
carried captive to Babylon. 12. In answer to his prayer 
he is released; he now seeks to put down idolatry. IS. Re- 
view of his acts; his death; is succeeded by his son Amon. 
21. Anion, reigning wickedly, is slain by his servants. 
25. Anion's murderers are slain, and JosiAH is made king. 

Note. For corresponding history, see 2 K. xxi. We have come 
to the times and the prophecies of Jeremiah, and deem this a lit 
place to introduce this prophet. 

Outline continued, see £ 12. 



Ch. XX: § 11. PROPHECY OF JEREMIAH. 147 

§ 11. Prophecy of Jeremiah. (See Diagram, Chap. 
XXIII: § 13.) 

goldex topic, "weeping prophet. ? ' (Captivity.) 

"Jeremiah was a priest, set apart to the prophetic office 
from his birth (ch. i: 5), and was expressly addressed by 
the word of God at the early age of fourteen years. He 
was called to his office nearly at the same time with Zeph- 
aniah, in the thirteenth year of Josiah, king of Judah, 
and continued to exercise it about forty years, during the 
reigns of the wicked sons of that pious king, to whom he 
fearlessly prophesied concerning their wickedness." — Gray's 
Key to the Old Testament. 

He was suffered to remain in Judea when Zedekiah and 
the nation generally were carried away captive by Nebu- 
chadnezzar to Babylon; but after the murder of Gedaliah, 
the governor whom Nebuchadnezzar had placed in Judea 
in the room of Zedekiah, Jeremiah with others was forced 
to flee into Egypt. Chap, xliii: 3-7. 

In his character he is presented as a bright example of 
the strictest fidelity in reproving sin, united with the 
deepest compassion for the sinner. This gives a peculiar 
feature, both to his character and his writings, which has 
led to his being called the "weeping prophet." Chap, ix: 1. 

His native place was Anathoth. m the land of Benjamin, 
some four miles southeast of Jerusalem. 

His prophecy reaches from the thirteenth year of Josiah, 
B. C. 629, to the eleventh year of Zedekiah, B. C. 586 (ch. 
i: 3); and afterwards lie prophesied in Egypt, whither he 
fled with the remnant of his people. 

(a.) Prophecies respecting ( 'hrist. "01 the prophecies in 
this book more immediately pointing to Christ, the follow- 
ing may be noticed: 

Chap, xxii: 5, 6, foretells the mediatorial kingdom of the 
Messiah, who is called the Lord, or Jehovah, our Eight- 



148 JEREMIAH. 

eousness. The title of Jehovah is elsewhere given to the 
Messiah by the prophets. Isaiah, xl: 10; xlviii: 17; Hosea r 
i: 7; Mal.'iii: 1. 

Chap, xxxi: 31-34; xxxiii: 8, clearly and forcibly describe 
the efficacy of Christ's atonement, the spiritual character 
of the gospel, and its excellence in giving, not only pardon, 
but holiness. See Heb. viii: 8-13; x: 14, etc. 

For the fulfillment of the prophecies respecting the 
return of the Jews, read Ezra and Nehemiah." — Nicholls. 

(b.) Two General Parts. The absence of any chrono- 
logical order in the present structure of this book is obvious. 
We have, however, two great parts: 

I. Chap, i-xlv. Prophecies delivered at various times, 
mainly to Judah, or connected with Jeremiah's personal 
history. 

II. Chap, xlvi-li. Prophecies connected with other na- 
tions. Chapter Hi, taken largely though not entirely from 
2 K. xxv, may be taken as a supplement to this prophecy, 
or as an introduction to the Lamentations. 

(c.) Part I, Sections I-Y. Looking more closely into 
each of these divisions, we have the following sections: 

Section I. 
Chap, i-xxi. Containing probably the substance of the 
book, and including the prophecies from the thirteenth 
year of Josiah to the fourth of Jehoiakim. 

•Section II. See Chronology, Chap. XXIV: §6. 
Chap, xxii-xxv. Shorter prophecies delivered at different, 
times against Judah and the false prophets: xxv: 13, 14, 
evidently marks the conclusion of a series of prophecies. 
Section III. 
Chap, xxii-xxviii. Two great prophecies of the fall of 
Jerusalem and Babylon, and the history connected with 
them. Chapter xxv belongs to the earlier, and chapters 
xxvi-xxvii to the later period of the prophet's work. 



Ch. XX: § 12. OUTLINE II CHRONICLES. 149 

Section IV. 

Chap, xxix-xxxi. The message of comfort for the exiles 

in Babylon. 

Section V. 

Chap, xxxii-xliv. The history of the last two years before 
the capture of Jerusalem, and of this prophet's work in 
them, and in the period that followed. 

Note. The position of chapter xlv, unconnected with anything 
before or after it, may be accounted for on the hypothesis that 
Baruch desired to place on record a remarkable passage in his own 
life, and inserted it where a direct narrative of his master's life 
«nded. The same explanation applies to chapter xxxvi. 

(d.) Part II, Sections I-IL 

Section I. 

Chap, xlvi-li. The prophecies against foreign nations, 
ending with the great prediction against Babylon. 
Section II. 

Chap, lii was added after the prophet's death. It is a 
short historical account of the taking of Jerusalem, and 
may be considered as a supplement, or an introduction to 
the Lamentations. 

Part I of this prophecy, which includes the first four 
sections, should be read in this connection. 

§12. Outline II Chronicles, xxxir - xxxv. (Con- 
tinued from § 10.) 

Chap, xxxiv: 1. Josiah's good reign; he destroys idol- 
atry, and orders the repair of the temple. 14. Hilkiah, 
the priest, finds a book of the law of Moses; the king sends 
for Huldah, the prophetess. 23. She prophesies of the 
destruction of Jerusalem; but it is not to be fulfilled until 
after Josiah's time. 29. Josiah has the law read in the 
.assembly, and renews the covenant with God. 

Chap, xxxv : 1. Josiah keeps a solemn passover. 20. He 
angers Necho, king of Egypt, and is slain. 25. Jeremiah 
.and others lament him. 

Outline concluded ^14. 



150 HABAKKUK. 

§ 13. Prophecy of Habakkuk. (See Diagram, Chap. 
XXIII: % 13.) 

GOLDEN TOPI.C, " AGAINST THE CHALDEANS." 

Of tlie prophet Habakkuk we have no certain informa- 
tion. It is evident that he prophesied in Judea, before 
the captivity, and probably, as Archbishop Usher supposes, 
in the reign of Jehoiakim; being contemporary with Jere- 
miah a few years before the final destruction of Jerusalem. 

Of all the nations that had most afflicted the Jews, the 
chief were the Edomites, Assyrians and Chaldeans; and 
three of the prophets were raised up for the purpose of 
pronouncing the destruction of these three nations: Oba- 
diah against the Edomites (see preface to Obadiah); Xahum 
that of the Assyrians (or Nineveh), avIio had carried away 
the ten tribes into captivity; and now Habakkuk against 
the Chaldeans (or Babylon), who completed the captivity 
of the twelve tribes of Isiael in the final destruction of 
Jerusalem by Nebuchadnezzar, B. C. 588. 

"The writings of this prophet stand high in the class 
of Hebrew poets. The beautiful connection between the 
parts of this prophecy, its diction, imagery, spirit and 
sublimity, cannot be too much admired." — Abp. Xeiccome. 

He is frequently quoted in the New Testament. Com- 
pare ch. i: 5. with Acts, xiii: 40, 41; and ch. ii: 3, 4, with 
Rom. i: 17; Gal. iii: 11; and Heb. x: 37, 38. 

(a.) Outline. This book is divided into three chapters. 
The following is an outline: 

Chap, i: 1. The burden of soul the prophet lias for the 
sins of the people. 5. Shows the vengeance of their ene- 
mies, the Chaldeans, who shall possess their land. 12. The 
prophet now bursts forth with a sublime plea thai God will 
not utterly cast off his people. 

Chap, ii: 1. The prophet awaits with faith and patience 
an answer. 5. Various judgments against the Chaldeans 



Cli. XX: § 15. conclusion to chronicles. 151 

(Babylonians),, for covetousness. cruelty, drunkenness, and 
for idolatry. 

Chap. iii. Habakkuk's prayer. He trembles in contem- 
plating the majesty of God. 

(b.) Concluding Remarks. The last chapter is also a 
psalm, and may hare been written for use in the temple 
service, and thus kept before the minds of the people. 

The first two chapters may have been first publicly pro- 
claimed; but if so. lest it be forgotten, the prophet is 
ordered to write it on tables, or tablets, which were com- 
monly hung up in public places (as our advertising cards), 
being written in large and bold characters, and so legible 
that it might be read while running (see chap, ii : 2). Calvin 
says this was the usual custom, in keeping the prophecies 
before the people, that they may not be forgotten, after 
having been first publicly proclaimed. 

§ 11. Outline II Chronicles, xxxri. (Continued 

from § 12.) 

Verse 1. Jehoahaz succeeds Josiah. his father; he is 
defeated by Pharaoh and carried into Egypt. 5. Jehoia- 
kim succeeds, but reigning ill, is carried bound into Egypt. 
9. Jehoiachin succeeding, reigns ill: he despises the 
prophets, and rebels against Xebuchadnezzar. 14. Jerusa- 
lem, for the sins of the priests and the people, is wholly 
destroyed. 22. The proclamation of Cyrus. Ezra, i: 1. 

Xote. "Verse 22 and the following verse are supposed to have 
been written by mistake from the book of Ezra, which begins the 
same way. These verses belong to a period 70 years later." — Bagster 

For history corresponding, to this chapter, see 2 Kings, from chap, 
xxiii : 30, to end of the book. 

§ 15. Conclusion to Chronicles. These books have 
been held in low estimation and much neglected by Bible 
students and commentators, because they say that they 
contain few things which are not to be found in the pre- 



152 HISTORY AND PROPHECY. 

ceding books. This, to some extent, is true; but it is 
equally true that they supply many circumstances omitted 
in the former accounts, with supplementary additions, and 
are written with a particular view, which was: (I) to sep- 
arate God's people, from the mixed multitude that returned 
from Babylon; (II) to ascertain the lineage of Judah, 
from which the Messiah should come ; and (HI) to re- 
establish them on their ancient footing. 



CHAPTER XXI. 

HISTORY AIS T D PROPHECY 

JUST BEFORE AXD AFTER THE DESTRUCTION OF JERUSALEM. 

§ 1. Outline Jeremiah's Prophecy : Section V of 
Part I. (See preface to Section F, Chap. XX: §11.) The 

following is an outline of this section: 

Chap, xxxvii. The Chaldeans having left Jerusalem to 
meet the Egyptians, Zedekiah counsels with Jeremiah, 
whom he east into prison. 

Note. The date of this chapter is ascertained by its introduction. 
In point of time it comes before the thirty-second and thirty-third 
chapters of this book. 

Chap, xxxii. Jeremiah's prayer in prison; the captivity 
confirmed; and promises of a gracious return. 

Chap, xxxiii. The prophet still in prison; gives further 
promises of restoration, and of extraordinary prosperity 
under the reign of the Messiah. 

Chap, xxxiv. Prediction against Zedekiah and the dis- 
obedient Jews. 



Ch. XXI: § 2. outline jeremiah's prophecy. 153 

Chap. xxxy. The temperance principles of the-Kechab- 
ites; God blesses them; they are a pattern of obedience for 
the Jews. 

Chap, xxxvi. Jeremiah's prophecy is written in a book; 
a portion read to the king, and then burned by him; after- 
wards it is rewritten. 

Chap, xxxviii. Jeremiah is taken out of the dungeon; 
his conference with the king; he is privileged to dwell in 
the court of the prison until the fall of Jerusalem. 

Chap, xxxix. Jerusalem is taken; Zedekiah is sent to 
Babylon, blind; Jeremiah is set at liberty. 

Chap. xl. Jeremiah, being liberated, goes to Gedaliah, 
the governor; and so do the dispersed Jews. 

Chap. xli. Ishmael murders Gedaliah and many of the 
people, and flees to the Ammonites, with a number of the 
Jews; but the latter are rescued from him by Johanan. 

Chap. xlii. Jeremiah is earnestly entreated to enquire of 
the Lord; he prophesies safety in Judea. 

Chap, xliii. His prophecy is discredited; he, with others, 
are carried down into Egypt; conquest of Egypt foretold. 

Chap. xliy. Jeremiah speaks of the desolation of Judah; 
he prophesies against them; he speaks of yieir obstinancy, 
ef the destruction of Egypt from the same cause; a rem- 
nant of Judah escape. 

Note. Some suppose that the discourse contained in this chapter 
was delivered 17 or 18 years after the capture of Jerusalem; and if 
so, it was written in Egypt, for the captives there. Chap, xlv may 
be considered as an episode. 

§ 2. Outline Jeremiah's Prophecy: Section I, 
Part II. (See preface to Section I, Chap. XX: § 11.) 
This section comprises chapters xlvi-li. 

Chap. xlvi. Two distinct prophecies: (I) against Egypt; 
(II) against Babylon. 

Chap, xlvii. The destruction of the Philistines. 



154 HISTORY AND PROPHECY. 

Chap, xlviii. The judgment against Moab (a son of Lot); 
their restoration. 

Chap. xlix. Judgments against the Ammonites (descend- 
ants of Benammi, son of Lot by incest); against Edom 
(descendants of Esau); against Damascus (Syrians); against 
Kedar and Hazor (Arabs, Ishmaelites); and against Elam 
(east of Persian Gulf, and eldest son of Shem), with prom- 
ise of their restoration. 

Chap. 1. The judgment against Babylon (Chaldeans); 
and the redemption of Israel (v. 4, 17, 34). 

Chap. li. The severe judgments continued against Baby- 
lon,* for the revenging of Israel; Jeremiah delivers this 
prophecy to Seraiah, to be first read, then cast into the 
Euphrates, in token of the perpetual sinking of Babylon. 

§ 3. Jeremiah's Prophecy : Section II, Part II. 

(See preface to Section II, Chap. XX: §11.) This. section 
includes the remaining chapter, lii. The preceding chap- 
ter concludes with the words, "Thus far are the words of 
Jeremiah," and they inform us that this chapter was not 
written by him. Indeed, it contains little more than a 
literal copy of a part of the twenty-fourth chapter, and 
nearly all of the- twenty-fifth, of the second book of Kings. 

The object of collecting these passages into this chapter 
evidently was to furnish the captives, who had no Bibles 
and concordances to refer to as we have, with a series of 
facts necessary to the understanding of the preceding 
prophecies, and to give light- on the Lamentations which 
follow, serving as a key to them. 

* This prophecy was written in Jerusalem by Jeremiah, and was 
sent to the captives in Babylon by the hand of Seraiah, who went 
there as ambassador for King Zedekiah in the fourth year of his 
reign. Seraiah is directed to read it to his countrymen in captivity: 
"Then thou shalt read all these words." This was in 594 B. C, or 
5G years before the taking of Babylon by Cyrus. 



Ch. XXI, §4. LAMENTATIONS OF JEREMIAH. 155 

The following outline is 25resented: 

Verse 1. Zedekiah rebels. 4. Jerusalem is besieged and 
taken. 8. Zedekiali's sons are killed and his eyes put out. 
12. Nebuchadnezzar burns and spoils the city. 24. He 
carries away the captives. 31. Eyil-merodach takes Jehoi- 
achin out of prison, and treats him kindly. 

§ 4. Lamentations of Jeremiah. 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "EXPRESSIONS OF SORROW." 

The Lamentations are "Expressions of Sorrow," and are 
composed after the manner of funeral liymns* They 
express, with most pathetic tenderness, the prophet's grief 
for the desolation of Jerusalem, the captivity of Judah, 
and the miseries associated with famine. 

"The use of this book was no doubt great to the pious 
Jews in their sufferings, furnishing them with language to 
express their natural grief, and helping to preserve in them 
a lively remembrance of their desolated Zion; and as well for 
their children, who did not see it, who were in captivity. 

This poem affords the most elegant variety of affecting 
images that ever, probably, were collected into so small a 
compass. " — Henry. 

Dr. Smith divides the chapters chronologically as follows: 

Chap. i. During the siege. 2 K. xxv: 1-3. 

Chap. ii. After the destruction of the temple. 2 Chron. 
xxxvi: 17-20. 

Chap. iii. During his own confinement in the dungeon. 
Jer. xxxvii: 11-16. 

Chap. iv. After the capture of Zedekiah. 2 K. xxv: 6-7. 

Chap. v. (A prayer.) After the final abandonment of 
the city. 2 K. xxv: 26. 

*■ We find in 2 Chron. xxxv : 25, that Jeremiah wrote lamentations 
upon the death of King Josiah, which may have been used at the 
funeral, or sung in memoriam. This elegy has not reached us, but 
seems to have been long preserved among his countrymen. 



156 HISTORY AND PROPHECY. 

§ 5. Prophecy of Obadiah. (See Diagram, Chap. 
XXIII: §13.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "AGAINST THE EDOMITES." 

Nothing of the personal history of this prophet is known. 
Archbishop Newcome and others suppose that he nourished 
between the final destruction of Jerusalem (B. C. 588) and 
the destruction of Idumea, which took place a few years 
afterwards. He was contemporary with Jeremiah, whose 
prophecy respecting Edom is very similar to that of Oba- 
diah. Ver. 5; compare Jer. xlix: 7, 8. 

"This, book," says Dr. Smith, "ma}', from internal 
evidence, be placed between B. C. 586 and B. C. 583. It 
is remarkable for its closing prediction of the coming 'day 
of Jehovah.' 'Saviors shall come up on Mount Zion to 
judge the mount of Esau; and the kingdom shall be the 
Lord's/" 

The book contains but one chapter, which begins with 
representing God as calling the nations "Against the 
Edomites," demanding their utter destruction, and declar- 
ing that all their strongholds should not save them. 

The following are a few of the many references which 
show the ill treatment of the Jews by the Edomites: 2 
Chron. xxviii: 17, with Ez. xxy: 12, 13, and Obadiah. 

(a. ) Who the Edomites tvere. The Edomites were of the 
posterity of Esau, the twin brother of Jacob, the sons of 
Isaac. Esau married two wives of the Canaanites, and 
there were born unto him eleven sons, who inter-married 
with the Horites. At length they swallowed up the sur- 
rounding nations, and the Israelites endured the crudest 
bondage from them. They were governed by eight kings, 
and were a powerful nation. About the time of the travels 
of the Hebrews in the wilderness, they united under one 
king, through fear of this wandering multitude. Many 
years after, in their prosperity, they gave some insult, to 



Ch. XXI: § 5. prophecy of obadiah. 15? 

David, who turned his victorious armies against them, and 
18,000 were slain m the valley of salt. After this they 
were governed by deputies under the king of Judah. After 
being subject to tbe Israelites for about 150 years, they 
threw off the yoke and set up a king of their own. This 
revolt transpired during the reign of Jehoram, B. C. 890. 

(b.) The Prophecy Fulfilled. This prophecy, according 
to Usher, began to be fulfilled about five years after the 
destruction of Jerusalem, in B. C. 582. About this time 
the Chaldeans, under Nebuchadnezzar, with whom they 
had been in alliance against Judah, ravaged Jdumea, and 
dispossessed the Edomites of a great part of Arabia Petraea, 
of which they never recovered full possession. 

" The Jews, after their return from the 70 years captivity, 
under a decree of Cyrus, extended over and took possession 
of their land. 

Darius Hystaspes (B. C. 500) ordered them to deliver up 
to the Jews that part of their country which they had 
siezed. 

About B. C. 154 Judas Maccabeus put about 40,000 of 
them to the sword, and sacked their capital; and later, 
B. C. 130, John Hircanus entirely conquered them, and 
obliged them to incorporate with the Jewish nation. 

Just before the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus, A. D. 
TO, a body of Edomites deserted the Jews, and went off 
laden with booty; since which their name has perished 
from among men.'' — JosepMis. 

Thus were they rewarded for insulting their brethren 
the Jews; and while at this day we see the Jews subsisting 
as a distinct people, Edom is no more. Agreeably to the 
words of this prophet, he has been "cut off forever." 
" Thus the prophecy appears to have been very literal in 
its fulfillment." — Bagster. 



158 HISTORY AND PROPHECY. 

§ 6. Prophecy of Ezekiel. (See Chronology, Chap. 
XXIV: § 6; also Diagram, Chap. XXIII: § 13.) 

GOLDEN" TOPIC, "ENCOURAGEMENT." 

Ezekiel was the son of Buzi, and the great prophet during 
the Babylonian captivity. Like his predecessor, Jeremiah, 
he was a priest. He was taken in the captivity of Jehoia- 
kim, eleven years before the destruction of Jerusalem. He 
was among the Jewish exiles who settled on the banks of 
the river Chebar.* Chap, i: 1. 

We learn from an incidental allusion in chapter xxiv: 
18 — the only reference which the prophet makes to his 
personal history — that he was married, and had a house 
(viii: 1) in the place of exile, and that he lost his wife by a 
sudden and unforeseen stroke. His mission lasted about 
twenty-two years. Nothing is known of his death. 

(a.) Divisions of the Prophecy. "The book may be 
divided into two parts, of which the destruction of Jeru- 
salem marks the turning point. Part I, chapters i-xxiv, 
contain predictions delivered before that event, and Part II, 
chapters xxv-xlviii, after it, as will be seen from chapter 
xxiv: 2."— Dr. Wm. Smith. 

The eminent German commentator, Haverneck, further 
divides the book into nine sections, as follows: 

(b.) Outline Part I. 

I. Chap, i-iii: 15. The call of Ezekiel to the prophetic 
office. 

II. Chap, iii: 16-vii. The general carrying out of the 
commission. 

* This river, according to Calmet, is the same as Habor, mentioned 
in 2 Kings, xvii: 6. If this is correct, ho prophesied to a remnant of 
the captives of Israel, who were taken captive by Shalmanezer 125 
years before. We are disposed to adopt this theory, from the fre- 
quent reference to Israel, and then to Judah. See chap. iv:5, 6. 
The reader will observe the frequent use of the term house of Israei. 



Oh. XXI: § G. PROPHECY OF EZEKIEL. 159 

III. Ohap. viii-xi. The rejection of the prophet because 
of their idolatry. 

IV. Chap, xii-xix. The sins of the age rebuked. 

V. Chap, xx-xxiii. The nature of the judgment, and 
the guilt that caused it. 

VI. Chap. xxiv. The meaning of the now commencing 
judgments. 

(c.) Outline Part II. 

VII. God's judgments denounced on seven heathen na- 
tions: Ainmon, xxv: 1-7; Moab, 8-12; Edom, 12-14; the 
Philistines, 15-17; Tyre, xxvi-xxviii : 19; Sidon, 20-24; 
Egypt, xxix-xxxii. 

Note. This section in the middle of the book (xxv-xxxii) contains 
a group of prophecies arranged regardless of the time when they were 
delivered, which is intentional, as elsewhere in Scripture, on the part 
of the writer or compiler. 

VIII. Chap, xxxiii-xxxix. Prophecies, after the destruc- 
tion of Jerusalem, concerning the future condition of Israel. 

IX. Chap, xl-xlviii. The glorious consummation; the 
new temple; its worship and glory. 

(d.) Character of the Prophecy. "The predictions of 
Ezekiel are marvelously varied. He has instances of 
vision (viii, xi), symbolical actions (iv: 8), similitudes (xii, 
xv), parables (xvii), proverbs (xii: 22; xviii: 1), poems (xix), 
allegories (as xxiii, xxiv), and open prophecies (as vi, vii, 
xx, etc.)." — Dr.Wm. Smith. 

The chronological order is followed throughout (the date 
of the prediction being constantly referred to), except in 
the section devoted to prophecies against heathen nations 
(xxv-xxxii), where it is several times abandoned. 

EzekiePs prophecy was largely for the " Encouragement " 
of Israel. In the vision of the resurrection of dry bones, 
it was intended, no doubt, to revive their hope; and it may 
be considered as an earnest of a general restoration here 
promised to the whole house of Israel. 



160 HISTORY A^D PROPHECY. 

This prophet, like Jeremiah, who made yokes and bonds 
to illustrate and enforce his prophecies, also uses many 
illustrations, or object lessons, to enforce that which he 
designed for their instruction. See chap, iv: 1, which 
occurred, says Scott, while he was shut up in his own 
house, and unable to speak to the people (iii: 22). The 
prophet is here ordered to predict by this sign what would 
powerfully strike the fancy and affect the mind (even the 
most stupid), the siege of Jerusalem, with its forts, batter- 
ing rams, etc. "This shall be a sign for the house of 
Israel." iv: 1-3. 

(e.) The Lost Ten Tribes. "The ten tribes composing 
the kingdom of Israel were taken captive into Assyria by 
Tiglath Pileser, about 740 B. C. See 2 K. xvii: 6. Many 
have been the conjectures with respect to their fate; some 
authors maintaining that they became totally extinct ; 
others that they exist to this day in some unknown part 
of the earth. Yet to others it seems more probable that 
they, and the captives of the tribes of Judah and Benjamin, 
amalgamated during the Babylonian captivity; and they 
returned together as one people, under the edict of the 
Persian king. 

To this conclusion the reader will be brought, who 
attentively examines the bearing of the following passages: 
Neh. xi: 3, xii: 47; Ezra, iii: 1, vi: 16, viii: 35, x: 5; Eze- 
kiel, xxxvii: 16-28. On no other principle is it easy to 
account for the amount of the population which is stated 
by Josephus as existing m Palestine at his time." — Am. 
Bap. Mag., Oct. 1834. 

Note. The reader will now turn to the prophecy of Ezekiel and 
read it carefully; and when doing so, bear in mind the above sugges 
tion. Read each section distinctively, observing where each one 
begins and ends, and note the subject. 



Oh. XX.LL: § 1. prophecy of daniel. 161 

CHAPTER XXII. 
HISTORY AFD PROPHECY 

DURING THE CAPTIVITY. 

§ 1. Prophecy of Daniel. {See Chronology, Cha]). 
XXIV: § 6; also Diagram, Chap. XXI 11 : § 13.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "HISTORY AND PROPHECY." 

Daniel was not, like Jeremiah and Ezekiel, a priest, but 
like Isaiah, of the tribe of Judah, and probably of the 
royal family. He was carried to Babylon in the fourth 
year of Jehoiakim, king of Judah, in the year B. (J. 60-4 
(t. e., eight years before Ezekiel), and probably about the 
eighteenth year of his age. He was placed in the court of 
Nebuchadnezzar, and was afterwards raised to great rank 
and power in the courts, both of the Babylonish and the 
Persian princes. He died at a very advanced age, haying 
prophesied during the whole period of the seventy years 
captivity. His last vision, respecting the succession of the 
kings of Persia, was written in his 90th year, and the third 
year of the reign of Cyrus. He was a man of deep piety 
and wisdom, even in his early life, which is attested of him 
by Ezekiel, xiv: 14-20, and xxviii: 3. He is characterized 
as one who spent much time in prayer. Much may be 
learned by observing the occasion when the prophetic 
vision is seen by these men of God. Thus the glorious 
display of the great work of redemption was made to 
Daniel when in the act of prayer, deeply bewailing his 
sins. Compare Dan. ix: 4. 21, etc.. with Isaiah, lvir 15. 

The book of Daniel was written in the darkness of the 
most terrible captivity the people of God evei suffered: 
"By the rivers of Babylon, there we sat down; yea, we 



162 HISTORY ASTD PROPHECY. 

wept when we remembered Zion. We hanged our harps 
upon the willows in the midst thereof." Ps. cxxxvii: 1, 2. 
Its prophecies extend from the first establishment of the 
Roman Empire, more than 500 years B. C, to the general 
resurrection. The fulfillment of some of the prophecies 
give us the greatest assurance that the rest will be fulfilled, 
and at the same time affords an unanswerable proof that 
the Bible is the Word of God. 

(a.) Chronology of this Booh. Though we cannot settle 
the chronology of this book, we may say that it covers the 
whole 70 years of the captivity in Babylon, commencing 
with : 

I. B. C. 604 The first captivity under Jehoiakim. 

II. B. C. 580. The three Hebrew children cast into the 
furnace. 

III. B. C. 569. The derangement of Nebuchadnezzar. 

IV. B. C. 538. The writing on the wall. 

Y. B. C. 537. Daniel cast into the den of lions. 

VI. B. C. 534. He is exalted in the realm in the third 
year of Cyrus (ch. x: 1), at which time he is supposed to 
have been 94 years old. This great age, and the honor 
shown him, are supposed to have been the reasons for his 
not returning to Judea. 

To place this book in order of time, and where it may 
give the Bible student the greatest advantage in under- 
standing it, we have decided, from its historic nature, to 
let it precede the historical account as given in Ezra. 

(b.) Two General Parts. This book consists of both 
" History and Prophecy," and may be divided into two 
parts : 

PART I. 

"This comprises chap. i-vi. It is chiefly historical, 
comprising: (I) the education of Daniel and his three 
friends, their advancement and trials issuing in their great 



Ch. XXII: § 1. PROPHECY OF DANIEL. 163 

honor; (II) the punishment of Nebuchadnezzar; and (III) 
the fall of Babylon. 

PART II. 

This includes chap, vii-xii. This part comprises: (I) 
various j)rophecies respecting the four great monarchies of 
Assyria, Persia, Greece and Home,* to be succeeded by the 
establishment of Christianity; (II) the division of the 
empire of Alexander into four, and the Roman into ten 
kingdoms; (III) the persecution of the Jews by Antiochus 
Epiphanes; (IV) the desolation of Jerusalem and of the 
sanctuary; (V) the power of Anti-Christ; (VI) the distinct 
assurance of the resurrection of the just and the unjust." 
— Nicholls. 

(c.) Outline Part I: Historical. {See § 1, b, part I.) 

Chap. i. The captivity of Jehoiakim, and the promotion 
of Daniel and his companions. 

Chap. ii. Nebuchadnezzar's dream forgotten; his demand 
of both the dream and its interpretation of the wise men; 
they failing to comply, Daniel relates and interprets the 
dream; and he and his three friends are promoted. 

Chap. iii. Nebuchadnezzar's image worshiped; the three 
friends of Daniel refusing, are cast into the fiery furnace; 
they are miraculously delivered. 

Chap. iv. Nebuchadnezzar's dream of a great tree; it is 
interpreted by Daniel, and is fulfilled. 

Chap. v. Belshazzar's feast; his death, and the end of 
the Babylonian empire. 

Chap. vi. Conspiracy against Daniel; he is cast into the 
den of lions, but is saved by an angel. 

* "These four empires had a particular relation to the people of 
God, who were subject to them in their turn. They were, therefore, 
particularly predicted, and we have in them, without the intermixture 
of others, a line of prophecy extending from the reign of Nebuchad- 
nezzar to the full and complete establishment of the kingdom of the 
Messiah." — Bp. Newton. 



164 HISTORY AX J) PROPHECY. 

(d.) Outline Part II: Prophetical. (See § 1, b, part II) 

Chap. vii. Daniel's vision of the four beasts; vision of 
God's kingdom, and its interpretation. 

Chap. viii. Vision of the ram and the lie-goats; the 2300 
days of sacrifice; the vision interpreted. 

Chap. ix. The prophet considers the duration of the 
captivity; he makes confession of sins; he prays for the 
restoration of Jerusalem; Gabriel informs him of the 70 
weeks. 

Chap. x. Daniel's vision of the Son of God ; being 
troubled, he is comforted by the angel. 

Chap. xi. The overthrow of Persia by the king of Grecia; 
leagues and conflicts betAveen the kings of the north and 
south; invasion and tyranny of the Romans. 

Chap. xii. The general resurrection foretold; Daniel in- 
formed of the times. 

(e.) Daniel as a Writer. "Daniel, as a writer, is simple, 
and so conscientious that he relates the very words of the 
persons whom he introduces as speaking. His narratives 
and descriptions are simple and natural; and, in short, he 
writes more like a historian than a prophet. His predic- 
tions are extraordinary. They include the general history 
of the world, as well as the church of God under the 
Jewish and Christian dispensations, from the time in which 
he lived down to the end of time; and he alone of all the 
prophets foretells the exact time when the Messiah should 
appear and finish the work of redemption." — /)/•. Pat ton. 

§ 2. Prophecy of Isaiah, Part TI. (See preface to 
Part 17. Chap. X VIII: § 7.) This part includes chapters 
xl-lxvi, and pertains to the prophecies in Babylon. (See 
Chronology, Chap. XXIV: §6.) 

Dr. Wm. Smith, speaking of Isaiah, says: "Thelast 27 
chapters are supposed by many critics to have been written 
in the time of the Babylonian captivity, and are thereioie 



Oh. XXII: § 2. prophecy of isaiah. 165 

ascribed to a * later Isaiah. ■ It is evident that the point of 
time and situation from which the prophet here speaks is 
that of the captivity of Babylon (compare lxiv: 10, 11); 
bnt this may be adopted on a principle which appears to 
characterize vision, viz: that the prophet sees the future 
as if presents" 

From Homes of God's People, p. 359, by Rev. TV. L. Gage, 
we extract the following: "Strictly speaking of this book, 
it seems to be not one book, but two; the first thirty-nine 
chapters being written during the reigns of Uzziah, Joth- 
am, Ahaz and Hezekiah, and the last twenty-seven by some 
unknown writer, who wrote apparently during the captivity. 
in a poetical light, however, the part by the ' Great Un- 
known.' as Ewald calls him, appears to be as rich and 
beautiful as that which is from the hand of Isaiah himself: 
and as some of the Psalms not written by David, but by 
unknown Hebrew poets, are as poetical as those which 
came from his royal hand, so it is with the mysterious 
author of the closing chapters of the book of Isaiah.*' 

"At this chapter (xl) begins the latter part of the proph- 
ecy of this book, which is not only divided from the former 
by the historical chapters, but seems to be distinguished 
from it in scope and style. In the former part, the name 
of the prophet was frequently prefixed to the particular 
sermon, besides the general title; as eh. ii: 1, eh. vii: 3, 
ch. xiii: 1. But this is ail one discourse, and the prophet 
not once named. The former consisted of many woes, hut 
this of many blessings. There the distress 'God's people 
were m was by the Assyrian, and their deliverance chiefly 
prophesied of: but that is here spoken of as a thing past- 
See ch. lii: 4. 

He furnished them with precious promises, for support 
and comfort in their trouble; and we may well imagine of 
what great use to them the glorious light of the prophecy 
was in that cloudy and dark day, and how much it helped 
to dry up their tears by the rivers of Babylon. 



166 HISTORY AND PROPHECY. 

But it looks yet further, and to greater things. Much 
of Christ and gospel grace we meet with in the former 
part of the book, but in the latter part much more; 
and as if designed for a prophetic summary of the Xew 
Testament, it begins with that which begins the gos- 
pels: 'The voice of one crying in the wilderness' ch. xl: 
3, and concludes with that which concludes the book of 
Rev.: 'The new heavens and the new earth/ ch. lxv: 22." 
— Henry. 

We have therefore concluded to let this concluding part 
of Isaiah's prophecy fill up the interim between the destruc- 
tion of Jerusalem and their deliverance from captivity. 
The reader will understand how well adapted it is to the 
circumstances of the people for whom it was intended. 
The following is an outline. 

(a.) Outline Isaiah, Continued; Chap. XL-LIX. 

Chap. xl. Predictions of the return of Judah from cap- 
tivity, and the coming of the Messiah. 

Chap. xli. God expostulates with his people about his 
mercies and promises, and the vanity of idols. 

Chap. xlii. A prophecy' of the Messiah, and Christ's 
mission to the Gentiles. 

Chap, xliii. God comforts his people by a prophecy of 
the destruction of their enemies, the Babylonians. 

Chap. xliv. Promises of God's spirit; an exposure of the 
folly of idol makers; an exhortation to praise the God of 
power. 

Chap. xlv. God calls Cyrus to deliver his people, and 
encourages him to trust in Him. 

Chap. xlvi. The idols of Babylon could not save them- 
selves, nor their worshipers. 

Chap, xlvii. God's judgment upon Babylon and Ohaldea, 
for their pride and boldness. 

Chap, xlviii. Israel reproved for not heeding the admon- 
itions of God's prophets. 



PROPHECY OF ISAIAH. 16T 

Chap. xlix. The Messiah, being rejected by the Jews. 
his mission is directed to the Gentiles. 

Note. Yer. 3: O Israel. "This cannot," says Bishop Lowth, "be. 
Isaiah; but it may apply to Messiah, who, in correspondence with 
the import of the name, 'As a prince had power with God and pre- 
vailed.' Compare Gen. xxxii: 28, and Hos. xii: 3, 4, with Heb. v: 7. 
Hitherto the subject of the prophecy has been chiefly confined to the 
redemption from the captivity, but here he is introduced in person 
declaring the full extent of his commission.'' 

Chap. 1. God justifies his own conduct. The Messiah 
predicts his own sufferings. 

Chap. li. Jews and Gentiles are directed to put their 
trust in Christ. 

Chap. lii. Zion roused from her stupor by the glad tid- 
ings of salvation. 

Chap. liii. The rejection, sufferings and death of the 
Messiah. See Acts, viii: 30, 31. 

Chap. liv. The Jewish church called to rejoice in her 
great accession of converts from the Gentiles. 

Chap. lv. A display of the fulness, freeness and excel- 
lence of the blessings of the gospel. 

Chap. lvi. Exhortation to piety, and judgments on 
wicked rulers. 

Chap. lvii. Blessed death of the righteous: idolaters re- 
proved; promise of happiness to the penitent. 

Chap, lviii. The hypocrisy of the Jews reproved; a word 
of encouragement to the penitent. 

Chap. lix. Wickedness of the people. The consequences- 
of sin. and the promise of the Eedeemer. See v. '20--21.* 

* I will now leave the reader to follow -out the reading of this very 
interesting prophecy after the manner introduced, not forgetting that 
it bears directly upon their deliverance from bondage, and also pre- 
figures the coming of Christ. 



1(58 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. 

CHAPTER XXIII. 

RETTTKN FROM CAPTIVITY. 

§ 1. Ezra: Continued History of the Jews. (See 
Chronology, Chap. XXIV: § 6.) 

golden topic, "god's providence.'* See Index. 

Having disposed of all the early prophets, and arranged 
them in their proper place chronologically, we are now 
ready to pursue the historical account of the Jews. This 
account is continued by Ezra, who was a priest, and who 
is supposed to have revised all the books of the Bible then 
extant, disposing them in their proper order, and settling 
the canon of Scripture for his time. See Poole*. 

This book gives us the history of 79 years, being a con- 
tinuation of the history of this people from the time at 
which the Chronicles conclude, which was written by the 
same hand. It begins with a repetition of the last two 
verses of Chronicles, which is attributed to an oversight of 
the transcribers. This history harmonizes most strictly 
with the prophecies of Haggai and Zechariah, which should 
be read in connection. 

"It is to be observed/' says Watson, "that between the 
dedication of the temple and the departure of Ezra, that 
is. between the sixth and seventh chapters of this book. 
there is an interval of about fifty-eight years, during which 
nothing is here related concerning the Jews, except that, 
contrary to God's command, they intermarried with the 
Gentiles." 

Ezra, like the Chronicles, consists of journals kept from 
tune to time, which were afterwards strung together, and 
either abridged or added to. as the case required, by a later 



Ch. XXIII: § 3. OUTLINE OF EZRA. 169 

hand. This later hand in the book of Ezra was his own, 
as appears in the last four chapters. 

§ 2. Three General Parts. This book consists of 
three parts, as follows: 

PART I. 

Chap. i-ii. Relates the return of the Jews from their 
captivity in Babylon, particularly informing us upon what 
encouragement and in what numbers they came. 

PART II. 

Chap, iii-vi. Gives an account of the rebuilding and 
dedication of the temple, notwithstanding the hindrances 
from the Samaritans. 

Note. Interim of fifty-eight years between chapters vi and vii. 
PART III. 

Chap. vii-x. Relates to the journey of Ezra to Jerusalem 
as a deputy from the king of Babylon, and, on his arrival, 
his deep mourning over the marriages of the Jews with 
strange women. 

§ 3. Outline of Ezra. 

Part I (See preface to Part I, § 2.) 

Chap. i. Cyrus issues a proclamation for rebuilding the 
temple, and the return of the Jews to their own land. 
B. C. 536. 

Chap. ii. A register of families, showing the number who 
returned of the people, priests, Levites, etc. 

Part II. (See preface to Part II § 2). 

Chap. iii. The altar set up. and the foundation of the 
temple laid. B. C. 535. 

Chap. iv. The building of the temple opposed by adver- 
saries, and stopped by a decree of Artaxerxes. king of 
Persia. 

Chap. v. The Jews roused to engage in work on the 
temple by Haggai and Zechariah, but are again opposed. 
A letter is sent to Darius, king of Babylon. B. C. 519. 

Outline continued, see £ 7. 



170 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. 

§ 4. Introduction to the Restoration Prophets 

{Haggai, Zechariah and. Mala clii). Says Dr. T. V. Moore: 
" The prophetic office is dmded into three eras: The first 
ends with the age of Samuel, in which we find the office 
but rarely filled, because of the purely theocratic character 
of the period. God ruled his people without the inter- 
vention of an executive, hence there was little need of a 
succession of prophets. 

But in the age of Samuel a second era begins, which 
extends to the age of Uzziah, about B. C. 800. This is the 
era of the prophets of action; hence the age of the kings 
is the age of the prophets. . . 

The third era began with the age of Uzziah, and was the 
era of written prophecy. It was then the prophets began 
to turn aAvay from the present and look more to the future, 
and the Messianic element began to grow more distinct. 
This era continued about 400 years. 

It is with the second and third of these eras that we have- 
mainly to do in tracing the development of the prophetic 
office. At the close of the second era we find the appear- 
ance of a prophetic literature in the Messianic Psalms. 
They prepared the way for the era of the prophets of the 
word, or that which was to be written. 

Samuel was the great head of the prophetic order, and 
doubtless enacted rules regarding it that gave it perma- 
nent form. It was in his time that we first find "Schools 
of the Prophets." But that God did not confine himself to 
them is proved by the case of Amos, who informs us that 
he had no connection with these normal institutes for 
training prophets (Amos, vii: 14); and the case of Elisha, 
who was called directly from the plough (1 K. xix: 19). 
These schools of the prophets were at Bethel, Gilgal. 
Haniah and Jericho, all within a short distance of each 
other, and in the tribe of Benjamin. 



Ch XXIII: § 4. THE RESTORATION PROPHETS. 171 

The third era, from Uzziah to the time of Malachi, is 
the era of written prophecy, and presents several marked 
divisions/ in each of which we find a group of prophets. 
In this era the grand division is made by the two kingdoms 
of Israel and Judah. We have resulting from this division 
three classes of prophets: (1) prophets to the ten tribes; 
(2) prophets to the Gentiles; (3) prophets of Judah. 

I. Prophets of the Ten Tribes. These are Hosea and 
Amos,, who, although residents of Judah, were called to 
prophesy in Israel. 

II. Prophets to the Gentiles. These were Jonah, Nahum 
and Obadiah, whose prophecies were directed toward the 
Gentiles. Jonah and Nahum directed their prophecies 
against Nineveh, and stand at the beginning and close of 
an era in Ninevite history. Obadiah directed his prophecy 
mainly against Edom, and hence may be classed with the 
prophets of the Gentiles. 

III. Prophets of Judah. These constitute the most im- 
portant division. This portion of the history of the 
kingdom of Judah has five distinct periods, each of which 
has its own peculiar prophecies. We have: 

1. The Culminating Period, which was between Uzziah 
and Hezekiah, about B. C. 800 to B. C. 700. When com- 
pared with the centuries preceding and following it, it was 
a century of prosperity, and the highest prosperity ever 
reached by the kingdom of Judah. The prophets of this 
period are Isaiah, Joel and Micah. Their tone is more 
cheerful, and the light of the future seems to rest on their 
pages, and they are all characteristically Messianic. 

2. The Declining Period. This extends from Manasseh 
to Zedekiah, a little more than a century. To this period 
belong Zephaniah and Habakkuk, on which pages rest the 
shadows of the setting sun. 



172 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. 

3. The Captivity. This is the mournful era, belonging 
to the prophet Jeremiah. 

4. The Exile. To this period, when nothing' was left 
but hope of the future, belong the prophets of the future, 
Ezekiel and Daniel. 

5. The Restoration. To this period belong the three 
last recipients of the prophetic gift during the Old Testa- 
ment dispensation, viz: Haggai, Zechariah and Malachi. 
It was the peculiar work of these prophets to sift the 
people, in order to extract the bitter elements contained in 
them, to rouse and incite them to the work before them, 
and to correct evils that were peculiar to that period. The 
historical books of Ezra and Nehemiah are the necessary 
counterparts of the prophecies, and they shed mutual light 
on each other.*' 

§ 5. Prophecy of Haggai. {See Diagram, Chapter 
XXIII: § 13.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "CAPTIVITY OF JUDAH." 

"Haggai is the first of the three prophets that appeared 
after the captivity. Of him personally Ave know but little. 
The name means literally my feast, and throws no light on 
his personal history. It is supposed he was born in Baby- 
lon during the captivity, and came to Jerusalem when 
Cyrus permitted a portion of the Jews to return under 
Zerubbabel, B. C. 53(1. 2 Chron. xxxvi: 23; Ezra, i: 1: 
also ii: 1. 

The prophecies of Haggai are dated with an unusual 
accuracy. The first was delivered on the first day of the 
sixth month of the second year of Darius, B. C. 520, and 
the last on the twenty-fourth day of the ninth month, thus 
extending through a period of not quite four months. 

(a.) General Divisions. 

PROPHECY I. 

(<hap. i. Summons to labor. 



Qh. XXIII. § 5. PROPHECY OF HAGGAI. 173 

PROPHECY II. 

Chap, ii: 1-9. Encouragement to labor. 

PROPHECY III. 

Chap, ii: 10-19. Instruction and encouragement. 

PROPHECY IV. 

Chap, ii: 20-23. The safety of Cod's people amidst the 
coming commotions. 

(b.) Explanation of this Prophecy. 

Prophecy I is a reproof to the people for their apathy in 
allowing the temple to lie in ruins. This call to duty was 
effectual,- for in twenty-four days afterwards we find the 
people commencing the work of rebuilding the temple 
under Zerubbabel. 

Prophecy II was designed to correct the feelings of de- 
preciation and discouragement that some of the people had 
in comparing the humble structure then going up with the 
magnificent fame of Solomon. To remove this reason or 
pretext, whichsoever it might be, he shows them wherein 
this greater glory should consist. 

Prophecy ///was to remove an error under which they 
had been laboring in regard to the efficacy of outward 
observances, and promises them a blessing if they engaged 
heartily in the work of rebuilding the temple. 

Prophecy IV was delivered on the same day as the 
preceding one, and was addressed to Zerubbabel, as the 
representative of the people. 

(c.) Characteristics of this Prophet. The style of 
Haggai is adapted to the nature of his various messages. 
When he exhorts, it is with pathos, and sometimes with 
tenderness; when he reproves, it is with burning severity; 
and when he looks forward to the magnificent future, he 
kindles with poetic fervor. He possesses a most patriotic 
spirit, and has deep piety, which produces an earnest char- 



174 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. 

acter, as deep as could be developed in our nature before 
the coming of 'God manifest in the flesh.'" — T. V. Moore. 

§ 6. Prophecy of Zechariah. (See Diagram, Chap. 
XXIII: § 13.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "THE CHRIST." 

"The name Zechariah (meaning one whom Jehovah re- 
members) was common among the Jews, as appears from 
the fact that four others besides the prophet are mentioned 
in the Old Testament. He was a priest, as well as prophet. 
In the prophecy he is called the son of Barachiah, the son 
of Iddo. Of his personal history we know but little, except 
that he entered early upon the discharge of his prophetic 
duties (ch. ii: 1). His family seems to have returned from 
Babylon with the first expedition in the reign of Cyrus. 

His prophecy was peculiarly adapted to the times in 
which he lived. Haggai was first raised up to rouse the 
people to activity in the building of the temple; and two 
months later Zechariah, to take up the same theme and 
unfold it yet more richly to the minds of the people, by 
connecting the j)oor and passing present with the magnifi- 
cent and enduring future. 

The date of this prophecy is recorded with accuracy, and 
is identical with that of Haggai, B. C. 520. 

(a.) Four General Parts. The prophecy consists of 
four parts, viz : 

I. Introductory, chap, i: 1-6. 

II. Symbolical, chap, i: 7, to end of chap, vi, containing 
nine visions. 

III. Didactic, chap, vii-viii. 

IV. Prophetic, chap, ix-xiv. 
(b.) Analysis. 

PART I. 

Chap, i: 1-6. Introduction. 



Ch. XXIII: '§ 6. PROPHECY OF ZECHARIAH. 175 

PART IT: VISIONS. 

I. Chap, i: 7-17. The man among the myrtles. 

II. Chap, i: 18-21. The four horns and four artificers. 

III. Chap. ii. The man with a measuring line. 

IV. Chap. iii. Joshua, the high priest, before the angel 
of Jehovah. 

V. Chap. iy. The golden candlestick, and the two olive 
trees. 

VI. Chap, t: 1-4. The flying roll. 

VII. Chap, v: 5-11. The woman in the Ephah. 

VIII. Chap, yi: 1-8. The four chariots. 

IX. Chap, yi: 9-15. The crown on Joshua's head. 

PART III: DIDACTIC. 

Chap, vii: 1-3. The query. 

Chap, vii: 4-14. The reproof. 

Chap, viii: 1-17. Promises. 

Chap, viii: 18-19. The reply. 

Chap, viii: 20-23. Promises to the church. 

PART IV: PROPHETIC. 

I. Chap, ix: 1-8, The Syrian conquest of Alexander. 

II. Chap, ix: 9-10. The lowly king, Messiah. 

III. Chap, ix: 11-17. The Maccabean deliverance. 

IV. Chap, x: 1-5. Prayer and promise. 

V.. Chap, x: 6-12. The restoration of the Jews. 

VI. Chap. xi. The mission of the Messiah. 

(1. ) Ver. 1-3. The storm preceding the coming of Christ. 

(2.) Ver. 4-14. Christ assuming the pastoral care of his 
people. 

(3.) Ver. 15-17. The curse of evil rulers after the rejec- 
tion of Christ. 

VII. Chap, xii: 1-9. Future blessings of Christ. 

VIII. Chap, xii: 10-11. Future repentance and blessing 
of Jerusalem. 

IX. Chap, xiii: 1-6. Fruits of repentance. 



176 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. 

X. Chap, xiii: 7-9. The sword awakening against the 
shepherd. 

XI. Chap. xiv. The glories of the future church.*' — 
T. V. Moore. 

§ 7. Outline of Ezra, Part II. (Continued frwn 
§ 3, a.) 

Chap. yi. Darius confirms the decree of Cyrus. The 
work goes on; the temple is finished and dedicated, and 
the worship of the true God re-established. B. C. 500. 

§ 8. Outline of Ezra, Part III. 

Chap. vii. Ezra goes up to Jerusalem. The commission 
from Artaxerxes (Ahasuerus) in their favor. 

Outline continued, see § 10. 

Note. We now return to pursue the history of the Jews as found 
in Esther, as given by Ezra. 

§ 9. Esther: Historical. (See Chronology, Chapter 
XXIV: §6.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "SPECIAL PROVIDENCE. " 

This book derives its name from the person whose history 
it chiefly relates, and is by the Jews called The volume of 
Esther. It does not extend the chronology of the Old 
Testament, as it forms an episode, which is generally placed 
between the seventh and eighth chapters of Ezra, and 
should be read in this connection. Ezra is supposed to be 
the author. 

The theme of- this book is Hainan's plot for the destruc- 
tion of the Jews throughout the Persian empire, which at 
the time comprehended all Asia; and the frustration of 
that plot by a remarkable interference of the "Special 
Providence" of God in the promotion of Esther and her 
uncle Mordecai. See ch. iv: 14. This special providence 
is beautifully narrated by Rev. IT. Reade, in his u Eland of 
(rod in History." 



Oh. XXIII: § 9. Esther. 177 

(a.) Special Providence Illustrated. "A young shepherd 
boy, as he tended his father's flocks on the hills of Pales- 
tine, dreams a dream. No strange thing this, accustomed 
as he was to gaze on the starry concave; not strange that 
he should dream of the sun, moon and stars, or that it 
should be interpreted of his future greatness, or that his 
brethren on this account hate him, or that Joseph should 
be sold into Egypt. Here seemed an end of the whole 
matter. The exiled youth would soon wear out in bond- 
age, unknown and unwept; a disconsolate father go down 
to the grave mourning; and the posterity of Jacob cultivate 
their fields, and watch their flocks, forgetful that this out- 
rage to humanity ever disgraced the annals of their family 
history. But not so in the mind of God. Joseph is 
enslaved — accused of crime — thrown into prison. Yet in 
that dark cell is nourished the germ of hope to the church 
of the living God. Israel grew up on the banks of the 
Nile, and spread his boughs to the river, and his branches 
to the sea. 'The eye of God was steadily fixed on the 
advancement of his church. 

Again, something is seen floating amidst the flags of the 
river of Egypt. A servant woman is ordered to bring it. 
It is an ark of rushes. Thousands of Hebrew children 
had perished uncared for; but now, as by accident, one is 
found and introduced into the palace of the king and to 
the court. He is educated in all the learning of the Egyp- 
tians, and schooled in the discipline needful to make him 
a legislator and a military leader. With what care did 
God watch that little rush bark, and with skill ordered 
every event, till he had reared up Moses, and fitted him to 
act a more prominent part in the advancement of his 
cause than any mortal had acted before. 

An obscure female is born in Persia. At an early age 
she was left an orphan. An uncle adopts her, and hopes 
she may yet solace his declining years. She is beautiful. 



178 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. 

lovely, modest, yet nothing points her out to any enviable 
station above the thousands of the daughters of Persia. 
To all human forethought, she would live and die un- 
known as she was born. 

But the church of God is scattered throughout the one 
hundred and twenty-seven provinces of Persia. Esther is 
a daughter of the captivity; and God would raise up some 
guardian spirit to save his people from an impending dan- 
ger, and honor them in the sight of the heathen. The 
palace of Shushan, and the gorgeous court of the Shah, 
shall stand in awe of Esther's God. By a singular train 
of circumstances this obscure orphan is brought to the 
notice of the king. She finds favor, and is called to share 
with him the honors of his throne. 

The king was wakeful on his bed. But what of that 9 
This may not have been an uncommon occurrence; we 
meet this as one of the most common occurrences of life; 
nothing is thought of it. But not so with the king; he 
may or may not have been able to give a cause of his rest- 
lessness. But be that as it may, he must be amused, 
instructed, or by some means have his mind diverted; and 
he calls for the reading of the chronicles, the result of 
which put Esther in position with her uncle, and saved 
the nation from death. Here we have illustrated what 
God wrought out of this most trifling circumstance of life. 

Again, a youth of nineteen years of age is carried captive 
to Babylon. But there is nothing singular in this. Thou- 
sands of every age and rank had been forced away from 
their native hills in Palestine. But the time had come 
when God wanted to proclaim his name. Again he wanted 
to magnify his church in the sight of all nations. Hence 
Daniel's captivity.* That youthful saint prayed and exem- 
plified unbending piety, till the king and his court, the 
nobles and the people, publicly acknowledged the God of 
Daniel. " — Reade. 



Ch. XXIII: § 9. Esther. 179 

It is in the light of special providences that true history 
is made up; and "the work of redemption is the sum of 
all God's providences.'' 

The name of God is not found in this beautiful little 
episode; but his finger is seen very clearly directing the 
minutest events for the deliverance of his people. It con- 
tains no prophecies, nor any reference directly or indirectly 
to Christ; yet it is one of the clearest gospel representations 
on record. 

(b. ) Analysis. The events recorded in this history may 
be divided into three parts, as follows: 

PART I. 

Chap. i. Ahasuerus, king of Persia (Artaxerxes), makes 
a royal feast, and sends for Queen Vashti to attend; but 
she refuses, and is disgraced. 

Chap. ii. A selection of "fair young virgins" is made 
for the king, among whom is Esther, the niece of Mordecai, 
who is made queen; Esther's feast. 

PART II. 

Chap. iii. Hainan promoted; he plots the ruin of Mor- 
decai, and the destruction of the nation of the Jews, 
because Mordecai refuses to bow to him. 

PART III. 

Chap. iv. The effects of this decree, and Mordecai's plan 
to counteract it, in which the queen acquiesces. 

Chap. v. Esther appears before the king; he and Hainan 
attend two banquets at her invitation; Haman prepares a 
gibbet for Mordecai. 

Chap. vi. Ahasuerus, not being able to sleep, has "the 
chronicles of the kingdom read, which mention the services 
of Mordecai; Haman, coining in in the morning, is made 
an instrument of rewarding him. 

Chap. vii. The queen now accuses Haman of plotting 
against her life;- and the king, astonished and enraged, 
orders his immediate execution. 



180 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. 

Chap. viii. The king promotes Mordecai to Hainan's 
place, and authorizes the Jews to stand in their own 
defence. 

Chap. ix. The Jews retaliate severely on their enemies; 
the feast of Purim is appointed as a memorial of the event. 

Chap. x. The book closes with an appeal to the Persian 
records, and a short sketch of the life of Mordecai. 

§ 10. Outline of Ezra, Part III. {Continued 
from §8.)_ 

Chap. viii. Ezra and his companions return from Baby- 
lon with the treasures. 

Chap. ix. Ezra's prayer and confession. 

Chap. x. The strange wives put away; names of those 
who had taken idolatrous wives. 

Conclusion to Ezra. "This book details the events 
of a very interesting period of the sacred history, when, 
according to the decrees of Providence, the Jewish people 
were to be delivered from their captivity, at the expiration 
of seventy years, and restored to the land of their fathers. 
This book informs us lioiv the divine goodness accomplished 
this most gracious design, and the movers and agents He 
employed on the occasion." — Bagster. 

§ 11. Nehemiah : Continued History of the Jews. 

(See Chronology, Chap. XXIV : § 6.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "REFORM AT I OX." 

This book resumes the history of the Jews about VZ 
years after the close of the book of Ezra, and contains the 
latest records of the nation till the days of Christ, reaching 
down about 154 years after the captivity. It was evidently 
written by Nehemiah himself, who throughout speaks in 
the tirst person. 

Nehemiah was a Jew, and a cup bearer of Artaxerxes 
(Ahasuerus), king of Persia. Hearing ot the distressed 



Ch. XXIII: § 11. NEHEMIAH. 181 

state of his countrymen, he petitioned the king- for leave 
to go to Jerusalem as governor, with a commission to 
rebuild the walls, and to provide for the security of his 
people. He obtains his request, and executes his mission 
for twelve years wj,th great success, after which he returns 
to the king of Persia. But he at length again goes up to 
Jerusalem, and employs various measures to promote the 
prosperity of the Jews, and the "Reformation" of abuses. 

Nehemiah is characterized as a reformer. He has much 
.zeal, activity and disinterestedness, which is well worthy of 
imitation, especially by those who are employed in the good 
work of the church. 

"This book always has been considered by the Jews as a 
part of the Scriptures, and indeed as a continuation of the 
book of Ezra. It does not, however, seem to contain any 
prophecies, nor is it explicitly referred to in the New Tes- 
tament. " — Scott. 

The book has no special reference to Christ, except where 
he is prefigured in the manna to the hungry and water to 
the thirsty, chap, ix: 20. 

(a.) Outline. 

Chap. i. Nehemiah's distress for his countrymen; he 
offers prayer in their behalf. 

Chap. ii. He goes to Jerusalem with a commission from 
Artaxerxes (the same who gave a commission to Ezra some 
years before) to rebuild Jerusalem. 

Chap. iii. Names and order of those who builded the 
wall. 

Chap. iv. The Samaritans oppose the work; Nehemiah's 
prayer; the enemies are defeated by his vigilance. 

Chap. v. The people complain of oppression from their 
richer brethren; Nehemiah obliges them to make compen- 
sation; and he sets them a good example. 

Chap. vi. Sanballat tries to injure and intimidate Nehe- 
miah. 



182 RETURN FROM CAPTIVITY. 

Chap. vii. The wall is finished; a registry of the families 
of those who first came from Babylon; and the offerings of 
the people. 

Chap. viii. The law read by Ezra and explained; and 
the feast of tabernacles celebrated. 

Chap. ix. A prayer of the Levites, rehearsing God's 
dealings with their forefathers, and an acknowledgement 
and confession of their sins; their covenant. 

Chap. x. The names of those who signed the covenant; 
the rest of the people bind themselves to observe it; and 
the renewal of the sacred rites of the temple worship. 

Chap. xi. Names of the dwellers in Jerusalem, and in 
Judah and Benjamin. 

Chap. xii. The names and order of the priests and Le- 
vites; dedication of the wall; offices of priests and Levites 
appointed in the temple. 

' Chap. xiii. Nehemiah, having returned from Persia, finds 
the Jews lapsed into sin, and immediately sets about the 
work of reformation; charge concerning the Sabbath; the 
strange wives dismissed; a closing prayer in his own behalf. 

§ 12. Prophecy of Malachi. (See Diagram, Chap. 
XXIII: §13.) 

golden topic, "the baptist." See Index. 

Malachi is the last of the prophets of the Old Testa- 
ment, as Nehemiah is the last of the historians; and the 
time of his ministry coincides with that of Nehemiah's* 
administration. Compare Mai. ii: 11, with Neh. xiii: 23- 
31; and Mai. i: 10, iii: 8, with Neh. xiii: 10-11. Hence 
this prophecy follows immediately the close of the historical. 

The name of this prophet means messenger, or angel of 
Jehovah. The abuses spoken of by Malachi were precisely 
the same as corrected by Nehemiah. We are compelled, 
therefore, to assign the date of this prophet as coincident 
with the second reformation of Nehemiah, or soon after, 
between B. C. 430 and 400. 



Oh. XXIII: § 12. PROPHECY OF MALAOHI. 183 

(a.) Peculiarity of this Prophecy. "There is some- 
thing peculiarly solemn in the closing of the Old Testament 
canon. The stern vigor of its reproofs, the yearning tender- 
ness of its appeals, and the sublime sweep of its predictions, 
combine to give it an intrinsic interest of the profoundest 
character. But this interest is greatly enhanced by its 
position. It is the transition link between the two great 
dispensations of redemption — the last note of that mag- 
nificent oratorio of revelation, whose wailing of sorrow and 
breathing of hope were soon to give place to that richer 
song, which should be not only of Moses, but of the Lamb, 
and tell not only of Eden and Sinai, but of Calvary and 
heaven. Hence we find running through it voices of the 
past and voices of the future — the knell of the departing, 
and the chimes of the coming age. 

(b. ) Divisions of this Prophecy. This prophecy is com- 
posed of six distinct parts or sections: 

SECTION I. 

Chap, i: 1-5. The expostulation. 

SECTION II. 

Chap, i: 6-14; ii: 1-9. The sins of the priests. 

SECTION III. 

Chap, ii: 10-16. Mixed marriages and divorce. 

SECTION IV. 

Chap, ii: 17; iii: 1-6. The coming of Christ and the 
Baptist. 

SECTION v. 
Chap, iii: 7-12. The neglect of tithes and offerings. 

SECTION VI. 

Chap, iii: 13 to end. Reproofs and warnings. 

(c.) Analysis. Section I opens the charges against Israel 
by laying bare the root of their sin: an insensibility to Cod, 
whose providence had been so signally unfolded in their 
history, proving his love. 



184 RETL'KX FROM CAPTIVITY. 

Section II addresses the priests, reproving them for their 
neglect of the worship of God, threatening punishment for 
their sins; and contains a prediction of the calling of the 
Gentiles. 

Section III rebukes the mixed marriages of the people, 
and their injurious treatment of their wives. 

Section IV predicts the coming of Christ and his fore- 
runner, and the different aspect he will appear from that 
in which he is looked for by the Jews. 

Section V reproves their withholding the tithes. . 

Section VI describes more fully the sinful character of 
the people; contrasts it with the character of those who 
fear the Lord; and then describes the contrast in their 
destinies that will take place in the dread scenes of the 
f uture. "— Rev. T. V. Moore. 



uQ § 13 Diagram orTHE Kings S. Prophets. 
jnn Q_ Dedication of the Temple 




Ch. XXIII. 



LESSON IX AND X. 



185 



1 
J 



LESSON IX AND X. 

Part I. 

hi. Jbvk. : (gonqutei. Jcbhua, q 

2d. tad. : Wov&mmeni. $(iah fiue&fo, 
3d. wu4h : &iiam oj Wamd\ pamilu. 

&amuil f 

Mk. 1 and 2 if am. : <^Mml\ and 

tiidah\ $/finm. ffamuel, 

5ih . / and 2 £$mab : ^od 1 -* &l44ukde&. 

(^faikan, 

Part II. 

Mi. 1 and 2 (gh'ivn. : Meview. §Ua ; 
jih §i. : %yd\ ©Picwdence. " 

$4h. qjfeh.: Sejfotmaiwn. qjfehemiah, 
o4h. $dk. : ifjieual iPiov-idence. (@4u= 

bode.) §W, 



e 

^* < 



H20 
1512 
104 J 



SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Note. Review the last lesson. This lesson is to be treated much 
like the preceding ones, except, on account of its length, it is divided 
into two parts; the first part ending with the second volume of the 
Kings, and the two making one lesson complete. Let first lesson 
remain on the board until the second lesson is complete. 

Part I. 

What is the name of the grand division of which this 
lesson is a part? Bee Index. How many parts has it? 
Name the first. The second. Into how many parts is the 
Executive divided? 

Note. Place on board bracket and 1st, 2d, etc. 



186 LESSON IX AND X. 

How many years of history in this division? (Ch. XII: 
§ 1.) What kind of history is this? (§ 2.) How does it 
differ from other history? By whom was it written? Who 
were the compilers? (§3.) How does this history compare 
with the oldest profane history now extant? (§ 5.) 

What is the name of the first subdivision? (§ 6.) What 
is the leading or golden topic? Who is suprwsed to be the 
writer? When is it supposed he wrote it? See Ref. Bible. 
Of what may it be considered a particular history? (§ 7.) 
Who is the supreme governor? (§ 8.) Into how many 
general parts is the book divided? (§ 10.) The first? The 
second? etc. What important prophecy is fulfilled? (§ 11.) 

What is the name of the second subdivision? (Ch. XIII: 
§ 1.) What is the golden topic? What two persons are 
found at opposite ends of this history? (Acts, xiii: 20.) It 
comprises how many years? Ans. 450. 

Note. Teacher will continue questions. 

What is the name of the third subdivision? (Ch. XIV: 
§ 1.) The golden topic? 
Note. Rehearse briefly the story of Ruth. 

What is the name of the fourth subdivision? (Ch. XV: 
§1; also XVI: §1.) 
Note. Question on golden topic, etc. 

What is the name of the fifth subdivision? (Ch. XVII: 
$ 1; also XVIII: § 1.) What is the golden topic? Of 
what is the second volume of Kings a particular history? 
(Ch. XVIII: § 1.) How many years of history does it 
contain? Author? etc. How many of the written proph- 
ecies are there included in the history of this second volume 
of the Kings? 

Note. Count them, and state what chapters they follow. Write 
the names of the prophets on the end of the board in chronological 
order. Have the class find the dates of the prophecies in refeience 
Bible. Compare their date with the latest date of Kings 



Ch. XXIII. LESSON IX AND X. 187 

Part II. 
Note. Review Part 1. 

What is the name of the sixth subdivision of the Execu- 
tive? See Index: What is the golden topic? (Ch. XIX: 
§ 1.) When written? By whom? Comprises how many 
years? What was the writer's object? Are these records 
valuable to us? Into how many general divisions may the 
first volume of Chronicles be divided? (§ 2.) What is the 
subject of the first? The second? Third? 

What are the general divisions of Volume II? (Ch. XX: 
§ 2.) What is the subject of the first? The second? 
How many written prophecies do we find in connection 
with this period of history? Ans. Isaiah, Jeremiah and 
Habakkuk. 

Note. Place these names with the eight prophets already on the 
end Of the board. 

What is the name of the seventh subdivision ? (Ch. 
XXIII: § 1.) What prophets' writings come between the 
history as given in the Chronicles and that of Ezra? Ans. 
Jeremiah, Obadiah, Ezekiel, Daniel. 

Note. Write them on the board. 

What is the golden topic? What is said of Ezra in 
connection with the Scriptures? This book contains the 
history of how many years? What two prophets should be 
read in connection with this history? 

Note. Write them on the board. 

What is the name of the eighth subdivision? (Ch. XXIII: 
§ 11.) What is the golden topic? 

Note. Bring out sketch as noted in this section. 

What prophet's writings are given in connection with 
Nehemiah's history? (Ch. XXIII: §12.) 

Note. AVrite answer on the board. 

What is the name of the ninth subdivision? (Ch. XXIII: 

§3-) 

Note. Relate briefly the story of Queen Esther, as an episode in 
the history as given by Ezra. Close with review from the board. 



188 lesson xi. 

LESSON XI. 

4&4. $ba. : ffhe @vanaetib4. $>. $. J0C 

2d. fei, : Wee/liny IPio/ikei (gafulividy. " Soc 

sd. Sam. : ^xkie&Honb oi Sfoiicw. *' " Soo 

4m, §le. : ^ncou/iaamienti '. " " 6>15 

5lh. Wan.: <!$ido ! iy and iPiefiAecy. " " 6 J J 






^ 



SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

What is the name of the third Old Testament grand 
division? See Index. Into how many parts is it divided? 
(Oh. V: § 3.) What are the jiames? What is the name 
of the first? Why so called? (§ 3, a.) The second? Why 
so called? (b.) Into how many parts are the Major Proph- 
ets divided? 

Note. Draw bracket and numerals on the board. 

What is the abbreviation of the first? What is said of 
his personal history? (Ch. XVIII: § 7.) What docs his 
name signify? What, then, may we conclude to be the 
golden topic? (See Isa. xl: 1-11; lxi: 1-3.) Into how 
many general parts may this prophecy be divided? (§ 7, a.) 

Note. Give the number of chapters; each pupil find the same, 
designating each by a mark on the margin of the page. Then the 
subject of each part, and during the reign of what king. For Part 
I, see Chap. XVIII: § 8; Part II, Chap. XX: § 4, etc. 

Date? See Ref. Bible. 

What is the name of the second part? Who was Jere- 
miah? (Oh. XX: § 11, a.) He was a native of what place? 
(Jer. i: 1.) During the reign of what king did he prophesy? 
(Jer. i.: 2. 3.) 

Note. Call out passages respecting Christ; also the general divi- 
sions (c), and the sections (d), giving the subjects of each. 



Ch XXIII. LESSON .XII AND XIII. 189 

What is the name of the third part? (Ch. XXI; § 4.) 

Note. Question on this, and then call out the fourth part (Ch 
XXI: § 6), and the fifth (Ch. XXII: § 1). Then review from the 
board. 







LESSON XII AND XIII. 






C/a/yect '. 


Part I. 








/. 


q$o*. : ®{laain&4 ^Maet. 


9.Q. 


>j2o 




2. 


Jcrl : §mdlt fudamenfa. 


a 


$00 




3. 


®/lmob : (galdimiu oj ^'caei. 


u 


7*1 




J>. 


06a. : gwalwd 4he §dcnii4&>. 


t( 


68^ 




6. 


Jonah : §/o (^/Ineveh. 


u 


Mt 




S. 


ct (lie. : (ghim\ ($fmadom. 


u 


>J40 






Part II 






"§-■ 










ss 


■/■ 


^fah. : (gomfo'idn'i . { (gaMividu?) 


(( 


fJ4S 




8. 


$falj. : ^laaind 4 he (ghaldeam. 


l( 


M 




( i- 


Uik. : (gafi4im4u oj fudah. 


It 


ijc 




40. 


$ag. : id and ?d (gomina oj (gk/iid. 


11 


52(j 




44. 


jfcch. : gfke (gk'ivd. 


(( 


520 




42. 


®ALaL : §he $a,ji4i&4. 


u 


u n 



SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Part I. 

What is the subject of this lesson? Why so called? 
This is a part of what grand division? How many books 
does it contain? 

Note. Draw brackets and place numbers on the board. 



190 LESSOR XII AND XIII. 

What is the name of the first? 
Note. Call for them in order. 

Who was the first? Whose son was he? (Hos. i: 1.) 
During the reign of what kings did he prophesy? (Hos. 
i: 1.) In what century did these kings live? See Ref. 
Bible; also Ch. XVIII: § 3. What prophets were contem- 
porary with Hosea ? During how many years did he 
prophesy? Date? See Ref. Bible. 

Note. Class should be required to find some prophecy referring 
to Christ. (See %'S, a.) 

What is the name of the second subdivision? (Ch. 
XVIII: § 6.) 

Note. Question on this part, then call out the third (Ch. XVIII: 
§ 4), the fourth (Ch. XXI: § 5), the fifth (Ch. XVIII: § 2), and the 
sixth (Ch. XVIII : § 10) in like manner. Review. 

Part II. 

What is the name of the seventh subdivision? (Ch. 
XVIII: § 12.) 

Note. Question, and then call out the eighth (Ch. XX: § 13), the 
ninth (Ch. XVIII: § 14), the tenth (Ch. XXIII: § 5), the eleventh 
(Ch. XXIII: § 6), and the twelfth (Ch. XXIII: § 12), questioning as 
time will admit. Then review both parts from the board. 



Ch. XXIII. TABULAE VIEW OF THE PROPHETS. 191 



TABULAE VIEW OF THE PROPHETS. 

The prophets arranged in chronological order, showing 
where they should be read in connection with the historical 
books: 

Following 2 Kings (God's Attributes): 

Chapter xiv. JoitAH (B. C. 862), Hosea and Amos. 

" xv. Joel and Isaiah, ch. i-v. 

" xvi. Micah. 

" xix. Nahum. 

" xxi. Zepha^iah. 
Latest date in the Kings, B. C. 563. 

Following 2 Chronicles (Review): 
Chapter xxviii. Isaiah, ch. vi-xxxix. 
" xxxiii. Jeremiah, ch. i-xxxi. 
xxxv. Habakkuk, B. C. 636. 

Between the Chronicles and Ezra, following 2 Chronicles 
(Captivity): 
Chapter xxxvi. Jeremiah, ch. xxxii-li. 
" " Obadiah. 

" " Ezekiel. 

" " Daniel. 

Isaiah, ch. xl-lxvi. B. C. 456. 

Following Ezra (Restorative) : 
Chapter v. Haggai, B. C. 520. 

".* Zechariah, B. C. 520. 

Following Nehemiah (Reformation): 
Chapter xiii. Malachi, B. C. 400. 



192 DEVOTIONAL. 

CHAPTEE XXIY. 
DEVOTIONAL. 

§ 1. Job. {See Chap.V: § 2, a; also Index.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "PATIENCE." 

"That Job is a real character is proved by the manner 
in which he is introduced by the prophet Ezekiel (xiv: 14). 
and the apostle James (v: 11). He was an inhabitant of 
Uz, in that part of Arabia bordering on Judea, and has 
been supposed to be descended from TTz, the eldest son of 
Nahor, Abraham's brother. 

Elihu, in reckoning the modes of divine revelation, takes 
no notice of the delivery of the Mosaic law; nor does there 
seem to be an}* allusion to Jewish history in any part of the 
book. Hence Job is supposed to hare lived before Moses, 
and this book to be the oldest in the world. 

As to the writer of this book, it can not be positively 
ascertained. Some think it to be Job, while others attrib- 
ute its authorship to Moses. It is interesting as containing 
the earliest record of patriarchal religion as it was professed 
by one not probably of the seed of Abraham." — Nicholls, 

(a.) Three General Parts. It may be divided into three 
parts : 

PART I. 

Chap, i. ii: 1-10. A narrative of this eminent servant 
of God, suddenly plunged from the greatest prosperity 
into dec}) affliction — the entire loss of his property, clnl- 
dren and health — which he bears with most exemplary 
" Patience." 

PART II. 

Chap, ii: 11. to close chap. xli. A controversy } which wa> 
a series of yet heavier trials fco Job, and which originated in 
the visit of his three friends. Eliphaz, Bildad and Zophar. 



Oh. XXIV:. g 1. job. 1913 

PAllT III, 

Chap, xlii The issue of the narrative and the contro- 
versy seen in the deep repentance of Job; God's reproof of 
his three friends; his appointing to offer sacrifice, which, 
through the intercession of Job, removed from them God's 
anger; and his promoting Job to yet greater prosperity 
than he had before his affliction. 

(b. ) Analysis. The following i >s an analysis of this book 
as given by Henry: 

(1.) The history of Job's sufferings, and his patience 
under them (ch. i, ii), not without mixture of human 
frailty (ch. iii ). 

(2.) A dispute between him and his friends on his suffer- 
ings and frailties, in which the opponents were Eliphaz (of 
Teman in Idumea. This was originally the name of a 
prince of the posterity of Esau. Gen. xxxvi: 11-15), Bil- 
dad (who belonged to a people descended from Sliuah, the 
Last of the six sons of Keturah, the second wife of Abraham. 
Gen. xxv: it), and Zophar (who is called the Kaamathite; 
nothing is further said of his descent or place of abode). 
The respondent was Job. 

(3.) The moderators were: (a) Elihu, ch. xxxii-xxxvii; 
(b) God himself, ch. xxxviii-xli. 

(4.) The. issue of all. in Job's honor and prosperity (ch. 
xlii). 

We learn that many are the afflictions of the righteous. 
but the Lord delivers them out of them all. 

(c.) Depository of Patriarchal Religion. "This book 
then." says J. M. Good, supposing Moses to be the author, 
"becomes a depository of patriarchal religion, the best and 
fullest in the world, and drawn up by the pen most compe- 
tent to do it justice. 

It will then appear that the chief doctrines of the patri- 
archal religion, as collected from different parts of this 
poem, were as follows: 



194 DEVOTIONAL. 

I. The creation of the world by one supreme and eternal 
intelligence. Chap, xxxviii-xli. 

II. Its regulation by his perpetual and superintending 
providence. Chap, i: 9-12, ii: 10, v: 8-27, ix: 4-13, and 
almost every ensuing chapter. 

III. The intentions of his providence carried into effect 
by the administration of a heavenly hierarchy. Chap, i: 
6, 7; iii: 13, 19; v: 1; xxxiii: 22, 23. 

IV. This heavenly hierarchy composed of various ranks 
and orders (Col. i: 16; Dan. iv: 17), possessing different 
names, as servants, angels, intercessors, destroyers, the 
heavenly saints or hosts. Chap, iv: 18; v: 2; xv: 15; 
xxxiii: 22, 23. 

V. An apostasy or defection in some rank or order of 
these powers (ch. iv: 18, xv: 15), of which Satan seems to 
have been one, and perhaps chief. Chap, i: 6-12: ii: 2-T. 

VI. The good and evil powers or principles equally 
formed by the Creator; both employed by him in the 
administration of his providence; and both amenable to 
him at stated courts, held for the purpose of receiving an 
account of their respective missions. Chap, i: (!, 7; ii: 1. 

VII. A day of future resurrection, judgment and retri- 
bution to all mankind. Chap, xiv: 13-15; xix: 25-29; xxi: 
30; xxxi: 14. 

VIII. The propitiation of (or atonement, reconciliation 
to) the Creator, in the case of human transgressions, by 
sacrifices (ch. i: 5; xlii: 8), and the mediation and inter- 
cession of a righteous person, ("hap. xlii: 8, 9." 

An Englishman said to Moody: "Job is the key to the 
whole, Hible; if yon understand Job yon will understand 
the entire Bible." 

Moody replies: "No; I don't understand that Job is 
the key to the whole Bible. How do you make that out?" 

He said: "1 divide -lob into seven heads. The first 
head is: A perfect man untried. Thai is what God said 



Oh. XXIV: § 2. psalms. 195 

about Job; that's Adam in Eden. The second head is: 
Tried by (diversity; and Job fell as Adam fell in Eden. 
The third head is* The wisdom of the world. The world 
•tries to restore Job; the wisdom of the world is centred in 
his three friends. Then in the fourth place, in comes the 
days-man; that is Christ. Then in the fifth place, God 
speaks. And in the sixth, Job learns his lesson. Job 
said: 'I abhor myself, and repent in dust and ashes.' 
And the seventh head is this, that God restores him," 

§ 2. Psalms. Written by King David and others. 
{See Index; also Ch. V: § 2, b.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, " SACKED HYMNS." 

This is a collection of "Sacred Hymns" and prayers, 
most of which were composed by David. 

(a.) Adaptation to Worship. Home describes the book 
of Psalms "as an epitome of the Bible, adapted to the 
purposes of devotion. In the language of this book the 
prayers of the church have been offered up from age to 
age." 

In them there is a peculiar adaptation to us. We find 
language to* express our thoughts, in prayer or praise, 
no' matter what our circumstances in life, whether it be 
that of the deepest sorrow or trials, or of joy and gratitude. 
In some of the Psalms are expressions of praise and adora- 
tion, which display the majesty, power, goodness and other 
attributes of God; others are song-s of thanksgiving; others 
are prayers, pleading the mercy of God and the forgiveness 
of sin; and others still seek deliverance from danger and 
affliction; indeed, covering every conceivable condition in 
life. 

Our Savior taught his disciples how to pray. Many of 
these Psalms no less teach us how to pray, even putting 
words into our mouths whereby we may give expression to 
our thoughts. 



196 DEVOTIONAL. 

(b. ) Messianic Character. Some of the Psalms are 
prophetical, relating to Christ and the gospel times. Thus : 

" Psalm xl speaks of our Lord's coming in our nature to 
abolish the Mosaic dispensation, of which ' sacrifices and 
offerings' was the distinguishing feature. See Heb. x: 5. 

Psalm cxxxii: 11, predicts that the Messiah should be of 
the family of David. See Acts, ii: 30. 

Psalm xlv: 6-7, declares his divine nature. See Heb. i: 8. 

Psalm cxviii: 22, quoted six times in the New Testament,, 
foretells the rejection of him by the Jews. 

Psalm xxii, his suffering on the cross. 

Psalm xvi: 9-11, his. resurrection. See Acts, ii: 2L 

Psalm lxviii : 18, his ascension, and sending the Holy 
Spirit. See Eph. iv: 8. 

Psalms lxix and cix, the sore judgment which should 
befall Judas and the Jewish nation. See Rom. xi: 9-10, 
and Acts, i: 20. 

Psalm cxvii, the call of the Gentiles (see Rom. xv: 11): 
and Psalm lxxii, the final triumph of the Messiah's king- 
dom in the earth. 

Nearly fifty of tin* Psalms are quoted in the New Testa- 
ment, which shows how frequently our Lord made use of 
them to instruct his disciples that he was the Christ. See 
Luke, xxiv: 14." — Nicfiolls. 

(c.) Fire Collections. "The whole consists of five dis- 
tinct collections, made at different times, in the order m 
which they now stand. The close of each is indicated bj 

a doxology. 

COLLECTION I. 

Psalm, ii-xli. The first collection made, almost all of 

which are noted as David's, and was doubtless intended to 

be a collection of his Psalms. There are hut three which 

are not noted as his. namely: the 2d, loth and 33d; and 

nothing in the contents forbids the supposition that he 

was the writer. The 1st Psalm is supposed to be written 

by Ezra as an introduction. 



Oh. XXIV: § 2. I'sauis. 197 

COLLECTION II. 

Psalm xlii-lxxii. This is a collection of Levitical Psalms 
i xlii-1), seven by the sons of Korah and one by Asaph, 
chiefly of a national character, followed by nineteen Psalms 
of David, and three of which the writer is not named, 
closing with one from Solomon. The appended note, 
•The prayers of David, the son of Jesse, are ended,' was 
probably inserted here when the next collection was added, 
in order to show where the productions of the royal psalm- 
ist, as then collected, closed. 

COLLECTION III. 

Psalm lxxiii-lxxxix. This third collection is composed 
of eleven Psalms by Asaph, and one of four Psalms by the 
sons of Korah, and one by Ethan. Only the 86th Psalm 
is ascribed to David; and with this exception, the whole 
collection is from those connected with the temple service. 

COLLECTION IV. 

Psalm xc-cvi. This fourth includes but three whose 
writers are mentioned, namely: the 90th, by Moses, and 
the 101st and 103d, by David. Except these three, they 
are very general in their contents, and were apparently 
intended for use in the temple service and at national 
festivals. 

COLLECTION V. 

Psalm cv-cl. This fifth was a collection, apparently, of 
all the psalms extant when it was made, and not included 
in the previous ones. It contains fifteen psalms of David, 
one of Solomon, and twenty-eight of which the writers 
are not given. It includes smaller separate collections of 
an earlier date; the pilgrim songs, fifteen in number (cxx- 
cxxxiv), and Psalm cxi-cxviii, designed for temple service 
and for festival occasions. 

There is also a collection of David's psalms placed by 
themselves (cxxxviii-cxlv), and the whole is closed with 
songs of praise to Jehovah (Ps. cxlvi-cl). 



198 DEVOTIONAL. 

At what time or by whom these several collections were 
made is unknown. In the time of Hezekiah, the psalms 
authorized to be sung in the temple service were those of 
David and of Asaph (2 Chron. xxix: 30). The last two col- 
lections could not have been made till after the captivity, 
as is shown by the subject matter in them."— Conant. 

§ 3. Proverbs. Written by King Solomon. (See 
Index; also Chap. V: § 2, c.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "MAXIMS." 

This book is a collection of Maxims, written by Solo- 
mon. "We are not," says Bishop Hopkins, "generally to 
expect an} r connection, either of sense or sentences, in this 
book; but this is like a heap of pearls, loose and unstrung." 

The Proverbs are frequently quoted in the New Testa- 
ment. See Matt, xv: 4; Luke, xiv: 11; Rom. xii: 16, 17, 
20; 1 Thess. v: 14; 1 Peter, iv: 8, v: 5; Jas. iv: 6, etc. 

(a.) Design of this Book. The design of this book is to 
instruct the young, at their entrance into public and active 
life. "It is very important," says Nicholls, "to observe 
that Solomon, the writer of this book, lays down this rule 
as the foundation of all instruction: ' The fear of the Lord 
is the beginning of wisdom.' " 

"Though we be wise, by reading this book we are made 
wiser. It bridles the tongue, corrects the wanton eye, and 
ties the unjust hand in chains. It persecutes sloth; chas- 
tises all absurd desires; teaches prudence; raises man's 
courage; and. represents temperance and chastity after 
such a fashion that one cannot but have them in venera- 
tion. "—Basil 

Bagster says: "These maxims are laid down so clearly, 
copiously, impressively, and in such variety, thai every 
man who wishes to be instructed may take what lie chooses, 
and those lie likes best." 



Cll. XXIV: §4. ECCLESIASTES. 199 

(b.) Five General Parts. This book may be divided 
into five parts. 

PART I. 

Chap. i-ix. Contains a sort of preface: the teacher giv- 
ing his pupil a connected series of admonitions, cautions 
and encouragements to study wisdom. 

PART II. 

Chap, x-xx: 16. Comprises what may be strictly called 
proverbs, namely: unconnected maxims. 

PART III. 

Chap, xx : 17-xxiv. In which the teacher renews his 
connected admonitions to study wisdom. 

PART IV. 

Chap, xxv-xxix. Contains proverbs supposed to have 
been taken from some larger collection of Solomon, by the 
men of Hezekiah; that is, by the prophets whom he em- 
ployed, as Eliakim, Joah, Shebna, and probably Hosea, 
Micah, and even Isaiah. 

PART V. 

Chap, xxx-xxxi. Consists of the last two chapters; the 
first of which contains the wise observations and instruc- 
tions of Agur to his pupils Ithiel and Ueal, and the other 
the excellent lessons addressed to King Lemuel by his 
mother. 

§ 4. Ecclesiastes. Written by King Solomon, B. C. 
977. {See Index; also Chap. V: § 2, d.) 

GOLDEX TOPIC, " HAPPIXESS." 

Ecclesiastes: "That is, the preacher, or one who pro- 
claims to a jmblic assembly. The purpose of the book is 
explicitly declared in the title, namely: to demonstrate the 
vanity of all earthly acquisitions, and show that, when the 
heart is set on earthly enjoyments, all will prove to be 
' vanity and vexation of spirit.' The course of the argu- 



200 DEVOTIONAL. 

ment anticipates the objections of the licentious and the 
thoughtless. 

It is necessary to keep the eye steadily fixed on the 
purport of the discourse, and to discriminate what the 
author delivers in his own, and what in an assumed char- 
acter. " — Carpenter. 

"This book was evidently written by Solomon, and is 
generally considered as a penitential discourse, composed a 
little before his death, to warn others, by his own sad 
experience, of the vanity of all created things, and of the 
misery of sin, both here and hereafter. 

(a.) For the Young. Let the young, learning from it 
the guilt and danger of yielding to the imaginations of the 
heart (xi: 9), remember their Creator in the day of then- 
youth (xii: 1, etc.); old age, even if they reach it, being a 
very unfit season to begin so important a concern as the 
salvation of the soul." — -Nicliolls. 

Mr. H olden, in his attempt to illustrate this book, 
divides the work into two parts: 

I. Chap, i-vi: 10, as demonstrating the vanity of all 
earthly conditions, occupations and pleasures; and 

II. Chap, vi: 11— xii, as eulogising Wisdom, and in de- 
scribing its nature, excellence and beneficial effects. 

§ 5. Song of Solomon. (See Index; also Oh. V: §2,e.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "ALLEGORY." 

Neither Jew nor Christian has ever doubted the canon- 
icity of this. book. The sacred writers were authorized to 
illustrate God's relation to the church by the figure of a 
marriage. Solomon therefore, in celebrating his marriage, 
was naturally led by a train of correspondent reflections; 
and the idea must have been the more forcibly suggested 
to him as he was about to build the temple, a place where 
God was about to meet his people. The spiritual Allegory 



Ch. XXIV: § 5. song of solomos. 201 

was thus worked up by Solomon to its highest perfection. 
Solomon, in the glow of an inspired fancy, not supposing 
he would be misunderstood, describes God and his church, 
with their respective attributes and graces, under colorings 
familiar and agreeable to mankind, and exhibits their 
ardent affection under the figure of earthly love. 

(a.) A Poem. This poem maybe considered, as to its 
form, a dramatic poem. There is a succession of time, 
and a change of places, to different parts of the palace and 
royal gardens. The persons introduced as speakers are the 
bridegroom and bride and their respective attendants. The 
interchange of dialogue is carried on in a mild and digres- 
sive manner; but the speeches are adapted to the persons 
with appropriate elegance. The companions of the bride 
compose a kind of chorus. Solomon and his queen assume 
a very simple style. 

The poem abounds with beauties, and presents every- 
where a delightful display of nature, painted in its most 
interesting season, and described with every ornament that 
an inventive fancy could furnish. It is justly entitled the 
Song of Songs, as being superior to any that could be 
produced by an uninspired hand, and tending, if properly 
understood, to purify the mind and elevate the affections 
from earthly to heavenly things. Xo one can fully appre 7 
ciate this beautiful poem as can he whose heart overflows 
with love to Glod and love to man. 



202 DEVOTIONAL. 

LESSON XIV 

4*4. fob : iPaiience. 



\alm* 



Jc6:$. & 


4S20 


Wamd and o4het*. 


Solomon, <§. (g. 


4045 


a a 


m 


(C u 


404* 



3d. HP'iov. : oMaxim*. 
Mh. §cci. : ^fafikine**. 
s4h. &. 0. : <$$Ueaoiu. 



SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AXD NOTES. 

What is the name of the second Old Testament grand 
division? Into how many parts is it divided? What lias 
been done with it? (Ch. Y: § 2.) What is the definition 
of devotional? How many hooks in the devotional? What 
is the name of the first? What is the golden topic of Job? 
(Jas. v: 11.) Who was the probable writer? What is the 
date of this book? (Eef. Bible.) This book contains the 
earliest record of what ? (Ch. XXIY: § 1.) Into haw 
many parts may it be divided? (§ 1, a.) 

Note. Bring out the subject of the following parts inv § 1, as 
time will admit. 

What is the name of the second subdivision? (Oh. 
XXIV: § 2.) What are they a collection of? (§ 2; also 
Ch*. V:§2.) Writers? Adaptation? (§ %, a.) Character? 
(b.) Divisions? (c.) 

What is the name of the third book in this division? 
What is the golden topic? (Ch. XXIV: S 3.) Writer? 
Design? (§ 3, a.) Divisions? (b.) 

What is the name of the fourth hook? See Index. What 
is the golden topic? (Ch. XXIV: g 4.) Writer? Date? 
What may it be considered? In what time of his life is it 



Ch. XXIV: § 6. chronology. 203 

supposed to have been written? To whom was it addressed? 
(Eccl. xii: 1, 2, etc.) Against what does he guard the young? 

What is the name of the fifth book? What is the golden 
topic? (Ch. XXIV: § 5; also Ch. V.) What does this 
allegory represent ? 

Note. Review from the blackboard. 

§ 6. Chronology of the Historical Books of the 
Old Testament. (See Diagram, Chap. XXIII: § 13.) 

GENESIS, " Origin." 

history O.K.. 

From the creation of man, - 4004 

To the death of Joseph., - 2369 



LEADING CHARACTERS. 1635 

Adam and the line of Patriarchs, of which 
Abraham was the twelfth. Isaac, Jacob and the 
twelve tribes, of which Benjamin was the young- 
est representative. (See Chap. VII: § 5.) 



EXODUS, "Departure.' 



From the preparation to leave Egypt, - - 1635 

To the building of the Tabernacle, - - 145 



LEADING CHARACTERS. 1490 

Moses, Aaron, Pharaoh and his daughter, Miri- 
am, and Jethro, the father-in-law of Moses. (See 
Chap. VIII: § 1.) 



LEVITICUS, "Duties of Levites." 
From the taking possession of the Tabernacle, - 1490 

To the instituting of Priesthood, Sacrifices and 

Festivals, ------ 3 mos. 

LEADING CHARACTERS, 

Moses, Aaron and his sons. (See Ch. IX: § 1.) 



204 OLD TESTAMENT CHRONOLOGY. 

NUMBERS, "Census Taking." Vr , of 

History B.C. 

From the numbering of Israel in the wilderness, 1490 

To the renumbering in Moab, - 38 



LEADING CHARACTERS. 1452 

Moses, Aaron, the Spies, Caleb and Joshua, 
Balak and Balaam. (See Chap. X : § 1.) 



DEUTERONOMY, "Law Rehearsed." 
From the Rehearsing of the Law, - - - 145-2 

To the blessing of the twelve tribes by Moses, 5 wks. 

leading characters. 
Moses, Joshua and the Levites. (See Chap. 
XI: %1.) 

JOSHUA, "Conquest." 
From the Lord's charge to Joshua, and crossing 

the Jordan, ------ 1452 

To the death of Eleazar and Joshua, - 9 



LEADING CHARACTERS. 1443 

Joshua, Rahab and the Spies, Achan, Gibeon- 
ites, Caleb and Eleazar. (See Chap. XII: § 6.) 



JUDGES, "Government." 
From the tribe of Judah warring against the 

Canaanites, and Gideon delivering Israel, - 144:> 

T<> the death of Samson (history ends with ch. 

xvi), - - - ~ - - - - 326 



LEADING CHARACTERS. 1117 

Caleb, Otbniel (first judge of Israel), Ehud, 
Deborah, Barak, Gideon, Abimelech, Tolah and 
Jair, Jephtha and Samson. (See Ch. XIII: § 1.) 



Ch. XXIV: § 6. CHRONOLOGY. 205 

RUTH, » Origin of David's Family." gfc* B.t>. 

From Elimelecli driven by famine into the coun- 
try of Moab, 

To the marriage of Ruth to Boaz, the grand- 
father of David, 

Note. This history covers about ten years, and is 
supposed to have .occurred during the time of Gideon, 
and is an episode in the chronology of Judges. (See 
Ohap. XIV: §1.) 



I SAMUEL. "Kings of Israel." 
From the birth of Samuel, - - - - 1117 

To the death of Saul and his sons, - 61 

LEADING CHARACTERS. 1056 

Samuel (the prophet), Eli and his sons, Saul, 
David and Jonathan. (See Chap. XV: § 1.) 



II SAMUEL, " Kings of Israel." 
From the death of Saul, - - - - 1056 

To the 38th year of the reign of David, - 38 

LEADING CHARACTERS. 1018 

David, king of Israel; Abner, chief captain of 
Saul, and Joab of David; the prophet Nathan; 
Uriah: Absalom and Solomon, sons of David. 

Note. To complete this history we must include 1 
Chron. xxii-xxix, as a supplement. (See Ch. XVI. % 1.) 

Supplement to II Samuel. 
1 Chronicles, chap, xxii-xxix, - 1018 

David's preparation to build the Temple, - 3 

LEADING CHARACTERS. 1015 

David, Solomon, Levites, Priests, Singers, Por- 
ters and Captains. (See Chap. XVI: § 5.) 



206 



OLD TESTAMENT CHRONOLOGY. 



I KINGS, "Attributes of God." 

Prefaced with David's old age, and declaring 

Solomon king, - - 
To the death of Jehoshaphat, king of Judah, 

LEADING CHARACTERS. 

David, Solomon, Adonijah and Joab, Hiram, 
king of Tyre, and the Queen of Sheba. 

Kingdom divided, B. C. 975. 



Yrs. of 
History 



B.C. 



KINGS AND PROPHETS 
OF JUDAH. 

Eehohoam, Shemaiah, 
Abu ah, Iddo, Asa, Az- 
ariah and Hanani, Je- 
hoshaphat, Micaiah, 
Jdhaziel and Eliezer, 
Jehoram, Elijah. 



KINGS AND PROPHETS 
OF ISRAEL. 

Jeroboam, Ahaziah, 
Nadab, B a ash a, Jehu, 
Elah, Zimri, Omri, 
Ahab, Ahaziah, Eli- 
jah and Elisha. 

{See Ch. XVIII: §1.) 



Note. Kings in cafitals and prophets in itahcn. 



KINGS AND PROPHETS 
OF JUDAH. 

A ii a zi ah, Elijah ; At n- 
a li a ii (Queen), Jo ash, 
Zecha Halt ; A ma z i ah , 
A Prophet ; Uzziah. 
Zechariah, Amos, Jopi 
and Isaiah ; Jot i i a m , 
Isaiah and Joel ; Ahaz, 



1015 



126 



889 



Ii KINGS, "Attributes of God." 
From the death of Ahab and the accession of 
Ahazian to the throne of Israel, and Jeho- 
ram to Judah, 

To the captivity under Jehoiakim, - - 294 

LEADING CHARACTERS. 



889 



595 



KINGS AND PROPHETS 
OF ISRAEL. 

Ahaziah, Elijah and 
Elisha; Jehoram, Jehu, 
Jehoahaz, Elisha; Je- 
hoash (Joash, 2 Kings, 
xiii: 14), Jeroboam II, 
Jonah and Hosea ; Zech- 
ariah, Shallun, Men- 



Oh. XXIV: §6. 



CHRONOLOGY 



KINGS AND PROPHETS 
OF JUDAH. 

Obed, Isaiah and Micah; 
Hezekiah, Isaiah and 
Micah; Manasseh, Mi- 
cah ; Amon, Josiah, 
Zephaniah, Jeremiah and 
Habakkuk; Jehoahaz, 
Zeph., Jet. and Hab.; 
Jehoiakim,* Zeph., Jer. 
and Hob.; Jehoiachin, 
Jer. and Hob.; Zede- 
kiah, Obed, Jer. and 
Hab. 

Jerusalem destroyed 
by Nebuchadnezzar, B. 
0. 577. 



KINGS AND PROPHETS HuL°y f . 
OF ISRAEL. 

ahem,Pekahiah, Amos 
and Hosea ; Pekah, 
Hoshea, Hosea and Na- 
hum. 

Israel taken captive 
into Assyria by Shalman- 
eser, about B. C. 700. 

Note. Nahum, carried 
away captive with Israel, 
prophesied and preached for 
the space of 50 or 60 years. 

(Nineveh destroyed, 
B. C. 613.) 

{See Oh. XVII) 



207 



B.C. 



Note. Thus ends the Kingdom of Judah, after it had 
stood from the division 398 years, and after the captivity 
of Israel 123 years. 



JEREMIAH, ' ' Captivity. " 

History and prophecy of the Jews just before and 
after being carried to Babylon, chap, xxii- 
xxxi, - - - - - - -.- 595 

Respecting the captivity in Egypt, chap, xxxii- 
xliv {see Chap. XX: § 11; also XXI: § 1, 
note). 

ISAIAH, "Evangelist." 

History and prophecy respecting the Jew r s in cap- 
tivity in Babylon, chap, xl-lxvi {see Chap. 
XVIII: § 7; also Chap. XXII: § 2). 

* First captivity to Babylon. {See Diagram, Ch. XXIII: § 13; 
also Dan. i; 1.) 



20$ old testament: chronology. 

EZEKIEL, "Encouragement." ,£££ b.c. 

History and prophecy respecting the captive Jews 
in Assyria, chap, xxv-xlviii (see Chap. XXI: 
§ 6. a). 



DANIEL, "History" (Ch. i-vi). 

Erom the captivity under Jehoiakim, B. C. 595; 
(the exaltation of Daniel in the realm of Darius, 

king of Persia, B. C. 522, 73 years). (See 

Diagram, Chap. XXII I: § 13.) 
To the return from captivity, - - - - 70 

LEADING CHARACTERS. 525 

Nebuchadnezzar, Belshazzar, Daniel, his 
three friends and Isaiah. (See Ch. XXII: § 1.) 



EZRA^ "God's Providence. 



Erom the decree of Cyrus, and the return of the 

Jews in charge of Zerubbabel, - 525 

To the dedication of the Temple, - 25 



LEADING CHARACTERS. 500 

Cyrus, Darius and Artaxerxes (Ahasuerus), 
kings of Persia ; the Jews; Ezra; Haggai and 
Zechariah (the restoration prophets). (See Ch. 
XXIII: § 4; also Ch. XXIII: § 1.) 
Interim between chap, vi and vii of Ezra, - - 48 



ESTHER, " Special Providence." 

History respecting the captive Jews in Persia, 

chap, i-ix (see ("hap. XXIII . § 9). - - 10 



442 



Ch. XXV: § 1. INTER BIBLICAL HISTORY. 

XEHEMIAH, " Reform atiox." 

Interim between Ezra and Xehemiah, - 

From Xehemiah's coming to Jerusalem, 
To the last reformation and the prophecy of 
Malaehi, - 

LEADING CHARACTERS. 

Artaxerxes, Xehemiah, Sanballat and Tobiah, 
Ezra and the Leyites. (See Ch. XXIII: § 11.) 



Yr8. nf 

History. 



INTERIM, Coxtixued History of the Jews. 
From the close of prophecy (Malachi), 
To the birth of Christ, 

LEADING CHARACTERS. 

Period I: The Highpriests. Period II: Alex- 
ander the Great and the Ptolemys; Samaritans. 
Period III : Antiochus Ephipanes and Judas 
Maccabeus. Period IV : Herod and his son 
Archelaus. (See Chap. XXV: § 1.) 



U 



33 



397 



209 

B.C. 

442 



430 



397 



397 



A.D. 



CHAPTEK XXV 



THE INTERIM («• C. 400). 



§ 1. Inter Biblical History. {See Chronology, Ch. 
XXIV : § 6. ) As we have now finished the Old Testament, 
in passing to the Xew. we meet with this "Interim, 400 
years B. C." The Old Testament leaves the Jews in pos- 
session of their own land, with Jerusalem, their capital 
city, rebuilt, and the temple and its service restored. It is 
necessary, therefore, that we should have some knowledge 



210 THE INTERIM. 

of their political and moral history during this interval. 
This period, in most people's minds, is a blank; yet it 
represents a period in Jewish history of the deepest interest 
to one who wishes to understand the New Testament. The 
sects of the Pharisees and Sadducees, who opposed Christ; 
the Synagogue, in which he taught; these had no existence 
in the day of the prophets. They arose either duriug the 
captivity, or in this intermediate period. The Jews of the 
New Testament seem to be a different people from the 
Jews of the Old Testament. The student of this inter 
Biblical history is able to see how this change takes place. 

Prof. Jaegar illustrates the study of this period by saying: 
"A bridge thrown across a river may, to one at a distance, 
appear like a dam between two stagnant and unconnected 
bodies of water; but he who is near perceives the connec- 
tion, and standing upon it one has the best view of both 
parts of the river. So the inter Biblical period appears 
like a dark streak separating the two Testaments." 

The whole then known world experienced a political and 
religious change, the parallel of which is not found in 
history. Upon the face of this period are written, with 
letters of blood and fire, the words: "Prepare ye the way 
of the Lord." 

A brief epitome is here given of the chief events of 
Jewish history during the interval between the Old and 
New Testaments. 

§ 2. Political History of the Jews. *AVo are in- 
debted principally for the following account to Dr. Win. 
Smith's History of the Bible, Students' Scries. 

The political history of this nation is gathered principally 
from the books of Maccabees and Joseph us, and may be 
thus briefly stated: The interval of four centuries, from 
the close of the record of the Old Testament to the event 
which heralded the birth of Christ, may be divided into 
four periods. 



Ch. XXV: § 3. THE FOUR PERIODS. 211 

§ 3. The Four Periods. 

PERIOD I. 

Was the continuance of the Persian power, to whom the 
Jews were subject, which lasted after their return to their 
land sixty-six years, and brings us down to B. C. 334. 

PERIOD II. 

When that power was overthrown by Alexander the 
Great, they became subject to him, and on his death 
(B. C. 321) to his successor, forming a part of the Egyp- 
tian Monarchy. This period lasted about one hundred 
and sixt} T -seven years, which point in their history brings 
us down to B. C. 16?. 

PERIOD III. 

During the second period the Jews were violently perse- 
cuted by Antiochus Epiphanes. Many thousands were 
carried into Egypt, and there remaining, were for three 
years and a half deprived of their civil and religious liber- 
ties; while many were put to death. This rousing them 
to resistance, they were restored to liberty by the piety and 
bravery of the family of the Maccabees. These princes 
continued to nourish, under the protection of the Roman 
power, for one hundred and twenty-seven years, up to the 
days of Herod the Great, an Idumean by birth, but of 
Jewish religion. Herod conquered and deposed the family 
of the Maccabees, and was appointed king of the Jews by 
the Romans, B. C. 10. 

PERIOD IV. 

Xow comes the rule of the house of Herod, under which, 
in the fortieth year, Christ was born. This rule extended 
on after the Christian era to the destruction of Jerusalem 
by Titus, A. D. 70, covering a space of one hundred and 
ten years, when they ceased to be a nation. 

First Period. During the sixty-six years, from the 
time of Xehemiah to the end of the Persian Empire, 



212 THE INTERIM. 

the Jew? seemed to have been content to develop their 
internal resources and their religious institutions. We 
cannot decide how far the princes of Judah retained their 
patriarchal authority; but from the time of Nehemiaji, the 
Highpkiest became the most important person in state. 
The highpriests during this first period were Eliashib, 
Jo [ada, Jonathan and Jaddea. 

Eliashib, the highpriest in the time of Ezra and Nehe- 
miah, was succeeded by his son Joiada (see Xeh. xiii: 28), 
and he by his son Jonathan, of the tribe of Levi, and were 
entered in the chronicles of Judah, which seem, therefore, 
to have ended with his priesthood. (See Xeh. xii: 11, 22, 
23.) Jonathan's priesthood lasted thirty-two years, and 
was stained by the first of those acts of murderous rivalry 
which afterwards brought the state into anarchy. He 
murdered his brother Joshua, who was suspected of want- 
ing the priesthood. This crime was the only memorable 
event in the history of Judea during this period. Jaddua 
was the last of the highpriests of the Old Testament, and 
also the last in this first period. 

Second Period. The second period finds this people 
subject to the Egyptian Monarchy, under Alexander the 
Great and his successors, which lasted about 167 years. 
In the division of the empire of Alexander. Palestine was 
treated, as it had always been considered by the Greeks, as 
a part of Syria. So it fell to the lot of Ptolemy, the son 
of Largus, the powerful governor of Egypt, who took 
Jerusalem by assaulting it on the Sabbath, when (he Jews 
would offer no resistance; and it was subject to the first 
five Ptolemies for about 104 years. 

1. Tin' Samaritan Opposition. During this period the 
national hatred between the Samaritans and .lews was 
fostered and augmented. They are said to have claimed 
the same privileges as the Jews, which Alexander refused 



Ch. XXV: §3. THE FOUR PERIODS. 213 

to grant; hence arose a rebellion, which resulted in the 
murder of their governor. 

It seems that the son of Joiada, called Manasseh by the 
Jews, had married, in Neheniiah's time, the daughter of 
Sanballat the Haronite, the Samaritan chief. For this 
offence Nehemiah expelled him from Jerusalem. He went 
at once to his Samaritan friends, carrying with him, it is 
said, a copy of the Pentateuch; and from it, though the 
text was frequently tampered with, the various copies of 
the Samaritan Pentateuch have been made. Manasseh 
was made the highpriest of the Samaritans by his father- 
in-law, Sanballat, and worship according to law established 
on Mount Gerizim. About 400 B. C, or perhaps later, 
Manasseh obtained permission to build a temple on Mount 
Gerizim, and the hostility between the Jews and Samaritans 
thenceforth was more bitter than ever. The Samaritans 
had fabricated traditions, which represented them as being 
genuine descendants of Jacob, and branded the Jews as 
imposters. They claimed, when it suited their purpose, to 
keep the law more strictly than the Jews: and once or 
twice defiled the temple at Jerusalem with dead men's 
bones. There is no limit to the hatred, leading at times 
to bloodshed and murder. 

II. Highpriests. Jaddua was succeeded by his son, 
Oniass I, who was highpriest, according to Eusebius, down 
to 300 B. C. 

Onias I was succeeded in the priesthood by his son 
Simox, surnamed The Just. Jewish tradition makes him 
the greatest of this later line of priests. He repaired the 
temple and surrounded it with a double wall, and main- 
tained the divine service in the highest splendor. 

Simon the Just was now succeeded by his brother Elea- 
zar. His long rule seems to have been very tranquil, 
under the mild government of Ptolemy I. Soter, son of 
Largus, and Ptolemy II, Philadelphia. 



214 THE INTERIM. 

III. The Septuagint Translation. During the reign of 
this later king, and probably commencing about 277 B. C, 
was made the Greek translation of the Old Testament, 
which we know as the Septuagint; so called from the 
seventy or seventy-two translators said to have been em. 
ployed thereon. Eleazar was still the highpriest, and 
appears to have been interested in the undertaking, fur- 
nishing six men from each tribe to do the work; and also 
was careful to furnish for the purpose correct copies of 
the sacred books. Thus the Jewish Scriptures were made 
accessible to the heathen. 

This version soon came into common use among the 
Jews themselves, even in Palestine; the original Hebrew 
having now become a dead language, or a language dropped 
out of common use. It was no doubt a faithful representa- 
tion of the Hebrew text, and as such was constantly quoted 
by our Savior and his apostles and the early church; and in 
consequence of its translation and wide circulation among 
Jews, and proselytes of the Jewish faith in all lands (the 
Greek being at this time the universal language of the 
world), the conversion of the nations to Christianity was 
greatly aided. President Edwards, in his "History of the 
Work of Kedemption," makes special mention of this as one 
of the most effective means of promulgating Christianity. 

IV. History under Highpriests. iSleazer's long priest- 
hood now closes, having held the office 41 years. He is 
succeeded by Onias II, who endangered the friendship of 
Egypt by withholding the annual tribute of twenty talents. 
which brought upon the Jewish nation new trials in the 
form of invasions. 

Jt was under this rule that the Sadducees began to 
appear as a sect; the Pharisees soon after, and before the 
close of this period both sects became notorious m parties 
and contests. 



Ch. XXV: § 3. THE FOUR PERIODS. 215 

Onias II died in 226 B. C, and was succeeded by his son 
Simon II. At this time the rival kingdom of Syria had 
reached the climax of its power, and the throne had just 
been ascended by Antiochus III, to whom the Jews sub- 
mitted, and were well treated by him, and assisted him in 
repelling the Egyptians; at which Ptolemy attempts to 
penetrate into the most holy place of the temple, but is 
prevented. He now requires the Jews to renounce their 
religion; they refuse, and about 40,000 are slain in revenge 
at Alexandria. 

Soon after this Onias II was succeeded in the priesthood 
by his son Onias III. The conquered provinces were 
restored to Ptolemy IV, king of Egypt, as a dowry to his 
bride, Cleopatra, who was the daughter of Antiochus III. 
But this Assyrian king did not give them their possession, 
and resumed them altogether by the treaty with Eome, 
B. C. 188. 

The Greek party is now represented not only by Simon, 
but by the highpriest's own brother, Joshua, who went so 
far as to adopt the Greek name of Jason. By an enormous 
bribe in money Jason obtained the highpriesthood, and 
Onias III was deposed. For the first time Greek customs 
were introduced in Judea, with a success which shows to 
what extent the Jews had become Greeks in spirit, and 
how far they had deviated from the religion of their fathers. 

After three years, however, Jason was in his turn under- 
mined by Menelaus, who held the office from B. C. 172 
to 168, a term of only four years, who was the last of the 
highpriests of the second period. Much of cruelty arid 
wickedness was perpetrated during this short reign. But 
for all this, as says Milman: "In the darkness of this long 
period, Judaism, with its stern and settled aversion to all 
polytheism, to Gentile influences, gradually hardened into 
its rigid exclusiveness. * * * Conflicting opinions 
grew up under the Asmonaean princes into religious fac- 



216 THE INTERIM. 

tions, those of the Pharisees and Saddueees, and which 
began to stir the religious mind and heart of the people." 
We now pass to the third period of this interesting 
people, viz: the time when they were governed by the 
Maccabean princes. 

Third Period. The persecutions of Antiochus Epiph- 
anes called forth a glorious resistance, which ended 
in establishing the independence of Judea under Mac- 
cabean, or Asmonean, princes. An aged priest named 
Mattathias, of the house of Eleazar, Aaron's eldest son. 
had escaped from Jerusalem at the beginning of the perse- 
cution. He had five sons, John, Simon, Judas, Eleazar 
and Jonathan. For a time they mourned the desolation 
of Jerusalem and the sanctuary. Roused to action, they 
returned. The father could forbear no longer. He rushed 
forward and slew the apostate, and next the king's com- 
missioner, and then made a proclamation for all those 
zealous of the law to follow him. With his sons and fol- 
lowers he fled to the mountains.. But they soon returned. 
and broke down the heathen altars, and killed many of the 
worshipers. 

Judas, the third son and the most warlike, and hence 
called Maccabeus, carried on his father's course of opera- 
tions. The Syrians fled before him; a victory followed, 
with great thanksgivings ; and he restores the temple 
worship, B. C. 165. 

T. Judas Maccabeus. The authority of Jason now being 
overthrown, Judas became leader and governor of Judea. 
He was followed by Jonathan, the fifth and youngest son 
of Mattathias, who "destroyed the ungodly men out of 
Israel." This state of tilings lasted about six years. 
Simon, the second son of Mattathias. and the last survivor 
of these brethren, was highpriest from B. C. L4d to 135. 



Gh. XXV: § 3. THE FOUR PERIODS. £17 

With the death of the last, of the sons of Mattathias, we 
lose the authentic record of the First Book of Maccabees, 
and Josephus becomes almost our only guide. 

II. John Hyrcanus, the second son of §imon, succeeded 
his father in the priesthood and government, which he 
held for about 30 years, B. C. 10G. Hyrcanus left the civil 
government by will to his wife; but it was siezed, with the 
priesthood, by his eldest son, Aristobulus, who imprisoned 
his mother and starved her to death. He assumed the title 
of King of Judea, and founded a monarchy which lasted 
70 years, and which was composed of a grand series of 
wickedness and bloodshed. 

The history of the Maccabees does not contain much 
which illustrates in detail the religious progress of the 
Jews. It is obvious that this period must not only have 
intensified old beliefs, but also have called out elements 
which were latent in them. The various glimpses of 
national life which Ave have gained show on the whole a 
steady adherence to the Mosaic law. Probably the law was 
never more rigorously fulfilled. 

B. C. 67 Hyrcaxus II was deposed by his brother, Aris- 
tobulus; and one year later Pompey restores Hyrcanus II 
to power, and carried Aristobulus captive to Rome. From 
this time Judea is subject to the Roman Empire. Axti- 
gonus Avas the last ruler of this period. 

We uoav enter that portion of JeAvish history under the 
government of the Herodiax family, B. 0. 40. 

Fourth Period. The history of this family pre- 
sents one side of the last development of the Jewish 
nation. Such were the tyrannies and oppressions that 
religion was adopted as a policy. Various accounts are 
given of the ancestry of the Herods. It seems, hoAvever, 
sufficiently clear that they were of Idumean descent; and 
though aliens by race, \vere Jews by faith. From the time 



218 THE INTERIM. 

of their conversion they remained constant to their new 
religion, looking upon Jerusalem as their mother city, and 
claiming for themselves the name of Jews. 

I. The Design of Herod. The great central idea was to 
found a great and independent kingdom. The protection 
of Eome was in the first instance a necessity; but the 
design of Herod pointed to an independent eastern empire 
as his end, and not to a subject monarchy. This at first 
seemed to have found some measure of acceptance with 
the Jews; and hence there arose a party called Herodians. 
Reference is made to this party in Matthew, xxn: 15, 16, 
where the Pharisees make choice of them in endeavoring 
to entangle our Savior in his talk. And in Mark. xii. a 
similar reference is made to this party. 

B. C. 37 we find this Herod, called the great, established 
on the throne of Judea. He may be termed independent 
in reference to the exercise of his power, though its origin 
rested in the will of his Roman master. He resolved at 
once to show all who were opposed to him that they had a 
master. Massacre and confiscation were dealt to all who 
dared to oppose him. He brought in foreign customs 
Avhich were obnoxious to the Jews; lie also brought an 
obscure priest from Babylon, named Ananehis, to fill the 1 
highpriesthood, which had been vacant since the mutila- 
tion of Hyrcanus. This brought out a spirit of resistance 
on the part of the Jews to such innovations, which brought 
upon them cruelties such as were meted out to the Asmon- 
ean (Maeeabean) family. 

II. The Jar* Disappointed. . One can readily see how 
this would affect the Jew, and induce him to pray for deliv- 
erance from such tyranny — tyranny indeed when viewed in 
contrast with the comparative freedom enjoyed under the 
Maeeabean rule. This, with the knowledge from the Scrip- 
tures of the promised Messiah or king, who was to be a 
deliverer of this people, broughl to the front a fresh 



Cli. XX V r : § 3. THE FOUR PERIODS. 219 

expectancy. With disappointed hopes, they again, with 
Renewed energy, search the oracles of God. It was ascer- 
tained that the time of their deliverance was nigh at hand. 
Instead of the change of rulers working a deliverance, it 
had the opposite tendency. It was indeed hoped by some 
that Herod, being a Jew and professing the Jewish faith, 
would work out a deliverance for his people; but in this 
their hope was blasted, instead of being brightened by this 
change in the temporal power. 

It is difficult even to imagine just the condition of this 
people, as they stand trembling between hope and fear. 
One may endure with patience trials brought upon us by 
an avowed enemy; but when they come from those of our 
own household, the former trials bear no comparison. 
Despairingly they now resort to the law; and so strict in 
its observance are they, that they clothed themselves with 
it as with a garment; entirely losing sight of its spiritual 
import however. This was particularly true as regards the 
Pharisees. In the teaching of the Elders, the word of God 
was to none effect; they so far changing the nature of the 
Messiah's kingdom that it was hoav believed by the majority 
that he would be a temporal deliverer. Thus its true na- 
ture as a spiritual kingdom which he was to set up was lost 
to sight. 

Our Savior says: '"A house divided against itself cannot 
stand." With the many sects into which the Jews were 
divided among themselves, and the bitterness and hatred 
as found existing between these several parties, every ves- 
tige of worldly hope is removed, at least so far as Herod is 
concerned. All the adhesive qualities of this people as a 
nation have lost their power. Hence we are able, to a very 
limited extent, to see what brought about the great change 
in this people. 

III. The Extent- of the Reign of Herod. Herod was now 
master of a kingdom which included all the land originally 



220 THE INTERIM. 

divided among the twelve tribes, together with Idumea. 
Exclusive of the latter country, the whole was divided into 
four districts, (I) Judea, (II) Samaria, (III) Galilee, and 
(IV) Peraea, the name of the region east of the Jordan and 
the Dead Sea. All this fair kingdom had been won by 
Herod, a man of ability, magnificence and taste, but utterly 
regardless of his people's most cherished feelings, and in- 
sensible to the high destiny of the nation, the peculiar 
people of God. 

IV. Herod's Public Administration. Herod's public 
administration was directed to increase his own royal state. 
But he probably acted also from the more subtle policy of 
"counterbalancing by a strong Grecian party the turbulent 
and exclusive spirit of the Jews." The Jews, who had so 
nobly resisted his attempts to persecute them into adoption 
of the religion of the Greeks, are now invited to adopt both 
Greek and Eoman customs. The holy hill, to which David 
carried up the ark of God, looked down upon a theatre in 
which Herod held games in honor of Augustus, with musi- 
cal and dramatic contests, horse and chariot races, and 
bloody fights of gladiators and wild beasts, while Jewish 
athletes took part in the contests. A few, however, viewed 
these proceedings with far different feelings. Hence now. 
as it has ever been, God has a remnant who do not bow to 
Baal — a remnant to be saved. 

Herod was ever courting the people of Greece by mag- 
nificent donations to the temple of Olympia, and was made 
a perpetual president of the Olympic games. A strange 
mutation of both Jews and Greeks, that a half heathen 
king of Judea should be the recognized head of the 
Hellenistic race ! 

V. Herod's Temple. During the year -U B. C. there was 
a long drought, followed by unproductive seasons; famine 
and pestilence were the result. This was a year of great 
misfortunes to Herod. The result was to remove to a. 



Oil. XXV: § 4. MORAL HISTORY OF THE JEWS. 221 

great degree the animosity occasioned by his proceedings 
m the previous prosperous years. Finding himself falling 
into disfavor with the Jews, he regains it by the restoration 
of the temple, the design of which he announced to the 
people assembled at the Passover, B. C. 20. If we may 
believe Josephus, he pulled down the whole edifice to its 
foundations and laid them anew on an enlarged scale; but 
the ruins still exhibit, in some parts, Avhat seem to be the 
foundations laid by Zerubbabel, and beneath them the more 
massive structures of Solomon. 

The work commenced about 17 B. C, and continued 
afterwards with fresh additions, besides the repairs of 
injuries done in frequent tumults; so that, when it was 
visited by our Lord during his ministry (A. D. 28), the 
Jews said to him: "Forty and six years was this temple in 
building, and wilt thou rear it up in three days?" 

VI. Herod's Successor. Herod reigned in the kingdom 
of Judea forty-four years, and was succeeded by his son, 
Archelaus. His evil. conduct so displeased the Romans 
that the}' reduced Judea to a Roman province. This Herod 
.died, being smitten by a painful and loathsome disease, 
during the infancy of Jesus. 

We now turn to the moral history of the Jews, bearing 
directly on their preparation for the advent of the Messiah, 
and their missionary work during their dispersion among 
the nations of the world. 

§ 4. Moral History of the Jews.* The moral his- 
tory of this nation during this interval of 400 years is of 
vital importance to us, bringing to light much which will 
aid us to interpret the words of Christ and gain a correct 
understanding of the New Testament. 

* We are indebted principally for the following account to D. S. 
Gregory, D. D., "Why Four Gospels," Chap. I, Section 1, Mission 
of the Jews. 



222 THE INTERIM. 

(a.) State of Religion. The captivity had a striking 
effect on this people to cure them of idolatry, to which 
they had always been jirone; but it presented their deprav- 
ity under a new shape, that of zeal for the form of religion 
while they denied the power. Greatly increasing human 
traditions, and teaching for doctrine the commandments 
of men, they made the Scriptures of none effect, and neg- 
lected it as the standard of truth. They became thereby 
divided into many sects, the result of which was despising 
and condemning each other and all the world around them. 
(Eom. ii : 17-20.) Their teachers are described by our 
Savior as full of hypocrisy, and their doctrines such as 
render those who embrace them twofold more, the children 
of hell than before. 

This period will be seen to be a time in which not only 
this people, but the world, are preparing for the great 
advent of the Messiah. The captivity produced a revolu- 
tion in the sentiments of both Jew and Gentile. While it 
cured the Jew of idolatry, it acquainted the Gentile witli 
the true God. It also, bound the Jew as never before to 
the sacred records, and urged them on to make proselytes 
of all the world. The Jew was the cultured religious man 
of that age. 

It was during the captivity that Ezra gathered up the 
sacred writings of the Old Testament which form our 
present canon. 

(b.) New Religions Centre. Jerusalem now becomes a reli- 
gious centre. This is a marvelous provision of God, making 
a deep moral impression upon both Jew and Gentile, in 
giving this true religion the widest possible influence. The 
chief of this provision are the restored city and temple, the 
complete canon of the Scriptures, and the synagogue sys- 
tem; which system gave opportunity to radiate its influence 
throughout the world, where the Scriptures were read. 



I'll. XXV- § 4. MORAL HISTORY OF THE JEWS. 223 

Jerusalem is now the : religious metropolis to the whole 
dispersed nation, from which should go forth the spiritual 
influences which should fashion the future of mankind. 
At Jerusalem, as the centre, were appointed yearly festivals, 
five in number, which brought-together "Jews and devout 
men out of every nation under heaven." While special 
effort was made to attend the feast of the Passover in 
March, and the great day of atonement in September of 
each year, the greatest familiarity with the Scriptures was 
thus secured wherever the wanderings of the Jew carried 
the synagogue system. 

We should not lose sight of one very important fact, that 
is, there is no more prophet to teach the people. Hence 
the attention of religious leaders is turned with tenfold 
eagerness to this centre where the festivals are 'commemo- 
rated, that they may be kept fresh in the memory; and 
for the study of the Scriptures, especially the prophecies 
concerning the coming of the Messiah, the time of which 
they understood to be fast approaching. These religious 
festivals were institutes of learning, not dissimilar to those 
held by our county superintendents for "the benefit of teach- 
ers; and as they returned to their respective homes, they 
carried back from the temple to their synagogues in all parts 
of the Pagan world the latest development of this study. 
This was continued with increasing interest through this 
entire period, no doubt increasing in proportion to the 
Hearing of the great event to which all their Scriptures 
pointed, namely: he who was to be born "King of the 
Jews." 

(c.) The Great Expectation. Every eye is now turned 
toward the coming of Christ. The vast synagogue system 
is made by the Jews a medium through wnich the knowl- 
edge of a great personage is to be born into the world, not 
to the Jew only, but to the Pagan. All, both Jew and 
Gentile,, are in expectancy. The time of the advent is 



224 THE INTERIM. 

drawing nearer; the expectation deepens and widens; the 
.Jew is directed to the time designated in the prophecies; 
they have awakened the people of all lands. All people 
are looking for a great deliverer to come out of Judea. 
Hence we can see, in the preparation of the Jews for this 
event, what this has done for the other great nations of 
the earth. And more, if the Jews only were prepared for 
the coming of Christ, the work would be incomplete; for 
there are two other great historic races, viz: the Greek and 
the Roman, and prophecy Avas directed to them as well; 
and each was successively prepared, through their syna- 
gogue system, for the advent of the Messiah and the spread 
of his salvation. This is in accordance with Daniel's 
proyjhecy, as found in the second and seventh chapters of 
his book. 

Neander savs: "The three great nations had to contrib- 
ute,- each in its own peculiar way, to prepare the soil for 
the planting of Christianity. The Jew on the side of the 
religious element: the Greeks on the side of science and 
art: the Romans, as masters of the world, on the side of 
the political element. When the fullness of time had 
arrived, and Christ appeared — when the goal of history 
was thus reached — then it was that through him, and by 
the power of the Spirit that proceeded from him, the 
might of Christianity, all the threads, hitherto separated, 
of human development, were to be brought together and 
woven into one web." 

*§ 5. Synagogue System. "The word synagogue, 
which means a congregation, is used in the New Testa- 
ment to signify a recognized place of worship. A know! 
edge of them is of importance to the student, since they 
are the great characteristic institution ot tins period. 

According to the traditions of the rabbinical writers, a 
great council was appointed on the return of the Jews 
from Babylon to recognize the religious lite of the people. 



Ch. XXV: § 6. THREE PREVAILING LANGUAGES. 225 

It consisted of 120 members, who were knowm as the men 
of the Great Synagogue, the successors of the prophets; and 
themselves, in their turn, succeeded by scribes prominent 
as teachers. Ezra was recognized as president. Among 
the other members, in part together or part successively, 
were Joshua, the highpriest, Zerubbabel, and their com- 
panions, Daniel and the three "children," the prophets 
Haggai, Zechariah and Malachi, the rulers Nehemiah and 
Mordecai. 

The aim was to restore the crown and glory of Israel. 
To this end they collected all the sacred writings of former 
ages and their own, and so completed the canon of the Old 
Testament. They organized the ritual of the synagogue. 
The narrative of Nehemiah, viii: 13, clearly implies the 
existence of a body of men acting as counselors under the 
presidency of Ezra; and these may have been an assembly 
of delegates from all provincial synagogues — a sort of synod 
of the national church." — Dr. Wm. Smith. 

This Great Synagogue of 120 members — which, having 
existed for about 150 years, was now under Simon the 
Just, B. C. 290 — was supplanted by w T hat is called the New 
Synagogue, whose office it w r as to interpret the Scriptures. 
Its members were made up of scribes, doctors of the law, 
and elders of the people. It was this august body which 
resulted in the Sanhedrim of our Savior's time. 

The services to be performed in these synagogues w T ere, 
first, prayers; second, reading the Scriptures and explain- 
ing them. Morning and evening the law w 7 as read on 
three days of the week, and on the Sabbath it was re-read. 
Besides, each day had its reading of the prophets. Each 
synagogue had a governor or ruler who took charge of the 
services. 

§ 6. Three Prevailing Languages. This old Jew- 
ish religion w r as fast completing its work. Soon another 
dispensation is to be inaugurated, as seen from the expee- 



226 THE INTEKIM. 

tancy of the world. All eyes are turned to Judea. Thence 
the magi came, and at just the right time. 

This was not only a period of preparation, but of expec- 
tancy, not only among the Jews, but the heathen. Suetonius 
relates that "An ancient and definite expectation had spread 
throughout the east, that a ruler of the world would, at 
about that time, arrive in Judea." Tacitus makes a similar 
statement. Schlegel mentions that the Boodhist mission- 
aries, traveling in China, met Chinese sages going to seek 
the Messiah, about 33 A. D. 

In this period there were three great prevailing languages 
on the earth, viz: the Hebrew, spoken by the Jew; the Greek 
by the Greek; and the Latin, which was the language of 
the Eomans. This world religion was first committed to 
the Hebrew, or Jew. During their dispersion and cap- 
tivities, it was carried to the utmost parts of the earth. 
Under Alexander the Great, who conquered the world, it 
became Hellenized. The Scriptures were translated into 
the Greek language, thus spreading a knowledge of this 
world religion among them. Lastly, Rome became mistress 
of the world. As this came to pass 70 years before Christ, 
we find the Scriptures translated into that language. 

Hence we are enabled to see the value of a knowledge of 
this interim of 400 years, and how it bears directly on a 
correct understanding of the New Testament. 



Ch. XXV. 



LESSON XV. 

LESSON XV. 



227 



r L ireulan irowoi, < '.' . . ,, 



"I 



3 



moan erowei, 



3. woman orowe/i, 



$ama%i4aw>, s6f uto. 

^n4iocAm. " lif 

@Maccaieeb ; J2>] ute. 



elan. 40 



*' * w 4L r^' | m oi 0M 4 



uon. 



L $ , 4a4e oj Meiiau 

2. $ew> oHeUaiowb penile. 

t> \ 3. ( &iea4 §xkec4a4lon. 

Jf. fflunaaoaueb. 

5. JThm SSanauaaeb. 



SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Note. Place on the board the title of the lesson and the subject, 
followed by introductory remarks. 

We are still pursuing the history of what people? Ans. 
The Jews. Where does the Old Testament leave them? 
(Ch. XXV: § 1.) What is the space of time between the 
Old and New Testament? W T as this before or after the 
birth of Christ? How, then, shall we designate it? Ans. 
B. C. Is their history during this period generally known? 



228 lessor xv. - 

Is there any necessity for a knowledge of this interval? 
What is it ? Ans. That the New Testament may be better 
understood. 

Every nation has a twofold history, what is it? Ans. 
Moral and political. What great moral and political 
changes were taking place with all the nations of the 
earth about this time ? To what four great political 
powers were the Jews subject during this interval? (§ 2.) 

Note. Place the numbers and powers on the board. 

W T here is this history found? What is the name of the 
first great power? 

Note. Here rehearse to the class the history of the return of the 
Jews from Persia under the decree of Cyrus, and the instituting of 
the priesthood and the temple worship. 

By whom were the Jews governed during this time? 
Ans. Highpriests. What is the date of the beginning of 
this period? Ans. About 400 B. C. Who was the first 
highpriest? A:n"S. Nehemiah. How loug were the Jews 
subject to the Persian power? (§§ 2, 3.) 

What was the second power to whom they were subject? 
In what year was the Persian .Empire overthrown by Alex- 
ander the Great? (§§ 2, 3, Period II.) 

What was the third power to whom they were subject? 
etc. (§§2, 3, Period III.) 

The fourth form or period of government? etc. (§§ 2, 
3, Period IV.) 

Moral History. 

We said every nation had a twofold history; we have 
referred to the political; what was the other? Why should 
we have a knowledge of the moral history of the Jews? (§ 4.) 

Note. This part may be given in the form of a lecture to the 
class, bringing out the several topics as seen in the blackboard 
lesson. Place each topic upon the board when introduced, each 
pupil noting the same in his blank book. Review from the black- 
board. 



Cll XXVI: § 1. THE FULLJSTESS OF TIME. 229 



CHAPTER XXVI. 

THE WORLD'S PREPARATION FOR 
CHRISTIANITY. 

PREPARED FOR THIS WORK BY REV. JAMES P. THOMS. 

§ 1. The Fullness of Time. The progress of the 
world's history is a study of the deepest interest and profit. 
It is the unfolding of the purposes and plans of him who, 
seeing the end in the beginning, directs all things accord- 
ing to his own will. In the rise and fall of empires; in 
the glory and wane of kingdoms; in the supremacy and 
subjugation of nations; in the growth of knowledge; in 
the triumph of liberty; in the victory of truth; in all the 
gathering forces of human advancement, there is an unseen 
power that directs the destiny of events ; and history is the 
unfolding of the Divine plan. 

"The fullness of time" is at hand, as we see the world 
prepared. First : 

§ 2. By Centralization. Rome was the centre of 
power. That palace of the Caesars and the Roman senate 
ruled from the Atlantic eastward beyond the banks of the 
Euphrates and Tigris, a distance of 4000 miles. The 
southern boundary was far into the deserts of Arabia and 
Africa. The northern line penetrated into the deep forests 
of central Europe, and ran along the briny coasts of the 
Black and Caspian Sea. 

(a. ) The Boundary. This boundary line made a circum- 
ference of 10,000 miles. The millions that peopled western 
and southern Europe, northern Africa and southwestern 
Asia were held in abeyance by the iron grip of the Caesars. 
Rival tribes, hostile nations and petty sovereigns were all 



'230 PREPARATION FOR CHRISTIANITY. 

brought into subjection to the Roman eagles. All along 
the centuries these nations had prowled upon each other. 
The wild hordes of northern Africa, and the warlike desert 
wanderers that had overwhelmed the throne of the Pharaohs 
and had baffled all the revenge of Macedonian monarchs, by 
the solid march of Roman legionaries were crushed, curbed 
and driven into the wilds. 

(b.) Conquest. In Asia and Syria barbarian despots, 
with their grinding tyranny and stupid selfishness, were 
swept away one after another before the resistless advance 
of Roman conquest. The wave of conquest reached far into 
the forests of central Europe. The Dacians, Germans,. 
Gauls and Celts all yielded in time to the Roman legions. 
Throughout the vast domain of the Roman empire legiens 
of soldiers were stationed. These barbaric tribes, these 
wild hordes, these tiger-like nations that had preyed upon 
each other in all previous ages, were brought into union 
and sympathy; walls of separation were demolished; jeal- 
ousies were buried; strifes were crushed; commerce, by its 
numerous ports and myriad ships on the Mediterranean, 
diffused knowledge throughout the realm. By this quel- 
ling of the nations, by this universal sway of masterly 
power, by this centralization of the world, by this reign of 
peace, the prophecies are fulfilled and the fullness of time 
is at hand. 

But Roman triumph had a deeper meaning than simply 
victory and centralization. It prepared for the fullness of 
time. Second: 

§ 3. By Civilization. From imperial Rome her 
genius and civilization wont forth with her victorious 
soldiery. The Roman soldier was not only mighty in 
battle; he was a skillful artist, a peaceful laborer, a, tiller 
of the soil; he was bravo in war, industrious in peace. 
Throughout this vast empire the arts of peace were nour- 



Ch. XXVI: § 3. by civilization. 231 

ished. Roads floored with square flinty stones, solid as 
adamant, radiated from Eome to the remotest bounds of 
the broad empire. Now they plunge through the solid 
rock; now they are vaulted high in air, arch above arch, 
pillar over pillar; now they lie along the valley, or pave a 
border to the Great Sahara. Barren regions and desert 
places were made to blossom, as artificial rivers were made 
to flow into them, along canals and over mighty arches 
that will crumble only with the pyramids. In Gaul, in 
Asia, in Africa, mighty aqueducts and gushing fountains 
were planted in dry places to refresh the weary traveler. 
These imperishable roads, these gigantic causeways, these 
stupendous bridges, these vaulted aqueducts, these arches 
and theatres of massive grandeur, are eternal witnesses of 
the power and influence of Roman civilization. 

. Throughout the empire, by the power of Eoman legions, 
the laborer in the field is safe from all invasion. The 
traveler or merchant is safe on the highway as he rolls 
along in his chariot or rides around the Mediterranean 
Sea. Savages were trained, wanderers were reclaimed from 
the forests, which fell before the march of civilization, and 
roving tribes were taught to love citizenship. 

(a.) The Eoman Art. The Roman art was displayed in 
the solid and lofty dwellings, in their clustering villages 
and flourishing cities. They raised massive temples; they 
reared magnificent and spacious theatres; they raised the 
most grand and beautiful triumphal arches; they adorned 
their cities with gateways of architectural splendor; they 
built harbors of solid masonry, against which the waves 
broke in their fury, while ships anchored safe near the 
docks. Statuary and sculpture graced every temple and 
city. The very grandeur of Roman ruins, as seen to-day, 
is the admiration of the world. These wonders of art, 
seen in every part of the Roman empire, were a great 
civilizing force to the rude, conquered nations. 



232 PREPARATION FOR CHRISTIANITY. 

This onward march of civilization prepared a language, 
in the fullness of time, for the coming revelation. The 
teachings of the New Testament are largely subjective; they 
address the spiritual nature of man, his thoughts, feelings, 
motives, hopes, beliefs. The Old Testament teaching is 
more objective; it presents truth in history, temples, altars, 
sacrifices, dreams, visions; it conveys knowledge to man 
largely through his five senses. This is adaj^ted to ruder 
nations and an earlier stage of the world's civilization. It 
preserves to us truth in object lessons; truth is truth, how- 
ever it may be taught or illustrated. 

But in the teachings of Christ a deeper revelation is to 
be made, and a language must be prepared that will express 
the feelings, motives, sentiments of man — this inner life. 
Not only was a language to be prepared for this; these 
very subjective feelings and sentiments were to be defi- 
nitely analyzed and known. It was necessary that the race 
have a photograph of man's inner life, his motives, feelings 
and sentiments in high civilization, with little light of rev- 
elation. 

(b.) The Grecian Schools. Over yonder in Greece, for 
200 years (from Pythagoras, B. C. GOO, to Socrates, B. C. 
400), the Grecian philosophers (sophists) have been contin- 
ually discussing physical and moral truths. While Malachi 
is uttering the last Old Testament prophecies in Palestine 
(B. C. 397), in the gardens at Athens, under the shade of 
those trees, surrounded by his pupils, Socrates, the brightest 
light of Eeason, is proving the existence of a God, from 
providences showing his attributes, and through reason 
reached many principles of sublime truth. It was mind — 
the grasp.ings of reason — seeking after a future life, a God, 
an over-ruling Providence. His disciples, Plato (B. C. 389- 
347) and Aristotle (B. C. 384^322), analyzed with matchless 
skill the feelings, sentiments and passions of men. The 
heart was dissected; the motives, findings and passions of 



Ch. XXVI: § 4. 13Y DEMORALIZATION 233 

men were photographed and shown to the world in stereop- 
ticon views. These philosophers developed a language at 
once strong and flexible, expressing the finest logical dis- 
tinctions, the tenderest sentiments, the sweetest music in 
poetry, and the sublimest eloquence in oration. 

In the train of the conquests of Alexander (B. 0. 350- 
323), the Greek language and civilization took root and 
flourished. Geography was better known; and after his 
death Greek kingdoms were formed in all parts of his vast 
empire, which existed for centuries. Therefore, through- 
out the Roman empire the Greek is the language of rank, 
of intelligence and of commerce. The universal empire of 
Rome carried the Greek language into all the countries 
washed by the .Mediterranean. The language of Christ, 
therefore, was known in every Roman province. Paul 
could preach throughout the known world without an 
interpreter. 

In the fullness of time the world was prepared. Third: 

£ 4. By Demoralization. At this point of the world's 
history the moral ruin of man was fully exhibited. Stand 
upon Mars hill, above Athens, in the golden age of Greek 
art and culture, and look into her streets. Those works 
of art, those hundreds of idols, that finished sculpture, all 
minister to lust and moral corruption. Raise the curtain 
of Rome. What scenes do you witness? There are wealth, 
art and culture; but what putref action in social life! Vir- 
tue is unknown, life is in peril. Even a heathen historian 
blushes to narrate the scenes on the streets of Rome. The 
land of promise has the same dark record. After all the 
revelations of divine truth, the warnings of God, and his 
gracious providences, the Jews are only tenfold more the 
children of hell. 

In these -4000 years, to secure man's moral recovery, 
every form of government had been tried — monarchy, 
aristocracy and democracy. Through every stage of cut- 



234 PR EPA RATION FOR CHRISTIANITY. 

ture man had passed, in every favorable condition and 
circumstance lie had been placed, yet all the world was 
guilty before God. 

(a. ) Prayer for Deliverance. By this centralization the 
nations were wheeling into line under one sceptre; in this 
civilization the people were prepared in thinking, in cul- 
ture, in language, in intercommunication; and hy demor- 
alization man's moral ruin was a universal prayer for the 
deliverer. 

(b.) Coming of the Prince of Peace. The voice of 
prophecy has been dumb for 400 years ; the Shekinah 
centuries before had departed from the temple ; but 
now the long silence is broken by the voice of one 
crying in the wildernes: "Prepare ye the way of the 
Lord." The eyes of the nations turn towards Jerusalem. 
The din of battle is long ago hushed, and a universal 
peace prevails. In the fullness of time a child is born, a 
son is given; "and his name shall be called Wonderful, 
Counsellor, The Mighty God, The Everlasting Father, The 
Prince of Peace." Angels sang: "Glory to God in the 
highest, and on earth peace, good will toward men." 
Luke, ii: 14. 

Such is the preparation for the Prince of Peace (Christ), 
who is the fulfillment of the Old Testament, and the theme 
of the New Testament. 



Oh. XXVI. 



LESSOR XVI. 



235 



LESSOR XVI. 

%oanda'iu. 



JFuilnete 

oj §/inw. 



/. (gzn4ialha4i 



on. 



< 2. (givilka4ion. 



3. Wmnoialbiadion. 



(gonauew. 



Ionian 



) %btwm ffckook. 

{ iPiaueb jol ffelive'oance. 
I iPlince oj 



race. 



SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

What do we understand by the fullness of time? (See 
Gal. iv: 4; compare Gen. xxii: 18.) What benefit is derived 
from having a knowledge of the progress of the world's 
history? (Oh. XXVI: § 1.) In what may it be seen? Ans. 
In the rise and fall of empires, etc. In what three great 
epochs may we see the world being prepared for the com- 
ing of Christ? (§§ 2, 3, 4.) 

What was the first? What great city was the centre of 
power? Who were the rulers? What was the extent of 
this kingdom? What was the circumference of this em- 
pire? {a.) How was this vast territory obtained? (b.) 

What was the second epoch? (§ 3. ) How was it displayed 
among the Romans? -(a.) How was this displayed among 
the Greeks? (bl) 

What was the third epoch? (§4.) What was the moral 
condition of Athens and Borne at this time? What was 
the result? (a.) For how many years had' the voice of 
prophecy been dumb? To what city were the eyes of the 
nations turned? Fur what were they looking (0.) 



236 30W TEST .ill EXT, 

CHAPTER XXYII. 
NEW TESTAMENT. 



§ 1. Preface. The two great grand divisions of the 
Scriptures represent, not the old and new wills of God, but 
earlier and later portions of that will; both are valid, and 
both are now under consideration, as presenting his love 
toward us. But while the former may be regarded as the 
main body of his will, the latter (the New Testament) may 
with equal propriety be regarded as codicils, duly attested 
and of equal validity with the previous will; while they 
provide for a different and greatly wider distribution of 
the inheritance. In the Old Testament this gift is prom- 
ised to the Hebrew nation. "There shall come a Star out 
of Jacob,'' etc. In instances like that of Isaiah, xi: 10: 
"In that day there shall be a root of Jesse, which shall 
stand for an ensign to the people; to it shall the Gentiles 
seek, and his rest shall be glorious;" where this extension 
of the kingdom is mentioned, the Jews regarded it as only 
signifying the accession of proselytes. "Unto us," says 
Isaiah, "a child is born, unto us a son is given.'' 

But in the New Testament we find not only that the 
Messiah, the Savior and King, has come, but that his 
chosen people have rejected this gift (inheritance), and 
refused to own the Messiah. A few of the Jews received 
him; but the greater part of the nation, including (lie 
rulers, reject and crucify him. 

The offer of this heavenly inheritance was made first to 
the Jew, to whom this Will and Testament was committed 
tor safe keeping; but on their blind and wicked refusal of 



Ok XXVII: § 1. preface. 237 

it, God offers it to the Gentiles* in this codicil to his will, 
cutting off the Jews till the fullness of the Gentiles shall 
have been gathered into the household of faith, and made 
heirs of the promise. We find this expressly declared in 
Acts, xiii: 46, 47: " But seeing ye put it far from you, and 
judge yourselves unworthy of everlasting life, lo, we turn 
to the Gentiles. For so hath the Lord commanded us, 
saying, I have set thee to be a light of the Gentiles, that 
thou (Christ) shouldest be for salvation unto the ends of 
the earth." Henceforth, till the fullness of time come, 
the Gentiles are spiritual Israel, the heirs of the promises; 
Abraham is their father; and Christ, the promised seed, in 
whom all the nations of the earth should be blessed, is 
their elder brother. 

Some one has said: " The object for which the Old Tes- 
tament was given was to make man a fit subject, and 
restore him to his original state of purity in Eden; and to 
secure this object God makes a Will and Testament. Said 
will provides for those only who wish to be restored to said 
Eden, as an everlasting inheritance. 

It also contains certain requirements on the part of the 
heirs: first, faith in, and second, a patient waiting for, the 
death of "the Testator; at which time they are to come in 
full possession of said inheritance. 

The object of the New Testament is to declare the death 
of the above Testator. But, as said Testator has risen 
from this death and is alive again, he takes said inherit- 
ance in possession and beautifies it. He also becomes the 
advocate, or attorney, defending the rights of the heirs to 
said inheritance. See 1 John, ii: 1. Compare Heb. ix: 
15-28." 

* It will be borne in mind that the Jews considered the world 
divided into two classes, viz: Jews and Gentiles. The Greeks say 
Greeks and Barbarians; while the Bomans, referring to themselves 
and the outside world, say citizens and strangers. 



238 XEW TESTAMENT. 

Included in the Jewish inheritance was the remembrance 
of Enoch, who walked with God; of Noah, the preacher of 
righteousness; of "Moses, the meek but wise lawgiver of 
Israel; of Joshua, Samuel, David, Isaiah, Daniel, Habak- 
kuk and Malachi, the last of the prophets; and a host of 
the apostles and martyrs of the New Covenant. The 
whole world is thus the gainer by this enlargement of the 
divine will in these New Testament codicils. 

The resurrection and the blessed life of the righteous in 
heaven had been divinely foreshadowed in the Old Testa- 
ment, but life and immortality were- brought to light in the 
gospel; and not only the life beyond, but city of God 
above, with its jasper walls, its pearly gates, its golden 
streets, and light-giving throne of the Lord God and the 
Lamb (Kev. xxi: 1-4), are all parts of the inheritance be- 
queathed to those who are called to be saints by this 
revelation of his divine will. 

Let us now examine briefly into the contents of this new 
and later will of God, as contained in the New Testament. 

§ 2. Grand Divisions. The New Testament, like 
the Old, is a compilation of books written by different 
inspired individuals, and arranged so as to exhibit a regu- 
lar account of : 

I. The birth, actions and death of Christ. 

II. The doctrines he promulgated. 

III. The prophecies regarding the future state of the 
church which he founded. 

We therefore find it divided into three grand divisions, 
viz: 

First, "Historical," containing the books, from Matthew 
to Acts" in elusive. 

Second, "Epistolary," with twenty-one books, from Ro- 
mans to Jude inclusive. 

Third, "Apocalyptic," comprising only one book, viz: 
Revelation. 



Ch. XXVII. §4. introduction. 239 

§ 3. Historical. The Historical may be divided into 
two parts: 

First. "life of Christ/' as written by four different 
persons, writing four separate biographies, portraying his 
character in four different phases; neither of them com- 
plete as a biography, nor one attempting to supply the 
deficiencies or omissions of the other. They were written 
at considerable distances of time and place from each 
other, which made any collusion impossible; and yet the 
four taken together give us a more comprehensive view of 
his life than could be given by a single individual. 

Second. "Church History," which will be considered in 
its place. 

§ 4. Introduction to the Four Gospels. In con- 
sidering the life of Christ as given by the biographers, 
Matthew, Mark, Luke and John, the question arises, why 
four gospels? Four reasons may be given: 

First. "In the mouth of two or three witnesses every 
word may be established." This was the legal evidence to 
establish a fact. Compare Matt, xviii : 16, with Deut. xvii: 
6. In case of murder, the criminal would not be convicted 
by one witness, even though an eye witness of the deed. 

Second. No one of the evangelists has written a com- 
plete history of his life. This is shown from internal 
evidence; for we find that Luke has nine long chapters — 
from the ninth to the eighteenth — which are not found in 
the other three gospels; also in John, from the fourteenth 
to the seventeenth inclusive, the record is not found else- 
where. The same is true of many other portions of the 
four biographies. 

Third., In the writings of the four evangelists we have 
presented to us four phases of his life. 

Fourth. We find these four gospels were written by four 
men, each having a peculiar and distinctive character, and 
for four distinct classes of men. 



2-40 NEW TESTAMENT. 

(a.) Zw&e the Historian. Luke is considered the his- 
torian, and not a witness, for the following reasons: 

1. He is the only one of the four who had a liberal 
education, thereby better qualified to write. 

2. He is a Gentile convert to Christianity; hence un- 
biased, not haying any personal interests. 

3. He gathers from eye witnesses and preachers of the 
word. Luke, i: 2. 

4. He is the only one who claims to write in chronologi- 
cal order. 

5. He is the only recorder of subsequent events; his 
gospel and the Acts being a continued history. Luke, 
xxiv: 53; Acts, i: 14. 

6. His gospel partakes of the nature of history; he 
having taken pains to ascertain the dates and incidents. 
and giving them in detail, more than any other of the 
evangelists. 

7. He is unqualified to be a witness, never having seen 
Christ. 

We are indebted for the following to a very valuable work 
entitled "Why Four Gospels?" by D. S. Gregory, D. D.* 

(b.) Theory of the Origin. "In a true theory of their 
origin is found the explanation of the number of the gos- 
pels, their peculiarities, their agreements and differences. 
Such a theory must evidently be based upon and con- 
structed out of the facts of the age and work of the 
apostles, as follows: 

(r.) Gospel for the World. The aim of the great com- 
mission and design of the four gospels was. to commend 
Jesus the Nazarene to all mankind as the great deliverer 
from sin and its consequences. The command is: 'Go 
preach my gospel to every creature.' 

* President of Lake Forest University, Lake Forest, 111. The work 
is published by the Western Methodist Book Concern, Cincinnati, 
Ohio. 



Ch. XXVII: § 4. INTRODUCTION. 241 

(d.) Faces of the World. As has been seen, there are 
three great races, and three great phases of thought, reach- 
ing throughout that world with which Christianity first 
comes in contact: the Jewish, the Roman and the Greek. 
There is, in addition, the kingdom of Christ — the church 
constituted out of those brought out of the three races of 
men and made spiritual by the preaching of the gospel. 

(e.) Preaching to the World. The apostles went forth 
preaching the gospel like common-sense men, presenting 
Jesus to each of the three great races or classes of mankind 
in the way best suited to the end in view, of leading those 
races to submit to him as the divine Savior. Each of them 
had its peculiarities which must be taken into account; 
each of them its side to be reached; each of them its own 
characteristic view of the evils of the world and of the 
qualities of the needed deliverer, of which, so far as it 
was right, the gospel must take advantage. These early 
preachers took wise account of all this, and preached to 
the Jew, to the Roman and to the Greek — from the three 
great centres, viz: Jerusalem, Antioch and Rome, as set 
forth in the Acts — in a form suited to their needs. 

After the church had been founded and converts made 
in all lands, in its varied adaptation to the races, that 
gospel which presents Christ as the light and life, for the 
purpose of leading men, already Christian, to higher at- 
tainments in Christian life, became necessary and was 
preached throughout the world. 

(/.) Demand for Permanent Records. But the apostles 
could not be everywhere and always with men. Before 
they passed away there arose a desire in the various races 
of men, who had heard their gospel, to have it embodied 
in permanent written form, that it might be preached to 
them still when the early preachers were absent or dead. 

(1.) By the Jew. This desire expressed itself among 
the Jews, and. Matthew, by divine inspiration, gave them 



242 XEW TESTAMENT. 

his gospel to meet that desire. It. was the gospel long 
preached to the Jews, the men of prophecy, which he had 
already thrown into form hest suited to commend to their 
acceptance Jesus as the Messiah and King. 

(2.) By the Roman. The same desire expressed itself 
among the Bomans, and Mark, by divine inspiration, gave 
them his gospel to meet that desire. It was the gospel 
which Peter, by his preaching to the Bomans, the men 
of poiver, had already thrown into the form best suited to 
commend to their acceptance Jesus as the almighty deliv- 
erer of men. 

(3.) By the Greek. The same desire expressed itself 
among the Greeks, and Luke, by divine inspiration, gave 
them his gospel to meet that desire. It had its basis in 
the gospel which Paul and Luke, by their long preaching 
to the Greeks, the men of reason and universal humanity, 
had already thrown into form best suited to commend to 
their acceptance Jesus as the perfect, divine man. 

These three missionary gospels were given their final 
shape before the fall of Jerusalem (A. 1). ?0). 

(4.) By the Christian. It was later that the longing 
came, in the church, for a spiritual gospel, which should 
help the Christian to develop, strengthen and perfect the 
life already begun; and John, by divine inspiration, gave 
his gospel to meet that longing. It was the gospel the 
materials for which he had gathered in the more intimate 
communion with his Master, and which, by Ids long preach- 
ing to the brethren, he had thrown in form best suited to 
commend to the faith of Christians Jesus as the light and 
life of all who believe. 

(g.) Adequacy, If this he the true theory, it may 
readily he ^vvn that it will furnish a most perfect and 
satisfactory explanation of the uumber and character of 
the gospels, and of their otherwise unexplained agreements 
and differences. 



Oh. XXVII: S^ introduction. 243 

This will appear best in the course of the subsequent 
prefaces to these books; but a brief statement of some few 
points will help to make those prefaces more intelligible. 

I. There are four gospels, because Jesus was to be com- 
mended to four classes of men, or to four phases of human 
thought, the Jewish,. Roman, Greek and Christian. 

II. The yery striking differences seen in the three mis- 
sionary gospels, Matthew, Mark and Luke, and between 
these three and the Christian gospel, John, are fully ex- 
plained. 

III. The force of the great mass of alleged discrepancies 
as objections to the historical character of the gospels is 
removed. 

IV. The theory presented explains the fitness of the 
gospels to the world in all ages. These classes weve repre- 
sentative clashes for all time. There are the same needs 
among men to-day: one man needing, for conviction of the 
truth of Christianity, to hear an authoritative word of God 
in type or prophecy, in the Scriptures, and to be assured of 
its fulfillment as proclaiming the divine mission of Jesus; 
a second needing to see him as the divine power in his 
living activity confirming his own claims; a third requir- 
ing a manifestation of Cod addressed to reason, through 
the perfect ■manhood of Jesus; a fourth demanding only 
the spiritual presence and teaching of Jesus to recognize 
in him the light and life. The four gospels given to men 
in the apostolic times are therefore the complete Gospel of 
God for the world in all ages." 



244 MATTHEW. 

CHAPTER XXVIII. 

MATTHEW. 

§ 1. Introduction to Matthew's Gospel. Written 
"•'for the Jew," from Judea, A. I). 37. (See Index; aho 
(limnology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "KHSTGSHIP." 

" These biographies are undoubtedly by the persons bear- 
ing their name. Matthew, the i publican,' from his being 
the chief collector of the Roman taxes at Capernaum and 
vicinity, was one of the twelve. He wrote in A. D. 37, 
with the fullness of knowledge which could be received 
only from personal intimacy with Christ. He wrote in 
Hebrew, as spoken by the Jew. His gospel has been called 
a Jewish gospel. It lias been also called the kingly gospel, 
pointing directly to the ' Kingship ' of Christ. To Mat- 
thew, Jesus was alway the King of Zion, the heir of David. 

(a.) The Promise. Above all, the Jews had the promise 
of the Messiah; they received the divine authority of the 
Old Testament Scriptures; they read in them of a coming 
deliverer. The promises and prophecies bad grown clearer 
all along the centuries. All the types and sacrifices pointed 
to him, and all prophecy centered in him. They also had a 
knowledge of the time of his coming, and were in expecta- 
tion. Simeon and Anna were waiting in daily expectation 
This expectation grew out of the assumption that the 
Scriptures belong to the Jew. 

(0.) The Character and Needs of the .lews. If the first 
gospel originated in the preaching <>f the apostles, espe- 
cially of Matthew, to the Jews, then the ehaiactcr and 
needs of the Jews must furnish the key Lo that gospel. 



Oh. XXVIII: § 1. ixtkoduction". 245 

There are certain characteristics which clearly distinguish 
the Jews from the other great historic races. They are the 
chosen people of God, and were conscious that God was in 
a peculiar sense in their history. They had the oracles of 
God, the true world religion. They had the divine form 
of religious worship. Above all, they had the promise of 
the Messiah. The Jews were the chosen people of God. 
No other people has occupied such a position. 

But the mass of the Jews, through incorrect teaching, 
were led to narrowness and exclusiveness, which had reached 
their height at the time of the advent of Christ. (See 
Interim.) Their selfishness had become extreme and prov- 
erbial. While they had forgotten that they were the elect 
out of the world, not against it, but for it, in order that 
all the world might be blessed in them, they had also 
forgotten that the world was not theirs for them to make 
the most of as Jews for their own selfish end, but theirs to 
bring to the true faith through the oracles of God and the 
coming of the Messiah. The Sabbatic year, the tithes and 
religious festivals had long si*ice become a dead letter; and 
through their haste to become rich the name of Jew was 
becoming then, as it is now, "a by-word and a hissing." 

There had sprung up a party, the Herodians, doubtless 
numerous, who had cut loose from Jewish worship, and 
who saw in the power of the Herodian family the pledge 
of their national existence, in the face of Ecman ambition. 
(See Interim.) The remainder of the nation was divided 
into two great religious sects, the Pharisees and Sadducees, 
the traditionalists and the skeptics. Most of the Jews had 
lost sight of or perverted those great doctrines which are 
the proper regulators of human conduct. Their practical 
creed ran thus: Thou shalt love thy neighbor and hate 
thine enemy. Thou shalt not take interest from a Jew, 
but shalt exact usurious interest from all Gentiles; thus 
substituting error for truth. 



246 MATTHEW. 

The evangelist who would reach and save the Jews must 
recognize their haying possession of the oracles of God, 
and seek to recall these lost principles, and correct the 
perverted ones. He must carry this apostatizing race back 
to the law of God and its requirements. 

For the Jew the credentials of Jesus must be drawn from 
Moses'and the prophets. In his origin, in the capital facts 
of his life, in his character, private and official, in short, 
in his work and his kingdom, he must be shown to meet 
all the requirements of the Messianic Scriptures. This 
work properly done, no Jew could escape the conclusion: 
Jesus of Nazareth is the Messiah. 

§ 2. General Divisions. To accomplish the great 
work of presenting Jesus to the acceptance of the Jews, 
Matthew has divided his gospel into five general heads, viz: 

First: The advent of the Messiah, chap, i-iv: 11. 

Second: The public proclamation of his kingdom, to 
chap, xvi: 12. 

Third: The distinct and public claim of Messiahship, to 
chap, xxiii: 39. 

Fourth: The sacrifice of the Messiah, the priest, to 
chap, xxvii: 66. 

Fifth: The triumph of the Messiah, the Savior and 
King, chap, xxviii. 

The outline, as thus given, is its own witness that the 
first gospel was prepared by Matthew for the Jew. 

§ 3. Matthew's Use of the Scriptures. Matthew 

brings such matter to bear upon the mind of the Jew as is 
most likely to interest and hold attention. He makes no 
less than 90 allusions, references and verbal quotations from 
the Scriptures. 43 of these are verbal quotations, while 
Mark has only 14, Luke 16, and John 14. 

Matthew's references to the Scriptures furnish the basis 
for the entire argument, and t<> correci practical errors 



Ch. XXVIII: § 4. omissions. 247 

into which the Jews had fallen. Mark has only 14 such 
references, almost all of which are general. But three of 
them at most are fulfillments of prophecy. Luke has 
perhaps 30 references or allusions to the Old Testament. 
Most of these are simple incidental citations of fact or 
law, and the argument does not at all depend upon them. 
John has 20 references or allusions to the Old Testament. 
He seems to take for granted that the church is acquainted 
with the revelation of the Old Testament. Matthew, on 
the other hand, as has already been shown, rests his gospel 
entirely upon the basis of Scripture revelation. His is- one 
continued comparison of Jesus of Nazareth with the Mes- 
siah of the prophets, which could not fail to convince any 
candid Jew. 

§<4. Omissions of the First Gospel. Matthew, in 
his gospel, in writing for the Jew, characteristically omits 
as useless for his jmrpose whatever is distinctively Eoman, 
Greek or Christian. The careful reader will note the 
entire absence of such explanations of Jewish customs as 
that which Mark gives of the religious washing of the 
hands before eating, and of the washing of cups, pots, 
etc. (Mark, vii: 2-5), which were necessary for strangers 
of Roman birth. • There are no such explanations of Jew- 
ish topography as that which Luke gives of the "village 
called Emmaus, which was from Jerusalem about three 
score furlongs" (Luke, xxiv: 13), which are necessary to 
strangers of Greek birth and philosophic turn of mind. 
There is an absence of such explanations of Jewish facts as 
that which John gives of the ministry of the Jews to the 
Samaritans (John, iv: 4), and which were necessary for the 
Christians over the world after the destruction of Jerusa- 
lem, For the Jew, at home in Jerusalem, was there at 
the date of Matthew's writing; hence no need of these 
things. 



248 MATTHEW. 

Matthew gives none of those scenic representations of 
events which are seen to abound in Mark, which were 
fitted for the Koman, the man of power. He also omits 
those eminently human features in which Luke's gospel 
abounds, and of the facts of the ministry of Jesus in 
Peraea. One who duly considers this omission by Matthew, 
will see that it constitutes the very heart of Luke's gospel. 
The most remarkable of all omissions by Matthew is the 
absence of the ministry in Judea, and those spiritual dis- 
courses which constitute the greater part of the fourth 
gospel; but on more careful consideration it will be seen 
that they were mainly addressed to that small class of Jews 
who had adopted the Christian faith. 

The gospel, in Matthew's view, is first a gospel for the 
Jew; for the twelve were sent forth first to "the lost sheep 
of the house of Israel," but ultimately became the gospel 
for all mankind. The last commission reads: "Go ye 
therefore and teach all nations." (Matt, xxviii: 19.) 

§ 5. Additions of the First Gospel. Matthew has, 
in short, given us the most systematic of the gospels, 
because his plan and purpose called for it. By that me- 
chanical analysis which has played so prominent a part in 
the study of the Scriptures, it has been shown that, if this 
gospel of Matthew be regarded as made up of 100 parts, 42 
of these are peculiar to itself, and 58 common with one or 
more of the other gospel's. 

This may be shown by passing in review the narratives, 
discourses and groups of events of which Matthew's addi- 
tions are made up. The origin of Jesus as Messiah (chap. 
i, ii) is peculiar to Matthew. The Jew would not listen a 
moment to anyone who had not the prophetic origin of 
the Messiah. The sermon on the mount (v, vii) is pecu- 
liarly adapted to the Jew, which Luke so entirely omits. 
Peculiar features may be traced in the other discourses of 
our Lord: In upbraiding the cities of Galilee (xi: 20-30); 



Ch. XXIX: § 1. introduction. 249 

in the answer to the Scribes and Pharisees who demanded 
a sign (xii; 38-45); the law of church censure and forgive- 
ness (xviii: 10-35); in the judgment of the Scribes and 
Pharisees, and of Jerusalem (xxiii: 1-39); and in the de- 
scription of the day of judgment (xxv: 31 to end). 

There are many incidental variations, which will be 
noticed by the careful reader. Expressions also occur 
which are peculiarly Jewish. The first of these is "The 
kingdom of heaven;" Matthew uses it 33 times. He alone 
of all the evangelists uses it. "Repent, for the kingdom 
of heaven is at hand." Matt, iv: 17; compare Mark, i: 14. 
So throughout the gospel the phrase is used. Matthew 
uses the word church; the other evangelists never use it. 

To one casting a final glance back, from the point now 
reached, the Jewish adaptation of the gospel by Matthew 
cannot fail to appear clear, and hence it is the true key 
to it. 



CHAPTER XXIX. 
MARK. 



§ 1. Introduction to Mark's Gospel. Written "for 
the Roman," from Rome, A. D. 65. {See Index; also Chro- 
nology, Chap. XXXV; § 7.) 



GOLDEN TOPIC, "SEKVANT. 



This evangelist was not, like Matthew, one of the twelve 
apostles. He was probably a nephew of Barnabas, and the 
son of Mary, a pious woman of Jerusalem, at whose house 
we read many were gathered, praying in behalf of Peter 



250 MAKK. 

when cast into prison by Herod. His Hebrew name appears 
to have been John. The apostle Peter calls Mark his son 
(1 Peter, v: 13), this leading us to infer that Peter was the 
instrument of his conversion. (Acts, xii: 12.) 

"The relation of Mark to Peter," says Dr. Wm. Smith, 
" is of great importance for our view of his gospel. Ancient 
writers with one consent make Mark the interpreter of the 
apostle Peter. Some explain this word (the Greek word 
interpreter) to mean that the office of Mark was to trans- 
late into the Greek tongue the Hebrew discourses of the 
apostle; while others adopt the more probable view that 
Mark wrote a gospel which conformed more exactly than 
the others to Peter's preaching, and thus ' interpreted ' it 
to the church at large. The report that Mark was the 
companion of Peter at Rome is no "doubt of great antiquity. " 

"Mark probably wrote this gospel when he was residing 
at Eome with Peter, A. D. 65, whose familiar companion 
he was. In connection with the fact of his writing under 
the direction of Peter, it is interesting to remark that 
many things honorable to that apostle, and mentioned by 
the other evangelists, are omitted, by Mark, whilst fche 
failings of Peter are all recorded in this gospel. It has 
been already remarked that Matthew in his gospel more 
particularly addresses the Jews; Mark, on the contrary^ 
writing for the immediate use of the Christians at Pome, 
which was at that time the great metropolis of the world 
and common centre of all civilized nations." — Nicholls. 

A careful study of the gospel itself, with a wise reference 
to the age in which it was produced and fche actual history 
of its origin, will reveal the fact that it has a distinct aim 
and an independent origin of its own. From the historical 
point of view, it can be shown conclusively that this record 
was written for the Romans, the second of the three great 
rein-esentative races of which the civilized world of Mark's 
day was made up. 



Ch. XXIX: § 2. witnesses. 251 

§ 2. Witnesses. Papias recorded what he learned by 
inquiry from the disciples of the apostles, as quoted by 
Eusebius, who wrote in the close of the third century: 
"Mark, the interpreter of Peter, wrote carefully down all 
that he recollected, but not according to the ord$r (chro- 
nologically) of Christ's speaking or working. Hence Mark 
made no mistake, since he so wrote some things as he was 
accustomed to repeat them from memory, and since he 
continually sought this one thing — neither to omit any-' 
thing of those things which he had heard, nor to add 
anything false to them." 

Irenaeus (A. D. 200) confirms the testimony of Papias. 
He states that, after the departure of Peter and Paul from 
Rome, "Mark, the disciple and interpreter of Peter, did 
also hand down to us in writings what had been preached 
by Peter." 

Tertullian of Carthage, who wrote later, agrees with 
Irenaeus, declaring incidentally that the gospel "which 
Mark published may be affirmed to be Peter's, whose inter- 
preter Mark was." 

At a later date, Eusebius, the historian, sums up the 
unvarying testimony of those who have gone before, and 
gives his own endorsement to the statement that "Mark 
wrote his gospel under the direction of Peter, at the request 
of the brethren at Rome, and with a special view to circu- 
lation in Italy and among the Romans generally." 

§ 3. The Character and Needs of the Romans. 

If the second gospel originated, as has been shown, through 
the agency of Mark for Roman readers, the character and 
needs of the Romans must furnish the key to this gospel. 
The Romans represent the idea of activp human power in 
the ancient world; they are conscious of being born to rule 
the world; they sieze and they "push the idea of national 
power to universal empire. The key to the character, 
career and wants of the Romans is found in the idea of 



252 MARK. 

power. In writing to the Christians at Rome, therefore, 
Paul is "not ashamed of the gospel of Christ, because it 
is the power of God unto salvation to eyeiy one that 
believeth." Rom. i: 16. The Roman, as such, cared little 
for the spiritual power of the Jew; his was the power of 
will, his was the beauty of action, his was the logic of deeds. 
In thus pushing forward the conquest of the world, Caesar 
became fitted to be the great organizer into a single empire; 
they held him to be the ideal man of the race, a mighty 
worker and conqueror. 

If the Roman was, as thus shown, the man of action, 
these characteristics must furnish the key to the gospel 
intended for him. The gospel to the Roman must be 
moulded by the Roman idea. It must present the charac- 
ter and career of Jesus from the Roman side or point of 
yiew, as answering to the idea of divine power, work, law, 
conquest and universal sway. It must exhibit Jesus as 
adapted in power and mercy, in his mission and work, to 
the wants of the Roman nature and world. To the Roman 
these are the credentials of Jesus, no less essential than 
prophecy to the Jetv, or philosophy to the Greek. Without 
them there could not be a reasonable hope of arresting his 
attention. 

The Holy Spirit proposes to commend to his acceptance 
Jesus of Nazareth as this sovereign and deliverer, the 
expected Savior of the world. 

§ 4. General Divisions. In examining the second 
gospel, in the light of its ascertained origin and design, its 
peculiar adaptation to the needs of the Roman of that age 
will become apparent, With the aid of its known origin 
and aim, it will be seen that it may be naturally and con- 
veniently divided into five parts. 

First: The advent of the King and Conqueror. Chap. 
i. ii: L2. 



Ch XXIX. § 5. ROMAN ADAPTATION. 253 

Second: The conflict of the Almighty King. Chap, ii: 
13-viii: 26. 

Third: The claim of the Almighty King. Chap, viii: 
27-xiii: 37. 

Fourth: The sacrifice of the Almighty King. Chap, 
xiv, XT. 

Fifth: The Universal Empire established. Chap. xvi. 

§ 5. Roman Adaptation. This gospel represents 
Jesus as proclaiming and establishing a kingdom; but it 
is a kingdom of power, and not a kingdom of prophecy. 
While, therefore, Mark has so much in common with 
Matthew, there is yet this wide difference, that whereas 
Matthew rests wholly on prophecy, Mark is so entirely 
independent of prophecy that, after the opening verses, he 
never even records the words of a prophet, except as he 
quotes from the mouth of Jesus. In part first and second 
Jesus appears as the Son of God, wielding almighty power 
in its most tangible forms. Hence the Roman, the man 
of power, is irresistably attracted toward him; as the Jew, 
the man of jwophecy, is by the genealogy of Messiah and 
other opening features of Matthew; and as the Greek, the 
world-man, is by the philosophic development of the life 
of the perfect divine man by Luke; and as the Christian, 
the man of faith, is by the different opening, concerning 
the eternal Word, by John. 

Da Casta has clearly pointed out certain peculiarly Ro- 
man and soldierly features that characterize this gospel as 
a whole; exhibiting emj)liatic repetitions, combined with 
the rapidity of movement, and copiousness of description 
with dramatic effect; so that we find the word straightway 
employed about forty times. Jesus calls men, and they 
straightway follow him. He enters the synagogue at Ca- 
pernaum on the Sabbath, and at once begins to teach. 
Men are amazed at the omnipotence of his command, and 
his fame immediately spreads through Galilee. Also in 



254 MARK. 

any great design to be accomplished;, which may conflict 
with the interest of others and stir up opj>osition, we find 
that there is secrecy of those plans. This is one of the 
peculiar features of this gospel,, for we find the strictest 
secrecy is enjoined no less than twenty times. 

§ 6. Omissions of the Second Gospel. It will be 
seen on examination that Mark omits Avhatever is distinc- 
tively Jewish, Greek or Christian, and would therefore be 
of little service in his work of presenting his gospel to the 
Roman. The peculiarities may be clearly seen, (I) in the 
omissions, and (II) in the parables. 

We find no genealogy, no birth, no Bethlehem, no wise 
men, as in Matthew; no childhood, no Nazareth, no sub- 
jection to parents, no increase in wisdom and stature, as 
in Luke; no reference to his pre-existence in glory, as in 
John. We also find no sermon on the mount, no Lord's 
prayer, no long discourses, and but few parables; no " Woe 
unto you," no sentence upon the nation or Jerusalem, no 
bridegroom, no Lord judging between faithful and un- 
faithful servants, no king enthroned in glory, separating 
the righteous from* the wicked, no saying that he could 
summon legions of angels, no promised paradise to the 
penitent thief, no notice of the resurrection of saints to 
appear when he arose leading captivity captive, no burning 
the chaff with unquenchable fire, as in Matthew. The 
disciples never call him Lord until after the resurrection; 
hence no "Lord! is it I?'' no "Lord! save, or I perish!" 

The reader of Mark's gospel will also note the absence 
of the numerous parables condemnatory of the Jews, found 
in the latter half of Matthew's gospel, as they would have 
been lost on the Romans. As compared with Luke, the 
omissions of the merely Greek features are equally appar- 
ent. The suggestive stages of the life of Jesus, upcu 
which Luke dwells, are not even mentioned bv Mark. II> 



Oh. XXIX: § 7. additions. 255 

appears without delay in his work as the mighty victor. 
For the Eoman there is but one stage in his career. 

§ 7. Additions to the Second Gospel. The por- 
tions usually reckoned as additions to this gospel are as 
follows: The parable of the seed corn (iv: 26-34); the 
healing of the blind man of Bethsaida (viii: 22-26); the 
healing of the deaf man of Decapolis (vii: 31-37); and the 
form of the last commission (xvi: 15-18). The longest of 
all these is the parable of the seed corn, occupying nine 
verses. 

Mark has altogether only four parables, viz: the sower, 
the seed corn, the mustard seed, and the wicked husband- 
man. The first three can best be understood together; 
these are employed in unfolding the growth of the king- 
dom as an outward objective thing. The first (the sower) 
contradicts the false Eoman idea, by putting the invisible, 
spiritual power of truth in the place of the visible, material 
power of the Caesars; the second (the seed corn) presents a 
development as independent of human will, and as inevit- 
able as that of Rome herself according to the most Eoman 
conception; the third (the mustard seed) completes the 
sketch of the development of the kingdom, showing the 
rapid growth into that universality which Eome, alone of 
all the worldly empires, had even imperfectly realized. 

Many are the distinctive variations and peculiarities of 
this gospel, as narrative changes and the slight additions. 
Under the head of peculiarities we have those of Eoman 
assumption and Eoman expressions. We find that phase 
of our Lord presented which represents him as the worker, 
one of push and activity, ever ready and willing to serve. 
Hence our Lord is presented as Christ the "Servant," not 
only to serve while on the earth,* but to aid by his Spirit. 
In the last verse of Mark's gospel we read: "And they 
went forth and preached everywhere, the Lord working 
with them, and confirming the word with signs following.** 



256 LUKE. 



CHAPTER XXX. 
LUKE. 

§1. Introduction to Luke's Gospel. Written "for 
the Greek/' from Greece, A. D. 63. {See Index; also Chro- 
nology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEK TOPIC, "HUMANITY." 

Luke, the name of the third evangelist, is supposed to 
have been a native of Antioch. Some suppose that he was 
the only one of all the penmen of the Scriptures that was 
not of the Israelites; that he was a Jewish proselyte, and 
was converted to Christianity by the ministry of Paul at 
Antioch, and after his coming into Macedonia he was his 
constant companiou. Nothing is known of his parentage. 
He employed himself in the study and practice of physic, 
and hence Paul called him "Luke, the beloved physician." 
Col. iv: 14. 

"Luke is supposed to have written this gospel about the 
year A. D. 63, before he wrote the ' Acts of the Apostles ' — 
which is a continuation of the former — while in Greece; 
while the later Church History was probably written in 
Rome when he was there with Paul, while he was a pris- 
oner, and ' preaching in his own hired house,' with which 
this history concludes, A. D. 64 or 5. Jerome says that 
Luke died when he was eighty-four years of age, and that 
he was never married. Dr. Cave observes that 'Ins way 
and manner of writing is accurate and exact, his style 
polite and elegant, sublime and lofty, and has a classical 
finish.' Luke, in his gospel, furnishes us with many para- 
bles, discourses, miracles and events omitted by the gospels 
preceding it, written for the Creek and m the Greek 
language. 



Oil. XXX: § 2. NEEDS OF THE GREEKS. 257 

This third gospel was addressed to Theophilus (ch. i: 3), 
to whom the Acts of the Apostles was also addressed (Acts, 
i: 1). The name is Greek, meaning lover of God. Some 
have supposed, from the meaning of the name, that it was 
used, not to represent any particular person, but Christians 
in general; while most have agreed that he was only the 
representative of a large class to whom the gospel had been 
preached; yet, when the subject is investigated from the 
historical point of view, the statements of most trust- 
worthy witnesses make it sufficiently clear that Luke wrote 
it for the Greek, the representative of the world at large. 
Among these witnesses are Irenaeus, of the second century, 
Origen of the third, and Gregory and Jerome of the fourth. 
The main statements thus brought to light seem to have 
been received, almost without question, in the early centu- 
ries of the church." 

§ 2. Character and Needs of the Greeks. If the 

third gospel, as prepared by Luke, was for the Greek, and 
for Greek readers in general, then the character and needs 
of the Greeks must furnish the key to this gospel. The 
Greeks are clearly distinguished from the other great his- 
toric races by certain marked characteristics. Every great 
race shows some part of man's nature in unusual develop- 
ment. In the old Jewish race, the spirit, or that part of 
man which links him to God, was the prominent element. 
In the old Roman race, the will, or that part of man which 
pushes to action and enables him to control and mould 
nature and mankind, was the predominant element. While 
in the old Greek race, the humanity, especially as embrac- 
ing intellect, taste and feeling, was the prominent feature. 
The Jew belonged to the race of Shem. The Greek be- 
longed to the family of Japheth, which has done all of 
what is usually regarded the world's great intellectual work; 
and this has given it all those grand secular literatures, 



~>b$ LIKE. 

which contain the highest expression of the soul from its 
human and earthly side. 

The Greek looked upon himself as having the mission 
of perfecting man. Through all the ages, in literature 
and art, in state craft and gymnastics, he was working 
toward his one great idea of the perfect man. In his 
ideal, intellect and taste held the supreme place. His aim 
was not the beautiful in the lower sense merely, but the 
thinking, reasoning man, intellect full summed, farthest 
reaching, most gracefully working. As a worshiper of 
man, humanity seemed most divine to him — diviner than 
all physical forces, than all physical life, than empires and 
emperors — man diviner than all his works, and than all 
the world! The man on earth, with the grandest powers 
of thought and beauty of speech and action, was the 
highest man for the Greek, and nearest the place which 
he thought the gods ought to occupy. 

The Greek was a universal man; the Jew and the Roman 
were by nature exclusive. The Jew could mingle readily 
with him only who eame from Abraham and received the 
prophets; the Roman with him only who wielded power in 
the empire. The full-grown Jew was a Pharisee; the full- 
grown Roman was a Caesar; but the fall-grown Greek was 
a world-man. All men could, therefore, meet the Greek as 
they could not the Jew or the Roman. His religious 
system provided for taking out all virtue from the world. 
The Greek deified all of man, what was base as well as 
what was truly noble and God-like. It left no room for 
spirituality. In deifying man, it brought God down upon 
a level with man. His religion had in it a kind of attract- 
iveness, but it took all the grandeur out of the universe. 
Instead of seeing the Supreme God and Father everywhere 
and in all things, shining in beauty and glory, lie saw 
himself imaged there. It was man's universe, not Jeho- 
vah's. The altar "to the unknown god " became the only 



Ch. XXX: § 2. NEEDS OF THE GREEKS. 259 

Greek altar winch was in any sense an altar to the true 
God. In short, the Greek theory hlottecl out the other 
and higher world, and left him utterly worldly, "having 
no hope, and without God in the world." This earth was 
his province, his home, his grave. 

Thus, in the character and condition of the Greek civil- 
ization in the apostolic age, is to be found the key to the 
third gospel. The Greek thought and culture had been 
the common possession of mankind for four centuries 
when Luke sent forth his gospel. The indiscriminate 
worship of humanity had ushered in the reign of natural- 
ism and sensuality. The worship of the beautiful had 
ended. In short, religion had become a mockery, and 
virtue had ended. Utter restlessness and wretchedness 
had siezed upon the greatest and purest minds, and the 
old longing for some divine man was everywhere urging 
toward despair, save as the Jew had quickened and made 
it hopeful by spreading abroad his idea of the Messiah, as 
the coming deliverer of the world. "When this gospel went 
forth for the Greek, it found the world language waiting 
to bear the world religion to this longing and despairing 
race, and to all who had been moulded by its ways of 
thinking and living. 

It is therefore evident that the Greek must be reached 
by a peculiar presentation of the gospel, a presentation 
shaped by these characteristics in his nature and condi- 
tion. It must present the character and career of Jesus of 
Nazareth from the Greek point of view, as answering to 
the conception of a perfect and divine humanity; must 
exhibit him as adapted, in his power and mercy, in his 
work and mission, to the wants of the Greek soul, and of 
humanity as represented in it. In short, the gospel must 
meet the true, and correct the false, in the Greek ideal. 
To the Greek these are the credentials of Jesus, no less 
essential than prophecy to the Jew or power to the Roman. 



2 (JO LUKE. 

§ 3. General Divisions. Luke's gospel may be con- 
veniently divided into five principal parts, presenting the 
successive stages of the work of Jesus as the divine man 
for the redemption of the world. 

First: The advent of the divine man. Clrap. i-iv: 13. 

Second: The work of the divine man for the Jewish 
world. Chap, iv: 14-ix: 50. 

Third: The work of the divine man for the Gentile 
world. Chap, ix: 51-xviii: 30. 

Fourth: The sacrifice of the divine man for all man- 
kind. Chap, xviii: 31-xxiii: 49. 

Fifth: The divine man, Savior of all nations. Chap, 
xxiii: 50-xxiv: 53. » 

§ 4. Greek Adaptation. The gospel according to 
Luke may be regarded as having a twofold idea, internal 
and external. 

(a.) The External. The central idea of the third gospel, 
in its outward aspect, is found in the opening verses of the 
first chapter. It is a presentation of an accurate history 
of Jesus of Nazareth. As clearly as we recognize in the 
first gospel a perpetual comparing of the person of Christ 
with the prophecies concerning the Messiah, for the Jews; 
and in the second gospel the exhibition of the mighty 
deeds of the conqueror of the world in compressed, graphic 
and living form, for the Roman; so clearly do we recognize 
in the third gospel the presence of the Jiistorian, preparing 
for the accurate and philosophic Greek. The author states 
at once the two main objects of the historical writer: to 
draw up a continuous narrative, derived from a careful 
scrutinizing of the testimonies of " eye-witnesses and min- 
isters of the word;" and to commit it to writing in chro- 
nological order. Chap, i: 1-4. 

This gospel takes the form of a complete historical 
narrative. It opens with an expression which occurs above 



Ch XXX; § 4. GREEK ADAPTATION. 261 

sixty times in the two compositions of Luke: there was, or 
it happened that. The use of this expression is significant 
of the historic point of view maintained throughout. 

Attention to dates, so requisite to history, is found 
everywhere in Luke. "There was in the days of Herod." 
Chap, i: 5. With respect to our Lord himself, it is Luke 
alone who speaks of his being circumcised on the eighth 
day. Chap, ii: 21. Jesus, at the age of twelve years, as 
sitting in the midst of the doctors in the temple. Chap, 
ii : 42. He is the only one that informs us that Jesus was 
"about thirty years of age" when he received the rite of 
baptism. Chap, iii: 23. 

Probably no book of antiquity contains so many varied 
and wide-reaching references to the institutions, customs, 
geography and history of their times as do the two books 
of Luke; so that Luke is justly and pre-eminently called 
the historian. 

(b. ) The Internal. The central idea of the third gospel, 
in its internal aspect, appears throughout. It is this : 
Jesus is the perfect divine man, the Savior of the world. 

Wescott says: "In the other gospels we find our King, 
our Lord, our God; but in Luke we see the image of our 
great Highpriest, made perfect through sufferings, tempted 
in all points as we are, but without sin." 

This gospel <siezes upon the humanity of Jesus as the 
idea most attractive to the mind of the Greek. Jesus, 
then, is the man. This man Luke exhibits in the various 
stages of his human development. He is bom as a child, 
grew as a child, subject as a child; is Highpriest from 
among men, begins at 30 years of age, prays like a man, 
says "Our Father," etc. Luke calls him the son of man. 
In the parables, man is most frequently used. For in- 
stance: "A certain man made a great supper;" "man fell 
among thieves;" "A man having an hundred sheep;" "A 



262 LUKE. 

man had two sons." And the centurion says: "This is a 
righteous man." 

The above is but the more perfect framework for the 
exquisite portraiture of the perfect man, who appears in 
the world to give light to them who sit in darkness. 

§ 5. Omissions of the Third Gospel. Luke omits 
so much of the facts and teachings given by the other 
evangelists as does not suit his special aim of commending 
Jesus as the Savior of the world to the Greek mind. He 
omits the distinctively Jewish narratives and teachings 
given by Matthew. It will be seen that lie j~>asses over the 
royal lineage by Solomon and Joseph; the prophetic divine 
origin; the coming of the magi; the massacre of the in- 
fants; the flight into Egypt, and the return to Nazareth: 
because such portions have exclusive reference to prophecy 
and to Jewish wants. 

Passing on to the public ministry of Jesus, Luke does 
not record the opening of the ministry in Galilee (Matt. 
iv), in which prophecy is fulfilled; this was a gospel for 
the Jew only. So the sermon on the mount finds no place 
in the third gospel (Matt, v-vii), it being the constitution 
and character of the kingdom of heaven for Jewish hearers. 
The portion of Luke's gospel that has sometimes been con- 
founded with the sermon on flic mount (Luke, vi: 17-49) 
is entirely without the marks of Jewish references as found 
in Matthew. 

Turning from discourses to parables, it will be found 
(hid Luke deals in like manner with parables aimed directly 
at the Jew. Of the parables of the kingdom (Matt. xiii). 
three out of the seven are retained, lie also omits the 
distinctively Roman features found in the second gospel; 
and no less striking is his omission of the spiritual and 
Christian portions of John's gospel. The nnspiritual 
Greek was qoI prepared for such lessons when Luke gave 
Ins gospel in permanent form. John's gospel, it given to 



Ch. XXX: § 6. additions. 263 

the Greek before Luke's, would have been foolishness to 
him. (1 Cor. i: 23.) 

§ 6. Additions of the Third Gospel. If this gos- 
pel be regarded as made up of 100 parts, 59 of these are 
peculiar to itself, and only 41 common with one or more 
of the other gospels. The important point, however, in 
this connection is, that all the 59 parts peculiar to Luke 
may be shown to be especially appropriate to the Greek 
soul and its needs; the 59 parts are tangible additions, and 
may be examined m detail. 

It will be seen that there are two very extensive portions 
of this gospel which are almost entirely its own, viz: the 
first and second parts. There is not the appearance of 
likeness between the opening chapters of Luke and those 
of Matthew and John. Luke's introduction is exactly 
suited to the Greek. It is chiefly occupied with the pre- 
sentation of every stage in the development of the humanity 
of our Lord, beginning from the counsels of God, and end- 
ing with the complete manhood of the Son of God, the 
Savior of the world. Luke alone, in the genealogy, traces 
his descent from Adam and God. He alone gives the 
infancy and youth of Jesus, including the wonderful 
events, natural and supernatural, accompanying his birth 
and cradling in the manger; the strong recognition attend- 
ing the circumcision and the presentation of the child in 
the temple; the subsequent visit of the child at twelve 
years of age to his Father's house; and the law of progress 
in his human development, in the family at Nazareth, 
toward the perfect manhood; then represents it as com- 
pleted in the baptism of John, which introduces him as 
the Jehovah of prophecy, teacher of the world, and the 
beloved Son of God. He alone gives the sermon on the 
plain (ch. vi: 17-49), in which he unfolds the great prin- 
ciples that should govern men as men of the kingdom of 
God. The more extensive portions peculiar to Luke (ix- 



264: LIKE. 

xviii: 30), known as the record of Christ's gracious work 
for the Gentile world, chiefly across the Jordan in heathen 
Peraea, and on his last journey to Jerusalem, is no less 
characteristic. 

The more carefully both the omissions and the additions 
of the third evangelist are examined, the more clearly it 
will appear that they are eminently suited to commend 
Jesus to the Greek world of that age, and the representa- 
tive men of this age. 

Luke develops to a wonderful degree the reality of this 
Saviors human sympathies and affections. This element 
in his character is seen to the best advantage in the relation 
which Luke represents him as holding to those classes of 
humanity for which the age cared the least, to children, to 
women, and to the outcasts from society. 

§ 7. Children's Gospel. The other evangelists tell 
us of our Lord's blessing children; but Luke commonly 
adds something that brings out the tenderness of his 
regard for them. He alone tells us that they were infants 
that were brought to Jesus when he so graciously and 
winningly presented himself as the children's Savior : 
"And they brought unto him also infants, that he should 
touch them " (xviii: 15); and the daughter of Jaims was 
an only child: "one only daughter, about twelve years of 
age" (viii: 42); that the demoniac healed at the foot of 
{lie mount of transfiguration was a child: ••Master. I be- 
seech thee, look upon my son, for he is mine only child* 3 
(ix: 38). Taking such incidents in connection with Luke's 
remarkable presentation of the childhood of the Baptist 
and of Jesus, in the opening chapters of the gospel, it is 
easy to understand why this should have been called the 
children's gospel. 

£ S. Woman's Gospel. The affectionate regard of 
our Lord for woman i< an equally marked feature of tins 



Ch. XXX: § 9. GOSPEL FOR THE TOOK. 265 

gospel. Luke tells us of "Certain women, which had been 
healed of evil spirits and infirmities; Mary, called Magda- 
lene, out of whom went seven devils; and Joanna, the wife 
of Chuza, Herod's steward; and Susanna, and many others, 
which ministered unto him of their substance*' (viii: 2-3); 
of the penitent woman who anointed him at the feast in 
the house of Simon the Pharisee (vii: 46); of certain 
women who lifted up their voices and blessed him (xi: 27); 
of his address to the women of Jerusalem who followed 
him to the cross weeping (xxiii: 27); of the restoration of 
the son of the widow of Xain (vii: 11-16). It is Luke 
who first introduces us to those typical women of all ages, 
Martha and Mary (x: 38-45). 

Such incidents as these, in connection with the tender 
regard so often exhibited for the Avidowed and bereaved, 
and more than all, in connection with those wonderful 
events in the lives of Elizabeth and Mary, unfolded only 
here, by bringing Jesus into closest sympathy with true 
womanhood, and by exalting the glory of true motherhood 
through her who was "blessed among Avomen " (i: 28-32), 
entitles this gospel to be called in a peculiar sense the 
gospel of woman, for whom the old Greek world had no 
gospel. 

§ 9. Gospel for the Poor. More wonderful still was 
the affectionate sympathy of our Lord, depicted in this 
gospel, with the poor, despised, suffering, outcast classes 
of society. While he constantly rebuked and warned the 
hypocrites, the self-sufficient, the self-righteous, the rich, 
the luxurious, the frivolous and thoughtless, he is every- 
where presented as a friend of the poor and the needy. In 
Luke's gospel (done the beatitudes all become blessings to 
the poor and suffering (vi: 20-22); the most precious of 
the parables — as the great supper, the marriage feast, Laz- 
arus and the rich man. and the prodigal — all mark this the 
gospel for the poor. The experience of our Lord himself 



2t>0 LUKE. 

is presented as that of one of the poor, since he became 
poor, was laid in a manger, and his parents were obliged to 
offer in the temple the offering of the poor (ii: 24). 

But Lnke makes the sympathy of Jesus with the abso- 
lute outcasts to stand ont more clearly. It appears in the 
friendly-recognition of publicans; in the parable of him 
Avho went up to the temple to pray, and standing afar off, 
with downcast eyes, smote his breast and prayed: '"God 
be merciful to me, a sinner*' (xviii: 13); in the story of 
Zaccheus (xix: 1-10); in the treatment of the sinful but 
penitent woman who anointed him (yii); in the parable of 
the lost piece of money and the lost sheep (xv: 3); in that- 
wonderful "gospel within a gospel,"' the parable of the 
prodigal (xv: 11); in the penitent malefactor on the cross 
(xxiii: 42, 43). 

It is no marvel, then, that this gospel, more than all the 
others, may be said to have given birth and inspiration to 
all the great reformatory movements — care of the poor, the 
deaf, the dumb, the insane, the maimed, the widowed and 
orphaned, the aged, even the criminal — which distinguish 
modern Christendom. The third gospel is in a peculiar 
sense the gospel of those for whom in all ages this world 
had no gospel. 

§ 10. Con-elusion. It lias been shown to he a fact of 
history that Luke, a Greek by birth, character and culture. 
prepared this gospel, with the 1 aid of Paul, for (J reek read- 
ers, the men who were the representatives of the world at 
large. The adaptation to this class and its needs lias been 
shown to furnish the satisfactory explanation of the various 
peculiarities of this gospel. In distinction from Matthew. 
the gospel for the. lew. the man of prophecy; from Mark, 
the gospel for the Roman, ihe man of power; and. from 
John, the gospel for the Christian, the man of faith: Luke 
is the gospel for the Greek, tin- world-man. 



Ch. XXXI: § 2. ORIGIN AND DESIGN. 267 

CHAPTER XXXI. 

JOHN. 

§ 1. Introduction to John's Gospel. Written "for 

the Christians/ '•from Ephesus, A. D. 97. (See Index; also 
Chronology, Chap. XXXV: §7.) 

GOLDEX TOPIC. " DIVINITY. " 

John, the evangelist and apostle, was the son of Zebedee. 
a fisherman of Bethsaida, on the sea of Galilee. He was 
probably the youngest of the twelve apostles, and it is 
evident from his writings that he possessed a very mild 
and amiable and affectionate temper. He died at Ephesus 
at the advanced age of about one hundred years. His 
writings are the gospel which bears his name, three epistles 
and The Re relation. 

§ 2. Origin and Design. "What is the actual origin 

of the gospel of John? For what class of readers was it 
originally designed? It is clearly a fact of history that the 
fourth gospel was prepared and given tothe church long- 
after the other three had been completed, and with a 
different purpose. 

There are able witnesses of this fact. The early church 
fathers have left their testimony on this point. Papias of 
the first century, Irenaeus and Clement of Alexandria of 
the second, and Eusebius of the third: the historian adopt- 
ing the statements of many of those who wrote before his 
time, and in measure summing up the past testimony. 
making additions of his own as well. Eusebius gives the 
origin of John's gospel substantially as follows: "While 
Matthew prepared his gospel for the Hebrews, and Mark 
and Luke published their gospels, they say that John in 



268 .iohx. 

all that time preached without writing. When the books 
of the three evangelists were spread throughout the world, 
and came into his hands, he approved them and acknowl- 
edged them as true testimony; but wished that those things 
which were done at the first preaching of Christ had been 
made in their books." He therefore wrote his gospel, 
recording the ministry in Judea and the early miracles. 
Jerome of the fourth century, in the same passage which 
he declares the origin of the first three gospels, testifies no 
less explicitly of the fourth. Augustine, who was contem- 
porary with Jerome, writes: "The three former evangelists 
had narrated our Lord ? s temporal acts, and the savings that 
were of most avail for the conduct of this present life, and 
which especially concerned the inculcation of active life. 
St. John relates fewer acts of Christ, but is more full and 
minute in recording his sayings, particularly concerning 
the unity of the ever blessed trinity, and the felicity of 
life everlasting. " 

These testimonies justify the belief in the following 
facts: That the apostle John wrote the fourth gospel at 
the close of the first century; that it was substantially the 
embodiment of his preaching to the early church, of those 
spiritual doctrines and experiences which had come from 
his most intimate communion with Jesus, and which in an 
important sense supplemented the other gospels; that it 
was written, not for the Jew, Greek or Roman, as such, 
but for the church; and that it was fitted to' commend 
Jesus to Christians in the church as the divine Son of God, 
the light and life of the world. 

It was almost half a century after the gospel according 
to Luke, the last of the missionary gospels, was given t<> 
the Greek Gentile world that John wrote the gospel which 
hears his name. And during this interval all the apostles 
had fallen asleep except John. The first great missionary 
work had therefore been done, and John m writing Ilia 



I'll. XXXI: § 3. NEEDS OF THE CHRISTIAN. 269 

gospel addressed a generation that had been taught the 
historical truths recorded by the other evangelists. It is 
evident, for example, that his declaration "for John was 
not yet cast into prison" (iii: 24), assumes the knowledge, 
on the part of his readers, of the account of the imprison- 
ment of the Baptist given by Matthew (xi), Mark (vi: 
14-29), and Luke (iii: 20). 

The fourth gospel, then, was written by John in response 
to an appeal from the church — already possessing the other 
gospels — for a spiritual gospel, and written with the view 
of furthering the spiritual life of the church, and to answer 
the demand for a Christian theology from the life of Christ 
himself. 

| 3. Character and Needs of the Christian. If, 

as has been seen, the fourth gospel had its origin in the 
preaching of John, after the missionary gospels had been 
preached and the church established throughout the world, 
then the character and needs of the Christian must furnish 
the key to this gospel. 

The Christian is the man who has heard the great facts 
of the gospel, and who has accepted Jesus Christ as his 
Savior. He has attained, through faith in Christ, to a 
new life, which is different in its origin, motives and aims 
from the earthly life. He is reaching out toward that 
everlasting life of glory with Christ, of which this new life 
is the beginning. The Christian is, then, the man of the 
new life. The Jew lost his narrow Jewish ideas, and 
turned from the prophecies of Christ and the forms and 
ceremonies to Christ himself. The Roman ceased to care 
for the temporal king in finding the spiritual king and 
deliverer. The Greek parted with his low humanitarian 
ideas of perfection, in having his eyes opened to see the 
divine and universal man. They were all brought into 
one brotherhood, all alike recognizing in Jesus the elder 
brother, the spring and moving power of their new life, 



270 johx. 

and being all alike linked in living union with Christ 
through faith. By faith he eats the broken body of 
Christ, and drinks his shed blood. 

If the character of the Christian is such as has been 
represented, it will furnish the key to the gospel intended 
for him. That gospel must be suited to meet his wants. 
The gospel for the Christian must present Jesus as the 
revelation of God, the word, the truth, the light, which 
the Christian needs in the new life. It is observed that 
the missionary gospels do not deal largely with these sub- 
jects, do not deal with them at all, except as they have to 
do with leading men to the first acceptance of Christ and 
the beginning of the divine life in him. They leave the 
Wants of this higher and peculiarly spiritual sphere for 
some later hand to supply. The fourth gospel must in 
this sense be the " Supplement" of the first three. To the 
Christian, then, these are the credentials of Jesus, no less 
essential than prophecy to the Jew. or power to the Roman, 
or the perfection of manhood to the Greek; for without 
them his most pressing needs would he left uusupplied. 
There could, therefore, be no gospel for the Christ inn in 
any production which should omit these grand themes of 
the divine and immortal life of faith. 

£ 4. The Authorship. The author of the fourth 
gospel was peculiarly fitted to prepare the truth of the 
gospel for the Christian. That he was just the man to 
give shape to the gospel for the Christian church may 
readily be shown. His birth and early history: his char- 
acter as transformed and exalted by the power of the 
gospel; his intimate union with his master, and his intense 
sympathy with him: his long and profound Christian ex- 
perience, and his wide acquaintance with the Deeds of the 
church, combine t<> make him the tit instrumenl for the 
work to which he was divinely called. 



Ch. XXXI: £ 4. THE A.UTHOESH1P. 271 

Tlie history of John, so far as ir has been recorded, is 
too familiar ro require extended rehearsal. He appears to 
have been born in Bethsaida. of Galilee. His father. Zeb- 
edee. was a respectable and well-to-do fisherman on the 
sea of Galilee, able to possess his own boats and to have 
hired servants. His mother. Salome, was one of those 
women who ministered to Jesns of their wealth, and fol- 
lowed him to the cross. She went with the Marys, on the 
morning of the resurrection, to the sepulchre to embalm 
the body of Jesus. Born of such a mother, it is not 
surprising that John early became one of the disciples of 
the Baptist, nor that when the Baptist introduced him to 
Jesus lie at once followed him as the Messiah. 

He belonged to that inner circle of Christ, consisting of 
himself. Peter and James, to the members of which alone 
Jesns permitted a near view of the great crises of his life 
and work on earth, such as the transfiguration and the 
agony. Among the three he was called the beloved dis- 
ciple, who leaned on Jesus' breast at the table at the last 
supper. He was the first to follow Jesns. and he was the 
one to cling most closely to him to the end. To him was 
entrusted the mother, with whom in his earthly career 
Jesus had been so closely bound: and from the afflicting 
houT on the cross to the death of her whose heart had 
been pierced with many sorrows. Mary and John were as 
mother and son. 

Still another peculiar element of fitness in John, as the 
instrument for preparing the gospel of the Christian life, 
was his long, varied and profound Christian experience. 
In this he was alone among the apostles. If. a.- is gener- 
ally agreed, his gospel was not written until near the close 
of the first century, he was ripened for it by an experience 
of nearh seventy years. During nearly three-quarters of 
a century he lived upon the words of his Master, the 
eternal Word — in filial intercourse with Mary, in spiritual 



272 * john". 

communion with the church, in living union with the 
ascended Christ — until those words became the thought of 
his thought, and the very life of his life. Hence it is that 
to-day men cling to the gospel of John as the very voice of 
the innermost soul of the divine Eedeemer. 

§ 5. General Divisions. John's gospel may be di- 
vided into five parts, presenting the successive stages in 
the revelation of Jesus as the incarnate Word, as the light 
and life, to the faith of men. 

First: The advent and incarnation of the Word. Chap, 
i: 1-13. 

Second : The incarnate Word the only life of the world. 
Chap, i: 14-vi: 71. 

Third: The incarnate Word, the light and life, in con- 
flict with the spiritual darkness. Chap, vii: 1-xi: 54. 

Fourth: The incarnate Word securing the life of the 
world through his sacrificial death. Chap, xi: 55-xix: 42. 

Fifth: The incarnate Word, crucified and risen, the 
Savior and Lord of all believers. Chap, xx, xxi. 

§ 6. Christian Adaptation. The central thought of 
the gospel, as stated by the evangelist himself, is found in 
the divine life which has its origin in faitli in Jesus as the 
Christ, the incarnate Son of God. He distinctly states 
that his selection of material was made with this end in 
view: "And many other signs truly did Jesus in the 
presence of his disciples, which are not written in this 
book; but these are written that ye might believe that 
Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and that believing ye 
might have life through his name" (xx: 30, 31). 

That this is the gospel of the incarnate Son in his rela- 
tion to the divine life in man is made manifest everywhere. 
Its teachings would have been unintelligible to the men of 
that age without the more external and elementary teach- 
ings of the first three evangelists. It prestipposes the 



Ch. XXXI: § 7. omissions. 273 

previous practical acceptance of Christ as- the Savior of 
those to whom it was addressed. It is the gospel which 
gives the Christian the requisite instruction concerning 
the secret springs and laws of the life of faith and obedi- 
ence to God, and concerning the mission of the Holy 
G-host as man's divine helper in this new life. It is 
obvious that these teachings are given nowhere else in the 
other gospels with such fullness, clearness and strictness. 
In short, all the great moving and controlling principles 
of the Christian life are here alone given in the form 
needed to prepare the way for an intelligent Christian 
career. 

§ 7. Omissions of the Fourth Gospel. The Chris- 
tian aim of the fourth gospel appears especially in its 
omissions of facts and truths made prominent in the other 
gospels. As John contemplates the wants of the church, 
■in which there was properly no longer a distinction between 
Jew, Eoman and Greek, he had no need for the material 
presented in the missionary gospels, and especially designed 
to commend Jesus to sinners in the representative races of 
the age. Accordingly we have almost a clean sweep of 
omissions; none of the leading events detailed by the other 
gospels, with a single. exception, is recorded by John until 
he reaches the history of the sufferings and the resurrection 
of Christ, without which no gospel could be written. 

This almost entire omission of the material found in the 
other gospels is what would be expected in the later and 
sjnritual gospel. No human genealogy, no divine origin 
of the Messiah, no early experience and preparation for his 
work, no sermon on the mount, no long series of parables, 
no apprehensions of the cross, no delivering to the Gentiles 
and mocked and spitefully treated and spitted upon, no 
prayer in the garden or agony, no angel strengthening 
him, not a word of sweating as it were great drops of 
blood; no weakness, but power; no darkness, no commend- 



274 JOHX. 

ing himself to God. The divine beams through the human 
everywhere. It passes from these fact* which appeal to 
the senses of the unspiritual man, to unfold that word of 
life which speaks to the spiritual man. 

§ 8. Additions of the Fourth Gospel. Still more 
clearly does the Christian aim of John's gospel appear from 
the additions which lie makes to the material furnished by 
the other evangelists. Only six of our Lord's miracles are 
recorded in it, but these surpass all the rest in depth and 
special application. Of these six. only one is found in the 
other gospels. The peculiarities of the five introduced by 
John are very striking. He alone records the first of all 
the miracles which Jesus wrought, changing the water into 
wine (ii: 1-11), in which, without even the utterance of a 
word, he transforms the very nature of the substance with 
which he deals. He records that of the nobleman's son 
(iv: 48-54), cured by Jesus at a distance from Cana. Out 
of the many cures of the lame and the palsied by the word 
of Jesus, John selects that of the man who had suffered 
from an infirmity thirty and eight years (v), a case of the 
most utter friendlessness and the most abject weakness, 
helplessness and hopelessness. Out of the innumerable 
cures of the blind, he chooses the case of the person who 
I/ad been bom blind (ix), which was such a case as men hail 
never known to be cured (ix: 32). Tie gives the resurrec- 
tion of Lazarus to life, not from a death bed, like the 
daughter of Jairus; tint from a bier for the dead, like the 
young man of Nain; bat from the grave, when, having lain 
buried there for four days, he had already begun to sink 
into corruption (\i). Lastly, the miraculous draught of 
fishes on the sea of Tiberias (xxi). John docs not record 
these works simply because they are SO wonderful; but 
their extraordinary character made them so much the 
better signs of //><' marvelous t?dngs of God. 



Ch. XXXI: § 9. christian doctrines. 275 

The above are no more marvelous than are his words of 
instruction, as in the conversation with Nieodemus (iii), 
the Samaritan woman (iv), with the Jews in the temple at 
the feast of tabernacles (vii, viii), with the Jews in the 
temple, in Solomon's porch, at the feast of dedication (x), 
and the discourses concerning the shepherd and the sheep 
(x), and the great series connected with the last passover 
(xii-xvii). 

§ 9. Christian Doctrines. The fourth gospel may 
be regarded as the embodiment of the theology of the 
Christian church. 

I. God. John teaches from the lips of Jesus himself 
that "God is Spirit" (not a spirit), meaning this, that he 
is the divine life principle in itself (iv: 24). See ch. i: 18; 
vi: 46; v: 37. 

II. The Person of Christ. Jesus is the Word (the 
Logos), the revealer of God (i: 1). Christ claims to be 
the revealer of the Father (xiv: 9; Matt, ix: 27; Luke, x: 
22), and this is best expressed by his title, the Word. 

III. The Condition of Man. Before the grace of God 
bestowed upon him the enabling power of the light of 
life, man was in darkness, unprepared to appreciate or 
receive the blessings which Christ came to give (i: 5, 10, 
11), many even preferring darkness to light (iii: 19, 21). 
The state of mind which leads to such results John denotes 
by the word flesh (iii: 6; viii: 15, etc.). 

IV. The Doctrine of the Incarnation. Christ came to 
enlighten this darkness, and to deliver man from this living- 
death which it involved. "In him was life, and the life 
was the light of men" (i: 4). "The true light, which 
lighteth every man that cometh into the world" (i: 9). 
He is the light of the world (viii: 12; ix: 5; xii: 35, 36, 
46). Such are the statements with which the gospel is 
filled. 



276 johx. 

V. The Doctrine of the Holy Spirit. It has been seen 
that Luke's teaching concerning the Hoi)' Spirit is greatly 
in advance of that of Matthew or Mark; but it nowhere 
approaches the definiteness of John, who makes him the 
applier of the redemption wrought by Christ. He is sent 
by Christ from the Father (xv: 26; xvi: 7, 8). By John 
alone is he named the Comforter or helper (xiv: 16, 26; xv: 
26; xvi: 7). 

VI. The Resurrection and Judgment. John teaches the 
fact and the cause of the resurrection. "The hour is com- 
ing in the which all that are in their graves shall hear his 
voice, and shall come forth" (v: 28). This is the teaching 
throughout the gospel (vi: 39, 40, 44, 54, etc.), "I am 
the resurrection and the life: he that believeth in me, 
though he ivere dead, yet shall he live: and whosoever 
liveth and believeth in me shall never die" (xi: 25, 26). 

The fourth gospel is equally clear on the doctrine of the 
judgment and of the future life. "All that are in their 
graves shall hear his voice, and come forth; they that have 
done good unto the resurrection of life; and they that 
have done evil unto the resurrection of damnation" (v: 
29). To come forth from the grave is, therefore, to come 
forth to judgment; and there are two future states, right- 
eous and wicked. 

Such, in brief outline, is the doctrinal system of John's 
gospel. Both the omissions and additions of this gospel 
are thus seen to furnish evidence of the Christian aim of 
the evangelist. 

§ 10. Conclusion: Four Gospels Needed. Why 

four gospels is plainly seen from the preceding studies of 
the evangelists. It entered into the purpose of God from 
the beginning to give the divine religion of the Christian 

revelation to all mankind. The great commission sent the 
apostles to preach the gospel to every creature. In its 



Ch XXXI. § 11. ELEMENT COMMON TO THE FOUR. 277 

fulfillment it required just so many and just such gospels 
to meet the wants of the world in commending Jesus to 
all men as the Savior from sin. 

It may be profitable to direct the attention to the two 
main facts of the gospel, the first, the element common to 
all four, and the second, the element peculiar to each. 

§ 11. The Element Common to the Four. There 
is a central mass of fact and truth around which Matthew, 
Mark, Luke and John alike grasp their material. These 
chief facts may be summed up in four particulars. 

The first is found in the incarnation of the Son of God. 
The four evangelists set it forth in such a way as to make 
it plain to every candid reader. With Matthew, Jesus is 
Emanuel, God with us, the fulfillment of prophecy; with 
Mark he is the Son of God in human form, exercising 
his almighty power; with Luke he is the descendant of 
Adam and the child of the virgin, yet the Son of the. 
Highest; with John he is the eternal Word made flesh. 

The second is found in the life of the Son of G-od on the v 
earth in human form, and subject to human conditions 
and laws. This makes up the central portion of each of 
the gospels. With Matthew it is the life of the Messiah; 
with Mark of the mighty worker and victor; with Luke of 
the divine and universal man; with John of the incarnate 
Word. 

The third of these common particulars is found in the 
death upon the cross. As this is the all essential fact, all 
the gospels devote large space to it, delineating also the 
events centering in it. In short, here is the ground which 
all the evangelists traverse most carefully. They all give 
the triumphal entry, the passover supper, the betrayal in 
Gethsemane, the trial and condemnation, the death and 
crucifixion, and the burial. 

The fourth and last of these common features is found 
in the rising of Jesus from the dead on the third day, in 



278 JOHN. 

his subsequent intercourse with his disciples, in liis giving 
to the apostles their great commission to preach the gospel 
to all the world, and in his ascension to heaven. 

All these — the incarnation, the life, the death, the resur- 
rection — are essential facts and truths of the gospel, those 
which at the first made it good neivs to men. Without any 
one of them all it would cease to be good news; for, with- 
out the incarnation, the Son of God would have no part 
in our human nature; without the life on earth he could 
neither be our righteousness nor our example; without the 
death he could not be our sacrifice for sin; and without 
the resurrection and ascension his claims would have been 
false, and the world would have been left to perish without 
a Savior. 

§ 12. The Element Peculiar to Each. There is 
an element of fact and truth peculiar to each of the evan- 
gelists. It was by means of this, as has been seen, that 
the fundamental and essential gos]3el truth was brought by 
Matthew, Mark, Luke and John favorably before the minds 
of the Jew, Roman, Greek and Christian, and Jesus of 
Nazareth commended to them all as the Savior of the 
world. 

In all ages the Jewish, Roman and Greek natures re- 
appear among men, and in fact make up the world of 
natural men; while Christian nature and wants likewise 
remain essentially identical. From age to age the four 
gospels appeal to the classes who. in temperament, mental 
constitution, training and modes of thought, are like those 
for whom of old, in obedience to the inspiring breath of 
God. they were prepared. 

For the man with nature inclined to bow to authority, 
to appreciate divine religious forms, to exalt the peculiar 
position of Cod's people, and to trace the marvelous plan 
of Cod in the preparation for the Messiah and in the 
progress of his kingdom, the gospel which Matthew wrote 



Ch. XXXI; § 12. ELEMENT PECULIAR TO EACH. 279 

for the Jew must possess a permanent and absorbing- 
interest. 

For the man of power, reverencing law, given to action, 
fitted to be an actor or leader in pushing forward the 
conquest of the world for Christ, the gospel which Mark 
wrote for the Roman must retain its old significance and an 
ever potent inspiration as the battle call of the Almighty 
Conqueror. 

For the man of reason and taste, of philosophic and 
aesthetic culture, the man longing for the perfect man- 
hood, cherishing a world-wide sympathy for mankind, 
delighting to contemplate the universal reach of the grace 
of God the Father to sinners, the gospel which Luke wrote 
for the Greek must maintain an increasing reasonableness 
and an undying influence as the voicing of the infinite 
reason of the divine man. 

And fourth, the man of faith, saved by the incarnation 
and atonement of the Son of God, the man of the new and 
divine life of obedience and devotion to Christ, the man 
enlightened, guided and helped by the Holy Ghost, the 
gospel which John wrote for the Christian Church cannot 
fail to retain an immortal fascination, and to furnish a 
supreme satisfaction as the utterance of God's eternal 
Word to the believing soul. 

It is on this wise that the one gospel of God in fourfold 
form, which was exactly fitted to commend Jesus to the 
ancient world, is still so perfectly adapted to meet the 
wants of the modern world that it would require a revolu- 
tion in the mental structure and experience of men before 
any other number of gospels, or different ones from the 
four in the New Testament, could meet the necessities of 
ruined and redeemed humanity. God appears, therefore, 
in his Word no less than in his world, as a God of order. 
The same perfect and divine plan which science is finding 
in the latter, a rational and. reverential study finds in the 
former. 



;>80 



LESSON XVII. 



LESSOR XVII. 

hi. (daii. : " $£mybhiji, ' ' few, fudea . & 
2(1. oMallc : "ifewanij" moman, ohonw. 
3(1. Sake : u ^fmnanl4u, ' ' ^leetc, fleece. 
4>4h. John: u W'mini4u, 11 (ghmiian, ^/ihebu*. 






© { 



5 1 
63 

97 



SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Note. Review New Testament grand division from Index in 
introducing this lesson. 

How many distinct parts are there in the New Testa- 
ment? (Ch. XXVII: § 2.) What is the first? The second? 
Third? Into how many parts is the New Testament His- 
torical divided? (§ 3.) What are they? See Index. How- 
many years of history in the first? 

Into how many parts is the life of Christ divided? (§ 3.) 
Note. Draw the bracket and place the numbers. 

What is the name of the first? 

Note. Bring out something of the history of the evangelists as 
they are named. 

What is the name of the second? Third? Fourth? 
Why four gospels? (§ 4.) 

Note. State clearly — using the four fingers of the left hand — the 
four reasons why four gospels; then present Luke as the historian. 

By whom was the first gospel written? 
Note. Define the word gospel. 



Ch. XXXII: § 1. introduction to the acts. 281 

What is the golden topic? (Ch. XXVIII.) For whom 
written? Where was it written? When? 

Note. State the character and needs of the Jews, and Matthew's 
use of the gospel, with other matter, as time will admit? 

What is the name of the second evangelist? (Ch. XXIX.) 
Note. Define the w r ord evangelist. 

What is the golden topic? For whom written? etc. 

Note. Question as above on third (Ch. XXX) and fourth (Ch. 
XXXI) evangelists, and conclude with review, answering the ques- 
tion, Why four gospels? 



CHAPTER XXXII. 
ACTS-OHUBOH HISTOEY. 

§ 1. Introduction to the Acts of the Apostles, 

Written for the church by Luke, from Rome, A. I). 64. 
(See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, " OBG AXIZATIXXN". " 

"Luke, as before mentioned, was the writer of the book 
of Acts. He was the constant and faithful attendant of 
Paul through the various scenes and experiences of his 
missionary labors; and though in his writings he modestly 
never refers to himself, yet Paul in his epistles speaks of 
him in high commendation. Col. iv: 14; 2 Tim. iv: 11. 
(Lesson, Prov. xxvii: 2.) 

The gospels close with a prophetic allusion to several 
facts recorded in the Acts, and with a promise of the Holy 
Spirit, of which this book gives the fulfillment. Luke, 
xxiv: 47-49; Mark, xvi: 17-18; John, xiv: 12-17.'— Xicholls. 



282 ACTS: CHURCH HISTORY. 

"I. This history looks back to the preceding gospels; 
the promises there are here made good, particularly the 
great promise of the descent of the Holy Ghost, and his 
wonderful operations, both on and with the disciples. 

II. It looks forward to the following epistles, introduces 
them and is a key to them, as the history of David is a key 
to the Psalms. 

The four gospels showed us how the foundation of God's 
house was laid; this shows us how the superstructure began 
to be^reared. First, among the Jews and Samaritans, an 
account of which is given in the first part of the Acts. 
Second, among the Gentiles, narrated in the latter part. 
Passing on, we find the Christian church subsisting in a 
visible profession of faith in Christ, as the Savior of the 
world, made by his baptized disciples, and incorporated 
into religious societies." — Henry. 

" Luke undoubtedly intended this book as an appendix to 
his gospel, if not, indeed, the whole may be considered as 
one publication in two parts." — Home. It will be observed 
by the careful reader that Luke's gospel and the Acts art- 
one continued history; for where the former leaves off the 
latter begins, after the introduction contained in the first 
thirteen verses. 

"The Acts comprise a history of about thirty years, 
from the Savior's ascension to Paul's arrival at Rome after 
his appeal to Caesar. This book, being continued to the 
second year of Paul's imprisonment, could not have been 
written before A. I). 63; and as his death in $5 is not 
mentioned, was probably composed before (probably A. D. 
Uy'-r-Home. 

"The epistles plainly suppose that those facts had actu- 
ally occurred which this history relates. Hence appears 
the importance of the Acts, as a kind of postscript to the 
gospels, and as an introduction to the epistles, to the study 
<.f which it forms a most useful guide." — Nicholls. 



Oh. XXXII: § 2. TWO GENERAL PARTS. 283 

* § 2. Two General Parts. The book of the Acts 
may, for convenience of study, be divided into two general 
divisions, viz: 

I. Chap, i-xii. In which Peter is the centre of the first 
great group of sayings and doings. The holder of tire 
keys of the kingdom of heaven becomes the prime actor 
under God in the founding of the church; ^unlocking the 
door first to the Jews (ch. ii), and afterwards to the 
Gentiles (ch. x). See Matt, xvi: 18, 19. 

II. Chap, xiii-xxviii. Saul (Paul) is introduced to the 
reader's notice in the eighth chapter, but is not brought 
forward as the main actor until the thirteenth chapter. 

"None of the twelve apostles,'' says Dr. Smith, "were,, 
humanly speaking, fitted to preach the gospel to the culti- 
vated Gentile world. To be by divine grace the spiritual 
conqueror of Asia and Europe, God raised up another 
instrument, from among the highly educated and zealous 
Pharisees. The preparation of Saul of Tarsus for the 
work to be done, the progress of that work in his hands, 
his journeys, preaching and perils, and his being brought 
to Eome, are the subjects of the last half of the book, of 
which the great central figure is the Apostle Paul.'* 

(a.) Analysis of the Four Particular Parts. The book 
may be further divided into four parts, as follows: 

Analysis Part I. "Chap. i-ii. Point to the great foun- 
dation of Christianity, the resurrection and ascension of 
Christ, and the descent of the Holy Spirit; facts to which 
alone its progress in the world can be attributed, and on 
which alone the hope of its final triumph can rest. 

Analysis Part II. Chap, iii-ix. Contain an account of 
the spreading of Christianity among the Jews, from A. D. 
33-40. 

Analysis Part III. Chap, x-xii. Contain an account 
of the spreading of Christianity among the devout Gen- 



284 ACTS: CHURCH HISTORY. 

tiles; that is, among those Gentiles who, like Cornelius, 
had before worshiped the one true God; together with its 
further progress among the Jews, A. D. 40-45. 

Analysis Part LV. Chap, xiii-xxviii. Contain an ac- 
count of the spreading of Christianity among the idola- 
trous Gentiles, together with its further progress among 
the Jews and Gentile proselytes, A. D. 45-62." — Nichotts. 

Note. Parts I, II and III should be read in this connection. The 
student should, in pursuing this very interesting history of the organ- 
ization of the church, have constantly before him some good Bible 
Atlas, noting the places as reference is made to them, as a knowledge 
of Paul's letters depends very much upon it. 

§ 3. The Apostle Paul. The prominent place Paul 
holds, as the writer of fourteen of the twenty-one epistles, 
renders some notice of him necessary as an introduction to 
his epistles and his work. 

"His history, as collected from different parts of the 
New Testament, and as given by himself, is as follows: He 
was a Jew of Tarsus, a city of Cilicia; a freeborn Roman 
citizen; a Pharisee and the son of a Pharisee; circumcised 
the eighth day; of the tribe of Benjamin; a Hebrew of the 
Hebrews; brought up at the feet of Gamaliel; taught ac- 
cording to the perfect manner of the law of the fathers; 
being conversant, also, not only with Jewish but Greek 
literature; and thus distinguished from the rest of the 
apostles as a man of education and learning." — Nichotts. 

Paul is first introduced to the reader as consenting to 
the death of Stephen (viii: 1), the first martyr of the Chris- 
tian faith, A. D. 31.* Again we read of him "breathing 
out threatenings and slaughter against the disciples of the 
Lord," on his way to Damascus, with Letters from the high 
priests giying him authority to visit the synagogues, that 
if he found any of this way, whether they were men or 



* The chronology relating to Paul and his epistles is from Cony 
beare and Howson. 



Ch. XXXII: § 4. OUTLINE PAKT IV. 285 

women, he might bring them bound to Jerusalem; also of 
his miraculous conversion, and his preaching (ch. ix), A. D. 
36. We afterwards learn of his being in his native city, 
Tarsus, A. D. 38, where he was sought by Barnabas. " Then 
departed Barnabas to Tarsus to seek Saul (Paul): And 
when he had found him, he brought him unto Antioch 
(A. D. 44). And it came to pass that a whole year they 
assembled themselves with the church, and taught much 
people. And the disciples were called Christians first at 
Antioch." Ch. xi: 25, 26. 

§ 4. Outline of Acts, Part IT. {See Analysis Part 

IV, $2.) 

Chap, xiii: 1. Paul and Barnabas are chosen to go to the 
Gentiles (at Antioch, A. D. 46-7). 7. Sergius Paulus and 
Elymas, the sorcerer. 14. Paul preaches at Antioch, in 
Pisidia, that Jesus is Christ. 42. The Gentiles believe, 
and the Jews gainsay and blaspheme. 46. Paul and Bar- 
nabas turn to the Gentiles. 48. As many as were ordained 
to life believe. 

Chap, xiv: 1. Paul and his companion are persecuted 
from Iconium. 8. At Lystra Paul heals a cripple, where- 
upon they are reported as gods; Paul is stoned. 21. They 
pass through different churches, confirming the disciples 
in faith and patience. 26. Keturning to Antioch, they 
report what God has done for them, A. D. 49. 

Chap, xv : 1. Divisions arise touching circumcision. 6. 
The apostles in council at Jerusalem consult about it (A. D. 
50); and they send their determination by letters to the 
churches. 36. Paul and Barnabas, thinking of visiting 
the brethren together, fall into strife, and separate. 

Chap, xvi: 1. Paul circumcises Timothy. 7. Is called 
by the Spirit into Macedonia. 14. Lydia is converted. 
16. He casts out a spirit of divination. 19. Paul and 
Silas are whipped and imprisoned at Philippi. 31. The 
jailor is converted, and they are dismissed, A. D. 52. 



286 acts: church history, 

Chap, xyii: 1. Paul preaches at Thessalonica, where some 
believe and others persecute him. 10. Paul and Silas are 
sent by night to Berea, where many are converted. 13. 
Jews from Thessalonica persecute them ; Paul goes to 
Athens, and preaches the living God to them "unknown," 
whereby many are converted to Christ. 

Chap, xviii: 1. Paul comes to Corinth; labors with his 
hands and preaches to the Gentiles. 9. The Lord encour- 
ages him in a vision. 11. "And he continued there a year 
and six months, teaching among them the word of God." 

Outline of Acts continued, see § 7. 

Note. During this time Paul writes his first and second letters to 
the church at Thessalonica, from whence he had recently come, and 
where he organized a church. Considerable additional interest will 
be felt in the epistles of Paul, and light will be thrown upon their 
contents, by reading them in the chronological order in which they 
were written, with a knowledge of the place, time, occasion and cir- 
cumstances in which they were written. This is the object of the 
following introductions to Paul's letters. 

§ 5. Introduction to Paul's First Letter to the 
Church at Thessalonica. Written from Corinth, A. 1). 

52. (See Judex; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV ; § ?.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC "ENCOURAGEMENT UNDER TRIALS." 

(a.) Paul in Thessalonica. "Thessalonica was a very 
large and flourishing city, where trade was free, and the 
capital of Macedonia. The place is now called Salonica. 
Here Paul came after he had been at Philippi, and stayed 
there about three weeks, and preached every Sabbath. 
Many Jews, Greeks and chief women of the place received 
the glad tidings of salvation which he declared, and the 
foundation of a gospel church was laid. 

The wicked Jcavs, who despised the apostle's message, 
raised a mob and assaulted the house of .Jason, where Paul 
and Silas were, and they were sent a\va\ for safety by night 
out of the city. Timothy wae soon after sent by the apos- 



Ch. XXXII: § 5. church at thessalonica. £87 

tie to comfort and instruct the converts of this city. He 
was pleased with what he saw, and took back to the apostle 
a report of the faith and charity which appeared among 
the Thessalonians. " — Collin. 

(1.) Reasons for Writing. "We now arrive at the point 
in the life of Paul when his first letter was written. This 
fact is ascertained by a comparison of the Acts and epistles 
with one another. Such comparison enables us to perceive 
that the apostle's mind on his arrival at Corinth, where he 
penned this letter, Avas still turning with affection and 
anxiety toward his converts at Thessalonica. While he 
'labored, working with his own hands/ among the Cor- 
inthians, as he afterwards reminded them, in his heart he 
was praying continually, with thanksgiving, as he says to 
them himself in the letter (ch. i: 2) which he dictates in 
the interval of his labors. 

While thus employed — in the daily labor in the workshop 
and the weekly discussions in the synagogues — Timothy 
and Silas return from Macedonia. Timothy (as we have 
seen) had been sent, while Paul was still in Athens, to visit 
and establish the church of Thessalonica. The news he 
brought on his return to Paul caused him to write this 
first letter to these beloved converts. It seemed to have 
been occasioned partly by his wish to express his earnest 
affection for them, and to encourage them under trials and 
persecutions, but it was also called for ly some errors into 
which they had fallen. Many of the new converts Were 
uneasy about the state of their relatives or friends who 
had died since their conversion. They feared that these 
departed Christians would lose the happiness of witnessing 
their Lord's second coming, which they expected soon to 
behold. In this expectation others had given themselves 
up to a religious excitement, and neglected to work at the 
business of their calling, but might claim support from 
the richer members of the church. Others, again, had 



288 ACT§: CHURCH HISTORY. 

yielded to the same temptations which afterwards influ- 
enced the Corinthian church, and despised the gift of 
prophesying in comparison with those other gifts which 
afforded more opportunity of display. These reasons, and 
others that will appear in the letter itself, led Paul to write 
to the Thessalonians." — Conybeare and Hoioson. 

(c.) Outline of PauVs First Letter. 

"Chap, i: 1. The introduction. .2-10. A thanksgiving 
for the grace received by the Thessalonians. 

Chap, ii: 1-12. A declaration of the sincerity and love 
of the apostle and his fellow laborers. 13-16. The effect 
produced at Thessalonica by their preaching. 

Chap, ii: 17-23; iii: 1-13. Their desire, care and joy on 
account of the converts. 

Chap, iv : 1-8. An exhortation to grow in holiness. 
9-12. Exhortation to brotherly love and industry. 13-18. 
Declaration concerning those that sleep, and those who 
shall be alive, at the coming of Christ. 

Chap, v: 1-1.1. Concerning the times and seasons. 12- 
26. Sundry exhortations. 27,28. A charge to. read this 
letter to all the brethren, and the usual benediction. " — 
Carpenter, 

Let a careful reading of this first letter follow here. 

§ 6. Introduction to Paul's Second Letter to the 
Church at Thessalonica. Written from Corinth. A. I). 
53. [See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: §7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "ANTI-CHRIST FORETOLD/' 

Paul's second letter to the Thessalonians, like the first, 
was written during his stay at Corinth, which was about 
one year and a half. 

(a.) Why Paul Wrote Again. "He found it necessary 
to write again to them. The exeitement which he had 
endeavored to allay by his Vw^i epistle had increased, and 



OK. XXXII: §7. outlike of acts, part iv. 289 

the fanatical portion of the church had availed themselves 
of the impression produced by Paul's personal teachings to 
increase it. 

It will be remembered that a subject on which he had 
especially dwelt while in Thessalonica, and to which he 
had also alluded in his first epistle, was the second advent 
of our Lord. Some of his disciples, on the other hand, 
inferred that if indeed the present world was so soon to 
come, to an end, it was useless to pursue their common 
earthly employments any longer. They forsook their work 
and gave themselves up to dreamy expectations of the 
future, so that the whole framework of society in the 
Thessalonian church was in danger of dissolution. Those 
who encouraged this delusion supported it by imaginary 
revelations of the Spirit; and they had recourse to forgery, 
and circulated a letter purporting to be written by Paul in 
confirmation of their views. To check this evil Paul wrote 
his second espistle, reminding them of certain signs which 
must precede the second advent." — Conybeare and Howson. 

This second letter is now to be carefully read, bearing in 
mind the above introduction, which will greatly aid the 
student to- understand it. It is clear that the leading 
topic is "Anti-Christ Foretold" (ch. iv: 4-18). The fol- 
lowing is an outline by Carpenter. 

(b.) Outline of Paul's Second Letter. 

Chap, i: 1-2, contains the inscription. 3-12. Thanks- 
giving and prayer for the Thessalonian s. 

Chapi ii: 1-12. The doctrine concerning the man of sin. 
13-14. The Thessalonians comforted against this trial. 

Chap, ii: 15-iii: 5. Exhortation and prayer. 6-16. Di- 
rections to correct the disorder.. 17-18. Conclusion. 

We will now proceed with the record contained in Acts. 

§ 7. Outline of Acts, Part IT. {Continued from 

§ 4.) Paul leaves Corinth in the spring of A. D. 54. 



290 acts: church histoey. 

Chap, xviii : 18. Passing from city to city, Paul strength- 
ens the disciples. 24. Apollos is instructed by Aquila and 
Priscilla, and preaches Christ with good effect. 

Chap, xix: 1. Paul comes to Ephesus (A. D. 55); the 
Holy Spirit is given by Paul's hands. 8. He occupies the 
synagogue three months only, but continues in the city for 
the space of two years. (See ver. 10.) 

Note. During this stay at Ephesus Paul wrote his first letter to 
the church at Corinth. 

Outline of Acts continued, see § 9. 

§ 8. Introduction to Paul's First Letter to the 
Church at Corinth. Written from Ephesus, A. D. 57. 

{See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEX TOPIC, " RESURRECTION. v 

(a.) City of Corinth. Corinth was a large and flourish- 
ing city, situated on an isthmus of the same name, and 
was the capital of Achaia, one of the lower provinces of 
Greece. Its situation was favorable to commerce, being 
between two ports, the one open to the eastern and the 
other to the western navigation. Its situation placed it. 
as it were, in the centre of civilization. It is also celebrated 
'for its games, to which Paul frequently alludes in his let- 
ters. To this city Paul came from Athens, in the autumn 
of 52 A. D., and founded a Christian church. One evil 
prevailed extensively, and threatened to corrupt the whole 
church. 

(b.) Reasons for Pa id's Writing. "'So notorious was 
this that it had already passed into the vocabulary of the 
Greek tongue, and the verb 'to Corihthianize ' meant f to 
play the wanton;' nay, the bad reputation of the city had 
become proverbial even in foreign languages. On account 
of this growing evil Paul now determined to visit Corinth. 
He has described this visit as a painful one; how he had 
'mourned 5 over those who had dishonored the name of 



Cb. XXXII: § 8. to the church at corinth. 291 

Christ by the ' : micleanness and fornication and wantonness 
which they had committed. ' He reminded them how at 
their baptism they lmcl died to sin and risen again to 
righteousness; but lie did not at once exclude them from 
the church which they had defiled. Yet he was compelled 
to threaten them, saying: 'If I come again I will not 
spare." But his censures and warnings had produced too 
little effect upon his converts; his mildness had been mis- 
taken for weakness. Then it was that he felt himself 
compelled to resort to harsher measures ; he wrote an 
epistle (which has not been preserved to us) in which, as 
we learn from himself, he ordered the Christians of Cor- 
inth, by virtue of his apostolic authority, 'to cease from 
all intercourse with fornicators.' 

To correct these abuses, and to answer some questions 
which the Corinthians had in a letter proposed to Paul 
(1 Cor. i: 11, 1*2; v: 1), was the object of this epistle. 

Some of them had so lost the very foundation of Chris- 
Han faith as to deny the resurrection of the dead. A crime 
recently committed by one of these pretended Christians 
was now reported to Paul. A member of the Corinthian 
church was openly living in incestuous intercourse with 
his stepmother, yet for this audacious act was n-ot excluded 
from the church. 

Xor were these the only evils. There was a lack of 
decent order of Christian worship: women had forgotten 
the modesty of their sex, and came forward unveiled (con- 
trary to the habits of the country) to address the public 
assembly; even the sanctity of the communion was profaned 
by scenes of reveling and debauch. About the same time 
that this distressful intelligence was brought to Paul by 
the household of Chloe, other messengers arrived from 
Corinth bearing the answer of the church to his previous 
letter (the one above mentioned), of which they requested 
an explanation, at the same time referring to his decision 



292 acts: church history. 

several questions which caused dispute and difficulty. 
These questions related, first, to the controversies respect- 
ing meat which had been offered to idols; second, to the 
dispute regarding celibacy and matrimony, the right of 
divorce, and the perplexities which arose in the case of 
mixed marriages, where one of the parties was an unbe- 
liever; third, to the exercise of spiritual gifts in public 
assemblies of the church. Paul hastened to reply to these 
questions, and at the same time to denounce their sins. 

The letter which he was thus led to write is addressed 
not only to this metropolitan church, but also to the 
Christian communities established in other places in the 
same province. This letter is in its contents the most 
diversified of all Paul's epistles." — Conybeare and How ton. 

(c.) Outline of Paul's First Letttr. The following par- 
ticulars comprise the whole subject matter: 

"Chap, i: 1-9. The introduction. 

Chap, i: 10-iv: 40. Exhortations relative to dissensions. 

Chap. v. Concerning the incestuous person. 

Chap. vi. Unlawfulness of going to law before unbe- 
lievers. 

Chap. vii. Marriage and virginity. 

Chap. viii. Unlawfulness of eating meat offered to idols. 

(Jimp. ix. Paul claims the rights of a Christian minister 
and an apostle. 

Chap. x. The Jewish institutions are types of ours. 

Ghap. xi-xiv. Regulations about public worship, the 
Lord's supper, spiritual gifts and charities. 

Chap. xv. Concerning the resurrection. 

Chap. xvi. Exhortations, salutations, common duties. 
etc." — Carpenter. 

Note. Trusting the above introduction and outline will greatly 
aid in understanding it, let the student now take the Bible and read 
Paul's first letter to the Corinthian church. Then return to Acts, 
xix. 10, where we arc told Paul "continued by the space of two 
years" at Ephesus. 



Oh. XXXII: § 10. TO THE CHURCH AT CORINTH. 293 

§ 9. Outline of Acts, Part IT. {Continued from 
§7.) 

Chap, xix: 11. "God wrought special miracles by the 
hand of Paul." 13. The Jewish exorcists confounded, 
and their books burnt (worth. 8,000 dollars). 24. Deme- 
trius's love of gain; raises an uproar against Paul, which 
is appeased by town clerk. 

Chap, xx : 1. Paul goes into Macedonia (to Philippi, in 
the summer of A. D. 57; and in the autumn of the same 
year writes his second letter to the church of Corinth). 

Outline of Acts continued, see § 13. 

§ 10. Introduction to Paul's Second Letter to 
the Church at Corinth. Written from Ephesus, A. D. 
57. {See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV : § 7.) 

GOLDEX TOPIC, "GLORY OE THE GOSPEL." 

Paul had great anxiety about this* church, knowing the 
trials, temptations and dangers with which it had to con- 
tend. His three years abode with them acquainted him 
with the power of their enemies. Haying written them a 
letter while at Ephesus. giving the church instruction 
concerning one of the most difficult cases, and answering 
certain questions which were most vital to them, it is not 
to be wondered at that he should be anxious to learn the 
result or effect of his letter. 

(a.) Object of Paul's Second Letter. il The whole tone 
of his second letter to Corinth shows the depression under 
which he was laboring; and he expressly tells the Cor- 
inthians that this state of feeling lasted not only at Troas, 
but also aft'er he reached Macedonia. He says: 'When 
first I came into Macedonia (or Philippi) my flesh had no 
rest; without were fightings, within were fears.' And this 
had continued until 'God, who comforts them who are 
cast down, comforted me by the coming of Titus.' At 
length the long expected Titus arrived, and relieved the 



294 acts: church history. 

anxiety of his master by better tidings than he expected, 
the majority having submitted to his injunctions. They 
had passed excommunication upon the incestuous person, 
and they had already contributed toward the collection for 
the poor Christians of Palestine. 

But there' was still a minority whose opposition seemed 
to have been rather embittered than humbled by the sub- 
mission which the great body of the church had thus 
yielded. They charged Paul with craft in his design, and 
with selfish and mercenary motives, especially in the col- 
lection which he was raising. The same opponents -accuse 
him of vanity and cowardly weakness; they declared that 
he was continually threatening without striking, and prom- 
ising without performing; always on his way to Qorinth, 
but never venturing to come; and that he was as vacillating 
in his teaching as in his practice, refusing to circumcise 
Titus, yet circumcising Timothy; a Jew among Jews, and 
a Gentile among the Gentiles. 

It appears that the party who opposed Paul were headed 
by an emissary from Palestine (ch. iii: 1), who brought 
letters of commendation from some members of the church 
at Jerusalem, and who boasted of his pure Hebrew descent 
and his special connection with Christ himself. Paul calls 
him a false apostle, a minister of Satan disguised ;is a min- 
ister of righteousness, and hints that he was actuated by 
corrupt motives. His confident hearing was contrasted 
with the timidity and self distrust which had been shown 
by Paul. They even extolled his personal advantages over 
their first teacher's, comparing his rhetoric with Paul's 
inartful speech, his commanding appearance with the in- 
significance of Paul's 'bodily presence." 

Titus, having delivered to Paul this mixed intelligence 
of the state of Corinth, was immediately directed to return 
thither (in company with two disciples), in order to con- 
tinue the business of the collection. Paul made him the 
bearer of another letter, which is addressed not to Corinth 



Cll. XXXII: § 11. TO THE CHUKCH AT GALATIA. 295 

only, but to all the churches in the whole province of 
Achaia." — Conybeare and Hoicson. 

The great object of the apostle seems to have been to 
overcome the difficulties reported to him in the Corinthian 
church, by presenting in a most charming manner the 
"Glory of the Gospel." Chap. iii. 

The following analysis brings out the prominent features 
of this letter. 

(b.) Outline of Paul's Second Letter. 

"Chap, i: 1-7. The preface. 8-14. An account of the 
persecution which the apostle had suffered in Asia, from 
which he had oeen miraculously rescued. 15-24. His pur- 
pose to visit Corinth. 

Chap, ii-vii. Concerning the sorrow the Corinthians had 
suffered on account of the expelling of the incestuous per- 
son. His own vindication against the false apostle, in 
which he gives an account of his doctrine, iii: 6-18; his 
conduct, iv: 1-6; and his bodily infirmities, iv: 7, v; exhor- 
tations to a holy life, vi, vii. 

Chap, viii-ix. The alms that had been collected and 
were yet to be collected. 

Chap, x-xii. Paul's defence against the false apostle and 
his calumniators in general. 

Chap. xiii. Miscellaneous matters.'' — Carpenter. 

A careful study of the above analysis and introduction 
will greatly aid the reader in comprehending this second 
letter to the church at Corinth. 

§ 11. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the 
Church at Galatia. Written from Corinth, A. D. 57-8. 

(See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEX TOPIC, "LAW VEKSUS GOSPEL." 

Paul now leaves Ephesus, where he has spent the autumn 
of A. D. 57 and written 2 Corinthians, and returns to Cor- 
inth to spend the winter, where he wrote the epistle to the 
Galatians. 



296 acts: church history. 

(a.) Reasons for Writing. "But a painful surprise 
awaited him on his arrival. He found that intelligence 
had reached Corinth concerning the state of the Galatian 
churches which excited both his astonishment and his 
indignation. His converts there, whom he regarded with 
peculiar affection, whose love and zeal for him had for- 
merly been - so conspicuous, were rapidly forsaking his 
teachings and falling an easy prey to the arts of Judaizing 
missionaries from Palestine. We know how great was the 
difficulty which Paul had to meet, with this restless party 
at Corinth (2 Cor. iii); and now he heard that they had 
been working the same mischief in Galatia, where he had 
least expected it. Paul, in addressing the Galatians, al- 
though he assumes that there were some who were familiar 
with the Mosaic law, yet evidently implies that the majority 
were converts from heathenism. At any cost of falsehood 
and detraction these false teachers resolved to loosen the 
hold of Paul upon the affections and respect of these con- 
verts. Thus to the Galatians they accused him of a want 
of uprightness in observing the law himself while among 
the Jews, yet persuading the Gentiles to renounce it; they 
declared that he was an interested flatterer, ' becoming all 
things to all men,' that he might make a party for himself; 
and, above all, the}- insisted that he falsely represented 
himself as an apostle of Christ, for that he had not, like 
the twelve, been a follower of Jesus when he was on the 
earth, and had not received his commission; that, on the 
contrary, he was only a teacher sent out by the authority 
of the twelve, whereas his doctrine (they alleged) was now 
in opposition to that of Peter and James and other 'pillars' 
of the church. 

In this letter his principal object is to show that the 
doctrines of these false teachers did in fact destroy the 
very essence of Christianity, and reduced it from an in- 
ward and spiritual life to an outward and ceremonial 
system; but, in order to remove the seeds of distrust 



Oh. XXXII: § 11. TO THE CHURCH AT GALATIA. 297 

which had been planted in the minds of his converts, he 
begins by fully contradicting the falsehoods which had 
been propagated against himself by his opponents, and 
especially by vindicating his title to the apostolic office as 
received directly from Christ, and exercised independently 
of the other apostles. Snch were the circumstances and 
such the objects which led him to write this epistle." — 
Cony bear e and Howson. 

(b.) Three General Parts. "The epistle divides into 
three parts. 

Analysis Part I. A vindication of Paul and his doc- 
trine. 

Ghap. i. Showing that he derived his authority from 
Christ himself, and was in no way inferior to the other 
apostles. 

Chap. 11 1-10. That he preached the same gospel as the 
other apostles, and (ver. 11-21) that his practice was con- 
sistent with his doctrine. 

Analysis Part II. A series of proofs, drawn from the 
Old Testament, that the law had been abolished by Christ. 

Chap, iii: 1-5. Justification is only to be obtained by 
faith. 6-18. The nature of the covenant made with Abra- 
ham proves this. 

Chap, iii: 19 to iv: 8. The design of the Mosaic law was 
not to disannul the promise, but. to prepare men for its 
reception. 

Chap, iv: 9 to v: 12. The. Galatians reproved for their 
defection from the gospel. 

Analysis Part III. Practical inferences from the fore- 
going discussions. 

Chap, v 13-15. Cautions against abusing the doctrines 
of grace. 

Chap. v. 16-24. The works of the flesh and fruits of the 
Spirit contrasted. 



298 ACTS: CHURCH HISTOEY. 

Chap, v: 25 to vl: 10. Directions to the Galatians for the 
regulation of conduct towards each other. 

Chap, vi: 11-18. The conclusion of the epistle, with 
Paul's usual benediction." — Carpenter. 

The leading topic in this letter seems to centre in the 
comparing of the Messiah of the Old Testament with the 
Christ of the New Testament,; or "Law versus Gospel." 
See ch. iii: 16-29. 

Note. Spring now opens, and we find Paul still in Corinth (A. D. 
58), Having a strong desire to visit Rome (Acts, xix: 21), he decides 
to write to the church, of which letter the following is an introduc- 
tion and outline. 

§ 12. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the 

Church at Rome. Written from Corinth, A. D. 58. 
(See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "JUSTIFICATION BY FAITH." 

(a.) Where Written. We find that it was written by 
Paul's amanuensis, Tertius (xvi: 22), and wag forwarded to 
the church at Rome by Phebe, a deaconess of Cenchrea, a 
port of Corinth (xvi: 1). It is further evident that it was 
written from that city, from the mention of Gaius, with 
whom he lodged at Corinth (ch. xvi: 23; also 1 Cor. i: 14). 
as well as Erastus, the chamberlain of that city (2 Tim. iy: 
20). It also appears that it was written there at the time 
that the apostle was preparing to take the contributions of 
the churches to Jerusalem (oh. xv : 25-27) j and conse- 
quently the probable date assigned to this epistle is A. 1). 
58, which is supported by Tomline, Lardner, Barrington, 
Benson and others. 

(/;.) Object in Writing. " Bis reason forwriting to thorn 
at this time was his intention of speedily visiting them on 
his way from Jerusalem to Spain. He desired, before his 
personal intercourse with them should begin, to give them 



Ch. XXXII: § 12. TO THE CHURCH AT ROME. 299 

a proof of the affectionate interest which he felt for them, 
although they 'had not seen his face in the flesh.' 

We are not to suppose, however, that they were hitherto 
altogether unknown to him; for we see, from the very 
numerous salutations at the close of the epistle, that he 
was already well acquainted with many individual Chris- 
tians at Rome (xvi: 3). From the personal acquaintance 
he had thus formed, and the intelligence he had received, 
he had reason to entertain a very high opinion of the 
character of the church; and accordingly he tells them 
(xvi 14, 15) that, in entering so fully in his letter upon 
the doctrines and rules of Christianity, he had done it not 
so much to teach them as to remind them, and that he 
was justified in assuming the authority so to exhort them 
by special commission which Christ had given him to the 
Gentiles. 

The name of the original founder of the Eoman church 
has not been preserved to us by history, nor even celebrated 
by tradition. It is therefore probable that it was formed 
in the first instance of private Christians converted in 
Palestine, who had brought back Christianity with them 
from some of their periodical visits to Jerusalem, as the 
•strangers from Rome' from the great Pentecost in A. D. 
29. (Acts, ii: 10.) 

We find, however, there were opponents to the gospel at 
Rome, who argued against it on the ground of the immoral 
consequences which followed (as they thought) the doctrine 
of justification by faith, and even charged Paul himself 
with maintaining that the greater man's sin the greater 
^vas God's glory (iii: 8). Moreover, not all the Jewish 
members of the church could bring themselves to acknowl- 
edge their imcircumcised Gentile brethren as their equals 
in the "privileges of Christ's kingdom (iii: 9, 29; xv: 7-11). 
And on the other hand, the more enlightened Gentile 
converts were inclined to treat the lingering Jewish preju- 



300 ACTS: CHUKCH HISTORY. 

dices with scornful contempt (xiv: 3). It was the aim of 
Paul to win the former of these parties to Christian truth, 
and the latter to Christian love." — Cony bear e and Hoivson. 
Two things the Jews then stumbled at: (I) justifica- 
tion by faith without the works of the law, and (II) the 
admission of the Gentiles into the church; therefore both 
these Paul, in his letter to the church of Eome, studied to 
clear and vindicate. 

(c.) Three General Parts. It may be divided into three 
parts: I, Doctrinal; II, Practical; III, Apologies for writ- 
ing. 

Analysis Part I. "The doctrinal part of the epistle 
instructs us concerning the way of salvation. 

(1.) The foundation of it is laid in justification, and not 
by the Gentile's works of nature (ch. i), nor by Jew's works 
by the'law (ch. ii to iii: 20) — both Jews and Gentiles were 
liable to the curse — but only by faith in Jesus Christ (ch. 
iii: 21 to iv: 25). 

(2.) The steps of this salvation are: {a) peace with God 
(ch. v); (b) sanctification (ch. vi, vii); (c) glorification (ch. 
viii); (d) concerning the persons saved, such as belong to 
election of grace (ch. ix), Gentiles and Jews (ch. x, xi). 

Analysis Part II. The practical part follows, wherein 
we find: 

(1.) Several general exhortations proper for all Chris- 
tians (ch. xii). 

(2.) Directions for our behavior as members of civil 
society (ch. xiii). 

(3.) Kules for the conduct of members of the Christian 
church toward each other (ch. xiv to xv: 14). 

Analysis Part III. As he draws toward the conclusion, 
he apologises for writing. 

Chap, xv: 14-1G, gives an account of himself and his 
affairs; 17-21 promises a visit; 32-29 begs their prayers; 
30-33 sends particular salutation to many friends. 



Oh. XXXII: § 13. outline of acts, part iv. 301 

Chap, xvi: 1-1 6, warns them against those who cause 
divisions ; 17-20 adds salutations of friends with him ; 
21-23 a benediction; 24-27 a doxology to God." — Henry. 

(d. ) Conclusion. A knowledge of the Old Testament is 
requisite to an understanding of this letter of Paul, as he 
makes reference to it oyer seventy times, fifty of which are 
verbal quotations bearing directly in answer to the great 
question voiced by Job, and which pervades the entire Old 
Testament, viz: "How shall a man be just with God?" 

Paul having finished the above letter, it is placed' in the 
hands of Phebe, who sets sail for Eome, while he proposes 
to visit Jerusalem, that he might convey the alms which 
he had collected at Corinth to the poorer Christians. 
Accordingly he now takes leave and returns to Macedonia 
(Philippi). 

We will now return to our study of the Acts. 

§ 13. Outline of Acts, Part IT. (Continued from 
§9.) 

Chap, xx : 3. Paul "returns through Macedonia," and 
arrives at Troas, where he preaches. 7. He celebrates the 
Lord's Supper, and departs in the morning. 17. Arrives 
at Miletus, where he assembles the elders of Ephesus and 
delivers his pastoral address to them; after prayer he de- 
parts on his journey toward Jerusalem. 

Chap, xxi: 1. Paul will not by any means be dissuaded 
from going to Jerusalem. 17. He arrives at Jerusalem (at 
Pentecost, summer of A. D. 58), is apprehended and in 
great danger, but rescued by the chief captain and per- 
mitted to speak to the people. 

Chap, xxii: 1. Paul declares how he was converted to 
the faith. 22. At the mention of the Gentiles the people 
exclaim against him. 24. He escapes scourging by claim- 
ing the privileges of a Roman. 

Chap, xxiii: 1. While Paul pleads hie cause, Ananias 
commands them to smite him. 11. God encourages him. 



'302 ACTS: CHUIfCH HISTORY. 

14. The Jews lay in wait for Paul. 20. He is delivered 
unto the chief captain. 27. Claudius Lysias sends him to 
Felix, the governor, residing at Caesarea. 

Chap, xxiv: 1. Paul is accused by Tertullus, the orator. 
10. He answers for himself. 24. He preaches Christ to 
the governor and his wife. 27. After two years (A. D. 
59-00) Porcius Festus succeeds Felix, wlio leaves Paul 
bound. 

Chap, xxv : 1. The Jews accuse Paul before Festus. 8. 
He answers for himself, and appeals to Caesar. 14. Festus 
opens the matter to Agrippa, and Paul is brought out. 
25. Festus clears him of having done anything worthy of 
death. 

Chap, xxvi: 1. Paul, in the presence of Agrippa, declares 
his life from childhood, his conversion, and call to the 
apostleship. 28. Agrippa almost persuaded to be a Chris- 
tian; Paul pronounced innocent. 

Chap, xxvii: 1. Paul shipped for Eome (by Festus, A. D. 
60). 10. He foretells the danger of the voyage, but is not 
believed. 14. They are shipwrecked. 44. All are saved. 

Chap, xxviii: 1. Wrecked on the barbarous island of 
Melita (Malta, winter, A. D. 60). 5. Viper on Paul's 
hand does no harm. 8. Kemains on the island three 
months, and heals many diseases. 11. They depart by 
ship for Rome, touching at Syracuse ami landing at Pute- 
oli; from thence by way of Appi Forum to Rome (spring, 
A. D. 61). 17. Paul tells the Jews in Rome why he came, 
and preaches there. 30. Be remains in Rome, "•preaching 
the kingdom of God," Tor two years. 

§ 14. When and Where Paul Wrote the Follow- 
ing Letters. "In the spring of A. D. 02 he writes a 
letter to Philemon, to the Colossians, and also to the 
Eph$sians. In (he autumn of the same year he writes to 
t he Philippian*. 



Ch. XXXIII: § 1. TO PHILEMON OF COLOSSE. 303 

A. D. 63 (spring). He is acquitted and goes to Mace- 
donia (Phil, ii: 24), and Asia Minor. 

A. D. 64 (?) He goes to Spain. (For this and subsequent 
statement, see chap, xxvii.) 

A. D. 65(?) In Spam. 

A. D. 66 (summer). From Spain (?) to Asia Minor (1 
Tim. i: 3). 

A. D. 67 (summer). Writes 1 Timothy from Macedonia; 
(autumn) writes TiVwsfromEphesus; (winter) at Nicopolis. 

A, D. 68 (spring). In prison at Rome; writes 2 Timothy; 
(summer) executed (Mayor June)." — Conybeare and How- 
son. 



CHAPTER XXXIII. 

ACTS- CHURCH HISTORY. 

[continued.] 

§ l. Introduction to Paul's Letter to Philemon 

of Colosse. Written from Rome, A. D. 62. (See Index; 
also Chronology, Chap. XXXV : § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "RECONCILIATION." 

In the chronological arrangement of Paul's letters accord- 
ing to Conybeare and Howson, which we have adopted, we 
find the next in order of time (A. D. 62) was his letter to 
Philemon. This man was a native of Colosse, a city on 
the river Meander, in Asia Minor. 

They say: " Of all the disciples now ministering to Paul 
at Rome, none has for us a greater interest than the fugi- 
tive Asiatic slave Onesimus. "He belonged to a Christian 



304 acts: church history. 

named Philemon, a member of the Colossian church. But 
he had robbed his master and fled from Colosse, and at last 
found his way to Eome. It is difficult to imagine a por- 
tion of mankind more utterly depraved than the associates 
among whom a runaway pagan slave must have found 
himself in the capital; yet from this lowest depth Onesi- 
mus was dragged forth by the hand of Christian love. It 
is not impossible that he may have already known Paul at 
Ephesus, where his master Philemon had formerly been 
converted by the apostle. However this may be, it is 
certain that Onesimus was converted to the faith of Christ. 
He confessed to Paul his sins against his master. The 
apostle seems to have been particularly attracted by the 
character of Onesimus, and he perceived in him the indi- 
cations of gifts which fitted him for a more important post 
than any which he could hold as a slave of Philemon. He 
wished to keep him at Rome aud employ him in the service 
of the gospel. Yet he would not transgress the law, nor 
violate the rights of Philemon, by acting in this matter 
without his consent. He therefore decided that Onesimus 
must immediately return to his master; and to make this 
duty less painful, he undertook himself to discharge the 
sum of which Philemon had been defrauded. An oppor- 
tunity now offered itself to Onesimus to return in good 
company, for Paul was sending TycMcus to Asia Minor, 
charged, among other commissions, with an epistle to 
Colosse, the home of Philemon. Under his care, therefore, 
he placed the penitent slave, who was now willing to sur- 
render himself to his offended master. Nevertheless, he 
did not give up the hope of placing his new convert in a 
position wherein he might minister no longer to a private 
individual, but to the church at large. He intimated his 
wishes on the subject to Philemon himself, with character- 
istic delicacy, in a letter which he charged Onesimus to 
deliver on his arrival at Colosse." 



Oh. XXXIII: § 2. TO THE CHURCH AT COLOSSE. 305 

The student, in order to receive the benefit of the above 
introduction, should now read this short letter of Paul to 
Philemon. The following is an outline : 

(a.) Outline. 

Verse 1. Salutation. 4. Thanksgiving and prayer for 
Philemon. 8. Bequest for the favorable reception of Ones- 
imus. 21. Announcement of a visit from Paul on his 
acquittal. 23. Salutations from Rome. 25. Concluding 
benediction. 

§ 2. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the Church 
at Colosse. Written from Rome, A. D. 62. (See Index; 
also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "ADVICE TO CHRISTIANS." 

While Onesimus, on the arrival of the two companions 
at Colosse, hurried to the home of -his master with letters, 
Tychicus proceeds to discharge his commission likewise by 
delivering to the presbyters the epistle with which he was 
charged, that it might be read to the whole Colossian 
church at the next meeting. 

The letter to the Colossians itself gives us distinct infor- 
mation as to the cause which induced Paul to write it. 
Epaphras, the founder of that church (Col. i: 7), was now 
at Rome, and he had communicated to the apostle the 
unwelcome tidings that the faith of the Colossians was in 
danger of being perverted by false teaching. 

(a.) Outline. 

Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 3. Thanksgiving for their con- 
version. 9. Prayer for their perfection. 13. Atonement 
and sovereignty of Christ. 21. They had been called from 
heathenism and reconciled to God by Christ. 24. Paul's 
commission to reveal the Christian mystery of salvation to 
"every man." 

Chap, ii: 1. He prays that they may grow in all true 
wisdom. 4. He warns them against those who would 



306 acts: church histokv. 

mislead them by a misnamed philosophy which depreciates 
Christ. 16. They unite Jewish observances with angel 
worship and asceticism.* 

Chap, iii: 1. Exhortations to heavenward affections. 5. 
Against heathen impurity and other vices. 9. Exhorta- 
tions to put on Christian character in all its Christian 
perfections. 16. Conduct at festive meetings. 19. Ex- 
hortation to fulfill the domestic duties of life. 22. Duties 
of slaves and masters. See iv: 1. 

Chap, iv: 2. Paul requests their prayers. 5. Conduct 
toward unbelievers. 7. Mission of Tychicus and Onesimus. 
10. Greetings from Christians in Eome. 15. Messages to 
Colossian and Laodicean Christians. 18. Autograph, sal- 
utation and benediction. 

§ 3. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the Church 

at Ephesus. Written from Rome, A. D. 62 (spring). 
(See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "DOCTRINE OF GRACE." 

This epistle was written Avhile Paul was yet a prisoner 
at Eome. It contains neither blame nor complaint, and 
beautifully develops the " Doctrine of Grace." See ch. ii. 

"We have seen that the epistles to the Colossians and 
that of Philemon were conveyed by Tychicus and Onesi- 
mus, who traveled together from Rome to Asia Minor. 
But these two were not the only letters with which Tychi- 
cus was charged. We know that he carried a third letter 
also. This third letter was that which is now entitled the 
epistle to the Ephesians. 

The most plausible account of the origin of this epistle 
seems to be as follows: Tychicus was about to take his 

* The state and practice of Ascetics: An Ascetic, in the early 
church, was one who retired from the customary business of life, 
and devoted himself to the duties of piety and devotion; a hermit; 
a recluse; such as teach the sanctity of celibacy, mortification, etc. 



Oh. XXXIII: § 3. to the chubch at ephesus. 307 

departure from Rome to Asia Minor. Paul had already 
written his epistle to the Colossians, at the request of 
Epaphras, who informed him of their danger. But Tychi- 
cus was about to visit other places which, though not 
requiring the same warnings with Colosse, yet abounded 
in Christian converts." — Conybeare and Howson. 

Says Henry: "It may be observed the epistle is expressly 
inscribed, ch. i: 1, to the saints at Ephesus; and, 'in the 
close of it, Paul tells them that he had sent Tychicus unto 
them, -whom, in 2 Tim. iv: 12, he says he had sent to 
Ephesus." And Scott remarks: "He wrote this epistle to 
establish them in the great doctrines of the gospel, guard 
them against errors, excite them to holy conversation, and 
animate them in their Christian warfare." 

(a/) Outline. 

Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 3. Thanksgiving for redemp- 
tion, and statement of the Christian mystery. 13. Thanks 
for their conversion, and prayer for their enlightenment. 
20. Office and dignity of Christ. 

Chap, ii: 1. They were awakened from heathen darkness 
by God's grace, and incorporated into God's Israel. 14. 
The law which divides Jews from Gentiles abolished. 
19. They are built into the temple of God. 

Chap, iii: 1. The mystery of salvation proclaimed by 
Paul, a prisoner of it. 13. Paul prays that they may be 
strengthened and enlightened. 

Chap, iv: 1. Exhortation to unity; different gifts and 
offices must combine to build up the church. IT. Exhor- 
tation to put away heathen vice, and to moral renewal. 
25. Against special vices. 

Chap, v: 1. Exhortation to Christ-like forgiveness and 
love. 3. Impurities and other sins of heathen darkness 
must be rebuked by the example aud watchfulness of 
Christians. 18. Conduct in festive meetings. 22. Duties 
of wives and husbands. 



308 acts: church history. 

Chap, vi: 1. Duties of children to parents. 5. Duties 
of servants to masters. 10. Exhortation to put on the 
Christian armor. 18. To pray for the brethren and for 
Paul. 21. Tychicus the messenger. 23. Paul's conclud- 
ing benediction. 

§ 4. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the Church 
at Philippi. Written from Borne, A. D. 62 (autumn). 
{See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, " JOY IN AFFLICTION." 

Philippi was a city of Macedonia, and the capital city of 
a Eoman colony, and is distinguished as being the first 
place in Europe where Paul preached the gospel (about 
A. D. 51). Acts, xvi: 12. 

"It seems probable that the three letters which we have 
last considered were dispatched from Eome when Paul had 
been there about a year; that is, in the spring of the year 
A. D. 62. After the departure of Tychicus and Onesimus, 
the apostle's prison was cheered by the arrival of Epaphro- 
ditus, who brought a contribution from the Christians at 
Philippi. Epaphroditus, apparently a leading bishop among 
the Philippians, had brought on himself, by the fatigues or 
perils of his journey, a dangerous illness. Paul speaks of 
him with touching affection. He calls him 'brother' (ii: 
25), declares that his labors in the cause of Christ had 
brought him near to death (ii: 30), and that he had ' haz- 
arded his life' in order to supply the means of communica- 
t i on between the Philippians and himself. And in speaking 
of his recovery he says: 'God had compassion on him, and 
not on him only, but on me also, that I might not have 
sorrow upon sorrow' (ii: 27). We must suppose from these 
expressions that Epaphroditus had exposed himself to some 
unusual risk in his journey. 

Meanwhile Epaphroditus was fully recovered from his 
sickness and able once more to travel, and he willingly 



Ch. XXXIII: § 4. to the Church at philippi. 309 

prepared to comply with Paul's request that he should 
return to Philippi. AVe are told that he was ' filled with 
longing' to see his friends again, and the more so when he 
heard that great anxiety had been caused among them by 
the news of his sickness. Paul took the occasion of his 
return to send a letter of grateful acknowledgement to his 
Phijippian converts. 

It has often been remarked that this epistle contains less 
censure and more praise than any other of Paul's letters. 
It gives us a very high idea of the Christian state of the 
Philippians, and the liberality which distinguished them 
above other churches. They were free from doctrinal 
errors, and no schism had as yet been created among them 
by the Judaizing party. They are warned, however, against 
them, as they are liable to appear among them. The only 
blemish recorded as existing in the church of Philippi is, 
certain of its members were deficient in lowliness of mind, 
and were thus led into disputes and altercations with their 
brethren. Two women of consideration among them, Eu- 
odias and Syntyche by name, had been especially guilty of 
this fault; and their variance was the more to be regretted 
because they had labored earnestly for the propagation of 
the faith. Paul exhorts the church with great solemnity 
and earnestness to let these disgraceful bickerings cease, 
and to be all 'of one soul and one mind.' He also gives 
them very full particulars about his own condition and the 
spread of the gospel in Rome." — Conybeare and Hoivson. 

Paul wrote this epistle "weeping" with tender remem- 
brance, and gives expression at times of great "Joy in 
Affliction." 

(a.) Outline. 

"Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 3. Thanksgivings and prayers 
for them. 12. Intelligence of his condition at Rome. 

Chap, i: 27 to ii: 16. Exhortations to steadfast endur- 
ance, concord and lowliness. 17. Paul's expectations and 
intentions. 25. Return of Epaphroditus. 



310 acts: church history. 

Chap, iii: 1. Warnings against Judaizers, and exhorta- 
tions to perseverance in the Christian race. 

Chap, i.v: 2. Euodias and Syntyche mnst be reconciled. 
4. Exhortation to rejoice in tribulation, and to love and 
follow goodness. 10. Liberality of the Philippian church. 
21. Salutations. 23. Benediction.*' — C. & II* 

§ 5. Preface to Paul's Last Three Pastoral 

Letters. The following is selected from Conybeare and 
Howson: The great question which we have to answer 
concerns that long imprisonment whose history has occu- 
pied the preceding chapters. Luke tells us that Paul 
remained under military custody at Eome "for two whole 
years" (Acts, xxviii: 16 and 30), but he does not say what 
followed at the close of that period. Was it ended, we 
are led to ask, by theapostle's condemnation and death, or 
by his acquittal and liberation? It was universally believed 
that Paul's appeal to Caesar terminated successfully, that 
he was acquitted of the charges laid against him, and that 
he spent some years in freedom before he was again im- 
prisoned and condemned. 

The evidence on this subject, though not* copious, is yet 
conclusive so far as it goes; and it is all one way. The 
most important portion of it is supplied by Clement, the 
disciple of Paul mentioned in Phil, iv: 3, avIio was after- 
ward bishop of Eome. This author, writing from Rome 
to Corinth, expressly asserts that Paul had preached the 
gospel "in the east and in the west," that he had instructed 
the whole world (i. e., the Roman empire, which was com- 
monly so called) in righteousness, and that he "had gone 
to the extremity of the west" before his martyrdom. 

Now to the Roman the extremity of the west could mean 
nothing short of Spain. Here, then, we have the express 

* If this letter of Paul to the Philippians is read in connection 
with this outline, and the occasion that called it forth be borne in 
mind, it cannot but greatly aid the student to understand it. 



Ch. XXXIII: § 5. pastoral letters. 311 

testimony of Paul's own disciple that lie fulfilled his origi- 
nal intention (mentioned Rom. xv: 24-28) of visiting the 
Spanish Peninsula, and consequently that he was liberated 
from his first imprisonment at Rome. The next evidence 
which we possess on the subject is contained in a New 
Testament compiled by an unknown Christian about A. D. 
170, which is known as Muratori's Canon. In this docu- 
ment it is said, in the account of the Acts of the Apostles, 
that Luke relates to Theophilus events of which he was an 
eye witness, as also, in a separate place (viz: Luke, xxii: 
31-33), he evidently declares the martyrdom of Peter, but 
omits the journey of Paul -from Rome to Spain. In the 
next place, Eusebius tells us: "After defending himself 
successfully, it is currently reported that the apostle again 
went forth to proclaim the gospel, and afterward came to 
Rome a second time, and was martyred by Nero" Next 
we have the statement of Chrysostom, who mentions it as 
an undoubted historical fact that "Paul, after his resi- 
dence in Rome, departed for Spain." About the same 
time Jerome bears the same testimony, saying that "Paul 
was dismissed by Nero, that he might preach Christ's 
gospel in the west." Against this unanimous testimony 
of the primitive church there is no external evidence- 
whatever to oppose. 

But further, unless Ave are prepared to dispute the genu- 
ineness of the pastoral epistles, we must admit not only 
that Paul was liberated from his Roman imprisonment, 
but also that he continued his apostolic labors for at least 
some years afterwards. As the epistles of Timothy and 
Titus cannot be placed in any portion of Paul's life before 
or daring his first imprisonment in Rome, we must ac- 
knowledge that after Paul's Roman imjjrisonment he was 
traveling at liberty in Ephesus, Crete, Macedonia, Miletus 
and Nicopolis, and that he was a second time in prison at 
Rome. 



312 acts: church history. 

But when we have said this, we have told nearly all that 
we know of the apostle's personal history from his libera- 
tion to his death. Immediately after his liberation, it 
may reasonably be supposed that he fulfilled the intention 
which he had lately expressed (Philemon, 22, and Phil. ii : 
24) of traveling eastward through Macedonia, and seeking 
the churches of Asia Minor, some of which, as yet, had 
not seen his face in the flesh. Having accomplished the 
objects of his visit to Asia Minor, he was at length enabled 
(perhaps the following year to that of his liberation) to 
undertake his long meditated journey to Spain. We may 
suppose him to have reached Spain in the year A. D. 64, 
and to have remained there two years. 

§ 6. Introduction to Paul's First Pastoral Let- 
ter. Written from Macedonia to Timothy, at Ephesus, 
A. D., 67 (summer). (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. 
XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "QUALIFICATION'S OF PASTORS AND 
DEACONS. " 

From Spain, Paul seems to have returned, in A. D. 6$, 
to Ephesus; and here he found that the predictions which 
he had long ago uttered were already receiving their ful- 
fillment. Heretical teachers had arisen in the very bosom 
of the church, and were leading away the believers after 
themselves. Hymengeus (1 Tim. i: 20; 2 Tim. ii: 19) and 
Philetus were sowing in congenial soil the seed which was 
destined in another century to bear so ripe a crop of error. 

He seemed not to have remained for any long time 
together in Ephesus, but to have been called away from 
thence, first to Macedonia, and afterwards to Crete. When 
he departed from Ephesus to Macedonia, he left the care 
of the Ephesian church to Timothy, charging him espe- 
cially to the duty of counteracting the effects of those 
heretical teachers whose dangerous character we have 
described. When he arrived in Macedonia, he found that 



Cll. XXXIII: § G. FIRST PASTORAL LETTEK. 313 

his absence might possibly be prolonged beyond what he 
expected; he probably felt that Timothy might need some 
more explicit credential from himself than a mere verbal 
commission, to enable him for a longer period to exercise 
the apostolic authority over the Ephesian church, where- 
with he had invested him. It would also be desirable that 
Timothy should be able, in his struggle with the heretical 
teachers, to exhibit documentary proof of Paul's agreement 
with himself. 

Such seems to have been the principal motive which led 
Paul to dispatch from Macedonia that which is known as 
"The First Epistle to Timothy," in which are contained 
various rules for the government of the Ephesian church. 
In the same manner it abounds with impressive denuncia- 
tions against the false teachers. There are also exhortations 
to Timothy himself. 

{a. ) Outline. 

Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 3. Timothy is reminded of the 
commission given him to oppose false teachers. 12. Paul 
relates his commission and calling. 

Chap, ii: 1-15. ' Directions for public worship, and the 
behavior of men and women thereat. 

Chap, iii: 1. Directions for the appointment of pres- 
byters (bishops). 8. Directions for the appointment of 
deacons. 14. Eeasons for writing these directions to 
Timothy. 

Chap, iv: 1. False teachers to be expelled; their charac- 
teristics, and the mode of resisting them. 

Chap, iv: 11 to v: 2. Duties of Timothy. 3. Widows 
are to be supported. 9. Qualifications of widows on the 
list. 17. Government of the presbyters. 

Chap, v: 23 to vi: 2. Particular and general cautions. 
3. False teachers rebuked; their covetousness. 11. Exhort- 
ation to Timothy. 17. Duties of the rich. 20. Timothy 
again reminded of his commission. 21. Concluding bene- 
diction. 



314 acts: church history. 

§ 7. Introduction to Paul's Letter Written from 
Ephesus to Titus, on the Island of Crete.* (See In- 
dex; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV : §7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "ADVICE TO PASTORS." 

"We must suppose that Paul returned shortly from 
Macedonia to Ephesus, as he hoped, though doubtfully, to 
be able to do when he wrote to Timothy. From Ephesus, 
as we have said, he soon afterward made an expedition to 
Crete. Paul visited there in company with Titus, whom 
he left in Crete as his representative on his departure. 
Thus Titus was left in Crete in the same position which 
Timothy had occupied at Ephesus during Paul's recent 
absence; and there would consequently be the same ad- 
vantage in his receiving written directions from Paul con- 
cerning the government and organization of the church 
which we have before mentioned in the case of Timothy. 
Accordingly, shortly after leaving Crete, Paul sent a letter 
to Titus. 

Paul's letter to Titus seems to have been still further 
called for to meet the strong opposition which that disciple 
had encountered while attempting to carry out his master's 
directions. This may be inferred from the very severe 
remarks against the Cretans which occur in the epistle, 
and from the statement at the commencement that the 
very object which its writer had in view of leaving Titus 
in Crete was that he might appoint presbyters in the 
Cretan churches, an indication that his claim to exercise 
this authority had been disputed. 

This epistle seems to have been dispatched from Ephesus 
(autumn A. D. 67) at the moment when Paul was on the 
eve of departure on a westward journey, which was to take 
him as far as Nicopolis (in Epirus) before the winter. n — 
C. and II. 

* In the Mediterranean Sea, south and east from Greece. 



Ch. XXXIII: § 8. SECOND PASTORAL LETTER. 315 

(a.) Outline. 

Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 5. Commission to Titus to reg- 
ulate the Cretan churches. 10. Titus must oppose the 
false teachers. 

Chap, ii: 1. Direction to Titus how he is to instruct 
those of different sexes and ages. 7. His own conduct. 
11. General motives of Christianity. 

Chap, iii: 1. Duties toward government, and toward un- 
believers generally. 8. Titus must enforce good works, 
and resist false teachers. 12. Special direction for Titus' 
journey to Nicopolis. 15. Salutations and concluding 
benedictions. 

§ 8. Introduction to Paul's Second Pastoral 

Letter to Timothy. Written from Rome (in prison) to 
Timothy, at Ephesus, A. D. 68 (spring). (See Index; also 
Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, " PERSON A.L HOLINESS." 

(a.) Paul's Last Imprisonment. We see from the above 
letter that Titus was desired to join Paul at Nicopolis, 
where the apostle designed to winter. The position of 
Xicopolis would render it a good centre for operating upon 
the surrounding province; thence Paul might make excur- 
sions to these churches of Illyricum, which he perhaps 
founded at an earlier period (Rom. xv: 19). It seems 
most probable, however, that Paul was not permitted to 
spend the whole winter at Nicopolis. The Christians were 
far more obnoxious to the Roman authorities than for- 
merly. There is no improbability in supposing that, upon 
testimony of some informer, he was arrested aud forwarded 
to Rome for trial. The indications which we gather from 
the second epistle to Timothy render it probable that this 
arrest took place not later than mid-winter. Hence it is 
not unlikely that Paul may have arrived at Rome some 
time before spring. In this melancholy journey he had 



316 acts: church history. 

but few friends to cheer him. Demas forsook him "for 
love of this present world," and departed to Thessalonica; 
Crescens went to Galatia on the same occasion. Luke, at 
any rate, remained faithful, accompanied his master once 
more over the wintry sea, and shared the dangers of his 
imprisonment at Rome. 

This imprisonment was evidently more severe than it 
had been five years before. Now he is not only chained, 
but he is treated "as a malefactor." His friends, indeed, 
are suffered to visit him in his confinement, but we hear 
nothing of his preaching. As the final stage of his trial 
approaches, he looks forward to death as his certain sen- 
tence. The alteration in the treatment of Paul exactly 
corresponds with that which the history of the times would 
have led us to expect. We have seen that his liberation 
took place early in A. D. 63; he was therefore far distant 
from Eome when the first imperial persecution of Chris- 
tianity broke out in consequence of the great fire in Rome 
in the summer of the following year* (A. D. 64). 

Probably no long time elapsed after Paul's arrival before 
his cause came to a hearing. The emperors from the first 
claimed judicial authority, both civil and criminal. And 
this jurisdiction was exercised not only by themselves, but 
by the delegates whom they appointed. 

From the above description we can realize in some meas- 
ure the external features of his last trial. He is now 
remanded to prison to wait the second stage of his trial. 
He certainly did not expect an acquittal, but felt no doubt 
that the cause would ultimately result in his condemna- 
tion. We are not left to conjecture his feelings; he has 
expressed them: "I am now ready to be offered, and the 
time of my departure is at hand; I have fought the good 
fight, I have finished my course, I have kept the faith: 

* For a fuller account of this persecution, read the "Life and 
Epistles of Paul/" by Conybeare and Howson, p. 700. 



Ch. XXXIII: § 8. second pastoral letter. 317 

Henceforth there is laid up for me the crown of righteous- 
ness, which the Lord, the righteous judge, shall give me 
in that day. " Chap, iv : 6-8. 

(b.) Paul's Last Letter. Paul, in these last hours, 
clings to the friendships of his early years (iv: 19-21). 
However he may have valued his more recent friends, their 
society could not console him for the absence of one far 
dearer to him; he longed with a parental longing to see 
once more the face of Timothy, his beloved son. But 
Timothy was far distant in Asia Minor. Thither, then, 
he wrote to him, desiring him to come with all speed to 
Rome (iv: 21), yet feeling how uncertain it was whether 
he might not arrive too late. And lest he should be pre- 
vented from giving him his last instructions face to face, 
he urges on him very emphatically the duty of boldness in 
Christ's cause, and steadfastness under persecution, and 
taking share in the suffering of saints; impressing on him 
with the earnestness of a dying man the various duties of 
his ecclesiastical office, and especially that of opposing the 
heresies which now threatened to destroy the very essence 
of Christianity. 

But no summary of contents can give a notion of the 
pathetic tenderness and deep solemnity of this epistle. 
The following is an analysis: 

(c.) Outline. 

Chap, i: 1. Salutation. 3. Timothy reminded of his past 
history, and exhorted to perseverance and courage, by the 
hope of immortality. 13. Exhortation to fulfill his com- 
mission faithfully. 15. Conduct of certain Asiatic Chris- 
tians at Rome. 

Chap, ii: 1. Duty of Timothy on church government. 
14. Must oppose false teachers and their immoralities; 
carefully preserve his own purity. 

Chap, iii: 1. Dangerous errors of the last days. 10. Ex- 
hortation to steadfastness in Paul's doctrine. 



318 acts: church history. 

Chap, iv: 1. Solemn charge to perform his commission 
faithfully, in expectation of evil times and of Paul's death. 
9. He is urged to come to Rome speedily. 14. Intelligence 
of the progress of Paul's trial. 19. Salutations and fare- 
well intelligence. 22. Concluding benediction. 

(d.) Paul's Last Request. We know not whether Tim- 
othy was able to fulfill the last request of the dying apostle. 
The only intimation which seems to throw any light on the 
question is the statement in the epistle to the Hebrews 
that Timothy had been liberated from imprisonment in 
Italy (Heb. xiii: 23). We may therefore hoj)e Paul's last 
earthly wish was fulfilled. Yet, if Timothy did indeed 
arrive before the closing scene, there could have been but 
a brief interval between his coming and his master's death; 
for the letter which summoned him could not have been 
dispatched from Rome till the end of winter, and Paul's 
martyrdom took place in the middle of summer. We only 
know that it resulted in a sentence of capital punishment. 
The privileges of Roman citizenship exempted him from 
death by torture, which had been inflicted on so many of 
his brethren. He was to die by decapitation, and lie was 
led out to execution beyond the city walls, upon the road 
to Ostia, the port of Rome. 

Thus died the apostle and the martyr, bequea tiling to 
the church, in her government and her discipline, the 
legacy of his apostolic labors." — Conybeare and Howson. 

§ 9. Introduction to Paul's Letter to the He- 
brews. {See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN" TOPIC, "PRIESTHOOD OF CHRIST." 

(a.) Author. There seems to be a diversity of opinion 
in regard to the authorship of this letter, not only among 
the early Christian fathers, but also among the more mod- 
ern critics. Among the early writers, some attribute it to 
Paul, and others to Barnabas, Luke, and Clement of Alex- 
andria. 



Oil. XXXIII: § 9. LETTEE TO THE HEBREWS. 319 

" Several very able modern critics have agreed with 
Luther in assigning the authorship of this epistle to 
Apollos. 

We may observe, notwithstanding the doubts recorded 
concerning the writer, that we need not scruple to speak 
of this portion of the Scriptures * * * as 'The 
Epistle of Paul to the Hebrews.' We have seen that 
Jerome expresses the greatest doubts concerning its author- 
ship, and that Origen says 'the writer is known to God 
alone;' the same doubts are expressed by Eusebius and by 
Augustine; yet all these great writers refer to the words 
of the epistle as the words of Paul. In fact, whether 
written by Barnabas, by Luke, by Clement or by Apollos, 
it represented the views and was impregnated by the influ- 
ence of the great apostle. 

The advocates of the Pauline authorship urge, first, that 
the general plan of the epistle is similar to that of Paul's 
other writings; second, that its doctrinal statements are 
identical with Paul's; third, that there are many points of 
similarity between its phraseology and diction and those of 
Paul."— a & H. 

(b.) Where and When Written. "If, then, Paul was the 
author of this epistle, the time when, the olace where, it 
was written, may be easily ascertained; for the salutation 
from the saints in Italy (ch. xiii • 24), and the promise of 
seeing the Hebrews shortly (ver. 23), plainly intimate his 
first imprisonment at Rome was then terminated or on the 
point • of being so. Consequently it was written from 
Rome, soon after the epistles of Colossians, Ephesians and 
Philemon, either at the end of A. D. 62, or more probably 
in the beginning of the year. 63." — Bagster. 

Note. The reader will see there is no necessity of placing this 
book in chronological order, as its subject matter answers far better 
as a supplement; hence it should follow Paul's epistles. 



320 acts: chukch history. 

(c.) To Whom Addressed. "It may be held certain that 
the epistle was addressed to Hebreiv Christians.* Through- 
out its pages there is not a single reference to any other 
class of converts. Its readers are assumed to be familiar 
with the Levitical worship, the temple worship, the temple 
services, and all the institutions of the Mosaic ritual. " 

We have seen that the epistle to the Hebrews was ad- 
dressed to Jewish converts who were tempted to apostatize 
from Christianity and return to Judaism.'' — C. & H. 

(d.) The Great Object. Another and greater object was 
to develop the priesthood of Christ, and to the converted 
Hebrew or Jew, the superiority of Christ to Moses, to 
Joshua or Aaron; to prove that in his priesthood and 
death all the work of the priests was completed, that he 
had made a perfect offering for sin, and that from hence, 
forth there was no other way in which salvation could be 
expected but through Christ. With this thought the 
reader will be better able to understand this epistle. 

We find that there are over ninety references to the Old 
Testament, forty of which are verbal quotations. The 
majority of them refer the reader to the book of Leviticus; 
hence we see the necessity, when we arrive at this point, 
first to read the book of Leviticus, and then read this 
letter as a supplement to it. Leviticus was written for the 
Jews only, while Paul's letter to the Hebrews was no less 
for the Jew, and refers to him as a Christian; hence we 
are enabled to see how impossible it is to be able to com- 
prehend this portion of the New Testament without sonic 
knowledge of the Old. The Old is therefore a commentary 
to the New. 

(e.) Outline. 

"Chap, i: 1. God lias revealed himself finally to man in 
the person of his Son. 



Ch XAXI1I £9 LETTER TO THE HEBREWS. 321 

Chap, i: 5, to ii: 8. Jesus is higher than the angels. 9. 
His humiliation needful, that he might be consecrated by 
sufferings as Highpriest for man. 

Chap, iii: 1. Christ is higher than Moses. 7. Warning 
against apostasy. 12. God's judgment cannot be avoided. 

Chap, iii: 14, to v: 10. Christ is a Highpriest who can be 
touched with the feeling of our infirmities. - 

Chap, v: 11, to vi: 3. They are reproached for decline in 
spiritual understanding. 4. Warned of the danger of 
apostasy. 9. Reminded of the motives to perseverance. 

Chap. vii. The priesthood of Christ (typified by the 
priesthood of Melchisedec) is distinguished from the Le- 
vitical priesthood by its eternal duration and efficacy. 

Chap, viii to x: 18. The Mosaic law, with its temple and 
sacrifices, was an imperfect shadow of the better covenant, 
and the availing atonement of Christ. 19.. Renewed warn- 
ing against apostasy. 32. Exhortation not to let faith be 
conquered by fear. 

Chap, xi: 1. Faith defined as that principle which en- 
ables men to prefer things invisible to things visible. 4. 
Its operations historically exemplified. 

Chap, xii: 1. Exhortation to imitate such examples, and 
follow Jesus in steadfast endurance of suffering. 14. 
Warning against sensuality. 18. In proportion to the 
superiority of the gospel over the law, will be the danger 
of despising it. 

Chap, xiii: 1. Exhortation to several moral duties, espe- 
cially to courageous profession of faith, and obedience to 
the leaders of the church. 18. The writer asks their pray- 
ers, gives them his own, and communicates information 
from Italy. 24. General salutation and benediction."— - 
C. & H. 

(/..) Hebreivs a Supplement. The epistle to the He- 
brews, says Dr. Hales, is a masterly supplement to the 
epistles to the Romans and Galatians, also a luminous com- 



322 acts: church history. 

men tar j on them, showing that all the legal 
was originally designed to be superseded by the new 
and better covenant of the Christian dispensation, in a 
connected chain of argument, evincing the profoundest 
knowledge of both. 

Dr. Clark says: It is an epitome of the dispensations of 
God to man, from the foundation of the world to the 
advent of Christ, It is not only the sum of the Gospel, 
but a sum of the Law. He further says: Without this, 
the Law of Moses had never been fully understood, nor 
God's design in giving it. With this, all is clear and plain. 
The apostle appears to have taken for his text: " Christ is 
the end of the Law for righteousness to them that believe. " 



Oh. XXXIII. 



LESSOR XVIII. 

LESSOR XVIII. 



323 



C7iiv/ect ': wAiiieA tgfei'dfoi'U. 

^,{2. Wtvoui Jewb, (ghah. ili= 



IX. 






II 

or, 



<^j 



<§ \3. Wwovd WmtUeb, (ghafi. x=xli 
gf'dclafacia ^wdila (@?ai4 iv), 

ifiddia, $wnium t 

\^^4n4icch } Jeimalem, 

a- /» ■ ji \* ffifieMatoniam, 

2 journey , wc-unih. X 
' I 2 tf/heMcUcniam, 

f/ (goimiliianb, 

<r gii \ 2 (poiiwihianb. 

3 Joutneu, ehneim. < *, , 

tomaw>, 






hlL 



enwn, 



am, 



icme. 



^OWM'J 



tuhfuam, 



^Macedonia, / (tfLmoihy, 
I iftome, 2 §imo4hu, 



33 
40 

45 



44 
44 

60 

52 
53 



Si 



324 LESSON XVIII. 

SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Note. Review the lesson on the four gospels; then introduce the 
subject of church history. 

"Who was the writer of this book? (Ch. XXX: § 1.) 
What is said of his general character? (Col. iv: 14) When 
was this book written? (Ch. XXXII: § 1.) Where? How 
many years of history does it contain? From and to what 
dates? What is the golden topic? Into how many general 
parts may it be divided? (§ 2.) 

Who is the centre of the first great group of savings? 

(§9,Tl.)- 

Note. Call out a sketch of Peter's life. 

• 

In what chapters may be found that which relates to 
Peter ? Axs. The first twelve chapters. Who is next 
introduced as the leading character? (§ 2, *~ II.) What 
chapters speak of Paul? 

Into how many sections may that which relates to PeteT 
be divided? Axs. Four. 

Note. First, the great foundation of Christianity, i. e., the resur- 
rection of Christ (Acts, i, ii). Second, spread of Christianity among 
devout Jews (ch. iii, iv). Third, exclusive]}' to the Jews (ch. iii-ix). 
Fourth to the Gentiles (ch. x-xii). 

The second general division pertains to what celebrated 
person? (§ 3.) What may be said of him? 

Note. In connection with Paul's nativity, education, etc., speak 
of his work in spreading the gospel and organizing the church) 
compassed in his five journeys. First journey beginning at Antiocb 
(§ 4), Acts, xiii. Second journey (Acts, xviii: 1), he comes to Cor. 
inth, where he wrote 1st and 2d Thessalonians (§ 5). Third journey, 
at Ephesus, he writes 1st and 2d Corinthians, Galatians and Romans 
(§ 8). Fourth journey, Paul at Koine, writes Philemon, Colossians, 
Ephesians a#d Philippians, (Ch. XXXIII). Fifth journey, gt> 
Macedonia (§ 6), thence to Spain (see Horn, xv: 24-28; also Ads, 
xxvii) and other places, when he writes 1st and 2d Timothy I 
Titus (§ 7), and Hebrews (§ 9). Review. 



'%) 









■&. 



Ch. XXXIII. lessor xix akd xx. 325 

LESSOR XIX AND XX. 

Part I. 

4. Mom. : Jm4ljlca4lon 6u ja'dk . 

2. hi (gov. : iktMViitdlon oj 4ke Sead. (gk. xi>. 

3. 2d (go\. : Woiu oj 4ke ( &o6kd. (gk. til. 
ip. %al. : 3?aw vmtM %bjiel. (gk. id : 4S=2(j. 

5. §lik.: Woduno oj %ace. (gk. II: 4=40. 
(. 9kll. : fou in <^ljjlidion. (gk. I : 4=4$. 
1. (gol. : ' <gidv-ice 4o (gkm4iam. (gk. Id. 

Part II 

$. h4 §km. : §ncomaaemen4. 

0. 2d§km.: <^ln4i=(gkm4 ffiotdold. (gk. w: -£=/<£ 

40. id §im. : %ialijlm4low> oj $>ttkofi!> and Smconb. 

41. 2d §lm. : /iPmonal $fotintM. (gk. II: 4Cj=24. 

42. §l4m : Advice 4o 9adov>.. 

43. iPkilmnon : meconclila4lon. 
44-. $fel>. : iPuedkood oj (gkud. {&ajijilmntn4^ 

SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

Part 1. 
Note. Review New Testament divisions up to this lesson. See 

Index. 

How many pastoral letters did Paul write? 
Note. Place bracket and numbers on the board. 
What is the name of the first? Second? etc. 



326 LESSON XIX AND XX. 

What is Paul's first letter called? See Index. Why is it 
called Romans? (Ch. XXXII: § 12.) Where was it writ- 
ten? When? What is the golden topic? (Rom. i: 17.) 
What is the first great question asked in the Old Testa- 
ment Scriptures? (Ch. II: § 3.) 

Note. This being the first great question, we find the first book 
in the arrangement of the doctrinal books answers it. 

To whom was the next letter addressed? See Index. 
Where written? (Ch. XXX: §8.) When? What is the 
golden topic? What was the second great question raised 
in the Old Testament? (Ch. II: § 3.). 

Note. This question, being second in importance, is answered in 
the second letter in the New Testament (1 Cor. xv). The placing of 
the letters in the order of comparative importance is a rule that holds 
good in the following letters of Paul, and no less so in the general 
letters. This fact must not be lost sight of. 

To whom was the third letter addressed? (Ch. XXX: 
§ 10.) What is the golden topic? (2 Cor. iii.) 

The fourth? (§ 11.) Golden topic? (Gal. iii: 16-22.) 
The fifth? (Ch. XXXIII: § 3.) Golden topic? (Eph. ii: 
1-10.) 

The sixth? (§ 4.) Golden topic? (Phil, i: 1-18.) 
The seventh? (§ 2.) Golden topic? (Col. iii.) 

Part II. 
Note. Review Part I before proceeding with this lesson. 

To whom did Paul write the eighth letter? (Ch. XXXII: 
§5.) When was it written? Where? What is the golden 
topic? 

Note. State some of their trials and Paul's reasons for writing 
this letter. 

To whom did Paul write \\w ninth letter? (§ 6.) From 
whore? When? Golden topic? 
Note. State why he wrote a second letter. 



Ch. XXXIV: § 1. seve;n t general epistles. 327 

To whom did Paul write the tenth letter? (Oh. XXXIII: 
§ 6.) Where was Timothy? When was it written? Gold- 
en topic? Where was it written? Why written? 

Note. State some of the reasons as given in this section. 

To whom was the eleventh letter written? (Ch. XXXIII: 
§8.) When? Where? Date? Golden topic? etc. 

To whom was the twelfth letter written? (Ch. XXXIII: 

To whom the thirteenth? (Ch. XXX'IH: § 1.) 
To whom the fourteenth? (Ch. XXXIII: § 9.) 
Note. State to the class, concerning the author, where and when 
written, to whom addressed, the great object, and its connection with 
the other epistles and Leviticus. Close with review. 



CHAPTER XXXIV. 

GENERAL LETTERS. 

' ' Sup plement. " See Index. 

§ 1. Preface to the Seven General Epistles. {See 
Chronology, Chap. XXXV : § 7.) "The last seven epistles 
have, for many centuries, been termed i catholic ' or ' gene- 
ral ' epistles, because most of them were addressed, not to 
particular churches or persons, as those of Paul, but to the 
body either of Jewish or Gentile converts dispersed over 
several countries." — Nicholls. 

"A wicked opinion sprung up," says Augustine, "even 
in the apostles' day, by misunderstanding Paul's argu- 
ments. Peter, John, James and Jude aimed in their 
epistles principally to this end, to vindicate the doctrine 
of Paul from the false consequences charged upon it, and 



328 GENERAL LETTERS. 

to show that faith without works is nothing worth. But 
indeed Paul does not speak of faith at large, but only of 
that living, fruitful, evangelical faith, which he himself 
saith worketh by love. As for that faith void of good 
works, which these men thought sufficient for salvation, 
he declareth positively against it. Peter calls it wresting 
(2 Peter, iii: 16), because Paul was, in truth, of the same 
opinion with the other apostles, and held eternal life im- 
possible to be obtained by any faith which had not the 
attestation of a holy life." 

Note. For a better understanding of these letters, th^ ~eader will 
now read Chap. VI: § 2, {b). 

§ 2. Introduction to the Epistle of James "to 
the Twelve Tribes Scattered Abroad." Written from 
Jerusalem, A. D. 62. 

GOLDEN TOPIC, " FAITH AND WORKS." 

"The epistle of James is called ' general,' because it was 
not written to any particular person. It was addressed 'to 
the twelve tribes which are scattered abroad.' These wore 
'not Christian Jews scattered abroad by persecution, but 
Jews who. had been scattered over all countries by the 
captivity, numbers of whom never returned in consequence 
of Cyrus's decree, but remained among the Gentiles. The 
author of this epistle is thought to be James, the brother 
of Jude, half brother to our Lord, and is known by the 
name of James the Less, probably because he was less in 
stature, or younger, than James the son of Zebedee, who 
was slain by Herod." — Cobbiii. 

"The prevailing error which attended the introduction 
of the gospel was, that we are justified in part by works; 
as opposed to this, Paul shows thai we are justified freely 
by faith alone. But now, where the gospel has been some 
time established, the tendencies of corrupt nature were to 
pervert it l>\ overlooking the importance of works as a 



Ch. XXXIV: §2, the epistle of james, 329 

necessary evidence of saving faith. Here we can see the 
tendency in our nature to run from one extreme to another. 

f[any professing Christians, it appears, were guilty of 
partiality to the rich, contempt for the poor, censorious- 
ness, envy, contention, covetousness, presumptious disre- 
gard of God's providences, oppression and luxury, and yet 
-confident of salvation, because they held a speculative 
'belief of doctrines of the gospel. To show them the 
unsoundness of such a faith is the object of the apostle's 
argument. He proves that it is of the very nature of 
saving faith to bring forth good works" (ch. ii). — Nicholls. 

This epistle is supposed to have been written about 
A. D. 62. The following analysis will assist the student 
in bringing out the subject as found in each chapter. 

(a.) Analysis. 

Chap. i. We are to rejoice under the cross, to ask patience 
of God, and in our trials, not to impute our weakness or 
sins unto him, but rather hearken to the word, to meditate 
on it, and to do thereafter. Otherwise men may seem, but 
never be, truly religious. 

Chap. ii. It is not agreeable to Christian profession to 
regard the rich and despise the poor brethren; rather we 
are to be loving and merciful, and not to boast of faith 
where no deeds are, which is dead faith, the faith of devils, 
not of Abraham and Kahab. 

Chap. iii. We are not rashly to reprove others, but to 
bridle the tongue, a little member, but a powerful instru- 
ment of much good or great harm. They who are truly 
wise will be mild and peaceable, without envying and 
.strife. 

Chap. iv. We are to strive against covetousness, intem- 
perance, pride, detraction and rash judgment of others; 
and not to be confident in the good success of worldly 
business, but, mindful ever of the uncertainty of life, to 
commit ourselves and all of our affairs to God's providence. 



330 GENERAL LETTERS. 

Chap. v. Wicked men are to fear God's vengeance. We 
are to be patient in afflictions, after the example of the 
prophets and Job; to forbear swearing; to pray in adver- 
sity, to sing in prosperity; to acknowledge mutually our 
several faults; to pray one for another, and thereby bring 
back a straying brother to the truth. 

§ 3. Introduction to Peter's First Letter, ad- 
dressed "to the (elect) strangers scattered throughout 
Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia (Minor) and Bithynia." 
Written from Eome, A. D. 65. (See Index; also Chron- 
ology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "OBEDIENCE AND PATIENCE." 

This, with the other letter of Peter, are called "general," 
because they Avere not addressed to any particular church 
or community of believers. This is supposed to have been 
written in a. time of violent persecution, by which the con- 
verts were scattered abroad. 1 Peter, i: 1; iv: 16.-19. 

(a.) Where Written. There is but one word which fixes 
the place (Babylon) from which the epistle was written (eh. 
v: 13). But a more important indication than that of .the 
place is found in the names of persons who were with 
Peter (S}ivanus and Mark) when he wrote this letter. Of 
Sylvanus we have lost sight since we saw him as the com- 
panion of Paul's second missionary journey, and there is 
nothing to show how he came to be in Peter's company. 
The case of Mark is clearer; for lie was with Paul in his 
first imprisonment at Rome, and he was (hen contemplat- 
ing a journey to Asia Minor (Col. iv: 10; Phile. 24). His 
intention was no doubt fulfilled, since we find him after- 
wards with Timothy .at Ephesus (2 Tim. iv: 11). The 
interval is just the time at which all indications concur to 
place Peter's first epistle, ami consequently Mark's com- 
panionship with him. See Introduction /<> Mark's Gospel. 



Cli. XXXV: § 3. peter's first letter. 331 

Says Carpenter: "Many, both of ancient and modern 
writers, have interpreted Babylon mystically, and refer it 
to Borne." 

(b.) General Characteristic. Says Dr. "Wm. Smith: "Peter 
wrote this letter to the Hebrew Christians of the eastern 
dispersion. Two of Paul's companions were his intimate 
associates, and one of them the bearer of this letter. 'By 
Sylvanus, a faithful brother unto you, 'as I account him, I 
have written briefly, exhorting, and testifying that this is the 
true grace of God wherein ye stand' (1 Peter, v: 12). This 
distinctly Pauline phrase sums up what has been called the 
Pauline element running throughout the whole epistle. 
The epistle may well be designated as Peter 's testimony to 
the truth of the gospel taught by Paul" 

(c.) Analysis. 

Chap. i. He blesses God for his many graces, showing 
that the salvation of Christ is no news, but a thing proph- 
esied of old, and exhorts them accordingly to Godly con- 
versation, forasmuch as they are born anew by the word of 
God. 

Chap. ii. He exhorts them from the breach of charity, 
showing that Christ is the foundation whereupon they are 
built. He beseeches them, also, to abstain from fleshly 
lusts, to be obedient to magistrates, and teaches servants 
how to obey their masters, patiently suffering for well 
doing, after the example of Christ. 

Chap. iii. He teaches the duty of wives and husbands to 
each other, exhorting all men in unity and love, and to 
suffer persecution. He declares, also, the benefits of Christ 
toward the old world. 

Chap. iv. He exhorts them to cease from sin, by the 
example of Christ and the consideration of the general 
end that now approaches; and he comforts them against 
persecution. 



332 • GENERAL LETTERS. 

Chap. y. He exhorts the elders to feed the flock, and the 
younger to obey, and all to be sober, watchful and constant 
in the faith, and to resist the cruelty of the devil, who, 
"as a roaring lion, walketh about, seeking whom he may 
devour. " 

§ 4. Introduction to Peter's Second Letter, 

addressed "to them (Gentiles*) who have obtained like 
precious faith with us " (Jews). Written from Eome, A. D. 
66. (See Index; also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: §7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "FALSE TEACHERS." 

"As in his first epistle Peter exhorts to patience under 
the tyranny of persecution, so in this he exhorts to perse- 
verance in the truths of the gospel against the deceptions 
of heretics and the profaneness of scoffers, describing their 
character, and the certainty of their destruction, and urges 
diligence in the improvement of every Christian grace. 

(a.) When Written. This epistle, like Paul's second 
letter to Timothy, was penned when the writer knew him- 
self to be drawing near to martyrdom, and it deserves a 
solemn interest from this consideration. On reading the 
views which are here presented to us of the perfection 
of God, the glory of Christ, the tremendous judgment, we 
are led to ask: Whence had this poor fisherman such wis- 
dom, but from God? His last exhortation to the Christian 
church is: i Grow in grace, and in the knowledge of our 
Lord and Savior Jesus Christ;' and his last testimony is to 
the divinity of his Lord: 'To whom be glory, both now 
and forever; Amen' (2 Peter, iii: 18)." — Nichotts. 

(b.) Analysis. 

Chap. i. Confirming them in the hope of the increase of 
God's graces, he exhorts them, by faith and good works, to 

* "Simeon (Simon Peter) hath declared how God first visited the 
Oe?itiles, to take from them a people for his name." Acts, xv: 14. 



Ch. 1 XXXIV: § 5. John's first letter. 333 

make their calling and election sure; whereof he is careful 
to remember them, knowing that his death is at hand; 
and he warns them to be constant in the faith of Christ, 
who is the true Son of God, by the eye witness of the 
apostle's beholding his majesty (Matt, xvii: 1-5), and by 
the testimony of the Father and the prophets. 

Chap. ii. He foretells them of false teachers, showing the 
impiety and punishment both of them and their followers, 
from which the godly shall be delivered, as Lot was out of 
Sodom; and more fully describes the manners of those 
profane and blasphemous seducers, whereby they may be 
better known and avoided. 

Chap. iii. He assures them of the certainty of Christ's 
coming to judgment, against the scorners who dispute 
against it; warning the godly, for the long patience of 
God, to hasten their repentance. He describes, also, the 
manner how the world shall be destroyed; exhorting them, 
from the expectation thereof, to holiness of life; and again, 
to think the patience of God to tend to their salvation, as 
Paul wrote to them in his epistles. 

§ 5. Introduction to John's First Letter, ad- 
dressed to " Christians of every denomination and country." 
— Macknight. Written from Ephesus, A. D. 96. 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "CHRIST OUR ADVOCATE." 

(a.) The Author. The author of this epistle was John, 
the son of Zebedee, the disciple whom Jesus loved. It was 
called "general," because it was not sent to any particular 
church or person. John was the youngest of the apostles, 
and survived them all. It is said, in some early histories, 
that he spent his last days in Ephesus, where he died; and 
that, when he was too old to walk, he was carried to the 
place of worship in the arms of his disciples. He could 
then only speak a few words very feebly, and these words 
always were: "Little children, love one another." 



334 GENERAL LETTERS. 

(b.) The Design. "The design of this first epistle of 
John was to promote brotherly love, to warn against doc— 
trines that allowed men to live in sin, and to give clear 
notions of the nature of God and the divine glory of Jesus 
Christ."— Collin. 

In the introduction (ch. i: 1-4), the apostle states the 
purport of this epistle, by bearing witness that the Lord 
Jesus was God manifest in the flesh; presenting him as 
the "Word of Life," or Living Word (compare John's gos- 
pel, i: 1), whom he and his fellow apostles had seen with 
their own eyes, had heard with their own ears, and handled 
with their own hands; thus seeking to establish the disci- 
ples in the faith, that they might have like fellowship and 

(c.) Leading Thought. Another, the second and appar- 
ently the leading thought, is to present Christ as our 
Advocate (ch. ii: 1, 2). Says the loving apostle: "These 
things I write unto you, that ye sin not." As, however 
"there is no man which liveth and sinneth not," he adds : 
"But if any man sin, we have an Advocate with the 
Father, Jesus Christ, the righteous." And also: "He is 
the propitiation for our sins." It is impossible to conceive 
of greater comfort and consolation than unay be drawn 
from these passages, first, that he is our sacrificial atone- 
ment (propitiation, see Lev. vi : 6, 7) ; and second, our 
Advocate. (See Isa. liii: 10, 11; Rom. viii: 33, 34.) 

John particularly enlarges on the love of God in redemp- 
tion, urging it as a motive to holiness. The epistle is 
especially useful throughout, as it presents many tests by 
which to try the sincerity of our profession. 

Says Henry: "Believers themselves have yet their sins. 
There is a great distinction between sinners : some are 
converted, others are unconverted. Believers, as they have 
had an atonement applied to them at their entrance into a 
state of pardon and justification, so they have an Advocate 



Oh. XXXIV: § 5. John's first letter, 335 

in heaven still to continue to them that state, and procure 
their continued pardon and forgiveness." 

(d.) Analysis. We will adopt the outline of this first 
epistle of John as given by Home, deeming it the best. 
It comprises six sections, and concludes with a statement 
of its design and value, as follows: 

SECTION I. 

Chap, i: 1-7. Asserts the true divinity and humanity of 
Christ, in opposition to the false teachers, and urges the 
union of faith and holiness of life, as absolutely necessary 
to enable Christians to enjoy communion with Christ. 

SECTION II. 

Chap, i : 8-10; ii : 1-2. Shows that all have sinned, and ex- 
plains the doctrine of Christ's propitiation. 3-17. Whence 
the apostle takes occasion to illustrate the works of true 
faith, viz: obeying the commandments of Cod and sincere 
love to the brethren, and shows that the love of the world 
is inconsistent with the love of God. 

SECTION III. 

Chap, ii: 18-29. Asserts Jesus to be the same with 
Christ, in opposition to the false teachers who denied it. 

SECTION IV. 

Chap. iii. On the privileges of the true believers, and 
their consequent happiness and duties, and the marks by 
which they are known as the sons of God. 

SECTION V. 

Chap. iv. Contains the criteria by which to distinguish 
Anti-Christ and false Christians, with an exhortation on 
brotherly love. 

SECTION VI. 

Chap, v: 1-16. Shows the connection between faith in 
Christ, regeneration, love to God and his children, obedi- 
ence to his commandments, and victory over the world; 
and that Jesus Christ is truly the Son of God, able to save 
us, and to hear the prayer we make for ourselves and 



336 GENERAL LETTERS. 

others. 17-21. The conclusion, which is a summary of 
the preceding treaties; shows that a sinful life is inconsis- 
tent with true Christianity, asserts the divinity of Christ, 
and cautions believers against idolatry. 

The above is an outline of this admirable epistle, which, 
being designed to promote right principles of doctrine and 
practical piety in conduct, abounds, more than any book 
of the New Testament, with criteria by which Christians 
may soberly examine themselves whether they be in the 
faith. See 2 Cor. xiii: 5. 

§ 6. Introduction to John's Second Letter, ad- 
dressed to a noble Christian mother and her children. 
Written from Ephesus, A. D, 96. 

GOLDEN TOPIC, "TO CHRISTIAN MOTHERS. " 

(a. ) To Christian Mothers. This epistle, it is the com- 
mon opinion, was addressed to a woman and a mother, 
particularly (I) to commend her for her virtues and reli- 
gious education of her children, and (II) to carefully avoid 
the delusions of false teachers; but chiefly (III) to practice 
Christian love and charity. 

"An apostolic epistle, so addressed, and on such a sub- 
ject, would seem to imply the importance in the sight of 
God of the station of a Christian mother, the earnestness 
with which she should interest herself in the religious 
welfare of her children, and the encouragement which, by 
so doing, she will give to Christian mothers and to the 
progress of truth." — Nicholls. 

§ 7. Introduction to John's Third Letter, ad- 
dressed to Gaius, supposed to be the treasurer of the city 
of Corinth. Written from Ephesus, A. D. 97. (See Index; 
also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

GOLDEN TOPIC, " HOSPITALITY." 

(a.) To Whom Addressed. This third epistle of John is 
addressed to a person called Gaius, a member of some 



Ch. XXXIV: §8. jude's letter. 337 

Christian church; most probably Gains of Corinth, who 
had been baptized by Paul (1 Cor. i: 14), and whom he 
calls his host, and the host of the whole chnrcli (Rom. 
xvi: 23). Paul speaks of him as an eminent Christian, 
distinguished for his Hospitality to those who went about 
preaching the gospel. « 

The apostle John expresses his affectionate joy at this 
and other evidences of his piety, and cautions him against 
the ambitious and turbulent practices of Diotrephes, and 
strongly recommends Demetrius to his friendship, deferring 
what he further had to say to a personal interview. 

§ 8. Introduction to Jude's Letter, addressed "to 
the called, beloved in God the Father, and kept by Jesus 
Christ. " — Conaat. (See Index; also Chronology, Chapter 
XXXV: §7.) 

GOLDEN" TOPIC, "AGAINST SCHISM." 

Jude (ver. 1) was one of the apostles, and brother of 
James the Less. He is called Judas Matt, xiii: 55; John, 
xiv: 22; Acts, i: 13; and elsewhere Lebbeus (Matt, x: 3), 
and Thaddeus (Mark, iii: 18). 

As to the time and place of the writing of his epistle, all 
is conjecture. It is supposed, however, to have been writ- 
ten soon after that of 2 Peter, as a large portion, from ver. 
3 to 16, is almost identical with 2 Peter, ii: 1-19, and 
which was written A. D. 67. 

(a.) " The Design of this epistle is to guard the church 
against those false teachers who had insinuated themselves 
into it, and to contend with the utmost earnestness for the 
true faith, against the dangerous tenets which they dissem- 
inated, resolving the whole of Christianity into a specula- 
tive belief and outward profession of the gospel. 

It will be observed that nearly all of the general letters, 
and those written in the last half of the first century, have 



338 GENERAL LETTERS. 

much to say about false teachers, guarding the early Chris- 
tians against being led away by them. Hence we see the 
great design in them, and they are of no less value to us. 
With them, too, we can better understand the history of 
the church down along the ages to the present time. 

(b. ) Sure Punishment of the Wicked. One of the perverse 
things which these corrupt teachers spoke, for the purpose 
of alluring the wicked, was that God was so good that he 
will not punish men for indulging those natural appetites 
which he has himself implanted in them, nor be displeased 
with them for committing a few sins, which can do him 
no harm, but which are necessary to their present happi- 
ness. Wherefore, to show the impiety and falsehood of that 
doctrine, and to secure the disciples from being seduced by 
it, the apostle, by facts recorded in Scripture, proved that, as 
God already punished the angels who sinned, notwithstand- 
ding their dignity, and the antediluvians, notwithstanding 
their number, so will he at length most assuredly punish 
all obstinate sinners in the severest manner." — Nicholls. 

This epistle seems to have been written to guard the 
early disciples against what seems to have been introduced 
about this time, namely: universal salvation based on the 
love of God. From the great danger of the early Chris- 
tians adopting this doctrine, this apostle makes very clear 
the fallacy of it. First, he states in ver. 4 what they are 
guilty of who hold to this doctrine: "turning the grace of 
God into lasciviousness, and denying the Lord;" and sec- 
ond, citing no less than three cases to illustrate how Gk)d 
did not spare: (I) the Egyptians, ver. 5; (II) the angels, 
ver. 6; (III) Sodom and Gomorrah, ver. 7, which were 
destroyed by fire from heaven, and their inhabitants eon- 
signed to the same "everlasting fire prepared for the devil 
and his angels." Upon all such Jude pronounces a woe 
(ver. 11). He says: "These are spots in your feasts of 



Oh. XXXIV. lesson xxi. 339 

charity." * The conversation of men who held such doc- 
trine were spots or blemishes ; that is, a disgrace and 
reproach. 

(c.) Last Admonition. The apostle now admonishes 
them, further, to remember the prophecy of Enoch spoken 
of by the apostles: "How * * * there should come 
mockers in the last time, who should walk after their own 
ungodly lusts; " then concludes with a prayer and doxology. 

LESSOR XXL 

/. famu : Mcuik and Woik. @£ W. 62 

2. id Mel : Hedience and @Pa£ence. " 6d 

3. 2d 9t'kl : JFahe ^eache-to. " 66 
\ Jf. hi John : (ghiid oia ^idvocaie. " (j6 

5. 2d John: §o (gkiiMLan eModhm. u (j6 

6. 3d John: ^o^fwlatUxf. " (jj 
H. fade : ^laaind ifch'mn. " 66 






^ 



SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

What is theMiame of the fourth New Testament division? 
What relation do these letters sustain to Paul's doctrinal 
epistles? (Oh. XXXIV: § 1.) How many are there of 
these general letters? By whom was the first one written? 
The second? etc. 

Who was this James? (§2.) What is the golden topic 
of his epistle? (Jas. ii: 14-26.) To whom was it addressed? 

* These, according to Dr. Benson, were frugal meals provided by 
the richer Christians to entertain the poor, the fatherless, the widow 
and stranger. 



340 future: revelation. 

(Jas. i: .1.) Where were the twelve tribes? (Acts, ii: 5.) 
About what time was it written? What was the prevailing 
error of the times? Where was it written? 

By whom was the second letter written? To whom was 
it addressed? (§ 3.) It was written from Avhere? (§ 3, a.) 
About when was it written? What is the golden topic? 
What is the general characteristic? (§ 3, b.) 

Who wrote the third epistle? (§ 4.) 

Note. This and the following letters should be treated as the 
above, bringing out the golden topic, the writer, when and where 
written, and the occasion. Review. 



CHAPTER XXXV. 

FUTURE - RE V EL ATIOK 

§ 1. Introduction to the Revelation of Jesus 
Christ to John, on Patinos, A. I). !)?. Addressed 

"to the seven churches which are in Asia." (See Index; 
also Chronology, Chap. XXXV: § 7.) 

(a.) The Writer. The apostle John wrote this book 
when "in the isle that is called Patmos." Thither he was 
banished by Home's cruel emperor, Domitian, "for the 
word of God, and for the testimony of Jesus Christ." 
This island is in the iEgean Sea, about thirty miles west of 
Miletus; a small, rocky island, about eighteen miles in cir- 
cumference, which, on account of its dreary and desolate 
character, was u^cd by the Roman emperors as a place of 
confinement for criminals. Eere it was that John, aboul 
1)7 A. D., in his old age, and perhaps 30 years after the 
other apostles had gone to their rest, had the revelation 
recorded in this book. 



Oil. XXXV: § 2. THREE GOLDEN" TOPICS. 341 

(b.) To Whom Addressed. Says Fausset: "The inscrip- 
tion states that it was addressed to the seven churches of 
Asia. John's reason for fixing on the number seven was, 
doubtless, because seven is the sacred number implying 
totality and universality; so it is implied that John, 
through the medium of the seven churches, addresses in 
the spirit the church of all places and ages. The church, 
in its various states of spiritual life or deadness, in all ages 
and places, is represented by the seven churches, and is ad- 
dressed with words of consolation or warning accordingly." 

(c.) The Object. It begins with admonitory addresses 
to the seven churches from the Divine Son of Man, whom 
John saw in vision; after a brief introduction which sets 
forth the main subject of the book, viz: to "show unto 
his servants things which must shortly come to pass " (ch. 
i-iii). Chap, iv describes the throne of God; and following 
to the end is mainly prophecy, with practical exhortations 
and consolations similar to those addressed to the seven 
churches. 

The Jews had a succession of prophets who guided them 
with the light of prophecy; what their prophets were to 
them, that the apocalyptic Scriptures have been and are 
to us. ' 

Says Gilpin: "We, in the same manner, look to these 
prophecies of the apocalypse for the full consummation of 
the great scheme of the gospel." 

§ 2. Three Golden Topics. 

I. "Christ Seen in Glory." Chap. i. 

II. "Letters to the Seven Churches." Chap, ii, iii. 

III. Prophecy, "From Pentecost to Christ's Second 
Coming," or end of the world. Chap, iv-xxii. See Index. 

(a.) Introduction to Topic I. "Christ Seen in Glory." 
Christ appears to have been seen three times after his 
ascension. First, by the martyr Stephen, A. D. 33. Under 



342 future: revelation. 

the cruel hand of persecution, "he, being full of the Holy 
Ghost, looked up steadfastly into heaven;" and with coun- 
tenance radiant with glory he says: "Behold, I see the 
heavens opened, and the Son of Man standing on the right 
hand of God. " Second, by the young man at whose feet 
the witnesses laid down their clothes when they stoned 
Stephen, "whose name was Saul," about three years after- 
wards as he was on a journey of persecution to Damascus 
(Acts, ix: 1-9). And third, about sixty years thereafter, he 
appears in his glory and majesty to the apostle John, in his 
lonely rock-bound island home in the Grecian Archipelago. 
"It was fitting that, when forbidden to go beyond certain 
bounds of the earth's lands, he was permitted to penetrate 
the secrets of heaven." 

Outline Topic I (Chap. i). 

Chap, i : 1. John writes his revelation to the seven churches 
of Asia (Proconsular Asia), signified by the seven golden 
candlesticks. 7. Assurance is given of the second coming 
of Christ in majesty and power. 13. Christ appears in 
person to John and talks with him, and a description is 
given of the glorious majesty of his appearance. 

(b.) Introduction to Topic II. "Letters to the Seven 
Churches." This part contains the messages to the seven 
churches of Asia, as "descriptive of the state of those seven 
as they tuere then, and as designed to furnish encourage- 
ment, reproofs, warnings and counsels to alt other churches 
and Christians in all future ages, as their cases are found 
to resemble theirs; for every one in every age, * that hat h 
an ear to hear/ is called to 'hear what the Spirit saith to 
the churches." — A Fuller. 

Christ seemed desirous to append to what had already 
been written in the gospels and epistles that which is found 
in the two chapters of this division, for the benefit of the 
churches established throughout the world: while Topic III 
refers to prophecy, relating more to the future of the seven 



Ch. XXXV: § 3. introduction to topic hi. 343 

representatiye churches. This topic relates to "the things 
which are." The things which the apostle was commanded 
to write were of a threefold nature, the first being those 
which he had seen, the second those which icere, and third 
those which should be hereafter. Thus is designed to be 
given a bird's-eye view, as it were, of the state of religion 
and the fortunes of the church, not merely from the time 
when the vision came to John, but from the time when 
the church was established to the end of the world. 

I. Outline Topic II (Chap, ii, iii). 

Chap. ii. "What is commanded to be written to the angels, 
that is, to the ministers, of the churches of Ephesus, Smyr- 
na, Pergamos, Thyatira; and what is commended or found 
wanting in them. 

Chap. iii. The minister of the church of Sardis is re- 
proved, exhorted to repent, and threatened if he does not 
repent. The minister of the church of Philadelphia is 
approved for his diligence and patience. The minister of 
the church of Laodicea is rebuked for being neither hot 
nor cold, and is admonished to repent and to be more 
zealous. Christ is willing to restore on repentance. Glori- 
ous promises are made to overcomers. 

§ 3. Introduction to Topic III. "The whole of 
chapter iv is introductory to what follows. The scene of 
the vision is the throne of God and the heavenly world. 
A door being opened, the apostle is invited to enter in. 
Having entered, he finds himself under prophetic inspira- 
tion. He was still in the isle of Patmos, while wrapped up 
by divine inspiration, and introduced into the immediate 
presence of God. In this state of mind he beheld the 
' Throne,' and one 'sitting upon it, who was the supreme 
disposer of all the concerns of creatures. Such a sight 
would impress him with the conviction that whatever 
should befall the church, or the world, it was all according 



344 future: revelation. 

to his will who ruled in the armies of heaven and among 
the inhabitants of the earth. No description is given of 
God, only that his glory seemed to resemble the' luster of 
precious stones. A rainbow was around the throne, in 
appearance like an emerald. 

Having spoken of the King Eternal, sitting on his 
throne, he next describes his retinue: the four and twenty 
elders, clothed in white, with crowns of gold on their 
heads; the lightnings and thunderings and voices. Be- 
sides these, there were 'seven lamps of fire before the 
throne/ which are said to be 'the seven Spirits of God.' 
Following this is what he saw before the throne, which 
was a 'sea of glass clear as crystal.' Four beasts (or living- 
creatures) are now introduced in the scene. The descrip- 
tion of the living creatures as bearing resemblance to 
certain animals, and as having each six wings which were 
full of eyes within, would naturally express their useful 
properties, particularly the union of zeal with knowledge, 
and their unceasing ascriptions of glory to God. The 
elders were crowned, but they cast their crowns before the 
throne. Such appears to be the scene ami scenery of this 
preparatory vision." — A. Fuller. 

(a.) "From Pentecost to Chrisfs S<><'<ni<l Coming" 
"From the beginning," says Henry, "the church of God 
has been blessed with prophecy. That glorious prediction 
of breaking the serpent's head was the stay of the Patri- 
archal age; and the many prophecies of the Messiah to 
come were the gospel of the Old Testament. Christ him- 
self prophesied of the destruction of Jerusalem, and con- 
cerning the time of its accompli hment. It was he who 
entrusted the apostle John with the hook of Revelation, 
and to deliver it to the church, as a prediction of the most 
important events that should happen to it to the end of 
time, for the supporl of the faith of bis people, and the 
direction of their hope. " 



Ch. XXXV: § 4. six general parts. 345 

Thus is Christ the great prophet. Says Fuller: "Christ 
is the great prophet of the church. He it was, as we shall 
see, that was found worthy to open the sealed book. As 
divine, he knows all things; as a prophet, he receives his 
messages frdm the Father and makes them known to us." 

§ 4. Six General Parts. The following is an out- 
line of Topic III, as given by Dr.Wm. Smith. He divides 
it into six parts: 

Part I. Chap, v-viii: 1. The seven seals opened. 

Part II. Chap, viii: 2-xi. The seven trumpets sounded. 

Part III. Chap, xii-xiv. The three enemies, the dragon, 
the beast, the false prophet, warring against the church. 

Part IV. Chap, xiv-xvi. The seven vials poured out. 

Part V. Chap, xvii-xx. The three enemies of the church 
overthrown. 

Part VI. Chap, xxi-xxii. The new heavenly Jerusalem. 

Note. The central objects are the seals, trumpets and vials; the 
visions of the dragon, the beasts, the false prophet, etc. , being inter- 
woven as introductory and supplementary scenes. 

(a.) Outline Part I. The seven seals opened. 

Chap. v. The book sealed with seven seals, which only 
the Lamb that was slain is worthy to open. Therefore the 
elders praise him, and confess that he redeemed them with 
his blood. 

Chap. vi. The opening of the seals in order, and what 
followed thereupon, containing a prophecy to the end of 
the w T orld. 

Chap, vii, viii: 1. An angel seals the servants of God in 
their foreheads. The number of them that were sealed: 
of the tribes of Israel a certain number; of all other na- 
tions an innumerable multitude, which stand before the 
throne, clad in white robes, and palms in their hands. 
Their robes were w r ashed in the blood of the Lamb. 



346 FUTUfiE: REVELATION. 

(b.) Outline Part II. The seven trumpets sounded. 

Chap, viii: 2. At the opening of the seventh seal, seven 
angels had seven trumpets given them. Four of them 
sound their trumpets, and great plagues follow. Another 
angel puts incense to the prayers of the 'saints on the 
golden altar. 

Chap. ix. At the sounding of the fifth angel a star falls 
from heaven, to whom is given the key of the bottomless 
pit. He opens the pit, and there come forth locusts like 
scorpions. The first woe past. The sixth trumpet is 
sounded. Four angels are let loose, that were bound. 

Chap. x. A mighty, strong angel appears with an open 
book in his hand. He swears by him that liveth forever 
that there shall be no more time. John is commanded to 
take and eat the book. 

Chap. xi. Two witnesses prophesy. They have power 
to shut heaven, that it rain not. The beast shall fight 
against them, and kill them. They lie unburied, and after 
three days and a half .rise again. The second woe is past. 
The seventh trumpet sounds. 

(c.) Outline Part III. The three enemies, the dragon, 
the beast, the false prophet, warring against the church. 

Chap. xii. A woman clothed with the sun travaileth. 
The great red dragon stands before her, ready to devour 
her child; when she Avas delivered she flees into the wilder- 
ness. Michael and his angels fight with the dragon, and 
prevail. The dragon, being cast down into the earth, 
persecutes the woman. 

Chap. xiii. A beast rises out of the sea, witli seven heads 
and ten horns, to whom the dragon gives his power. An- 
other beast comes up out of the earth; causes an image to 
be made of the former beast, and that men should worship 
it, and receive his mark. 

Chap. xiv. The Lamb standing on Mount Sion with his 
company. An angel preaches the gospel. The fall of 



Ch. XXX Y: § 4. six general parts. 347 

Babylon. The harvest of the world, and putting in of the 
sickle. The vintage and wine press of the wrath of God. 

(d.) Outline Part IV. The seven vials poured out. 

Chap. xv. The seven angels with the seven last plagues. 
The song of them that overcome the beast. The seven 
vials full of the wrath of God. 

Chap. xvi. The angels pour out their vials full of wrath. 
The plagues that follow thereupon. Christ comes as a 
thief. Blessed are they that watch. 

(e.) Outline Part V. The three enemies of the church 
■overthrown. 

Chap. xvii. A woman arrayed in purple and scarlet, with 
a golden cup in her hand, sits upon the beast, which is 
great Babylon, the mother of all abominations. The in- 
terpretation of the seven heads and the ten horns. The 
punishment of the harlot. The victory of the Lamb. 

Chap, xviii. Babylon is fallen. The people of God com- 
manded to depart out of her. The kings of the earth, 
with the merchants and mariners, lament over her. The 
saints rejoice for the judgments of God upon her. 

Chap. xix. God is praised in heaven for judging the 
great harlot and avenging the blood of his saints. The 
marriage of the Lamb. The angel will not be worshiped. 
The birds called to the great slaughter. 

Chap. xx. Satan bound for a thousand years. The first 
resurrection; they blessed that have part therein. Satan 
let loose again. Gog and Magog. The devil cast into the 
lake of fire and brimstone. The last and general resurrec- 
tion. 

(/.) Outline Part VI. The new heavenly Jerusalem. 

Chap. xxi. A new heaven and a new earth. The heavenly 
Jerusalem, with a full description thereof. She needs no 
sun; the glory of God is her light. The kings of the earth 
bring their riches unto her. 



348 future: revelation. 

Chap. xxii. The river of the water of life. The tree of 
life. The light of the city of God is himself. The angel 
will not be worshiped. Nothing may be added to the word 
of God, nor taken from it. 

§ 5. Purpose of this Prophecy. With reference to 
this third topic (ch. v to end), (Jobbin remarks: " The rest 
of this book is very difficult to explain, and can only in 
part be understood by those of riper years, and who will 
study and pray over it. We have already said, on the 
prophecies, that they are written in dark terms on pur- 
pose, because otherwise all the world would know them; 
and they are only designed to be a guide to those who wish 
to know the mind of God, and mark his providence in his 
dealings with his church. 

In the eight chapters, the seven seals which were opened, 
and the seven trumpets which were blown, are descriptions 
of seven periods of Christ's church on earth, and the divi- 
sions of those periods. They tell of the setting up of 
Christ's kingdom in the world; of the triumphs of pagan- 
ism, rise and fall of popery, and other great errors; of the 
final triumph of the gospel; the happy state of the church 
of Christ; the day of judgment; and the eternal blessed- 
ness of the saints." 

§ 6. Conclusion. We have now finished the subject 
of the sacred books, bringing out the golden topic of each, 
which forms "The Golden Chain of Topics," with other 
matter, such as the time and place of writing, and the 
circumstances of the writers in their surroundings, which 
adds much to a correct understanding of what is written: 
hoping it may assist, not only the ordinary Bible reader, 
but also the Sunday school teacher in his arduous and 
responsible work, and that we may so finish our life's work 
that when we have done it may be said of us: " Well done, 
thou good ami faithful servant; thou hast been faithful 



Oh. XXXV: § ?. chronology 349 

over a few things, I will make thee ruler over many things; 
enter thou into the joy of thy Lord." 

§ 7. Chronology of the Books of the New Testa- 
ment. 

LIFE OF CHRIST. £-£ a.d. 

Matthew, "Kingship" for the Jew. 
From the birth of Christ, A. D. 1,* - 
To the ascension of Christ, A. D. 33 (see Chap. 

XXVIII: g 1),- - - - - . .33 

Mark, " Servant, " for the Roman. 
From the preaching of the Baptist, A. D. 30, ■ - 
To the ascension of Christ, A. D. 33 (see Chap. 

XXIX: § 1), 3 

Luke, "Humanity," for the Greek. 
From the conception of the Baptist, A. D. 1, 
To the ascension of Christ, A. D. 33 (see Chap. 

XXX: § 1), --_... 33 

John, "Divinity," for the Christian. 
From the preaching of the Baptist, A. D. 30, 
To the ascension of Christ, A. D. 33 (see Chap. 

XXXI: § 1), ------ 3 



33 



ACTS, "Church History." (See Chap. 
XXXII: § 1.) 
From the Ascension and Pentecost, A. D. 33, 
To Paul's first imprisonment in Rome, - - 29 



62 



* As the birth year of Christ, Christendom adopts the calculations 
of Dionysius Exiguus in the sixth century, which assumes his birth 
to have occurred in 754 U. C. (year of Rome). This date is 4 years 
too late; for Christ was born shortly previous to the death of Herod 
the Great, who died 751 U. C. 



350 NEW TESTAMENT CHRONOLOGY. 

LEADING CHARACTERS AND TOPICS. SoryA.D. 

The Apostles; Pentecost; Peter's sermon; 3,000 
•converted ; church organized ; deacons chosen ; 
Stephen and Philip; Saul of Tarsus; Cornelius, 
the first Gentile convert; persecution by Herod; 
Paul and Barnabas sent to the Gentiles; speech 
of James in the first council held at Jerusalem, 
concerning circumcision. 



PAUL'S LETTERS. 

Paul's first journey, A. D. 44 to 50, - 6 

Paul's second journey. When at Corinth writes 
his first letter to the church at Thessalonica, 
A. D. 52, and his second in A. D. 53 {see §§ 5, 6), 3 

'Paul's third journey. When at Ephesus writes 
his first and second letters to the church at Cor- 
inth, A. D. 57; also writes to the church at Gal- 
atia, and in A. D. 58 to the church at Rome {see 
§§ 8, 10, 11, 12), 5 

Paul's fourth journey. When in prison at Rome 
writes to Philemon, also to the churches at Col- 
osse, Ephesus and Philippi, A. D. 62 [see Chap. 
XXXIII: §§ 1, 2, 3, 4), 4 62 

Paul's fifth journey. When in Macedonia writes 
his first letter to Timothy, A. D. 6T] the same 
year, when at Ephesus, writes to Titus; and dur- 
ing his last imprisonment at Rome writes his 
second and last letter to Timothy, just before his 
execution, A. D. 68 {see §§ 5, 6, 7, b), - 6 

Paul's letter to the Hebrews is supposed to have 68 

been written about the close of his first imprison- 
ment at Rome, A. D. 62 or 3. {See § 9.) 



Ch. XXXV: § 7. chronology. 351 

GENERAL LETTERS. (See Ch, XXXIV: §1.) ^a.d. 

James, "Faith and Works." 68 

Addressed to "the twelve tribes scattered 
abroad." Written from Jerusalem, A. D. 62. 
(See §2.) 

Peter's First Letter, "Obedience and Patience." 

Addressed "to the elect strangers scattered 

throughout Poirtus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia and 

Bithynia, Written from Rome, A. D. 65. (See § 3.) 

Peter's Second Letter, "False Teachers." 
Addressed "to those who have obtained like 
precious faith." Written from Rome, A. D. 6Q. 
(Seel'4,) 

Jude's Letter, "Against Schism." 
Addressed "to the called, beloved of God the 
Father, and kept by Jesus Christ." Unknown 
where written, A. D. 66. (See § 8.) 

IxTERni, 28 years, ------ 28 

John's First Letter, "Christ our Advocate." 96 

Addressed "to Christians of every denomina- 
tion and country." — Mackniglit. Written from 
Ephesus, A. D. 96. (See §.5.) 

Johx's Second Letter, "To Christian Mothers." 
Addressed "to a noble Christian mother and 
her children." Written from Ephesus, A. D. 96. 
(See § 6.) 

John's Third Letter, "Hospitality." 
Addressed to Gaius, supposed to be the treas- 
urer of the city of Corinth. Written from Ephesus, 
A. D. 97 (see%% - - - - - - 1_ 

97 



352 



LESSON XXII. 



REVELATION. 

I. "Christ Seen in Glory." 

II. "Letters to the Seven Churches." 

III. " Prophecy, from Pentecost to Christ's Sec- 
ond Coming, or End of the World." 

A Revelation of Jesus Christ to John, on Pat- 
mos. Addressed to the seven churches which are 
in Asia, A. D. 97, ------ 



Yrs. of . n 
history ^-' u ' 



97 



LESSOR XXII 



■| rv. 

s 1 






f>. 



(gkiid ifeen in Wont. Mev., (gli. i. 
SBzMm 4o 4ke Sfev-en (ghuicheb. (gh. ii=iii. 

(^nitoduciim 4o HPiokhecu. (gh. iv. 

Jfoom ®Pen4tcod 4o fudgmen4. (gin. v=xxii. 

Third Golden Topic, 
ifmtn ifeaL f/iened. (gh. v=viii : /. 
Seven §imnjie4^ Sounded, (gh. viii : ?=ri. 
§hiee §nemwb oi 4he (ghmeh. (gh. xii=xtv. 
ifeven Tiah iPomed tu4. till, xv-=xvi. 



mee (pnemm 



'em 



0vet4/i 

k 



nown. 



wven< 



'AMalem 



xrtt^x.r. 
//. xxi-xxu. 



a 



-SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. ^ 

Note. Review. Call out the several divisions up to this lesson. 

Who was the writer of the book of Revelation? (Rev. i: 
4.) To whom was it written? (Rev. i: 4.) Where? When? 

(Ref. Bible.) How many golden topios are found in this 



Ch. XXXV. lessor xxii. 353 

book? (Ch. XXXV: § 2.) What is the first? Where 
found? The second? Where found? The third? Where 
found? 

Note. Chapter iv is an introduction to the prophecy which fol- 
lows, and cannot be understood without it, as many references are 
made to it. 

How came John on Patmos? Why banished? (Key. i : 9. ) 
Where and what kind of an island was it? (§ 1, a.) Whom 
did he see there? On what day of the week? (Rev. i: 10.) 
Do we read of his haying been seen in glory by any other 
persons? (§ 2, a.) 

How many churches were addressed? Why do you think 
the number seven was used? (§ 1, ft.) What do the seven 
churches represent? 

What particular use is made of chapter iv of Revelation? 
(§ 3.) What are the leading topics of this chapter? 

Note. Have the class read the analysis as found in the Reference 
Bible. 

Of what does the third golden topic consist? Axs. 
Revelation. (§ 3, a.) Into how many general parts may it 
be divided? (§4.) 

Note. Place bracket and numbers on the board. Have the class 
read the analysis of the chapters in Part I, and from it decide as to 
the leading thought, "Seven Seals Opened," etc. The following 
parts may be treated the same way. Close the lesson with what is 
said of the Illustrated Index in the following chapter. 



354 ILLUSTRATED INDEX CONCLUDED. 

CHAPTER XXXVI. 
ILLUSTRATED INDEX CONCLUDED. 

"We will now return to the Index, to where we find the 

word 

" Meridian." Moving upward from thence, we find 
a reference to Malachi, iv: 2: "Unto you that fear my 
name shall the Sun of Righteousness arise with healing 
in his wings." As we now pass up this line, our attention 
is arrested by 

" Interim 400 Years. 5 ' The significance of this 
term will he seen by referring to the date of the book of 
Malachi. We find that nearly 400 years elapsed between 
the close of the Old Testament Scriptures and its fulfill- 
ment in the New. Notwithstanding this lapse of years, 
where the Old concludes the New Testament begins. Mal- 
achi and Luke (the historian) are linked together in their 
subjects. Compare Mai. iv: 5, with Luke, ch. i. 

We now pass up the meridian line to the 

Index Hand, pointing to the reference "John, i: 29- 
37." We here find the Savior formally introduced to the 
world by John the Baptist, as we would introduce friend 
to friend, with the words: "Behold the Lamb of God, 
which taketh away the sin of the world." Again, the next 
day after this, while the Baptist is at Bethabara surrounded 
by his disciples, Christ, as he approaches, is introduced to 
than as the one of whom he is the forerunner, and he says: 
"Behold the Lamb of God.'' It was then that the disciples 
followed him. 

We have now reached the objet I for which the Bible was 
given to the world, viz: the introduction of Christ, the 



Oh. XXXVI. ILLUSTRATED INDEX CONCLUDED. 355 

Savior, to fallen man. In accordance with this thought, 
and the thought as brought out in the quotation from 
Malachi, the sphere is now surmounted with an emblem- 
atical presentation of the 

" Sun of Righteousness," with radiations represent- 
ing Christ as the "Light, which lighteth every man 
that cometh into the world." John, i: 9. Within this 
may be seen a 

Cross, upon which the "Lamb of Cod" was slain 
as the world's Kedeemer. This redemption, sufficient for 
the ivhole world, is yet only beneficial to those who are 
willing to acknowledge him as their Savior. (Matt, x: 38.) 
Just here we are carried back to the scenes of Calvary. 
We behold him as he is suspended upon the cross. We 
recall the three days of sadness and gloom, when hope 
sank within the hearts of that little band of disciples, and 
the finger of scorn and derision everywhere pointing to 
them, taunting' them with: "Where is he now in whom 
you trusted?" 

Disintegration immediately takes place among the disci- 
ples. We find one going this way, another that. Disheart- 
ened as they were, they cared not to meet even a fellow 
disciple. The place where they were wont to meet had 
lost its attractions. Some are found on their way to 
Emmaus, and, when in conversation with one whom they 
supposed to be a stranger, say: "But we trusted that it 
had been he which should have redeemed Israel. " 

But soon the glorious light of the 

(i Resurrection " dispels the darkness. On the morn- 
ing of the third day joy fills their hearts, and we hear 
them say one to another as they meet: The Lord is risen! 
The Lord is risen from the dead! ! Now we remember 
how he told us, when we were alone with him in that 
upper room in the evening of the fifth day of last week: 



356 ILLUSTRATED INDEX CONCLUDED. 

"A little while, and ye shall not see me; and again a little 
while, and ye shall see me." And we remember, too, how 
he said that "Ye shall weep and lament, but the world 
shall rejoice." Also: "Behold, the hour cometh, yea is 
now come, that ye shall be scattered, every man to his 
own, and shall leave me alone" (John, xvi: 17, 20, 32). 
We also remember how* he said: "But these things have I 
told you, that when the ftime shall come you may remember 
that I told you of them" (ver. 4). "How that he must 
go up to Jerusalem, and suffer many things of the elders 
and chief priests and scribes, and be killed, and be raised 
again the third day" (Matt, xvi: 21). 

The tomb could hold its victim no longer. Death and 
the grave are vanquished. The "Sun of Righteousness" 
has arisen over the sin-fettered world "with healing in 
his wings." The last and crowning act in the drama of 
redemption's work is now accomplished. Hence light can 
emanate from the cross only as it radiates through the 
resurrection, which is the ground of our faith. So Paul 
considered it; for, in writing from Ephesus to the church 
at Corinth, he said: "And if Christ be not raised, your 
faith is vain; ye are yet in your sins" (1 Cor. xv: 17). Not 
till the resurrection morning did light radiate from the 
cross. 

The early disciples met on the first day of the week to 
celebrate this greatest of all events, the resurrection of 
Christ from the dead. It has been handed down through 
all the ages to us. May we bear in mind this great fact, 
that it is the Lord's day. And, "like as Christ was raised 
up from the dead by the glory of the Father," even so may 
we "walk in newness of life," that at the last we may 
assuredly " KNOW THE POWER OF Ills RESURRECTION. " 



Ch. XXXVII: § 1. LNHEKITA^CE DESCRIBED. 35? 

CHAPTER XXXVII.* 
ABSTRACT OF THE TITLE 

OF A CHKISTIAis T JTO HIS HEAVENLY INHERITANCE. 

§ 1. The Inheritance Described. (See Preface to 
New Testament, Chap. XX VII: § 1.) It is in the city of 
the Xew Jerusalem, which city is described as having a 
great wall surrounding it, 144 cubits high, and haying 12 
gates and 12 foundations. The city is square, and meas- 
ures 12,000 furlongs in length on each side. Its streets 
are of pure gold, it is brilliantly lighted, its gates are of 
pearl, its magnificence is inexpressible, and all its appoint- 
ments perfect. Read Rev. xxi: 10-24. 

This city has many mansions, and the inheritance is an 
everlasting home among them. John, xiv: 2. 

The Ruler and Governor of this city is so pure and 
holy, the city itself so honorable, and its inhabitants so 
exemplary and select, that nothing can enter the city that 
may in any way dishonor or defile it, notwithstanding its 
gates are always open. Read Rev. xxi: 23-27. 

The. names of those entitled to enter and occupy the 
several palaces and mansions are all entered and registered 
in a book entitled "The Lamb's Book of Life." Rev. 
xxi: 27. 

Through .the city there flows a river of pure water, com- 
mencing at the Governor's abode. It is well supplied with 

* The importance of having the reader know whether he is entitled 
to a share in this inheritance, spoken of in the last two chapters of 
Revelation, is the object of this concluding chapter. It is gathered 
from a tract published by the American Tract Society many years 
ago, and long since out of print; but from its real worth as & rule by 
which the Christian may compare or measure his life, it is invaluable. 



358 ABSTKACT OF THE TITLE. 

fruit, for among others a peculiar tree, called the "tree of 
life," bears twelve kinds of fruit monthly, and its leaves 
are medicinal. Rev. xxii: 1, 2. 

The city is exceedingly healthy, so much so that death 
is never known, and neither sickness nor disease occurs. 
Happiness is so continual and universal that neither weep- 
ing nor sorrow is known. Eev. xxi: -1. 

§ 2. The Inheritance is Imperishable, and held 

in reserve for the one entitled to it. "An inheritance 
incorruptible, undefiled, and that fadeth not away, reserved 
in heaven for you. " 1 Peter, i : 4. 

§ 3. The Title to this Inheritance is derived by 
gift, from the One who was the entire and absolute owner 
thereof. 

He gave it to his only Son. 

(a.) A memorandum from the record of this gift is as 
follows: "His Sok", whom he hath appointed heir of all 
things." Read Heb. i: 2-10. 

(#.) This Son's name was Jesus Chkist; and it pleased 
his Father, for his Son's sake, to adopt certain children 
and make them joint heirs with his Son. 

This is clear from satisfactory record thereof, as will now 
be shown: 

Rom. viii: 15-17. "Ye have received the spirit of adop- 
tion, whereby we cry Abba, Father. The Spiril itself 
beareth witness with our spirits that Ave are the children 
of God; and if children, then heirs; heirs of God and 
joint heirs with Christ." 

See also Gal. iii: 26. "For ye are all the children of God 
by faith in Christ Jesus." iv: 5-7. "Thai ye might re- 
ceive the adoption of sons. And because ye are sons, God 
hath sent forth the Spirit of his Son into your hearts, 
crying Abba, Father. And if a son. then an heir of God 
through Christ." 



Oh. XXXVII: § 4. adoption and heikship. 359 

See also 1 John, iii: 1. "Behold what manner of love 
the Father hath bestowed upon us r that we should be 
called the sons of God." 

See also John, i: 12. " To them gave he power to become 
the sons of God, even to them that believe on his name." 

§ 4. Adoption and Heirship. A Christian is an 
adopted child, and therefore a joint heir to this inherit- 
ance. Proof thereof, to show that he has the requisites 
necessary to identify him as an adopted child: 

(a.) A new birth is necessary. John, iii: 3. "Except a 
man be born again, he cannot see the kingdom of God." 

(b. ) A belief on the name of his Son is necessary. John, 
i: 12. "As many as received him, to them gave he power 
to become the sons of God, even to them that believe on 
his name." See also John, iii: 16. " Whosoever believeth 
on him should not perish, but have everlasting life." 

(c.) A Christian does believe on his name, and has the 
new birth. 

(I.) He has so given himself up to Jesus Christ as to 
become identified with him in all moral characteristics. 

(II. ) He cherishes no desires, hopes or aspirations except 
such as are in accordance with his wishes and interests. 

(III.) He bears the fruits of the Spirit, such as love, 
gentleness, etc. 

(IV.) "He visits the widow and fatherless in their afflic- 
tion, and keeps himself unspotted from the world." 

(V.) His entire life is in unison with the wishes and 
will of his Father. He dreads his displeasure and desires 
his favor, has a regard for his excellency, submits to his 
will, is grateful for his benefits, sincere in devotion to him, 
and conscientious in obeying his commands. 

Wherefore it clearly appears that a Christian is an adopted 
son and joint heir with Jesus Christ, and as such entitled 
to the inheritance. 



360 ABSTEACT OF THE TITLE. 

§ 5. Surety of Possession. Is a Christian certain 
of receiving the possession of this inheritance? Yes; it is 
"held in reserve" for him. 1 Peter, i: 4. "Reserved in 
heaven for yon." 

When ~ an estate is held in reserve, then such estate is 
kept for the future use of those entitled to its possession. 

Where heirs are mutually interested, then the occupancy 
and enjoyment of the estate by some of them cannot by 
lapse of time create a possession adverse to the other heirs. 

The Heavenly Inheritance is held in reserve for the 
future use of a Christian by Jesus Christ, who so preserves 
the same that no waste, decay nor time can depreciate the 
estate. 

It is well understood that the will of the Son is all- 
powerful. He said, "Let there be light," and there was 
light. 

All things were made by the word of his power, and were 
given into his hands. Read the record: John, i: 2, 3; 
xiii: 3; Heb. i: 2-10. 

Jesus Christ, as joint heir, is now in possession: and that 
he exercises his will and power on behalf of every Chris- 
tian is evident from the record. 

"Father, I will that they also whom thou hast given me 
may be with me where I am." John, xvii: 24. 

Also the record says: "He that overcometh shall inherit 
all things; and I will be his God, and he shall be my son." 
Rev. xxi: 7. 

§ 6. Is the Inheritance Real ! Yes. The follow- 
ing are proofs: 
John saw it from Patmos. See Rev. i: 9. 

kk 1 was in the Spirit on the Lord's day. and heard a voice 
saving. k What, thou seest write.'" Head Rev. i: 10. 11. 

And he "showed me the groat city, the Holy Jerusa- 
lem." Rev. xxi: 10. 



Ch. XXXVII: § 7. signatures and witnesses. 361 

Paul saw it, and says he was "caught up into the third 
heavens (paradise) and heard unspeakable words, which it 
was not lawful (possible) for a man to utter." 2 Cor. xii: 
4. Eead Luke, xxiii: 43; also 1 Cor. ii: 9. 

Elisha caught a glimpse thereof when he cried, "Lo, the 
chariot of Israel and the horsemen thereof," while Elijah 
was caught up into it by a whirlwind and a fiery chariot. 
2 K. ii: 12. 

' ' For the Lord called unto him (Moses) out of the midst 
of the cloud, and the sight of the glory of God was like 
devouring fire/' etc. Read Exodus, xxiv: 16-18. 

Abraham sojourned in the land of promise, dwelling in 
tabernacles, "For he looked for a city which hath founda- 
tions, whose builder and maker is Cod." Heb. xi: 10. 

When the Seed of Abraham lay in the Bethlehem man- 
ger, the shepherds on the plains of Judea saw and heard of 
and from this inheritance; for as they were abiding in the 
fields, keeping watch over their flocks by night, "the angel 
of the Lord came upon them;" and suddenly there was 
with the angel a heavenly host, praising God and saying: 
"Peace on earth, and good- will to men." Read Luke, ii: 
8-15. 

Peter and James and John had a glimpse thereof when 
Moses and Elias talked with Christ and he was transfigured 
before them. Read Matt, xvii: 1-5. 

Stephen saw it, and was received up into it. Read Acts, 
vii: 55, 56, 59. 

Above all, the Son himself, "the image of the invisible 
God," by his own incarnation, and the disclosures he made 
while on earth, has demonstrated its existence. Read 
John, i: 1-14; also Eph. iv: 10. 

§ 7. Signatures and Witnesses. Wherefore it clearly 
appears that the Christian's title to his heavenly inheritance 
is certain and undisputed. It is a gift by the Owner to his 



362 ABSTRACT OF THE TITLE. 

adopted child, for the consideration of the love and affec- 
tion which the Owner has and bears to his only Son. 

And the Son is the Mediator of a new covenant, in which 
the Father binds himself to bestow this inheritance on 
Christians. It is an "everlasting" covenant, confirmed by 
a solemn oath registered in heaven. Eead Heb. viii: 6-12. 

The inheritance is real, and is held in reserve, under 
guarantee of all the divine attributes and pledges, that the 
Christian may in due time be in the full possession and 
everlasting enjoyment thereof. Read Heb. vi: 17-20. 

Wherefore the title is certified to be perfect. 

Three that bear ( THE FATHER. 
record in heaven. < THE WORD. 
1 John, v: 7. ( THE SPIRIT. 

Three that bear i THE SPIRIT. 
witness on earth. •] THE WATER. 
1 John, v: 8. ( THE BLOOD. 
Read 1 John, v: 9-11. 



" These three are 
one." 

"These three agree 
in one." 



Ck. XXXVII. lesson xxiii. 363 

LESSOR XXIII. 

. ( dwijiemhaUe, 4 @P. i : Jp. 

/. Wemihiion, mev. xxi: 40=2Jf. \ <st-ji w/> i • 

1 ! I oldie, <$eb. t : 2-40 

\®fldoji4ion, Mom. mii : 45. 

2. memhik, mom. mil: 44. \ a • j <w ■ m 

7 ; ( Joim &fem, mom. miv: 4*]. 

'foriA, John, i: 42. 



3. ^jfew- $!idh, John, Hi : 8. 

4. 'iPioojb, <§lvk, mi: oL 



i: *. 
\id, 2 $oi. xii: 4. 



fohn, Miev-. 



xxt : 40 



V'Hjnodwwb. f of he JFatiiei. 1 



whe&e mtee 
n 



5. .efn Meav-en. 4 John, v : ^ A @fhe Wold. Y 

' ' ' ' \% q>r -j \ Me one. 
y ojhe ¥fmi4. J 

Wdneue*. (ofhe SJiitil 1 " Mhm ilnee 

6. $n @al4h, 4 John, v: L\ of he 'W'edu, \ afiee 

yofhe $j>locd. J in one." 

>j. (^jijfilieaivon, 4 John, v : (j=44. 

SUGGESTIVE QUESTIONS AND NOTES. 

What is the subject of Chapter XXXVII? Where in the 
Bible do yon find a description of it? (§ 1.) Who gives 
this description ? Who was this John ? Where was he 
when he saw it ? What is said of its ruler and governor ? 
Who are entitled to enter this city ? What is said of the 
health of this city ? How enduring is this inheritance ? 
(§ 2.) What is said in the record about it? (1 P. i: 4.) 
How is the right secured to this inheritance? (§3.) 
Note. Bring before the class the subject of this section. 



364 LESSON XXIII. 

What is the subject of § 4? What requirement is neces- 
sary? Where in the record is this requirement found ? 
(John iii: 3.) How may we become the sons of God? 
(§ 4, b.) What are some of the characteristics of a Chris- 
tian? (§ 4, c.) 

Where is the certainty of the Christian receiving this 
inheritance ? (§5.) Where in the record is this found? 
Note. State who it is that holds this inheritance, his power, and 
his request of his Father. 

What proof is there that this inheritance is real? (§ 6.) 
Who is said to be the first who saw it? (Acts, vii: 56.) 
What did Stephen see? Who else saw it? (2 Cor. xii: 4.) 

Note. State to the class what Elisha, Moses and Abraham saw as- 
proofs. 

What is the conclusion as regards the certainty to the 
Christian of this inheritance? (§ 6.) Where is it regis- 
tered? By whom is it certified? Where are the witnesses?" 
What are they? How may we knoiv that we are heirs to 
this inheritance? (1 John, v: 9-11.) Ans. From the 
testimony. 



INDEX. 



365 



INDEX 



Abstract of Christian title to 
Inheritance, 357. 

Acts, introduction to, 281; divi- 
sions of, 283; outline of, 285; 
part iv, 289, 293, 301. 

Adoption and Heirship, 359. 

American Bible Society, 13. 

Amos, 115; outline of, 116. 

Apocalyptic, what it pertains 
to, 63. 

Apocrypha, not inspired, 16. 

Areas of seas and lakes, 3. 

B 

Bible, various names of, 1 ; lands, 
1 ; division into chapter and 
verse, 4; punctuation, 5; age, 
6; preservation, 7; unchang- 
ed, 8; translations, 9; our 
English or King James, 12; 
societies, 13; first printed in 
United States, 14 ; ancient 
versions, 20; inspiration of, 
23; doctrines proof of divine 
origin, 25; writers, 27; inter- 
pretation, 29 ; taught as a sci- 
ence, 36; two grand themes, 
36; two great questions in, 
37; two great parts of, 38; 
two Gr. Gr. Divisions, 44; 
number of books, 47. 



Books, construction of ancient, 3; 
sealing of, 4. 

British and Foreign Bible 
Society, 13. 

o 

Canon, history of, 23. 

Captivity, of Israel, 124; of Ju- 
dah, 127; return from, 168; 
diagram of, 184. 

Christ, character of, 26; corre- 
sponding references in Old 
and New Testament, 45; four 
phases of his life, 61; the 
great expectation, 223. 

Christian, gospel for, 242; char- 
acter and needs of, 269; in- 
heritance, 236, 357. 

Christianity, preparation for, 
229. 

I Chronicles, chapter xxii-xxix, 

103; introduction, 129; divi- 
sions and outline, 131-133. 

II Chronicles, two general parts, 

136; outline, 137, 142, 145, 
146, 149, 151. 

Chronology, of O. T. books, 
203 ; of N. T. 349 ; Bible, 44. 

Church, history of, 61, 69; estab- 
lished in Canaan, 90; govern- 
ment theocratic, 90; apostol- 
ic, 281. 



366 



INDEX. 



Colossians, introduction and out- 
line, 305. 
Corinth, description of, 290. 

I Corinthians and why written, 

290; outline, 292. 

II Corinthians, object of, 293; 

outline, 295. 
Creation, scientific view of, 70. 

D 

Daniel, prophecy of, 161; out- 
line, 163. 

David, anointed and persecuted, 
99; Psalms of, 101; king at 
Jerusalem, 102; prepares to 
build temple, 103; old age 
and death, 105. 

Deuteronomy, meaning of and 
writer, 83; a rehearsal, 84; 
outline, 85. 

Diagram of Kings and Prophets, 
184. 

Distances from Jerusalem, 2; 
other distances, 2. 

Divisions, two great grand, 44; 
three O. T. grand, 47, 48, 49 ; 
three N. T. grand, 52; Josh- 
ua, 92. 

Doctrines, Bible. 25; of future 
state, 91; Christian, 275. 

E 

Ecclesiastes, object of, 56, 199. 
Edomites, account of, 156. 
Elevations above the sea, 3. 
EPHESIANS, Paul's letter to, 306; 
outline, 307. 

Epistles, doctrinal and general, 
62. 



Esther, 176; analysis, 179. 

Executive, 55, 88; compilers of, 
89. 

Exodus, meaning and writer, 72; 
outline, 73. 

Ezekiel, prophecy of and out- 
line, 158. 

Ezra, book of, 168; outline, 169, 
176, 180. 



Fathers, quoted from Bible, 22 ; 

time of church fathers, 23. 
Festivals, religious, 76. 
Future, revelation of, 340. 
Future State, doctrine of, 91; 

punishment, 338. 

G- 

Galatians, Paul's letter to, 295; 
why written, 296; analysis, 
297. 

General Letters, 327. 

Genesis, book of, 68; outline, 71 ; 
writer, 70. 

God, his being, 25. 

Gospel, Matthew's, 244; Mark's, 
249; Luke's, 256; John's, 267; 
children's, 264; woman's, 264; 
for the poor, 265, 

Gospels, introduction to, 2:>9; 
why four, 239; demand for, 
241; need of four, 276; ele- 
ment common to the four. 
277; element peculiar to each. 
278. 

GREEK, gospel for the, 212; char- 
acter and needs, 257. 



IKDEX, 



3g: 



H 

Habakkuk, prophecy of, 150. 

Haggai, prophecy of, 172; ex- 
plained, 173. 

Heaven, vision of, 343 ; the Chris- 
tian inheritance, 357; reality 
of, 360. 

Hebrews, author of, 318; object 
of, 320; outline, 320; a sup- 
plement, 321. 

Herod the great, 217; his design, 
218; extent of his reign, 219; 
public administration, 220 ; 
temple of, 220; death and 
successor, 221. 

Highpriests, were Levites, 75; 
typified Christ, 76; of inter- 
im, 213, 214. 

History, of mankind in Genesis, 
69; of church in Bible, 69; 
sacred denned, 88; inter-Bib 
lical, 209; the Jews, political, 
210; the Jews, moral, 221; 
civil and moral of Gentile 
world, 229. 

History and Prophecy, 152, 161. 

Hosea, prophecy of, 112; dis- 
courses, 114. 



Index, object of Biblical, 42; 
why so called, 43; plan of, 
45 ; Scripture illustrations, 45 ; 
meridian line, 47; is a beau- 
tiful illustration, 47; explain- 
ed, 44, 45, 67, 354. 

Inheritance, heavenly, 236; de- 
scribed, 357; title to, 358; a 
surety, 360; signatures and 
witnesses, 361. 



Inspiration of the Bible, K T. 
proofs, 23; O. T. proofs, 24; 
proofs from prophecy, 25; 
from originality and consis- 
tency, 25; from character of 
Christ, 26. 

Interim, history of, 209. 

Interpretation of the Bible, 
rules for, 29. 

Isaiah, prophecy of, 119; general 
analysis, 119; outline, 121, 
142, 143, 144, 145, 164, 166. 

Israel, number of, 79; camp of, 

82; lost tribes of, 160. 



James, letter of, 328; analysis 
329. 

Jeremiah, prophecy of, 147; di- 
visions, 148; outline, 152, 153; 
lamentations of, 155. 

Jerome, author of the Vulgate, 
21. 

Jerusalem, distances from, 2; 
becomes capital of Judea, 
102; destroyed, 128; rebuilt, 
181 ; a religious center, 222. 

Jews, descendants of Abraham, 
71 (outline Gen. No. IX); de- 
liverance from Egypt, 73; es 
tablished in Canaan, 92; gov- 
erned by Judges, 94; ruled 
by kings, 99; captivity, 128; 
return from Babylon, 169; 
political history in Interim, 
210; moral history in Inter- 
im, 221 ; gospel for, 241; 
Messiah promised, 244; char- 
acter and needs, 244. 



368 



IXDEX. 



Job, character of, 56; book of, 
192; analysis, 193. 

Joel, prophecy of, 117; outline, 
118. 

John, gospel of, 267; origin and 
design, 267; peculiar fitness 
of the author, 270; divisions, 
272 ; Christian adaptation, 
272 ; omissions, 273 ; addi- 
tions, 274; doctrines, 275. 

I John, letter to all Christians, 

333; design of, 334. 

II John, letter to Christian moth- 

ers, 336. 

III John, letter to Gaius, 336. 
Jonah, prophecy of, 111. 
Joshua, book of, 90; divisions, 

92. 
Jude, letter of, 337. 
Judges, book of, 92; names of, 

93; outline, 94; importance, 

95. 
Justification, question raised 

and answered, 37. 

K 

I Kings, book of, 104; outline 

part i, 105; outline part n, 
106. 

II Kings, book of, 108; outline, 

109, 117, 122, 124, 126, 127; 
tabular view of, 184. 

L 

Law of Moses, 54, 68. 
Lamentations of Jeremiah, 155. 
Languages, three prevailing, 225. 



Leviticus, book of, 75; author, 
75. 

Luke, the historian, 240; gospel 
of, 256; divisions, 260; Greek 
adaptation, 260; omissions, 
262; additions, 263. 

M 

Maccabees, rule of, 216. 

Malachi, prophecy of, 182; an- 
alysis, 183. 

Manuscripts, 8 (foot note); Old 
Testament, 17; number of 
Hebrew, 18; date of, 18; va- 
rious readings, 18; Greek N. 
T. 18; number of apostolic, 
18; number of N. T. 19; 
dates of N. T. 19; various 
readings of N. T. 19; ver- 
sion, 20. 

Mark, gospel of, 249; witnesses 
to, 251; divisions, 252; "Ro- 
man adaptation, 253; omis- 
sions, 254; additions, 255. 

Matthew, gospel of, 244 ; for 
the Jew, 244; divisions. 24<>; 
omissions, 247; additions, 24s. 

Micah, prophecy of, 123; analy- 
sis, 124. 
Mountains, elevation of. 3. 

1ST 
NAnuM, prophecy of, 125. 

NEHEMIAH, book of, ISO; out- 
line, 181. 
Numbers, book of, 79; outline, 

79, SO. 



INDEX. 



369 



O 

Outline, of Acts, part iy, 289, 
293, 301. 
Amos, 116. 

I Chronicles, 131, 132, 133. 

II Chronicles, 137, 142, 145, 
140, 149, 151, 

Colossians, 305. 

I Corinthians, 292. 

II Corinthians, 295. 
Daniel, 163. 
Deuteronomy, 85. 
Ephesians, 307. 
Esther, 179. 
Exodus, 73. 
Ezekiel, 158. 
Ezra, 169, 176, 180. 
Galatians, 297. 
Genesis, 71. 
Hebrews, 320. 

Isaiah, 121, 142, 143, 144, 

145, 166. 
James, 329. 
Jeremiah, 152, 153. 
Job, 193. 
Joel, 118. 
John, 272. 
I John, 335. 
Judges, 94. 

I Kings, 105, 106. 

II Kings, 109, 117, 122, 124, 
127. 

Malachi, 183. 
Nehemiah, 181. 
Numbers, 79, 80. 
Obadiah, 156. 

I Peter, 331. 

II Peter, 332. 
Philippians, 309. 
Revelation, 342, 343, 345. 
Romans, 300. 



Outline, of I Samuel, 99. 
II Samuel, 102. 

I Thessalonians, 288. 

II Thessalonians, 289. 

I Timothy, 313. 

II Timothy, 317. 
Titus, 315. 
Zechariah, 174. 
Zephaniah, 127. 



Pastoral Letters of Paul, 310. 
Patriarchal Religion, 193. 

Paul, letters of, 61; history of, 
284; in Thessalonica, 286; 
seven last letters, 302; last 
imprisonment, 315 ; death, 
318. 

Pentateuch, defined, 54; value 
of, 86; Samaritan, 213. 

Peshito, ancient version, 20. 

I Peter, letter, 330; analysis, 

331. 

II Peter, letter, 332; analysis, 

332. 

Philemon, letter to, 303. 

Philippians, letter to, 308; out- 
line, 309. 

Priesthood, instituted, 73 (out- 
line Exodus, No. 6); conse- 
crated, 75; of Interim, 212. 

Prophets, why called major, 57; 
why called minor, 59; restor- 
ative, 170; of Israel and Ju- 
dab, 171; to Gentiles, 171; 
diagram of, 184; tabular view, 
191. 



370 



IXDEX. 



Prophecies and Types of Christ: 
Gen. 70; Ex. 73; Lev. 76; 
Num. 83; Josh. 92; Jonah, 
112; Hosea, 113; Isa. 120; 
Jer. 147; Psalms, 196. 

Proverbs, 56; book of, 198; de- 
sign, 198; divisions, 199. 

Providence, illustrated, 177. 

Psalms, use of, 56; by whom and 
how composed, 101; book of, 
195; adaptation to worship, 
195; Messianic character, 196; 
five collections, 196. 

Punctuation, history of Bible, 5. 

Q 

Qualifications for teaching, 
preface; necessity of, 32. 

R 

Resurrection, question raised 
and answered, 37; of Christ, 
355. 

Revelation, denned, 63 (foot 
note); book of, 340; object, 
341; three topics, 341; out 
line, 342, 343, 345; introduc- 
tion to topic in, 343 ; six parts 
of topic in, 345; purpose of 
this prophecy, 348. 

Rivers, length of Bible, 3. 

Roman, gospel for the, 242; char- 
acter and needs, 251; adapta- 
tion, 253. 

Romans, Paul's letter to, 298; 
where and why written, 21)8; 
analysis, 300. 



Roman Empire, boundary, 229; 
civilization, 230; demoraliza- 
tion, 233. 

Ruth, book of, 96 ; design of, 97. 

S 

Sacrifices, where to find laws 
of, 75. 

Salvation, Bible shows way of, 
26; requirement for, 359. 

Samaritans, who they were, 124 
(outline 2 K.); oppose the 
Jews, 181 (outline Neh.); ri- 
valries between Jews and, 
212. 

Samuel, as a prophet, 10Q; eulogy 
on, 100; head of prophets, 
170. 

I Samuel, book of, 98; writer, 

98; outline, 99. 

II Samuel, book of, 101 ; outline, 

102; supplement to, 103. 
Schools, of the prophets, 170; 

Grecian, 232. 
Scriptures, name given to Bible, 

1 ; Matthew's use of, 246. 
Seals of ancient books, 4. 
Seas and Lakes, areas of, 3; 

depressions of, 3. 
Septuagint, origin of, 20; his- 
tory of, 214. 
Society, American Bible, 13 ; 

British and Foreign Bible, 13. 
Solomon, reign of, 105. 
Song of Solomon, object of, 57; 

explained, 200. 
Subdivisions, Bible, 66. 
Synagogues, history of, 224. 



INDEX. 



371 



Table, of distances, 2; seas, riv- 
ers, elevations, 3 ; weights, 
measures, moneys, 77; Jewish 
times and festivals, 78; kings 
and prophets, 184; prophets, 
191. 

Talmud, history of, 14; defined, 
22. 

Targums, origin of, 21. 

Teachers, suggestions to, ix ; rules 
for, x ; two questions for, 32. 

Teaching of Bible to youth, an- 
cient mode of, 84; annual 
festivals a means, 223. 

Temple, Solomon built, 105; de- 
stroyed, 128; rebuilt, 169; 
Herod's, 220. 

Testament, New, when written, 
23; defined, 38; juxtaposition 
of Old and New, 38; grand 
divisions of Old, 47; histori- 
cal Old, 48, 54; poetical Old, 
49, 55; prophetical Old, 49, 
57; historical New, 52, 60; 
epistolary New, 52, 61 ; apoc- 
alyptic New, 53, 63; preface 
to New, 236; grand divisions 
of New, 238. 

Theocracy of Jews defined, 90. 

I Thessalonians, letter of, 286; 

reason for writing, 287; out- 
line, 288. 

II Thessalonians, letter of, 288 ; 

why Paul wrote again, 288; 
outline, 289. 



I Timothy, letter of, 312; out- 

line, 313. 

II Timothy, letter of, 315; out- 

line, 317. 

Titus, letter to, 314; outline, 315. 

Traditions of the elders, 14. 

Translations, of Bible into Eng- 
lish, 9; Wickliff's, 10; Tyn- 
dale's, 11; Coverdale's, 11; 
Traverner's, 11; The Great 
Bible, 11; Geneva Bible, 12; 
Bishop's Bible, 12; Catholic 
Bible, 12; our English or 
King James Bible, 12; an- 
cient, 20. 

V 

Versions of the Bible, ancient, 
20; Septuagint, Peshito, 20; 
Samaritan Pentateuch, Tar- 
gums, Yulgate, 21; Talmud, 
Quotations of Fathers, 22; 
modern, 9. 

Vulgate, Latin, 21. 

W 

Will and Testament of God, 
236; heirs of, 358. 



Zechariah, prophecy of, 174: 

analysis, 174. 
Zephaniah, prophecy of, 126; 

object, 126; outline, 127. 



372 TESTIMONIALS. 

TESTIMONIALS. 

The following is what eminent Divines, Sunday S-chool 
Superintendents and the Press say about it : 

FROM REY. D. MOORE, D. D. 

Geneva, N. Y., August 2d, 1880. 
Mr. C. V. D. Cornell: 

Dear Sir:— Having examined briefly the manuscript of your Illustrated 
Biblical Index and Key, a work on which you have spent so many years of 
patient labor, I can say I am favorably impressed with it. It strikes me 
that it possesses real value to the average Bible student, and especially to 
Bible and Normal classes, in marking out a systematic and comprehensive 
course of Bible study, and furnishing needed helps by the way. The analyses 
of the several books are for the most part excellent. Placing the prophets 
in their proper places, chronologically, in the historical books, will, to many, 
present these portions of the Bible under a new aspect and render the study 
of them more interesting and profitable. You have also collected many 
choice extracts, some of them of great value, from various authors, and ar- 
ranged them in such a manner as to shed light on large portions of the Word 
—often on entire books. The questions and reviews will also lead to more 
careful study. Should you decide to publish the work, I have no doubt it 
would prove helpful to many in a better understanding of God's Holy Word. 

D. MOORE, 

Pastor Baptist Church. 



FROM REV. H. A. NELSON, D. D. 

I have examined the "Illustrated Bible Index" somewhat less thor- 
oughly (I believe) than Dr. Moore has done, and have received similar 
impressions of its character. I concur with him in the opinion that ic will 
be really helpful to Bible study. 

H. A. NELSON, 
Pastor 1st Presbt. Church, Geneva, N. Y. 



FROM REY. S. H. GRIDLEY, D. D., PRESBYTERIAN. 

The undersigned, having given some attention to the Index to Bible 
Study, by Mr. Cornell, would here say that I heartily concur in the opinions 
expressed by Drs. Moore and Nelson, that it is a work well adapted to facili- 
tate the study of the Holy Scriptures. 

S. H. GRIDLEY, 

Waterloo, N. Y. 



FROM REV. I). I). BCCK, D. D., OF THE M. E. CHURCH. 

A Nkw BIBLICAL AVork.— Having obtained from the author, as well as 
from his MS., a definite idea of the purpose, method and execution of a 
work entitled "Key to Bible Study," I am distinctly impressed with the 
irreat value of the work. It supplies a desideratum that thorough Bible 



TESTIMONIALS. 373 

students have long- desired, to-wit : a comprehensive yet brief method of 
studying", with scientific thoroughness, the whole Bible in its completeness. 
The author's plan and method are remarkable for originality, simplicity 
and completeness. It has been with him, as we may say, a life work; and 
the public may, in convenient form, and at little expense, avail themselves 
of the ripe results of many years of patient, prayerful study of the Scrip- 
tures, and of the innumerable books, pamphlets, maps and charts that help 
to a better understanding of the sacred oracles. 

The author modestly aims to assist S. S. and Bible Class teachers, but I am 
impressed that his work will be of great value in all institutions of learning 
where systematic study of the Word of God is intended. 

D. D. BUCK, 

Geneva, July 28th, 1880. Geneva, N. Y. 



The author received the following testimonial from his 
Class: 

Waterloo, N. Y., Nov. 24th, 1878. 
Mr. C. V. D. CorneU : 

Dear Brother .-—Having taken the series of what you term " Introductory 
Blackboard Lessons," we deem it a pleasure as well as a duty to you, and to 
those who may desire a knowledge of God's Holy Word, to say that the 
Lessons as imparted to us are of incalculable value to the Bible student, 
introducing- the Bible as a science, easy to be understood and retained, each 
being an object lesson and thereby held in its place by association. The 
" Biblical Index " gives a bird's-eye view of God's word. While heretofore 
the Bible has been one confused mass of matter, now each book and the 
leading thought in the same stand out in bold relief, whereby we are able 
to comprehend the Bible as a whole, the system being entirely new and 
novel, yet so simple that a child may understand it. 

Mrs. N. Seely, Julia A. Johnson, 

Hattie Bodell, Mrs. Annie E. Bragg, 

Hattie Bookstaver, Thomas E. Seely, 

Amy Smith, Abram L. Seely, 

Sarah A. Smith, Fenton Seely, 

Allie Seely, Mrs. M. Brewer, 

Mrs. Francis E. Seely, Mr. S. Brewer, 

Elmer Smith, James Seely, 

Mary Clark, John E. Graw, 

George S. Lawrence, Martin F. Bragg, 

Eliza Bragg, Zalmunna Bragg, 

Maribla Wooden, Lina Welter, 

Mrs. Margaret Brewer, Alfred W. Fairweather, 

Mrs. Hattie Tobey, Sarah A. Travis. 



FEOM REV. W. HOGARTH, D. D., PRESBYTERIAN. 

Geneva, N. Y., August 12th, 1880. 
C. V. D. Cornell : 

Dear Sir:— You were kind enough to show to me your "Key to Bible 
Study." So far as time allowed I gave it a careful examination, and am 
persuaded fully that it would be a valuable aid to Sabbath School teachers, 



374 TESTIMONIALS. 

and especially valuable in the family as a book of reference. It puts into 
brief and available form a large amount of information, and affords the 
very assistance that could only be had by reference to a large number of 
books. The matter is so condensed, also, that much time would be saved in 
pursuing- the study of any one subject. 

I hope, my dear sir, that you may see the way clear to give it to the public 
through the press. Yours truly, 

W. HOGARTH. 



FROM REV. J. HENDRICK. 

C. V. D. Cornell. Esq., I Canisteo, N. Y., August 6th, 1880. 

Millport, N. Y. j 
Dear Brother: — With the most sincere satisfaction I have examined your 
work entitled " Cornell's Illustrated Biblical Index and Key to Bible Study." 
The general reader cannot fail to be interested and profited by it. To the 
Sunday School Superintendent and teacher it is invaluable as a work of 
reference on Biblical knowledge, and especially for its suggestions in the 
mode of studying the Bible. You have done good service in bri aging out a 
system of lessons eminently practical, which will enable the young as well as 
others to study the Bible more effectually, and to retain what they learn. 
Knowledge systematized and explained is science. This you have accom- 
plished most successfully, and in a manner entirely new. I commend the 
work, together with the index, to ai/who love the study of the Scriptures. 
Very truly yours, 

J. HENDRICK, 

Pastor Canisteo Baptist Church. 



What Sunday School Superintendents Say. 

FROM C. B. VESCELIUS. 

Lodi, August, 1880. 
Mr. C. V. D. Cornell: 

After a review of your manuscript and an examination of your chart, 
allow me to say that in my judgment they will be among the best and most 
interesting aids to Bible study that it has been my pleasure to meet with in 
a Sunday School experience of a score of years, and I congratulate you and 
the Christian public on so successful a termination of your many years of 
labor upon the work. The very low price at which your work is to be ]>ut 
upon the market bears no comparison to its real worth— the chart alone 
being worth more than the cost of both. 

Yours in the cause, 

C. B. VESCELICs. 



FROM R. G. SMITH. 

Waterloo, N. v., Sept. 1878. 
After an examination of Biblical Index prepared by C. V. I). Cornell. I 
am satisfied thai the condensed manner of presenting subjeotswill materi- 
ally aid the students in the reading and study of the Bible. 

R. G. SMITH, 
Superintendent Of Presbyterian Sunday School. 



TESTIMONIALS. 375 

FROM N. B. COVERT, M. D. 

Mr. C. V. D. Cornell, ) Geneva, N. Y., Sept. 17th, 1878. 

Waterloo, N. Y. : f 
Dear Bro. :— I have carefully examined the copy of your Biblical Index 
presented to me, and I do not hesitate to say that it must prove of inesti- 
mable value to every family, as well as those who are more closely allied to 
Bible study and Sabbath School work in the Churches. 
Yours in the work, 

N. B. COVERT, 
Superintendent Baptist Sunday School. 



FROM J. A. CASTERLIN. 

Waterloo, N. Y., Sept. 30, 1878. 
Mr. C. V. D. Cornell : 

Dear Bro.:— I most cheerfully recommend your Bible Index, it being as 
useful in the study of the Old and New Testament as our map of the world 
to the study of the earth's surface. Could I not obtain another, I would 
not part with it. Respectfully yours, 

J. A. CASTERLIN, 
Manager Western Union Telegraph Company. 



Notices of the Press. 

(From the Ontario County Times, May 21st, 1879.) 
AN INSTRUCTIVE DISCOURSE. 

The pulpit of the Baptist church was occupied last Sunday evening by 
C. V. D. Cornell, Esq., of Waterloo, who gave us a most interesting and 
instructive lecture on the study of the Scriptures. He presented a large 
chart, which he called a " Bible Index," and which contained more instruc- 
tion adapted to aid the student of God's Word in reading and understanding 
the Bible than I ever saw in the same space before or heard in the same 
time. Mr. Cornell is a business man, and prepared this work between the 
hours of active business. D. 

(From the Ovid Independent, Aug. 3d, 1878.) 

The monthly exercises pertaining to the town S. S. Association, at the 
Baptist church, 3 p. m., Sunday, proved highly interesting. All were pleased 
with the clearly defined system of Bible teaching as laid down by a chart 
and explained on the black-board in separate lessons by C. V. B. Cornell, of 
Waterloo. There was a large attendance, and more than usual interest 
manifested. 

In this Index Mr. Cornell presents a plain, practical method, which, it 
seems to us, must be of inestimable va.ue and utility to the Bible student, 
and of great service, particularly, in Sunday schools. No description which 
we could give would do this Index justice. It must be seen and examined 
to be fully understood and appreciated. 

(From Geneva Gazette.) 

Mr. C. V. D. Cornell, of Waterloo, gave a very interesting and instructive 
lecture in the Baptist church, Tuesday evening, presenting his "Biblical 
Index " as furnishing the subject for his lecture. His conceptions and mode 
of illustrating the Bible, as shown upon his Index, is new and practical, and 



376 TESTIMONIALS. 

easily understood by those who are not thorough Bible students, and will 

without doubt prove a great aid in the study of different portions of God's 

Word. In fact, the Index is just what he represents it to be— a bird's-eye 

view of the Bible. 

<» 

Reviewer's Notice. 
BY REV. JAMES P. THOMS, CAZENOVIA, JT. Y. 

" Cornell's Key to Bible Study, and Biblical Index,' 1 I have reviewed for the 
press with special interest. 

In this work the author has unfolded, as fully as space permitted, the 
history of God's revelation to man. 

All the books of the Bible are analyzed and unfolded in historic and 
chronological order, with such surrounding events and scenery as throw 
side lights upon them. 

Thus the Prophets are pictured amid the scenery of their lives, and in 
their historic associations. Thus, too, the Epistles are presented and 
unfolded in their order of time and circumstances. The entire Bible is 
exhibited in its unity and development, as a revelation of God's purposes of 
grace in Jesus Christ. 

In addition to this, the author has compiled much information about the 
Bible that is not accessible to the general reader, viz : a history of the Bible, 
English translation, ancient book-making, Bible text, manuscripts, versions, 
evidences that the Bible is from God, statistical tables, etc., etc. 

Gathering materials from a wide range, with patient care, he has embraced 
all in a simple and compact form, and by his Illustrated Bible Index presents 
the analysis of the Bible to the eye, and still more f ully on the black-board 
by diagrams. Thus, by these lesssons, the Bible is taught and illustrated in 
the same manner as natural sciences, through the eye by figures and dia- 
grams. 

The work is divided into a series of lessons, to be used as a text book for 
teachers, students, normal classes, institutes, etc., but the division into les- 
sons does not interfere with the unity of the work for the general reader. 

"The Interim" is worthy of special mention, as giving a concise, clear 
and complete view of the moral and political history of the Jews, from 
Malachi to Christ, and with the Introduction to the New Testament, showing 
the preparation of the world for Christ, gives the reader a bird's-eye view 
of the condition of the world from the last utterances of Malachi to the an- 
gelic choir around Bethlehem. This period of history to many readers is 
\ ery little known, and often not in possession. 

The work has carefully prepared tables of contents, marginal notes, com- 
plete tables of indices, which render it invaluable as a book of reference. 
This book will, therefore, be of great service to student?, ministers, and all 
Bible readers. I therefore cheerfully commend it to the public as a timely 
work, much needed, and destined to be of great service. 

Yours truly, 

To C. V. I). Cornell, JAMES P. THOMS. 

Millport, N. V. 

A.gents wanted in every town; some one who desires to 

DO GOOD, and make money in its sale. 
Scud for private terms to agents. 



HOW TO MAKE 



COMPLETE REFERENCE BIBLE. 



Of the numerous methods presented for Bible marking, none fur- 
nish a practical method of handy reference, whereby the Bible 
reader is supplied with that desideratum which makes a complete 
reference Bible. It is conceded by all Biblical scholars that the 
Bible is its own interpreter, and can be understood only by the use 
of references. Much precious time is consumed finding them, they 
being often neglected' for this reason; and many times the interest in 
the reference is lost before it is found, especially by the young. 
Hence a system that will obviate these difficulties merits a hearty 
welcome. 

This plan is valuable above all others for three reasons: 

First, its simplicity; a child can perform the whole operation. 

Second, much valuable information is imparted by its use. 

And third, there is pleasure in the use of a Bible thus prepared, 
especially by the young. 

The author has made a practical test of its value for years, it 
being used by him in his Teachers' Meetings and Sunday School 
Classes. One pastor says: " I consider it invaluable in giving Bible 
readings." 

The above information will be accompanied with a beautiful 
engraving of a Bible, showing how it appears when complete. Sent 
to any address on receipt of two 3-cent postage stamps. 
Address 

C. V. D. CORNELL, 

Author and Publisher, 

Millport, K Y. 



